SEOTips.ws

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

"SEO San Jose" Keyword help

by @Hengover66 Raynold @ "SEO San Jose" Keyword help

@Hengover66 wrote:

Is your website has only 1 keyword. Or you would like to rank this keyword only "SEO san jose' to no-1?

Read full topic

5 Facebook Advertising Tools That Save Time and Improve Your ROI

5 Facebook Advertising Tools That Save Time and Improve Your ROI

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you advertise on Facebook? Looking for more efficient ways to manage your campaigns? Facebook ad tools can make a world of difference in the amount of time, effort and money you spend on your ad campaigns. In this article you'll discover five Facebook advertising tools that save you time and boost your return on investment (ROI). Listen to this article: #1: Facebook Ads Manager App Facebook has offered Ads Manager for mobile devices since 2014, but earlier this year they launched a stand-alone iOS Ads Manager app with some pretty necessary features for advertisers. Now you can track ad performance, edit existing ads, revise ad budgets and schedules, receive push notifications and create ads from the app. It was nice to be able to manage ads with the first iteration of the mobile manager, but the stand-alone app is more convenient and powerful. It's designed for small- to medium-sized advertisers and allows you to create ads from your existing page posts or from images and photos on your device. If you're using Android, you'll be happy to know a version will be released later this year. #2: Facebook Ads Exclusion Targeting Facebook continues to add more precise targeting options to their ad platform, making it possible to market to incredibly granular groups, right down to specific individuals. Often though, it's beneficial to exclude certain segments to get your ads in front of the right audience. Enter Facebook's Exclusion Targeting, a tool launched to help you avoid targeting the same people twice. For example, you can exclude your existing customers from a promotion designed to generate new leads. Or target your website visitors (as a custom audience), but exclude those who've already converted. Facebook promises that exclusion targeting can help you lower your cost per action or cost per click, reduce money spent on wasted clicks and reach people who are more likely to buy or convert. It works with regular Facebook ads, as well as the newer (and awesome) carousel ad format on both desktop and mobile. See Facebook’s Help resource for instructions on setting up exclusion targeting. #3: Qwaya Sure, you can split test Facebook ads on your own, but if you're attempting to glean useful insights from it on any scale, you're going to want a tool to automate the process. Qwaya is a paid tool with a ton of features including ad scheduling, performance-based rule setting, autorotation of ads and a campaign organizer. But one of its best features is its ability to automate split testing (A/B testing) for both creatives and audiences. If you're already using Facebook Power Editor, you know that the ability to split test audiences, as shown above, is sorely lacking. Qwaya also helps you determine which combinations of imagery, text and targeting make up the best-performing ads with its split testing feature. #4: AdEspresso's Facebook Ads Compass Report AdEspresso's Facebook Ads Compass is like a report card for your Facebook ads account. If you're agency-side, don't worry; it lets you choose which account and which campaigns you'd like to analyze so you don't get a mass of information for all of your accounts together. If you're already using a tool to analyze your ads' performance, the Compass report might seem redundant. But it's a great starting place if you're a small business and have been doing the bulk of your Facebook ads optimization based on manual analysis. You have to factor in your time spent managing your Facebook campaigns into overall ROI, so a tool like this can help you save time and enhance performance (if you act on its recommendations!). AdEspresso has analyzed over $290 million in Facebook ad spend to create industry benchmarks against which your campaigns are compared in the Compass report. It's a great way to see how you stack up against other businesses in your industry. #5: Hootsuite Ads

5 Psychology Tips to Improve Your Social Media Posts

5 Psychology Tips to Improve Your Social Media Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to create social media engagement? Do you want tips to improve your posts? To get more social media engagement, you need to tailor your content to appeal to your audience on an emotional level. In this article you'll discover five psychology tips to improve engagement on your social media posts. Listen to this article: #1: Images Speak to Viewers Your image is your first call to action in your social posts. It's the front door to your content, so it needs to make an impact. It's important to choose an image that expresses what you're trying to say in your post. For example, Red Bull's Instagram images inspire their followers to enjoy life and seek new adventures. Good social images also stand out from the crowd and command attention in people's news feeds. The image in this Coca-Cola post draws the audience's attention with its use of vivid colors and an interesting pattern. Your images should also be relevant to your target audience. In this Facebook post, Zappos uses an image that appeals to their audience: women who are fashion-conscious and love to buy shoes. #2: Color Communicates Brands that make the best color choices are the brands that get the most engagement on social media. Before you start sharing your content on social media, you should choose a color that is synonymous with your brand. Your color choice not only represents your business but also impacts your followers on a psychological level. Rob Russo's visual branding stands out in his followers' news feeds and draws attention to what he's saying. That's the strategy you want to apply to your visual marketing. The Honest Company's signature color is used prominently on all of their social channels and in their posts. The color makes their posts instantly recognizable to their fans. Think about whether your brand color speaks to your target market. If you're using a consistent color for your brand but not getting the engagement you want, you may need to rethink your color choice. #3: Words Trigger Action After creating your first call to action with an image, it's time to focus on the description. The law of attraction states that "like attracts like," so start your description with words you know people want or like to hear. Six words that typically work well are who, what, when, where, why and how. These words spark an emotional response that grabs a person's attention. You can also try these trigger words to engage your audience. #4: Emotion Connects Connecting with readers on an emotional level, especially when it's something happy, can impact your social media posts. In this Facebook post, Adidas connects with their fans by sharing Flavia Pennetta's exhilaration at winning her first Grand Slam singles title. Whether you know it or not, you're prompting some sort of emotion with all of your social posts. Even if it's boredom, readers are feeling an emotion when they see your post. To make the most of this opportunity, share good things with your followers. Portray a friendly, happy brand that is helpful and generous, and people will be drawn to your posts. On Oreo's Facebook page, their posts project a fun and lighthearted personality. #5: Conversation Engages How you introduce conversation into the mix of your social media posts helps determine how much people will open up to you. The easiest, most effective way to spark communication is to ask for it. You might begin your post with a question or end with a question or a statement that prompts people to engage. In this post, Threadless engages their followers by asking them to submit a quip to use in one of their t-shirt designs. By establishing communication with your followers, you'll discover what they need and want and how you can give it to them. In the post below, Livescribe asks their followers to share stories about how the company's products have helped them in p...

Podcasting Renaissance: Is Podcasting Making a Comeback?

Podcasting Renaissance: Is Podcasting Making a Comeback?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a podcast? Do you believe podcasts are making a comeback? Do you find yourself listening to more podcasts lately? To explore why podcasting may be entering a renaissance period, I interview Mitch Joel for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mitch Joel, author of Six Pixels of Separation and founder of the Six Pixels of Separation podcast. Mitch shares his experiences from when he first started podcasting in 2006 to now. You'll learn why now is a great time to start a podcast and pick up some useful podcasting tips. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting Then and Now Stories from the beginning of podcasting Mitch talks about the people who inspired him back in 2006 when he first started podcasting. He explains how C.C. Chapman was one of the early adopters of podcasting and introduced Mitch to CastBlaster. You'll hear how people consumed audio back then and why podcasting started. What really made podcasting was the subscription model. You could now download 5-6 hours of rich content specific to your niche. People looked forward to podcasts to make their commutes useful by listening to relevant content. Mitch explains how many of the early adopters got fatigued quickly and what you can learn from this if you're interested in podcasting. You'll find out the questions to ask yourself before you start a podcast. Mitch talks about persistence and consistency being paramount to success in any social media channel. To produce the best content, you need to have an appetite to constantly hunt for interesting stories to tell. Listen to the show to find out what you should ask yourself before you start a podcast. The meaning behind the word "podcasting" Did podcasting ever die? Mitch explains the possible reasons why people thought podcasting had declined. He compares podcasting to other social media platforms and the different speeds in evolution. Is the word "podcast" still valid today?  Mitch thinks podcasting is part of the zeitgeist now. Mitch talks about how podcasting is more serialized and scheduled than online radio, which is streaming and more like regular radio. Listen to the show to hear more about what "podcasting" means today. The resurrection of podcasting Mitch shares the time when he realized that there could possibly be a resurrection for podcasts. He thinks the resurrection of podcasting is due to quality in terms of technology and delivery rather than podcast production. With today's technology, smart devices and LTE in the palm of our hand, we can more easily access audio than ever before. We now have the ability to consume this content when we want and the audience is there in a major way. As more and more people adopt these devices, there are going to be more people who are naturally inclined to get better content. Listen to the show to hear the podcasts that made Mitch realize the possibility of a resurrection. Podcasting tips from Mitch Mitch explains how his podcast format has changed since when he first started, compared to today. You'll discover the different formats of podcasts people are doing today. Mitch opens his podcast show with the question "Who are you and what do you do?" He explains why he does this and how this question enables the people he's interviewing to present themselves to his audience. Listen to the show to hear more about the meaning behind the question.

Why The Right Hotel Images Are SO Important for Your OTA Listings

Why The Right Hotel Images Are SO Important for Your OTA Listings

by Leonardo @ Vizlly

Your hotel images are the one feature you can really control on OTA sites. They are the single most important way to convey your unique story and become part of a traveler’s consideration set. Learn what hotel images travel shoppers want to see the most, and how a digital brochure can help you serve up the right content on these third-party booking channels.

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your employees on LinkedIn? Do they share your company's content with their networks? Asking your employees to promote your company content on LinkedIn is a great way to reach more prospects and increase visibility. In this article I'll explain how to help your employees share your content on LinkedIn. #1: Promote the Program The first step to starting a LinkedIn employee engagement program is to find and appoint a leader. Look for someone from marketing who's enthusiastic about LinkedIn and excited about this program. You'll want to choose a passionate leader who can motivate your employees and get them excited to participate. Listen to this article: Once you've established a leader, get a couple of employees on board before rolling out the program to the rest of your staff. Later on, after you work out the bugs and streamline the processes, these employees can promote the program and encourage others to participate. Now you're ready to launch the program to everyone. #2: Communicate the Goal First, explain and outline your company's current digital marketing efforts and what it takes to get followers for your social media channels. Then, make it clear that the program's overarching goal is for all employees to attract new followers and customers by representing the company as a cohesive team. Finally, create a short but powerful mission statement that will engage employees in helping you to achieve the goal of your LinkedIn Employee Engagement Program. #3: Highlight Participant Benefits To get your employees' buy-in, share why their participation can benefit them personally and professionally. For example, the program can increase exposure to potential customers, drive more leads and increase sales, possibly resulting in higher bonuses or profit-sharing. Additionally, participating in the program can enhance your employees' personal profiles, activities and visibility on LinkedIn, and they'll be seen as industry professionals. And it may even improve their reputation within the industry your company serves. #4: Outline Profile and Engagement Expectations Spend some time going over what you expect from employees who take part in the program. Keep in mind that you don't want to overload them with too much extra work. Here are some tasks you might want to ask them to do: Optimize Personal Profiles It's important that employees have a complete and professional-looking LinkedIn profile. Ask them to update their profile with a company and job description (which may come from marketing). You'll probably need to walk employees through how to optimize their LinkedIn profiles. Show them how to: Claim a vanity URL. Add or change their profile picture. A professional-looking profile image goes a long way toward making the right first impression on LinkedIn. Set the correct industry description. Update the Summary section and add rich media (especially if your company produces high-quality videos and other rich media). Update the Experience section. Link their current position to the LinkedIn company page (thus increasing your company's LinkedIn page rank in organic searches on Google). Update and optimize their contact information. Expand Personal Networks Share how together as a team you'll be able to reach hundreds or thousands of people who may be interested in reading and engaging with the company's content. The larger their personal networks, the better. Provide instructions on how and why your staff should connect with fellow employees, customers, partners, prospects and so on. Explain how this will help expand the reach of your company's content on LinkedIn. You might share an example like the following: "Say that 20 employees in the program have 200 connections. This means that potentially 4,000 people could see and engage with our content if we shared and promoted it. Even if only a small percentage of these 4,

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Pinterest marketing use a jumpstart? Are you curious about what's working for other businesses? Tweaking techniques that have been successful for others can help you drive traffic, connect with your target audience, and increase sales. In this article, you'll discover 26 tips to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Share Pin It for Later Links The Pin It button encourages users to pin content from your site onto their own boards. Engagement is captured even when users aren't on the platform. The same idea holds true for Pin It for Later links. You can post Pin It for Later links, along with the prompt "Pin it for Later" across social media. To create a Pin It for Later link, attach the URL of the pin you want users to save, add it to a post on social media after explaining what it is, and attach it to the phrase "Pin it for later!" This is a great way to drive traffic to Pinterest and build up repins. #2: Add 20-30 Keywords in Promoted Pins Keywords are the most important targeting feature you can use with promoted pins. Pinterest recommends that you use 20-30 keywords per promoted pin. That's just enough to get you noticed, but not so many that you're showing your content to the wrong people. Using a large number of keywords can help you cover all of the broad, specific, short, and long keywords you need. You'll show up better in searches when users are looking for content like yours, and it helps ensure that your pin is placed in the right category. These keywords won't show up on promoted pins; they work instead like targeting criteria, matching your content with the people looking for it. Think outside the box. Dollar Shave, for example, recently promoted their razors for Father's Day gifts, and attached a Father's Day keyword even though it's not a direct description of the product. #3: Feature Multiple Products in Single Pins Featuring multiple products in your pins can help them to get more engagement. This tactic can add value to a single pin for two reasons: first, you show users how many amazing things you have to offer; and second, you have a better chance of appealing to more users by featuring more options. You can feature multiple complementary products (like an assembled outfit from your collection) or show multiple uses for a single product (like six types of crafts that use mason jars). Not only does this increase the chance of appealing to more users, but it can also lead to larger sales. #4: Capitalize on Image Height Pinterest's pages are full of vibrant, high-quality, colorful images. So how do you make yours stand out? Image size (or image dimension) matters a great deal. While Pinterest automatically scales all images you upload to match the exact width, you choose the height of your images. Vertical pins (pins that appear taller) perform better on Pinterest. It's recommended that you use image dimensions from about 2:3 and 1.3:5 (with the minimum recommended width being 600 pixels). Note: While you can design pins with the extended dimensions 1.2:8, pins that reach the maximum height don't perform quite as well. #5: Include Text Overlay on Images While descriptions matter, images reign supreme on Pinterest. However, visuals still need a little help sometimes. To catch the attention of users scrolling quickly through feeds, add text overlay directly onto your images to make them stand out and explain why your pin and the content behind it are so valuable. In most cases, text shouldn't make up the majority of the pin. It can, however, be helpful to show off step-by-step tutorials, listicles, or a few words telling pinners what the pin is. Keep the text simple, the phrases short, and all of it easy to read. Bold text can make the description stand out. Plus, make sure the text is strongly contrasting in color from the rest of the image. #6: Choose Light Over Dark Images

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is fear holding you back in your business? Are you wondering what you can do to face your fears? To learn about the kinds of fears we deal with as marketers, I interview two small businesses owners for this 52nd episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, it's a panel discussion with Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income, and John Lee Dumas, the host of Entrepreneur on Fire. Both Pat and John share the fears that could have held them back in their businesses. You'll learn about the common fears marketers face and practical steps you need to implement. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Overcoming Fear John, what were some of your doubts when you had the idea of starting a podcast? John says that he had many doubts and fears when he had the idea for his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast. The idea for the podcast came about when he was on a commute to work as a commercial real estate agent. He liked to listen to podcasts and soon ran out of content to listen to. At the time, Pat Flynn had his Smart Passive Income podcast, for which he released one episode every two weeks. John soon realized that if he was running out of content, then so were others. He had the idea to start Entrepreneur on Fire as a 7-day-a-week podcast featuring interviews with today's most inspiring and successful entrepreneurs. In the beginning, John approached Jamie Tardy, The Eventual Millionaire, for mentoring. She agreed but thought he was crazy to commit to 7 days a week. Jamie thought it would be too much for his listeners to consume. John also joined Cliff Ravencraft's Podcast Mastermind and was told the exact same thing. You'll hear what John did with the advice from mentors and people already in that space. Listen to the show to hear the fears and doubts John had, and still has today. Pat, in the early days what were some of your fears? Pat shares the fears he faced when he first started out. One of the them was that the work wouldn't be appreciated or seen and whether it was the right thing to do. One of the biggest was the fear of failure and looking bad. When he was first let go from his job, he had the fear of not being able to provide for his family. He wanted to go down the path that was good for his and his family's future. You'll discover the kind of support Pat received from his wife, family and mentors. It helped him face the fear, doubt and resistance he encountered and got him to take action. When he wrote his first ebook in 2008, which was aimed at the architecture industry, he feared that nobody would buy it. This is one of the things that could have easily stopped him from writing the ebook. The take-home message is that you may not know John, Pat or me, but one thing is certain: We have all dealt with significant fear. We have all overcome it and gone on to do some pretty exciting things. Listen to the show to hear my story of when I put my idea for a social media blog out to some extremely influential people. My idea became Social Media Examiner. What about the fear of missing out? John believes the fear of missing out is prevalent. As entrepreneurs, it's the bright, shiny object syndrome. You see all these amazing platforms that you want to try. With all this going on around him, John always tries to remain focused. His passion is for podcasting and interviewing entrepreneurs. So his focus is to follow one course until he succeeds and it has stood him well.

Facebook for Local Business: Creative Ways to Grow

Facebook for Local Business: Creative Ways to Grow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your local business on Facebook? Wondering how to market your business more effectively? To explore how to use Facebook in creative ways, I interview Anissa Holmes. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dr. Anissa Holmes, the author of Delivering WOW: How Dentists Can Build a Fascinating Brand and Achieve More, While Working Less! Her podcast is the Delivering WOW Dental podcast. She's a practicing dentist and teaches Facebook marketing courses for dentists. Anissa explores how local businesses can grow using Facebook. You'll discover why Facebook is more valuable for local businesses than review websites. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Local Businesses Anissa's Story After practicing dentistry in the U.S. for several years, Anissa moved to her husband's home country of Jamaica in 2010 and started a new dental practice from scratch. She knew most dentists typically get 10 to 15 new patients per month through referrals, but with a startup practice in a totally different country, she decided to try promoting her new practice on Facebook. In early 2010, Anissa set up a Facebook business page and began sharing what happened in the practice each day, including behind-the-scenes snapshots and stories about how the practice's dental services were changing people's lives. Anissa's strategy worked. Her practice began getting 5 to 10 new patients a month. Anissa figured she was onto something and began buying Facebook ads. As the Facebook algorithm changed, she made adjustments. Her practice now spends about $500 a month on Facebook and those marketing efforts attract about 50 new patients every month. With such outstanding growth, the practice's revenue tripled, and Anissa's practice was able to pay for a new office with three times the space totally out of profits. The practice is debt-free and so is Anissa. She shares that this financial success and security is a result of the business growth she achieved through Facebook marketing. After dentists started asking Anissa how her practice was achieving those crazy results, last year Anissa created a Facebook course and began lecturing to dentists all over the world about Facebook. The journey has been interesting, Anissa says, and she attributes the success to Facebook. When new customers come in, they already know the practice and how it can solve their problems. They're already connected and ready to make a purchase. Listen to the show to learn more about Anissa's background. Why Local Businesses Need to Go Beyond Review Sites If your new customers hang out on Facebook, Anissa says, that's where you need to be. People aren't hanging out on Yelp or Google. Most people (including Anissa) check Facebook first thing in the morning, between daily tasks, and in the evening. That's why Facebook marketing needs to be your focus. Anissa says creating the right content is important. A lot of businesses post information about how great they are and share a lot of stock content, but Anissa says that really doesn't work. She stresses that local businesses need to share their story and what makes their business unique. For example, if you have a plumbing company, what are you offering that's different from everyone else? To compete with photos of kids, community happenings, and articles, Anissa creates engaging posts that connect with people and make them want to click, including content about community impact and what her practice does to change patients' lives. Anissa also shares testimonials.

Client Confidence Plans | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

Tips and Tricks to get you started with Social Media Marketing

by Sahil Kakkar @ SEO Nick

Just when you’ve decided to build your social media presence, you face the dilemma “where do I begin”. You have so many platforms, so many users to connect with, a plethora of content you can explore from various angles!

You should know that there is no one-size-fits-all strategy for social media marketing. It all depends on the nature of your business, the products and services you offer, the audience you Keep Reading »

The post Tips and Tricks to get you started with Social Media Marketing appeared first on SEO Nick.

Help… I’m Stuck!!

by 321go @ 321GoProject

You’ve opened your gym in the last year or 3 years ago, got some members and now… you’re stuck. You just can’t seem to break through some invisible member mark (20, 40, 100) and you don’t know what to do. If you haven’t already, try out some of these tips to get your membership train back on track: Beginners Welcome! – This should be front and center on all of your websites, FB, and any kind of marketing. Remove that intimidation factor associated with CrossFit as often as you can. Post pics of just normal people doing CrossFit.   Use Facebook – If you are on The Hub and haven’t already watched social media expert Josh Sturgeon’s videos about Facebook marketing, stop what you’re doing and do this now!  It will unlock the mysteries of an effective ad campaign on Facebook and focus your ads (and money) on the audience you want. Priceless! Create a Facebook Private Group for your Members – Make sure you are friends on Facebook with all of your members and they’re in this private group that you create. This is a great alternative way (besides newsletter, email, etc.) to spread info about upcoming events, deals and just general info. It also allows your community to converse with each other and share successes. Be sure to make this community reflected of the culture that you’re wanting to see in your gym. Tag Away and Post on Timelines – Once you are friends with your members on Facebook, try and get some good pics of your members and then put them on their Facebook timelines. Don’t spend every class being a photographer but just take a few seconds to snap some pics. Pick the best ones, post the pics on their timeline, make sure you mark the location...

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use StumbleUpon for your business? Are you wondering how you can use StumbleUpon to drive more traffic to your content? To learn how your business can benefit from StumbleUpon, I interview Nick Robinson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nick Robinson, co-author of StumbleUpon for Dummies. He's also the social media channel manager for SAP Americas. Nick shares how StumbleUpon works and why it's different from other platforms. You'll learn how to use StumbleUpon to discover shareable content and the type of content that works best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: StumbleUpon Marketing  What makes StumbleUpon different from other social networks Nick explains how StumbleUpon is a content discovery engine. It's a search engine and bookmarking site all in one. It's great if you want to bring exposure to your online content, which can include your website, blog post, video or infographic. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F8DtI9e4xZ8 Nick believes that the key differentiator with StumbleUpon is the Stumble button. It takes you directly to a piece of content on another website that you are interested in. You can tell StumbleUpon what your interests are in several ways. When you set up your profile, you can specify your interests, the interests of people you follow and what pieces of content you have given a thumbs-up to on that particular website. When you click the Thumbs-Up or Thumbs-Down button, it tells StumbleUpon's algorithm if it should or shouldn't serve that type of content to you in the future. Each person's StumbleUpon experience is personalized. It allows you to curate content, promote your content and connect with communities with all types of interests. Listen to the show to find out how you can create content that's relevant to an audience within an Interest category. StumbleUpon for B2B and B2C Nick believes that any business in B2B or B2C can use the platform. It all depends on the type of content you produce. The content needs to entertain, be informative and connect with your audience. To be successful, you need to test and measure, based on the changes you learn. StumbleUpon launched their new design and a new mobile app, which has increased its mobile stumbles by 25% over a one-year period. However, the majority of StumbleUpon activity is still primarily desktop, at over 60%. Since these changes were made, around 40% of their activity comes from mobile. In the next couple of years, Nick thinks it will easily overtake desktop. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to consider with these figures in mind. According to Alexa, StumbleUpon is one of the top 149 websites in the world and Quantcast estimated that 23.4 million people in the last month in the U.S. alone have used it. As of June 2013, when the StumbleUpon for Dummies book was published, StumbleUpon had 25 million registered users. They have indexed over 100 million–plus web pages. Listen to the show to find out how much the average user "stumbles" per month and the time spent on the platform. Companies who use StumbleUpon well  Nick says that two companies come to mind, which are both primarily content publishers. The first is Forbes. They do a great job, which is primarily attributable to their company page. They use it to acquire followers and as a content feed. Unfortunately StumbleUpon has closed off access to these pages to the general ...

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want better results from social media? Have you considered researching your competitors? If you're not getting the results you want from social media, a little research and the right tool can help you refine your social media strategy. In this article, you’ll discover how to perform a detailed competitive analysis and improve your social strategy. Why Competitor Analysis? Competitor analysis lets you discover how your competitors use social media. You can see how your competitors position themselves on social media, what they share and how their audience responds. You can also find out what social media networks work best for your competitors, what information you should include in your social profile and page bios and what types of status updates get the most engagement. Listen to this article: While you can gain these insights for free on your own, it takes time to find multiple competitors' social accounts, collect all of the data (followers, engagement, etc.) and then analyze that data. To show how using a tool can help you gather the data more quickly and present it in an easy-to-analyze format, this article uses Rival IQ as an example. Now, let's look at how to do social media analysis and apply what you learn to improve your social media strategy. #1: Create a Landscape With You and Your Competitors To get started, you'll want to sign up for a free 14-day trial of Rival IQ's service. If you're just doing a one-time analysis of your competitors' social media strategy, you should be able to get it done before the free trial period ends. Otherwise, you'll want to choose a plan that best fits your needs. For each company (including your own), you'll be able to analyze and monitor one account per social network (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, Instagram and YouTube). Once you set up your account, create your first landscape by clicking the + button under the Landscape drop-down menu at the top left. In the dialog box that appears, enter the name for your landscape and click the Create Landscape button. Next, enter the website address for your company and select it from the drop-down list if it appears. Then click the Add to Landscape button. This will allow you to compare your social media presence and content against your competitors'. After Rival IQ confirms that your company has been added, continue adding your top competitors. Enter each competitor's website address and click the Add to Landscape button each time. When you're finished adding companies, click Done Adding Companies. When you click Done, your screen will refresh to show your landscape's dashboard. Rival IQ will confirm the accounts it has found for your company and your competitors. If the companies are new to their system, it might take a little while to update, but usually no more than 24 hours. If you know that one of your competitors has an account on a network that Rival IQ didn't find, you can hover over it and suggest it to them. They'll usually add it within 24 hours. In the above example, the only accounts Rival IQ didn't find were the ones that didn't exist for the specified companies. Once everything is set up, you're ready to start your analysis. #2: Find Social Engagement Opportunities Begin your analysis with the social networks where your competitors have profiles and pages. This should tell you at a glance if you're missing a network that might be beneficial for your social media strategy. In this case, you might assume that out of all of the networks, Instagram is the least important because a few of your competitors don't have a presence there. But that might not always be true, which you'll see shortly. In addition to seeing what social networks your competitors are on, check to see which ones they have the largest audiences on. You can do this by clicking the Cross-Channel link in the left sidebar and then clicking on Detailed Metrics at the to...

Search and Social: What Marketers Need to Know About the Changing Landscape

Search and Social: What Marketers Need to Know About the Changing Landscape

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media and search to promote your business? Are you wondering how the landscape of search and social is changing, and how to benefit from it? To learn about the key changes in search and social, and how they impact your marketing, I interview Lee Odden for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lee Odden, author of the book Optimize: How to Attract and Engage More Customers by Integrating SEO, Social Media and Content Marketing. He's the CEO of TopRank Online Marketing and the editor of Marketing Blog. Plus there is a killer SlideShare tip you'll want to pay attention to. Lee shares his insights into the world of SEO and content marketing, and the elements of his strategy that have contributed to his success. You'll learn about the four categories of content that you must create for your sites, and tips for getting the most out of them. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search and Social Graph Search and what Facebook is doing Lee believes that Facebook is always going to progress towards having a more robust search engine. Right now they are collecting a lot of data, and as Graph Search continues to roll out to more people, they will refine and optimize how it works. It's not just about providing a better user experience, there is ad play too. Lee feels that this is the driver. Lee believes that Facebook will move towards providing marketers opportunities to get in front of people and offer contextual advertising in the way that Google does. Before implementation of Graph Search, when you did a search on Facebook, the results would come from Facebook's own data set such as Fan Pages, Profiles, Groups, etc. If Facebook couldn't find what you were looking for, they would provide search results from Bing. Facebook is still working with Bing, but the search result set they offer is a lot different. The filtering options are more robust. However, today when we want to find something specific, we still use Google. As a marketer, Lee feels that it's important to understand the customer's journey and experiences. Often an idea surfaces on Facebook, and to validate the idea, people go over to Google expecting to find something that they can act on. Listen to the show to find out how the Facebook search capability is similar to what they have allowed to advertisers. How Google is using Google+ to impact the results consumers see Marketers need to consider the public social content crawled by Google Bot, the integration of Google+ and authorship, and the association between Google+ profiles and associated content in search results. Lee believes that it's virtually impossible to employ a successful organic search optimization effort without robust social content or social presence. These social signals have eclipsed signals like links. When you look at simplifying SEO best practices, we are not just talking about content, keywords and links. We have to equally include the importance of social content and social signals. Marketers really need to understand the search results landscape for their key search terms, and to what degree social content competes with you. Lee gives an example of how social is impacting search results. Every search experience result could be unique because of geography, and whether you are logged in or not. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8Z9TTBxarbs As marketers, we still have to execute standard SEO best practices.

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter account unmanageable? Do you want to clean up your followers and profile? A well-managed Twitter account improves your branding and helps you engage with your audience. In this article you'll find six tips to clean up and revitalize your Twitter account. Listen to this article: #1: Unfollow Inactive Accounts First, tend to the users you're following. Let's start with your family members. You know the ones. They started using Twitter in 2007 and haven't been back since. They're inactive users, along with potentially hundreds of other users you followed a long time ago, and never heard from again. It's possible to go through your Twitter profile, analyze each profile and unfollow them. If you're following hundreds or thousands of people, that's a waste of your time. You can use any one of numerous tools like UnTweeps. UnTweeps scans all accounts you follow and provides a list of the inactive ones. Decide what you consider inactive (how many days since their last tweet) and fill in the number. Then check the boxes next to the accounts you want to unfollow. The idea is simple. Weed out all of the people you're following who aren't tweeting. If you're following inactive users, then you're wasting your follows. The maximum number of Twitter users you can follow is 2,000. Once you hit 2,000, you can't follow anyone else unless you gain more followers. How many more followers? We don't know. It’s a ratio, and Twitter keeps it a secret. Other tools to use to clean up inactive accounts include Tweepi, ManageFlitter, Follower Filter, Crowdfire and iUnfollow. #2: Unfollow Irrelevant Accounts After you've deleted some inactive users, take another look. You're likely still following too many users who are irrelevant. There are some options. If you unfollow almost everyone, it seems rude and you may tick some people off. It takes time to unfollow only select people. But if you keep it the same, Twitter stays messy. For example, blogger Michael Hyatt chose to unfollow all of his followers. Hyatt used to follow back everyone who followed him: all 108,698 of them. Michael realized the volume of inbox messages and irrelevant tweets he was getting was out of hand, so he took drastic measures. Chris Brogan also went this route. He unfollowed 131,000 users. Another approach is to sift through the people you follow, identify the ones who are irrelevant and unfollow them. If you want to curate your follows in this way, here's what to do. Go to your profile page, and click Following. Look at each profile and decide if it's worth following. To stop following a user, hover over the Following button. It should turn into a red Unfollow button. Click it. Just remember, if you're following a lot of people, purging like this could take a long time. Some of the tools mentioned previously can assist with the process. #3: Organize With Twitter Lists Twitter lists help you organize the different purposes you have for Twitter: work, family, influential people, etc. Create as many kind of lists as you like. There's no limit. To create a list, go to your profile page, click Lists, then Create a New List. To add someone to a list, click on Following from your profile. Then, click the settings icon next to the user, and select Add or Remove From List. Then, check the box next to the list or lists to add the user, or create a new list. Lists are an excellent way to filter through the different types of people you follow. If you follow a lot of people, you'll never see everything. This way, you can get the information you need from certain people whenever you want it. Depending on how you use lists, you may wish to keep your list private (for example, a list of competitors). Once your account is clean, get back into the Twitter swing of things. #4: Spruce Up Your Profile Another point for cleaning up your account is your Twitter profile.

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to develop relationships that will lead to business? Are you wondering how you can use social media to build valuable connections? To learn about the importance of relationships in business, I interview Ted Rubin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ted Rubin, co-author of Return on Relationship. He's also the former chief social marketing officer for Collective Bias and OpenSky. Prior to that, Ted was the CMO for e.l.f. Cosmetics. Ted shares the best ways to start to grow your online connections via social media. You'll learn what you need to include in your profile and why return on relationship is the most important thing for a business or brand. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Relationship Marketing Recently I attended New Media Expo (NMX) in Las Vegas, where I was not only embraced by fellow podcasters, I was overwhelmed by the number of people who came up to me to thank me for this show. I'd like to take this opportunity to thank each and every one of you. Since I had a mission for this conference, I didn't announce that I would be attending. My hope is that you will be inspired by the story of why I did this, and that you will try it for yourself. How to build relationships in person, that often start online In my second book, Launch, I talk about the power of other people. I coined the phrase "Elevation Principle," which consists of great content plus other people minus marketing messages equals growth. For podcasters, the "other people" include listeners—a segment of whom I call "power users," or people with extreme influence. Without them, it's really hard to grow your business. I went to NMX with two purposes. I wanted to build relationships with the podcasting community and the parenting community, since I'm a newbie in both of these spaces. You'll discover why I only attended a few sessions, and made it a priority to hang around at the end of each session. One of the best places to meet the speakers is out in the halls, or where the speakers gather to network with each other. They don't seem to attend any sessions other than their own. It's an opportunity to have amazing conversations with influential people. You'll hear the types of questions I asked to get people engaged, which can develop into real relationships. This is one of the secrets to the success of my business, and it can be for you too. My take-home lesson is to get involved in real life through face-to-face encounters. One of the best places to do this is at a conference. Our upcoming conference, Social Media Marketing World, is a great place to start. Are relationships still important AND achievable with social media? Ted Rubin likes to say that "relationships are the new currency." With all of the different social media channels available, you can reach the world 24/7, without ever leaving your home. It used to be that you had to wait until you were at a company meeting or an event to meet people. The problem today is that when people click your name or check a box to follow you, they immediately think they have a real relationship with you or your brand. A lot of brands believe that they need to get as many likes and followers as possible so they can broadcast to them. It's not about broadcasting, though—it's about building relationships. Listen to the show to find out why building a relationship online is no different to a regular relationship offline.

6 Steps to Updating Your Social Media Profiles During a Rebrand

6 Steps to Updating Your Social Media Profiles During a Rebrand

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to update your social identity? Are you looking for a simple way to make sure all your social channels are consistent? In this article you’ll discover a checklist that will help you rebrand your social media profiles. Listen to this article: #1: Give Your Audience a Sneak Preview Some companies purposefully keep their rebrand under wraps until the last minute. While this shock-factor approach will likely generate press, it can be risky if people react badly. To stay on the safe side, give your audience a sneak preview of your rebrand. To do this, post something from your new company (your new logo or images from a new marketing campaign, for example) on social media. Announce the change and ask people what they think. This makes your audience feel like you value their opinion and allows you to gather feedback before launching the rest of your rebrand. It also gives your audience time to adjust to the idea, and you'll generate anticipation and excitement for the launch. In the example below, Cultures for Health uses a sneak preview photo that offers enough information to generate excitement, without giving it all away. Once you've launched a new visual identity, it's a good idea to get feedback on what your audience thinks about it. This isn't about whether people like your logo; it's about more tangible things that can affect revenue. Is your new blog easy to navigate? Does your audience relate to your brand story on social media? You can post a quick survey on Twitter or Facebook to ask these questions and then use the results to make improvements. #2: Update Your Social Media Profiles Have you designed a sleek, modern visual identity to accompany your rebrand? Great! Now it's time to show it off. Be sure to update your profile photos and hero photos on all of your social media accounts or add them to new accounts if you've completely scrapped the old ones. This isn't just about profile photos. It's about making sure your social media sites visually represent your company's new identity. For example, you may need to change your Twitter theme to match your new colors. Or you may want to create a new Pinterest board showcasing elements such as your packaging design or imagery. In addition to standard social media profiles like Facebook and Twitter, make sure you edit review sites such as Yelp, Foursquare and TripAdvisor. If you don't have a presence on these sites, now is your chance to create one. If you're a B2B company, you might have reviews on sites like Capterra or G2 Crowd. You also might have a presence on directories like Angie's List, so it's important to be thorough with this search, no matter your industry. It will only add to your brand consistency and boost awareness. You also need to update your social media profile handles. This seems like a no-brainer, but you'd be surprised how many companies get this wrong. When creating new social media usernames, here are two important points to keep in mind: Choose a handle that's spelled correctly and arranged sensibly. This makes it easy for users to locate your new accounts. It also makes your account names more memorable, which means your audience will be more likely to engage with you. Create a consistent social media name across all channels. Before you do this, make sure your desired handle is available on each social platform. You don't want to change half of your usernames only to find out another company already owns it on one channel. #3: Revamp Your Google Business Page If you don't have a complete Google Business profile, you could be missing out on opportunities for new customers. Make sure your Google Business page is up to date with your most current information so local customers can easily find you. The first thing you want to do is create a customized URL. Then add photos or images and include information about your company such as your address,

Facebook Live: Why Live Video Matters for Marketers

Facebook Live: Why Live Video Matters for Marketers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you tried Facebook Live video broadcasting? Want to know what it means for your business? To discover how to use Facebook Live, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari has also teamed up with Facebook to assist in educational events. Mari will explore Facebook Live, how it works, what it means for marketers, and much more. You'll discover tips to set up your Facebook Live broadcast. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Live What Is Facebook Live? Facebook Live is like Periscope, Meerkat, MeVee, and a few other apps that let you stream live video from your mobile device. Mari loves Facebook Live because whether you use the live-streaming feature with your personal profile or your page, you have a built-in audience. When you go live, the video goes out in the notifications and in the news feed and gets great organic reach. Mari believes Facebook Live video is great for marketers because it gives the ability to create a intimate, authentic connection with your audience. It humanizes and personalizes your brand. She clarifies that you don't need to download anything extra to stream with Facebook Live on your profile; it's part of the Facebook iOS app. Mari points out that Live is different from Facebook Mentions, which is only available to verified Facebook users. At the time this episode was recorded, all iPhone users had Facebook Live on their personal profiles in the United States, United Kingdom, Australia, Denmark, Norway, Sweden, New Zealand, Japan, and most English-speaking countries. On February 26, 2016, Facebook announced they'd opened Live to more countries, as well as Android users. Listen to the show to hear about Mike's first experience with using Facebook Live. Facebook Live for business Mari says when you use Facebook Live through your personal profile, you get to choose the audience. You can broadcast to the public, friends only, a specific friends list, or just a few friends. Since one of the keys from a business perspective is to broadcast live and then share it to your page, you want to go with a public broadcast. Then once it's been shared to your page, you can boost the post to reach a wider audience. When asked for examples of people using Live, Mari shares that Guy Kawasaki uses Live regularly from his page to show equipment or where he is and what he's doing. She also points to Robert Scoble, who uses Live regularly from his profile to do tech updates. Mari says she really enjoys what Carol Tuttle is doing. Carol does a Blog Talk Radio show that she simultaneously broadcasts on Facebook Live, and then hosts on iTunes as a podcast. From her Facebook Live post on her page, she shares the iTunes subscription link and the show's call-in number. Mari shares that she watched fitness expert Christine Dwyer live-stream her turbo kickbox jam class. Christine set up the camera on a tripod and pointed it into the mirror, so viewers were able to see the scope of the room and Christine teaching the class. She had a very nice, engaged audience. Mari is quick to remind listeners that while she's sharing great examples, the idea is to focus more on the application of Live and how people can use it within their industry. For example, Doreen Virtue, one of the top experts on angels, uses Facebook Live broadcasts on a regular basis to give people special messages....

Is Blogging Dead? Building Your Content Home on Rented Land

Is Blogging Dead? Building Your Content Home on Rented Land

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering what the future is for blogs? Is blogging dead? To discover what the future holds for blogging, I interview Mitch Joel and Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mitch Joel and Mark Schaefer. Mitch is the president of Mirum, author of CTRL ALT Delete, host of the Six Pixels of Separation podcast and a blogger at TwistImage.com. Mark Schaefer is a marketing consultant, author of The Content Code, co-host of The Marketing Companion podcast and a blogger at businessesGROW.com. Mitch and Mark discuss the premise that blogging as we know it is dead. You'll explore the future of publishing your content on social networks and beyond. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Future of Blogging Blogging's evolution Mitch recalls that when blogging first came to be, there wasn't much else. Technology didn't empower us to do things like shoot and post videos immediately, stream online or do podcasts. Back then, even sharing images was pretty difficult. He shares that for him, blogging started to evolve when social media platforms for smaller forms of text-based publishing turned up, like Twitter. Then images and video became easier to publish and share. Mitch says things became very different with Twitter and Facebook status updates. The updates gave people who were writing long-form articles the ability to publish stream of consciousness–style instead. He talks about how this change created a space for platforms like Huffington Post to progress and become more popular with people who wanted to write. While Mitch still looks at his blog as a place for a writer to write, he says it's no longer the primary place for his content. He talks about putting content in places such as Medium, LinkedIn Publisher, Facebook Notes and Harvard Business Review where it might find different audiences. He explains why he'd rather publish directly on these other sites and use them as his distribution platform. Mark thinks blogging will be dead when reading is dead and that there will always be a place for long-form content. He explains why things like podcasts and streaming video are taking some readership away and how smartphones play into that. Mark says that Mitch is onto something in saying what's changing most drastically is not what we're doing, but where. He points out that there are cataclysmic changes in how content is published and consumed and offers the example of Facebook Notes, which encourages people to blog on Facebook. Mark talks about the difference in publishing on Facebook, LinkedIn or other platforms and says the magnet for inbound leads isn't on your website anymore. When discussing the question of what is and isn't a blog, Mitch shares why he's moving away from using that terminology and using words such as article, writer or journalist instead. It's semantics, Mark says, and shares an insight from Tom Webster, his partner on the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom works for Edison Research where they study podcasting a lot. One of the things they found was that people don't know what the word podcast means. Listen to the show to discover what Mark says will happen with storytelling and content marketing in a few years. Building on "rented" land Mitch says it used to be that publishing on social networks was like building your house on rented land, and explains why he doesn't believe it's that way anymore. He shares that it's no longer a sense of rented versus owned; it's a combination that creates a holistic platform.

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how your business can be more useful? Do you provide youtility? To learn about youtility and a new way of thinking when it comes to marketing, I interview Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, the founder of the award-winning blog Convince & Convert and co-author of The Now Revolution. His brand-new book is called Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. Jay shares the many different ways companies are already providing youtility to their customers. You'll learn the three categories of being useful and how to implement them into your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: New Marketing Techniques What's changing marketing that everybody needs to understand? Jay believes that marketing is harder than ever. With the incredible growth in the number of media outlets, it makes it very difficult to achieve top of mind awareness in the ways that we used to be able to do. Blogs and podcasts didn't exist before, but today they have huge audiences. Companies now have to compete for attention—not just against other companies, but against everybody and everything. Jay explains that if you take a look at your Facebook news feed, Twitter account or email inbox, you'll find a combination of both personal and professional relationships. Companies are competing for attention with consumers' friends and family members and are forced to use the same technologies to get on their radar. Since 1994, Jay has worked online and remembers how people freaked out when they bought advertising on the web for the first time. He says at the end of the day, all these things are almost free, but somebody has got to pay the free. The guys who pay the free are businesses. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to succeed against everyone and everything. The story about @HiltonSuggests and what the take-home message is for marketers Jay talks about certain people who are an exception to the rule when it comes to being amazing. But he feels that most of us aren't amazing. So the best approach for us all is to be useful. You need to create youtility. Jay defines youtility in his book as marketing that is so useful, people would want to pay for it. Jay shares the story of Hilton Hotels' program called Hilton Suggests on Twitter and how the program came about. You'll hear a great example of how they helped a guy on Twitter who was looking for a vet in the area. They helped him when he needed it most, and this will probably lead to him booking a Hilton hotel in the future. Jay says the difference between helping and selling is just two letters, but in modern business those two letters make all the difference. At a recent conference, Jay heard Gary Vaynerchuk say, "Everybody wants to be a hunter, but nobody wants to be a farmer." Youtility is about long-term play. If you sell something, you make a customer today. But if you help someone, you can create a customer for life. You need to start to think about marketing, customer acquisition, loyalty and retention over a longer time horizon. You'll hear why Jay wishes that more businesses were less self-serving and more useful. Listen to the show to hear how Columbia Sportswear uses indirect marketing and provides youtility to their customers. What youtility is and what marketers need to understand Jay says you wouldn't necessarily charge for youtility because it's marketing...

Generating Leads With LinkedIn: What You Need to Know

Generating Leads With LinkedIn: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for business? Are you wondering how you can use LinkedIn to generate quality leads? To learn how to use LinkedIn to attract leads and build networking relationships, I interview Stephanie Sammons for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stephanie Sammons, who blogs at Build Online Influence and is the CEO of Wired Advisor—a firm that helps those in the financial industry. She also writes exclusively about LinkedIn for Social Media Examiner. Stephanie shares her LinkedIn knowledge, tips and experiences when it comes to social networking for your company. You'll learn about the tools and techniques that will help you attract leads and connect with business professionals. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn for Business Why LinkedIn is so important for business professionals seeking leads Stephanie explains how most people think of Facebook as a personal web, whereas LinkedIn is a professional web. LinkedIn is the largest professional network for working people. It doesn't matter if you're an employee or a business owner, a freelancer or a marketer within a company. People typically visit LinkedIn with a purpose to make connections, gain insights about their industry and anything that can help them get smarter. They also use LinkedIn to network. In Stephanie's mind, it's the purest form of business networking online. Listen to the show to find out how LinkedIn has evolved from just being a place to look for a job. LinkedIn tools to help generate leads You'll discover that it's not just about the awesome tools and features that LinkedIn has, it's also about how you use them. Stephanie recommends having a relationship mentality when on LinkedIn and to position yourself as a thought leader. Look where you are building influence with your network and niche. It's the right thing to do when it comes to attracting leads and people for your business. The smarter you are about marketing, the less people realize you are marketing to them. Your main goal is to aim to be consistently visible and valuable. Studies have shown that it takes someone 7 exposures to you before they really start to pay attention, listen and determine whether it makes sense to take the next step. Stephanie looks at LinkedIn as an opportunity to position herself as a resource within her niche using the various tools. For example, LinkedIn Today is a great way to quickly find content that is relevant to your target market and be able to share it on LinkedIn. You'll find out the benefits of using these rich status updates to stay top of mind. It's really important to keep your LinkedIn profile up-to-date. The more people see you on LinkedIn, the more they are likely to come and check out your profile to learn more about you. And if that person is relevant and potentially interested in your business, they may click through to your blog or website and take the relationship from there. Another great LinkedIn tool to consider is Groups. If you spend time in group discussions, you have the opportunity to connect with mutual group members whom you might not necessarily know. As you get to know some of the members in the group, you can send them an invitation to connect with you. Stephanie goes into greater detail about how many LinkedIn Groups you can join and how adding value to the conversation can lead to potential clients and customers.

Content Marketing: How Businesses Can Grow With Content

Content Marketing: How Businesses Can Grow With Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a content marketing strategy for your business? Would you like to discover how to create and distribute content that will drive sales for your company? To learn how to grow your business with content marketing, native advertising and more, I interview Robert Rose. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Robert Rose, the co-author of the book, Managing Content Marketing: The Real-World Guide for Creating Passionate Subscribers to Your Brand. He's the chief strategist at the Content Marketing Institute. He's also the co-host of the podcast, This Old Marketing. Robert explores content marketing, native advertising and what all of it means for your business. You'll discover how to develop a content marketing strategy that grows your business, take advantage of the marketing opportunities offered through native advertising and learn new ways to distribute your content to the right influencers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing What is content marketing?  The Content Marketing Institute views content marketing as the approach businesses use to create, curate, distribute and promote the types of content their customers will find valuable. The goal of content marketing is to drive sales and move your business forward. Done well, content marketing offers a value that's separate and discrete from the products or services you sell. It's about providing content-driven experiences that are educational, entertaining or useful to your audience, but ultimately drive engagement, awareness and sales for your brand. Social media gives you the power to aggregate your own audiences and be your own media company. The tools needed to publish the type of content that establishes you as a thought leader in your industry and draws customers to your brand are readily available and easy to use. Listen to the show to discover how content marketing can go beyond written articles and encompass things like videos, app development, games and more. Examples of businesses that do content marketing well You'll hear Robert explore how big companies like Chipotle Mexican Grill, LEGO and Coca-Cola leverage content marketing in creative and innovative ways such as movies, TV series and magazines. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DBhTiyQU1kA Compared to what large companies might spend on traditional mass media or big sponsorships, their content marketing expenditures are just a drop in the bucket, according to Robert—yet it has such a big impact from a branding standpoint. Even if your small business doesn't have the budget for national TV spots and large print campaigns, you can get a lot of bang for your buck through content marketing. It's easy and inexpensive to publish, distribute and promote your own content through blogging, social media and podcasting. Robert uses Marcus Sheridan's business blog to illustrate this point. He used his site to answer every question asked about pools and became an expert in the very small niche he was already passionate about. This propelled his business, River Pools and Spas, to huge success and top Google rankings. Listen to the show to find out how the Content Marketing Institute leverages its blog, workshops, classes and podcast to drive attendance to their annual show, Content Marketing World.  Research on the effectiveness of content marketing Content Marketing Institute and MarketingProfs recently released two new studies: B2B Content Marketing 2015: Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends — North America and B2C Content Marketing 2015: Be...

How to Connect With Traditional Media Influencers

How to Connect With Traditional Media Influencers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you seen as an expert in your industry? Want to develop relationships with the media to become a go-to expert? To explore what marketers need to know to connect with traditional media influencers, I interview Josh Elledge. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Josh Elledge, a consumer advocate and founder of SavingsAngel.com, a site dedicated to consumer savings. He's a weekly syndicated newspaper columnist and has made more than 1,000 TV and radio appearances. Josh is also the founder of UpendPR.com and host of the Savings Angel Show. Josh explores how to connect with traditional media influencers. You'll discover how to develop and build relationships with media via Twitter. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Connect With Traditional Media Influencers Josh's Story Out of high school, Josh joined the United States Navy and became a journalist. He says it was a great way for an 18-year-old to participate in producing video news stories for the Navy and Marine Corps. About 9 1/2 years ago, Josh started a membership-based website called SavingsAngel. SavingsAngel pursues their mission to end hunger, lack, and need in communities by helping consumers cut their grocery bills in half; Josh's company charges customers $3.99/week. Since he had no money for advertising, he was forced to look for other ways to get exposure. Josh shared the mission of SavingsAngel with every media influencer he could get to pay attention to him. His outreach wasn't about promoting SavingsAngel to make a lot of money, it was about finding a way to work with others to achieve what he wanted to do in his area. With print publications, Josh knew to ask for remnant space, or the unsold ad space publications typically fill by running ads for themselves. Josh suggested an alternative to 20 media outlets; they could do a revenue share based on a 1/4- or 1/8-page ad. Several of those outlets made suggestions and he quickly learned what was possible. For radio, Josh developed a segment in which he shares the best 3 to 5 grocery deals in the area (he currently lives in Orlando, Florida). This segment has now become his syndicated newspaper column. He's also been doing a TV segment for the last 5 1/2 years. It's a very popular segment. He gets great feedback on it, and his local FOX affiliate absolutely loves the content he provides each week. Listen to the show to hear what Josh did after the Navy and before he started SavingsAngel. What Marketers Need to Understand About Traditional Media Josh explains that it's very important to understand that you're asking the media to give you publicity and to take a chance on you. You have to pitch them with a great concept for education or entertainment content as part of a segment or in a news story. PR is all about the long game. It's incredibly important not to use any kind of sales language. This opportunity is not about you selling your thing. Josh says the media will be sensitive to you trying to sell to their audience. If you try, you won't be invited back, or worse yet you could be blacklisted. Trust that the influencer will credit you, and give them the space to do that. It's okay for you to mention your brand in passing, but it's absolutely not okay to give calls to action. What is the long game with PR? Become the reliable source and subject-matter expert that the media contact can go back to time and again. Josh says he has been quoted in the Chicago Tribune close to a dozen times and has done his TV segment on FOX 35 close to 300 times.

How a Blog Launched a Movement: The Vani Hari Story

How a Blog Launched a Movement: The Vani Hari Story

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog? Want to use your blog to inspire change? This episode explores how a blogger followed her passion and grew a mega following in a few short years. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Join me as I interview Vani Hari, who is known online as the Food Babe. Her popular blog, FoodBabe.com, focuses on healthy eating. She's built a large platform through articles and videos that investigate unhealthy ingredients in food. Her new book is called The Food Babe Way. In this episode Vani will share how she got started with her blog and built her following. You'll discover how to apply Vani's lessons and journey to your own business blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How a Blog Launched a Movement Vani's story Vani's parents were from India, and moved to the United States right after they married. The first thing Vani's father introduced her mother to was a McDonald's hamburger. Since cows are sacred in India, her mother had never eaten a hamburger before and it was a shock to her system. It turned out American food didn't sit well with Vani's mother, so she just made Indian food at home. However, she let Vani and her brother eat whatever they wanted. Because the siblings wanted to fit in with their neighbors and peers (Indian food looked weird and smelled funny to some of the other kids), they shunned their mother's cooking and asked for fast food and other processed foods. As a result, Vani had a lot of health issues as a child: eczema, asthma, allergies and stomachaches. She didn't tie them to food; she thought they were largely genetic, because her brother also had health issues. Many years later, her health issues caught up with her. Vani was working in a prestigious job for a big-six consulting firm shortly after she graduated from college. She gained over 30 pounds right away (eating catered meals brought into the office and fancy dinners out), and landed in the hospital with appendicitis. Vani didn't look or feel well. It was a major wake-up call. After her recovery, when Vani got back to work, she started to research health and nutrition. She wanted to lose the weight and get healthy. Vani set out to learn about what she was eating; what the ingredients were, why they were in the food and why the food companies were using them. She discovered the chemicals put in food (many of which were invented in the last 50 years or so) were there just to improve the bottom line of the food industry, to figure out how to sell food cheaper by using food-like substances and making them taste like real food. Vani realized the majority of the food she had been eating was processed and had little to no nutrients left in it. The health incident happened 14 years ago and Vani started the blog 4 years ago. The Food Babe Way is all about adopting healthy eating habits. Listen to the show to discover what Vani's aunt told her cousin about Vani's new look. FoodBabe.com Vani says she created the blog because her co-workers and friends asked her to. She explains how she came up with the name. After asking her husband to register the name EatHealthlyLiveForever.com, Vani recalls him saying, "Are you crazy? That's a horrible name. No one's going to remember that." She asked him to come up with something better. A few minutes later, he saw FoodBabe.com was available on auction, and suggested that. At first Vani didn't want to call it Food Babe because for most of her life, she was anything but a food babe. She decided she wouldn't call herself the Food Babe,

How Gary Vaynerchuk Turned a Video Series Into a Popular Book

How Gary Vaynerchuk Turned a Video Series Into a Popular Book

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use videos to enhance your brand? Want to find ways to grow your business? To discover how he created a video series that exploded his personal brand and his business, I interview Gary Vaynerchuk. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Gary Vaynerchuk, CEO of VaynerMedia, host of the #AskGaryVee Show and author of Jab, Jab, Jab, Right Hook. His brand-new book is called #AskGaryVee: One Entrepreneur's Take on Leadership, Social Media, and Self-Awareness. Gary will explore how he created a video show that became an audio podcast and a book. You'll discover Gary's thoughts on what's hot in social. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Gary Vaynerchuk Turned a Video Series Into a Popular Book Gary's big dreams Gary recalls that from a business and entrepreneurial standpoint, he's always dreamed big. At 14 years old, he started working for his dad bagging ice for $2 an hour and by his third day on the job was plotting how to open 4,000 wine stores. Although a lot of people think Wine Library TV grew his business, Gary clarifies that he'd been in business for over a decade and built a $50 million+ operation before he started Wine Library TV and talking about marketing. Gary launched Wine Library TV on February 1, 2006, which was less than a year after YouTube had been created. He says that while the show didn't really pop until the summer of 2007, he felt there were enough comments to make it worthwhile. He notes that Ze Frank and Rocketboom were also making some noise around the same time. Gary's patience paid off and when he ended up on the Conan O'Brien Show, Lifehacker, TechCrunch, and Diggnation, everything exploded. Listen to the show to discover how and when Gary discovered he was good at being a personality. The start of #AskGaryVee During the summer of 2014, D Rock (David Rock) emailed Gary, asking to make a film about him. Gary agreed and before the film even aired, Gary asked David to work for him full time doing video content. Then on a random day a year and a half ago, Gary invited David and Steve Unwin from his editorial team into his office to shoot the first episode of #AskGaryVee, in which Gary answered random questions people asked him on Twitter. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=76d0lQiCqNI When asked how the format for the show came about, Gary shares that he felt his keynotes were stagnating because he was telling the same story over and over. To get out of that rut, he started pushing event organizers to let him add a Q&A component to his presentations. For example, during a 45-minute keynote, he would do 30 minutes of speech and 15 minutes of Q&A. Gary believes his ability to answer any question about business, social media, technology, or branding off the cuff is what separates him from other speakers. Gary realized he didn't need to travel to answer questions and he could use the video show to deliver something he was really good at. Then, he made the decision to use it to get to the point where his keynote speeches were solely Q&A sessions. Gary explains that the format for #AskGaryVee is simple. They go into an all-glass conference room at VaynerMedia, Gary sits down in front of the camera, and India asks him five questions that come from social media (Snapchat, Instagram, Facebook), which Gary answers in one take. Any edited spots, which are rare, go to black and white so they're clearly recognizable. In addition to #AskGaryVee, Gary recently started #DailyVee, which is a day-in-the-life vlog that gets edited into episodes to help entrep...

Going Beyond Your Website With SEO

by Josh @ SEO Help – 321GoProject

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to drive more traffic to your site with Pinterest? Are you looking for ways to improve your Pinterest exposure? To explore how Pinterest can help your business I interview Pinterest expert, Vincent Ng. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Vincent Ng, host of the Pictures to Profits podcast and author of Pinterest Marketing: How to Search Optimize Your Pins and Boards for Pinterest. He's a Pinterest expert and blogs at MCNG Marketing. Vincent shares how to use Pinterest to drive more traffic to your website. You'll discover reasons why you should use Pinterest in your social media marketing, tips on images and plugins that can boost traffic to your site and provide social proof for your company and what you need to know about Pinterest's smart feed and promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Traffic How Vincent got started with Pinterest While Vincent has successfully used Twitter and Facebook for his social media clients, he found neither site could drive much traffic to his blog. Curious about Pinterest's rapid early growth, he explored the site and discovered a fair amount of traffic going to his blog from it. That is when he decided it was the site he needed to be on. Vincent has been on Pinterest since its beta stage four years ago and has witnessed how much the platform has changed and evolved since the beginning. Listen to the show to discover the major changes and trends Vincent has witnessed on Pinterest. Reasons to consider Pinterest for your marketing People are naturally drawn to attractive, magazine-quality images. Information can be processed very quickly when it's seen as an image or picture. Pinterest makes it possible to leverage beautiful, shareable images to drive more traffic to your site. You'll hear Vincent describe how to lay out your images to get the most impact and reach from Pinterest. Pinterest is also a powerful way for users to discover things they might not have expected to find. It's become a visual search engine for products and can link items together based on how they've been previously pinned or searched. Vincent shares how many people bypass Google and go directly to Pinterest to search for products and lifestyle topics because the content is curated by actual users and the results tend to be high quality. Listen to the show to find out how Pinterest's visual recognition engine links related products to be searched and discovered. The biggest mistakes people make on Pinterest The biggest mistake businesses make on Pinterest is neglecting to redirect the source of a pin back to their site. The source is the URL where you want users to be directed when they click on your pin. You could potentially get hundreds of pins and repins on your image, but you lose the opportunity to grow your blog with Pinterest if you don't link directly to your site as the source of the pin. Listen to the show to learn how to edit your image to redirect where you would like your pins to point users. The Pinterest smart feed and what marketers need to know about it The Pinterest smart feed is a new algorithm based on the quality of the pin, the quality of the pin's source (blog or website) and relevance of pins. Each factor is measured based on the number of users who link to the specific pin or the source. High-quality images and the most popular sources are given preferential treatment on Pinterest's feed. It also boosts pins from people you follow and will suggest related pins based on what's pinned...

FIGHT! How to use SEO to get the deal.

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Website promotion is often a "the winner takes it all" game. That means that the best website will get the deal and all other websites will get nothing, no matter how good they are. Read this article to learn how to be the winner.

How to Handle Customer Complaints Via Social Media

How to Handle Customer Complaints Via Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your customers leaving negative comments on social media? Do you need a plan to handle customer complaints? Responding quickly and appropriately to negative social comments can help you increase customer loyalty and retention. In this article you’ll find out how to deal with negative comments on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Respond Quickly It's important to respond quickly and efficiently to customer complaints on social media. As a starting point, try to reply within 1 hour. This doesn't mean you need to have all the answers right away. Customers typically want you to acknowledge their issue so they know you're looking into it. Next, let customers know when they can expect a response. This helps you manage expectations and reduce negative feedback. You've acknowledged the issue and set a realistic time frame for a response. It's important to consistently provide this same level of response on social media, even on weekends. According to a study from Convince & Convert, 40% of respondents expect a response time within hours of leaving a complaint. #2: Acknowledge Mistakes Consumers know that no business is perfect, so instead of hiding mistakes, it's best to own up to them. When you apologize to fans on social media, you acknowledge mistakes and take ownership. This also prevents the customer from continuing to blame your company for the mistake or issue. Then you can focus on the real task at hand, which is to help find a solution. When you post an apology on social media, make sure it's genuine. People will be quick to highlight apologies that appear to have been copied and pasted from a script or that lack emotion. Instead, show your human side and use your natural tone of voice. Above, you can see how Fashion brand Allen Solly found a creative way to apologize and respond to this customer's comment. When you've made a mistake, it's best to show transparency, be honest and do everything in your power to fix the situation right away. For example, Pizza Hut took ownership of a mistake with an order by responding promptly and apologizing to the customer. Remember, it takes time to build trust with your customers, but it takes only seconds to lose it. #3: Take Conversations Offline All communications on social media are in the public eye, and often when dealing with negative comments, this can prompt others to join in. The best course of action is to take the conversation offline so you can talk to the person one on one. This prevents the situation from escalating, and also helps calm the customer, because you're working with him or her to resolve the problem. #4: Personalize Your Responses When customers reach out to you with a negative social comment, they're typically looking for you to acknowledge and help resolve their problem. If you respond with an automated reply, you're sending a message that you haven't taken time to understand the issue and don't value the customer's input. Here's an automated response that has no relevance to the customer's negative comment. When responding to negative comments, these tips will help you reassure customers: Reply using a conversational tone. Include the customer's name in the response. Let the customer know how you will fix the issue. If it's a mistake, take ownership. Acknowledge the customer's situation in your response. Automated replies can save you time when answering common queries online, but only use them as templates for your responses. The key is to personalize your messages, rather than copy and paste the same message every time. #5: Don't Take It Personally When dealing with negative comments on social media, remember that customers aren't angry with you as an individual. They're angry about the situation they're in. That's why you should never take these responses personally or respond to the customer in a negative manner as a result.

6 Browser Extensions for Busy Social Media Marketers

6 Browser Extensions for Busy Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to increase your productivity? Looking for browser extensions that simplify your marketing? In this article, you'll discover six browser extensions to help busy marketers. #1: Group Multiple Tabs Into a Single Tab With OneTab Some of the best tools are the simplest ones, and you can't get much simpler than OneTab. When you click the toolbar icon, the tool will pull all of your browser tabs into a simple list under a single tab. You can then organize, sort, and save that tab for later. Listen to this article: This free tool can be especially helpful when you're doing article research online. It's easy to get lost when you're reading article after article and following link after link. With OneTab, just click the toolbar icon when you're done and you can comb back through your tabs days or weeks later. The tool also gives you the option to save your newly formed list as a web page that others can view. #2: Save Web Pages With Evernote Web Clipper The Evernote Web Clipper is a fantastic free tool from the Evernote team. It lets you clip a web page and save it as an article, simplified article, full page, bookmark, or screenshot. After you clip it, you can add tags or comments and drop it into a folder in your Evernote account. You can then share that article with whomever you like right from the Web Clipper dialog box. #3: Edit Your Content With Grammarly Grammarly is a free, simple, powerful editing app that hides on your browser toolbar and edits your work as you write. As with many of these apps, there are both free and paid versions available. The free version offers a more advanced spelling, punctuation, and grammar check than Microsoft Word. You can paste your copy into the editor on the Grammarly website, upload a document, or just let the extension edit as you create social media posts in whatever program you're using. The app runs in the background, and if your copy is clean, you'll see a green icon. If your copy needs work, you'll see a red icon along with suggestions. If you opt for the paid version, you get more robust features like style and sentence structure suggestions, vocabulary enhancement tips, and a plagiarism detector. You also have the option to submit your work to one of their professional proofreaders. #4: Schedule Social Posts With Hootlet Hootsuite is a powerful social media management tool, and their Hootlet extension offers an easy way to create and schedule social media posts from within your browser. Cruise to a website article that you want to share and click the Hootlet icon to make the magic happen. You can then choose which social media account you want to post it to, edit the post, and post it now or schedule it for later. #5: Research Hashtags With RiteTag RiteTag is a great tool for researching relevant and trending hashtags. To access the free version, you need to use RiteTag's website. Just enter your keyword or topic in the search box. You can get access to the browser extension at the paid level (starting at $11 per month). This allows you to enhance your social media posts with hashtags related to the topic you're writing about. RiteTag's extension lets you upload images to your post, add emojis, edit calls to action in your links, and see your saved tag sets. You can even search for free images or GIFs to add to your posts. #6: Track Email Opens With RocketBolt RocketBolt works a little differently from other extensions. The extension itself doesn't do anything when you click it; but you need to have it installed to unlock its functionality. When used in conjunction with Gmail, RocketBolt lets you track individual email open and click-through rates. Marketers are used to this in programs like MailChimp and Emma, but those programs don't give you that information on the individual level. Why does this matter? Because you can see if a specific person is reading your email.

How to Use Video to Generate Leads

by 321go @ 321GoProject

So you say you want more leads. That would solve a lot of problems, right? More money, fuller classes, you could hire another coach, etc. Alright then, I have one question for you…. Just how much do you want those leads? To get more specific, what are you willing to do to get them? How uncomfortable are you willing to get? Are you willing to consistently put out content so that people come to know you as the expert? So many know they need to create consistent content, but let’s be honest, few are willing to commit to it on a regular basis. Everything else somehow takes priority.  Far too many gym owners want the quick fix. Write a blog or two. Shoot a couple videos. Do a Facebook ad. Run the newest, hottest, lead-generating tool/event you just read about on a group page. Then… hope (actually, expect) the leads will pour in. But, the problem with quick fixes is that they’re just that. A quick fix. They’re not intended for long-term, consistent results. The hard truth is that a quick fix is often the abandonment of responsibility. That statement may need to be read again for it to sink it. In business, CASH is king. In marketing, CONTENT is king. These days in content, VIDEOS are king. All the current research and studies are proving that video is where it’s at (and our experience wholeheartedly agrees with this). Not where it’s headed, but where’s it at now. A few statistics from an infographic by Hyperfine Media prove this point: Including video on a landing page can increase conversion by 80%. Video in an email leads to 200-300% increase in click-through rate. 90% of users say that product videos are helpful in the decision process. Enjoyment of video ads increase purchase intent by 97% and...

Blogging: A Business Model for Growth

Blogging: A Business Model for Growth

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you blog for business? Are you wondering how the blogging can help your business? To learn how a blog can be the center of your entire marketing program and explode your business's growth, I interview Joe Pulizzi for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute and co-author of Get Content, Get Customers and Managing Content Marketing. Joe shares his blogging story and how sharing free content grew his business. You'll learn how blogs can grow your email list, why multi-author blogs may be worth exploration and how to widen your professional network. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing What is content marketing? Joe tells us that people think content marketing is a buzzword. He says that 2013 is the year for content marketing to become part of the vernacular used by more marketing folks and business owners. It's important to realize that content marketing has been around for a long time. Joe looks at the example of John Deere creating The Furrow magazine back in the late 1800s. The company published the magazine because they wanted to create a true resource and educational component for farmers to be more successful business owners. The only way to do that back then was to have a magazine. They didn't have blogs, webinars or in-person events. It's the first representation of what is now content marketing. Joe explains that today, we're all basically media companies and publishers. It's really the essence of what content marketing is and because there are no technology barriers; everybody is doing it. The idea is that companies create or curate valuable, compelling and relevant content on a consistent basis. Usually it's to maintain or change behavior, and attract or retain a customer. If you're a traditional media company, you create content to get revenue in one of two ways: 1) getting your content sponsored in some way and 2) selling your content. This is how a traditional publisher goes to market. That's the business model. However, if you're a small business, you're creating content because you ultimately want to sell something. You're not necessarily making money directly from the content, but sales are coming in a later form or you're growing relationships with people who are then more likely to buy from you at a later date. Listen to the show to find out why the barriers to entry are very low and why consumers are more accepting of content in different forms than they have ever been. Joe's blogging story Joe describes the term blog as being a very important tool. He started out in the content marketing industry in 2000, with a company called Penton Media. Penton still is the largest independent business publisher in North America. They publish magazines mainly in industries like heating and air conditioning,  major manufacturing or food service. Joe ran the custom content division for all of these properties, which meant that if someone didn't want to advertise in a magazine, the publisher sent them over to Joe. It was his job to find a different way to make money from these people because he couldn't sell them ads. Joe tried to figure out how to help these companies tell better stories: "How were companies going to get attention if they didn't have a compelling story to tell?" Joe shares examples of the market share of the most popular television shows.

How to Get Started on the Most Popular Social Media Networks

How to Get Started on the Most Popular Social Media Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you starting a new social media presence? Do you know what to share on each platform? In this article, you'll discover tips to guide your posting on six social media networks. Listen to this article: #1: Start a Conversation on Facebook People typically use Facebook to catch up on news and chat with friends. If you want to connect with your audience, you can't just copy a headline and call it a day. Instead, ask a question or tease what makes your post interesting. Picture someone sharing the post with their friends. Encourage that with your tone. Your posts will get more engagement on Facebook if you include an image. Share a link and choose a bold image to catch the attention of your fans. You can upload a photo or video directly to the platform. Facebook's algorithm favors native videos uploaded directly. Keep your photos in the 1200 x 630 pixel range. Remember, if you want to boost the post or use it as an ad, the image must include less than 20% text. Facebook users are most active in the afternoon. A general rule is when people are bored at work, they're probably browsing Facebook. One study found that Facebook posts at 3 pm receive the most clicks. Thursday and Friday tend to be the busiest days. Keep an eye on your Facebook analytics to see which posts get the most engagement and adjust your posting schedule accordingly. #2: Inspire and Educate on Pinterest People come to Pinterest on a mission. They want to learn a new skill, buy a new product, or find a new project. For these reasons, valuable and informative posts get the most engagement. Pinterest favors information-rich captions, which can be up to 500 characters long. Tell your audience what inspired you about the pin, give an overview of what they'll find if they click through, and include a call to action like "Click for more" or "Comment with your thoughts." Resize your photos to fit the vertical pin standard. The recommended size is 600 x 1200 pixels. To add more interest, you may want to combine a few photos or add a text overlay. Pinners are more active in the evening and especially on Saturday. Schedule your pins in the evening and make sure you spread them out. If you upload a group of pins at the same time, you'll likely miss out on some engagement. #3: Join the Conversation on Twitter People typically go to Twitter to have a conversation or follow news at a specific moment in time. It's a great place for you to share product updates and news or answer questions from your users or community. Your space and time are limited on Twitter, of course. You have 140 characters to share your take on your link or ask a question. Add one or two relevant hashtags to connect your post to a conversation or community. If you add photos or other images to your tweet, you can boost your retweets by as much as 150%. Horizontal images perform best on Twitter. Keep your images around 440 x 220 pixels. Twitter generally sees the most activity between 1 and 3 pm on weekdays. But because a tweet's half-life is just a few hours, it's good practice to share your content more than once, perhaps in prime time and in the evening or early morning. #4: Keep It Professional on LinkedIn LinkedIn is the professional social network, so people come to the platform with a work mindset. Joining the conversation on LinkedIn is like making a presentation in your office or at an industry conference. Share your industry updates or thoughts on strategy as you would speak to peers or potential clients. This is the place to use the industry lingo you often avoid on other social networks. Like other social networks, visuals will help boost engagement with your content. Horizontal images typically work best. In terms of size, keep your images around 646 x 220 pixels. People spend the most time on LinkedIn mid-week. Post early in the morning or late in the afternoon on Tuesday or Wednesday for bes...

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering if you should get into Snapchat? Is podcasting something you're considering? To discover more, I interview Tom Webster from Edison Research about his latest study on Snapchat and podcasting adoption. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tom Webster, vice president of strategy and marketing at Edison Research and co-host of the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom is a specialist in consumer behavior and media consumption. Tom will explore his brand-new research from The Infinite Dial, focused on Snapchat and podcast adoption. You'll discover reasons to embrace Snapchat and podcasting for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Snapchat Growth About the study Research from The Infinite Dial series dates back to 1998, according to Tom, and it's the longest-running study on digital habits, behaviors, and consumption. They have trending graphs for areas, such as Internet radio, that go back to 1998. Plus, they've measured all kinds of behaviors and patterns in relation to consumption of audio, video, social, and mobile. Tom has been involved with the study and has been the voice of the studies on webinars since 2004. When the series started in 1998, it was focused more on digital audio. While today's brands and streaming audio like Pandora and Spotify weren't around back then, there were plenty of others. For example there was Broadcast.com, which Mark Cuban sold to Yahoo, NetRadio, Spinner, AOL Radio, and lots of other fledgling brands, Tom explains. The survey was a means to track them and put them in their place in the universe. As behaviors started to migrate to various media (as opposed to the text-driven medium that it had been previously), The Infinite Dial started tracking that too. Over the years, they added podcasting, social media, and so on. Essentially, if people do it online, The Infinite Dial is interested in measuring how it's consumed. The Infinite Dial's goal was always to create the survey of record in the various fields covered, so they spend nearly six figures in hard costs on mobile and landline telephone sampling to make a study that's random, representative, and projectable to the United States population. Tom loves coming out with new facts every year that corroborate what he sees people do online. Listen to the show to learn more about the survey sampling and why they survey via telephone. Podcast growth One of the things Tom loves about doing survey research is that although it reflects the current state of America, it typically lags behind what the digerati think. It can lag by quite a bit, he says, but if it's a real thing, it eventually gets there. The Infinite Dial added podcast tracking back in 2007. Two years ago, before Serial popularized podcasting, research showed that 15% of Americans 12+ listened to a podcast in the past 12 months. While that's a huge number (tens and tens of millions of Americans), it had been growing steadily, but not exponentially. Podcasting inched up from 9% in 2008 to 11% to 2009. And to 12% in 2010. For a short time, podcasting plateaued before jumping to 15% in 2014. After Serial came out, there was enormous advertiser, brand, and insider interest in podcasting. Listenership went from 15% in 2014 to 17% in 2015. In 2016, podcast listening has surpassed 21% already. That's a 24% increase year over year in the percentage of Americans who listened to a podcast. The Serial effect didn't happen immediately, Tom continues, although it made people a lot more aware of the on-demand content out ther...

Customer Advocacy: How to Get People to Talk About Your Company

Customer Advocacy: How to Get People to Talk About Your Company

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are your customers advocates for your brand or business? Want to improve customer satisfaction and advocacy? To find out how to turn customers into advocates, I interview Joey Coleman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Joey Coleman joins us today. He's a customer advocacy consultant and coach who has worked with Hyatt Hotels, NASA, and Zappos. Joey's also a frequent keynote speaker and leads workshops on the customer experience and the customer journey. Joey explores what it takes to turn a customer into an advocate. You'll discover the phases that lead to advocacy. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Customer Advocacy Joey's Story Joey has had an eclectic career. After college and law school, he did business consulting before working as a criminal defense attorney in the courtroom for many years. Then he taught executive education courses and ran a division of a promotional products company. About 15 years ago, Joey started his own brand experience and design firm. This led him to speak on stages all over the world, talking about how to create remarkable experiences that take someone from being a one-time customer to a customer for life. In each of his careers, Joey says, success hinged on two things. First, an understanding of human psychology (why people believe what they believe and why they do the things they do). And second, an ability to use that understanding to persuade people to take a certain course of action, whether it's a sales pitch, brochure, website, infographic, piece of evidence introduced in the courtroom, or a closing argument. Looking back, his entire career has been all about the experience; meaning the experience someone is currently having and how to make it better. While marketing firms build ad campaigns, branding agencies design logos, and graphic design firms execute the visuals, Joey looks at brand experience and how all of the different elements of a business work together. Experience is the through-line that connects everything. Listen to the show to discover how the name of Joey's business, Design Symphony, represents brand experience. Why Customer Advocacy Matters Joey thinks customer advocacy is really the end goal for most organizations. It happens when you reach the point where your customers are such big believers in who you are and what you do that they become your external sales force. Customers drive new business and increase the amount of business they do with you because they've become such raving fans, they can't help themselves. They advocate zealously for you and your business. Joey shares a brief overview of the history of business. In the 1980s, he explains, a movement came out of Japan that became known as the Total Quality Management approach to business. It was all about reducing product defects to as close to zero as possible. Out of this came things like Six Sigma Black Belt, as well as a general belief that when you buy something, it's going to work. The 1990s were all about Just-in-Time manufacturing. For example, companies like Dell shortened the supply chain through building things on demand. As a result, the computer giant could dramatically control inventory, while at the same time push prices lower. Companies started to succeed based on being the lowest-priced player in the game, while at this higher level of quality. In the 2000s, it became all about the Internet era. Businesses built websites and could make everything available globally 24/7. Then in the 2010s, everything that happened over the past three decades came together.

Snapchat Content Strategy: How Marketers Can Win With Snapchat

Snapchat Content Strategy: How Marketers Can Win With Snapchat

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you on Snapchat? Want to know how to use it for marketing? To discover how to create a content strategy on Snapchat, I interview Carlos Gil. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Carlos Gil, the head of social media marketing at BMC Software and co-host of the Social 545 podcast. He's also an avid Snapchat user. Carlos will explore Snapchat, and specifically, how marketers can benefit from it. You'll discover why Snapchat isn't just for Millennials. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Snapchat Content Strategy How Carlos got started on Snapchat In 2013, Carlos had been working in social media for about eight years and was leading social media for a supermarket chain, when a teenager told him Facebook was essentially for older people. He decided as a marketer, he needed to get on Snapchat, because the Millennials who were using it would soon be adults. He says he spent most of 2014 getting to know the platform and creating content. Over the course of a solid year, Snapchat became his go-to social network. Carlos began seeing more of his friends within the social media marketing community on the platform. What sold him on Snapchat over other networks like Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram, was the engagement. Snapchat essentially forces your audience to come back and watch your content within a 24-hour period, because if they don't see it, it goes away. Listen to the show to learn about Snapchat's previous reputation. Why marketers and entrepreneurs should be on Snapchat Last February, we had Gary Vaynerchuk and Shaun McBride (aka Shonduras) on the podcast to discuss Snapchat. A year later, it looks like Snapchat is about to explode. Snapchat has more than 200 million monthly active users and its audience continues to grow and mature. Snapchat is very transparent when it comes to their demographics, and reports that 77% of their user base is above the age of 18. Carlos thinks people are consuming so much content on Snapchat because it puts what you love about Twitter (the micro-content aspect) and what you love about YouTube (pressing a Play button to sit back and watch content) into a single app. You can go in and press a button to see what anyone you're following has done in the last day. He explains that when you publish content on Snapchat, it's available for 24 hours, which forces your network to come back and watch it. The messaging feature on Snapchat, which works almost like a text message, allows you to send content directly to your friends. Then, you can specify how long you want that content to be seen, and see when someone views your content . Listen to the show to discover why Snapchat is amazing at getting their users' attention. Types of Snapchat content Carlos shares that there are two different kinds of snaps: one is a photo and the other is a video of up to 10 seconds. For images, he says there are a couple of different filters you can use to change the contrast and color of your photo. There are also geofilters, which are graphic overlays for your photos, based on your location. For example there are geofilters exclusive to cities and other locations such as Disneyland. Videos have the same geofilters, but also have features like fast-forward, rewind, and slow motion. There are a couple of additional tricks to spruce up your snaps so they look better than average video content on your smartphone. Listen to the show to hear what else you can add to your Snapchat photos. Snapchat Content Strategy

New in SEOprofiler: more than 800 good links for your site (free tool)

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

It can be difficult to get good links, especially if you have a new site. What if there was a tool that helped you to get links from good websites as easily as possible? The Starter Backlinks tool in SEOprofiler is such a tool. It helps you to get the links that have a positive influence on the position of your pages.

How Video Marketing Creates Immediate SEO Results

How Video Marketing Creates Immediate SEO Results


The Shareaholic Content Marketing Blog

Quality video marketing will improve the way you approach SEO. Inside, read up on 4 key SEO metrics and best practices for using video to grow rankings.

New in SEOprofiler: the much improved new Ranking Monitor (you�ll love it!)

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Daily updates, mobile rankings, faster, more features and lots of improvements: that�s the new Ranking Monitor in SEOprofiler.

6 Ways to Use Periscope for Your Business

6 Ways to Use Periscope for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to use mobile live-streaming to market your business? Have you tried Periscope? Periscope is already proving to be an incredibly powerful social tool, and savvy marketers are using it in innovative ways to grow their businesses. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Periscope for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Show Live Product Demos If you're launching a new product, share the details with your audience on Periscope. You can do an interactive product demonstration by answering pertinent questions from viewers. Showcase cool product features, packaging and more. In this example Instagram coach and retailer Sue Zimmerman shows viewers how to apply Flash Tattoos (gold temporary tattoos) to their skin. #2: Share Industry News Periscope is a way to break news to your online community before anyone has a chance to write about it. Publishing a half-decent blog post on an industry innovation could take hours. On Periscope, you can simply talk about marketplace trends and then use your conversation with viewers to write a blog post or produce a training video. Sharing relevant news is a great way to position yourself as a go-to person in your industry, which sets you apart from your competition and gives you perceived authority. #3: Connect With Influencers Periscope is a great way to connect with influencers in your industry. To get noticed, show up regularly to their broadcasts, make insightful comments, ask intelligent questions and share their broadcasts on your social channels. If you want to develop a deeper relationship with an influencer you've met in person, Periscope can help with that, too. To remember to tune into specific broadcasts, turn on your push notifications and then mute everyone except the people you want to connect with. If you know certain influencers will broadcast at the same time every day, add a reminder to your calendar to tune in. #4: Take Viewers Behind the Scenes To connect with viewers on a personal level, use Periscope to give them a glimpse into your life or take them behind the scenes of your business. You can start a conversation by answering questions from your audience during the broadcast. As a preview to his podcast, Lewis Howes did a Periscope broadcast from the home of fitness guru Gabrielle Reese and surfer Laird Hamilton. People were able to chime in with questions they wanted Lewis to ask the couple in his podcast interview. If you're an author, share an update about your upcoming book or ask your audience for feedback on the title or a chapter you're working on. If you own a retail shop, give people a sneak peek at new items that have arrived. #5: Build Your Mailing List Periscope broadcasts can be an opportunity to build your mailing list. During your broadcast, ask viewers to leave their email addresses in the comments to sign up. Then you can enter the addresses into your database later. While this may create a little extra work for you, the signup process removes a barrier for viewers to join your mailing list. A note of caution: Because you'll be entering the email addresses manually, you may want to turn on opt-in confirmation emails to be certain you're complying with international email marketing regulations. #6: Provide Content for Other Channels You can repurpose your Periscope broadcasts to provide content for your other social channels. Although Periscope videos can only be broadcast vertically, some users have come up with innovative ways to work creatively with the vertical layout. You can also hack the layout to crop videos for YouTube or other social channels. Here’s a SlideShare presentation showing how to hack the vertical layout by using a tripod with iPhone and iPad mounts. To repurpose your content for other networks, look for creative ways to hack Periscope's vertical layout. Be sure to turn on Autosave Broadcasts in your Periscope settings so you...

How to Retarget With Instagram Ads

How to Retarget With Instagram Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you retargeting people with Facebook ads? Want to know how to retarget Instagram users? Serving relevant Instagram ads to people who've visited your website helps increase sales and conversions. In this article you'll discover how to retarget your website visitors using Instagram ads. Listen to this article: #1: Install the Facebook Pixel on Your Website Before you can start using Instagram ads to retarget website visitors, you need to set up the Facebook pixel on your website. You can do this with Facebook Power Editor. First, open Google Chrome and then log into Power Editor. If you manage multiple accounts, make sure that you're logged into the Facebook ads account that corresponds with the website for which you want to implement Instagram ads retargeting. You can double-check which ads account you're logged into in the top-left corner of Power Editor. Next, click Tools and choose Pixels from the drop-down menu. If you haven't done so already, create your Facebook pixel by clicking the green Create a Pixel button. In the Create a Facebook Pixel dialog box, type in a name for the pixel and click Create Pixel. Next, you see a message that your Facebook pixel is ready. Click Install Pixel Now to see the pixel code. If you already have an active Facebook pixel, you can access it by clicking Actions and choosing View Pixel Code from the drop-down menu. Next, copy your Facebook pixel code and paste it between the head tags of your website code. For more detailed instructions for installing your pixel, check out this page. Now you need to make sure that your Facebook pixel is working. You can do that with the Facebook Pixel Helper, which is a free plugin for Google Chrome. Once you've successfully installed the Facebook pixel on your website, Facebook will automatically start tracking every person who visits your website. #2: Create a Custom Audience to Retarget Next, you need to create a custom website audience. To do this, go to the Facebook Pixel tab and click the Create Audience button. Now, create the custom audience you'd like to retarget. Select Website Traffic for the audience type. Then in the Create Audience dialog box, enter the details for your custom audience. The custom audience in the example below will retarget anyone who has visited my website in the last 30 days. Note that the domain option appears only if your Facebook pixel is installed on multiple domains. Keep in mind that it's a good idea to create audiences based on the action you want users to take when they see your ad, rather than broadly target every website visitor (as in this example). When you're finished creating the audience you want to retarget, click Create Audience. #3: Set Up Your Ad Campaign Now you're ready to create your ad campaign to retarget past website visitors. To do this, open Power Editor and click Create Campaign. Then enter a name for your new campaign and choose one of these objectives: Clicks to Website, Website Conversions, Mobile App Installs or Video Views. When you're finished filling in all of the details for your campaign, click Create. #4: Build Your Retargeting Ad Set Now you need to edit your ad set. First, set your budget and schedule. Then edit your audience so you're only targeting people who have previously visited your website. To do this, click the Edit Audience button. Then select the custom audience you created. Once you've done this, click Save. Next, select Instagram as your placement. Finally, confirm that the custom audience you selected and refined for Instagram actually has people in it. To do this, check that your potential audience (in the top-right corner of the Ad Set panel) has more than 20 people in it. If it doesn't, you may need to broaden your other targeting parameters. Alternatively, you can wait until your Facebook pixel has captured...

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Twitter, Facebook or Pinterest? Do you know which type of posts your followers prefer? Social media analytics let you see who your followers are and what they like. In this article you'll discover how to use your audience insights from Twitter, Facebook and Pinterest to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Track Follower Preferences on Twitter Twitter provides a free analytics dashboard with key statistics about your account. You can measure your success in a variety of ways, ranging from the number of new followers to your most popular tweets. You can access the Twitter analytics dashboard here. After you log into your account, you'll see a 28-day summary of your profile. The summary shows the number of times you've tweeted, tweet impressions, followers and profile visits. Next to each number is an up or down arrow, representing the change over the previous period. The right side of the screen shows a summary of your analytics for the current month. If you scroll down, you can see summaries from previous months so you can compare and track your progress. What do you do with this information? Start tracking it from month to month. Create a table and list the number of followers you have at the end of the month. Then measure the monthly and overall percentage increases or decreases from the first column or month you started. If you want to see more detailed analytics for your profile, click on View All Tweet Activity. The page that appears shows a helpful and informative graph that lets you see the number of impressions that your tweets have earned over the last 28 days. On the right side of the page is an overview of your engagement rate, link clicks, retweets, favorites and replies. The 28-day range is the default setting, but you can change it to a more specific or broader range of dates. Make your selection from the drop-down menu on the right side of the page. Below the main graph on this page is a breakdown of all of your tweets within the selected date range. From here, you can see the number of impressions and engagements and the engagement rate for each tweet. Click on View Tweet Activity to see more information for a specific tweet. The report details how many people engaged with the tweet and the number of impressions. It also shows how many people clicked on your profile, favorited the tweet or retweeted it. Why is this information beneficial? Because it lets you see what content is working (what your audience likes) and what isn't. This helps you refine your content strategy to post about topics that your followers care about. #2: Discover Fan Insights on Facebook Facebook offers its own version of analytics called Facebook Insights (available after your page has received 30 likes). Use this information to make improvements to your content and determine the best times to post. To access these metrics, click Insights at the top of the page. From here, you can click these tabs to view a variety of analytics. Overview The Overview section provides the most important analytics. It lists page likes, post reach (the number of people who have seen impressions of a post) and engagement (the percentage of people who saw a post and liked, clicked, commented on or shared it). Scroll down the page to see your five most recent posts. For each post, view metrics on reach, engagement (broken down into post clicks, likes, comments and shares) and if applicable, how much money you spent promoting the post. Likes In the Likes section, you'll see a graph showcasing your page's growth in terms of audience. You can change the date range to see the total page likes for a certain range of dates or a particular date. For the time period you selected, you can also see net likes, which is the number of new likes minus unlikes and paid likes.

Advanced Facebook Ad Techniques: What Marketers Need to Know

Advanced Facebook Ad Techniques: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Want to bring your Facebook advertising to the next level? To learn how to use Facebook advertising to your advantage, I interview Jon Loomer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jon Loomer, a Facebook marketing expert who specializes in Facebook advertising. His blog, JonLoomer.com, was the top pick in our 2014 top 10 social media blogs. Jon explores the benefits of Facebook advertising. You'll discover new tools for publishers on Facebook, information about conversion tracking, custom reporting options and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Advanced Facebook Ad Techniques New Facebook tools for content publishers Before going into detail about the four new features aimed at content publishers, Jon explains the difference between an organic post and a Facebook ad. An organic post is something you share with your fans that's free and will also show up in the news feed. If you want to promote a post or create a separate promotion, that's an ad. The first new feature is the ability to target organic posts by interest to your fans. Targeting interests was previously something you could only do with ads. Jon shares why a marketer might want to try targeting fans. Facebook's algorithm only shows content to people who are likely to engage. After these fans engage, Facebook will show it to more people. So, if you target a post to people you know are highly likely to engage, you'll get the benefit of more Facebook visibility. Note: You can target by demographics, as well as to fans of other pages and fans in specific categories. The next change, which has been rolled out to a small number of big media companies, is smart publishing. This is auto-publishing, based on user engagement. Facebook looks at the most popular links people share on Facebook, and will share them with your fans. It won't post on your fan page, it'll just appear in your fans' news feed. Third is post end date. If you share something that's going to expire, you can put a post end date. It will disappear from your page and the news feed when that promotion is over. You'll hear about the final update, which is improvements to domain insights. Listen to the show to hear Jon's take on dark data, as well as how to generate and use UTM codes to better track link engagement and conversions. How Facebook tracks conversions By default, Jon explains, Facebook records a conversion when somebody has clicked your ad and converted within 28 days or viewed your ad without clicking and converted within 1 day. However, if you use your custom reports, you can adjust that window. You can get rid of view-through, or you can set view-through and click-through conversions for 1 day, 7 days or 28 days. When you have that conversion pixel on your site, Facebook knows three things: whether someone viewed your ad, clicked your ad or if they ever fired that conversion pixel. Facebook uses these metrics to determine whether your ad resulted in a conversion. To get to custom reports, go into your Ads Manager and click on Reports. Then click on the Customized Columns button, and then in the bottom right-hand corner of the window, the Attribution Window pops up. This is what you change to include any or all six reporting options. Listen to the show to discover what happens to your view-through and click-through conversions when you target the right way. Why bloggers should consider using Facebook ads Jon says that there's nothing more important than traffi...

How to use structured data and other technologies to improve the display of your web pages in the search results

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Structured data markup and other technologies can help you to get prettier listings on Google's search results pages. For example, pages that contain structured data markup for recipes look like this on Google. SEOprofiler offers many tools that help you with structured data markup and other technologies.

How Can PPC Help Grow My Business?

by admin @ FORWARD marketing

You probably have come across these terms many times now: Google AdWords, online marketing, paid search, online advertising, Pay Per Click (PPC), Cost Per Click (CPC). Generally, they are used interchangeably, and refer to online advertising via Google AdWords. While you may associate these terms with cost, they should be linked with the vast number […]

How to Increase Your Post Reach on Top Social Networks

How to Increase Your Post Reach on Top Social Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to see your social media posts? Have you thought about investing in social media advertising? With targeted ad campaigns, you can ensure that your posts reach the audience you define. In this article, I explore the top social networks that offer promoted post options and how they help you reach your audience. Listen to this article: #1: Boost Posts on Facebook To combat low organic reach on Facebook, you can boost your Facebook page posts in a variety of ways. You can boost your posts as you create them. You can use the Boost Post button after a post is published to your Facebook page. This is especially helpful if you're using social sharing tools to post to your page. You can also boost posts from inside your page's Facebook Insights. This is particularly useful if you're browsing through your analytics and notice a particular post could use a boost or could go viral based on its current organic reach. When you click the Boost Post button, a lightbox pops up that gives you simple audience targeting, scheduling and budgeting options. If you want the quick and easy approach, use this interface. For more detailed options, visit the Facebook Ads Manager, create a new ad and choose the Boost Your Posts ad objective. This approach gives you the full Facebook Ads interface for advanced audience targeting, scheduling and budgeting, allowing you to get the most out of your ad budget and post promotion. Alternatively, go to your Audience Manager and create custom audiences and saved audiences. You can create custom audiences with email or phone lists of your customers and subscribers. A saved audience is created when you save an audience based on specific configurations. When creating audiences, use the Boost Post buttons on your page and Facebook Insights to target specific audiences faster. Using specific audience targeting ensures that your Facebook page posts will reach the right audience to drive qualified traffic and engagement to your business. #2: Promote Tweets on Twitter If you think Facebook is the only social network suffering from low organic reach, think again. One of the more popular tweets from Whole Foods, a company with over 4 million followers, resulted in only 233 favorites, 96 retweets and 5 replies. That's pretty low reach, which is why promoting your tweets on Twitter is a good idea. You can start a promoted tweet campaign from a few places. First, you can click on the tweet Analytics icon beneath any of your tweets. This reveals your tweet's activity, as well as a Promote Your Tweet button. Second, you can click on the Tweet Details link in your Twitter Analytics to get the option to promote your tweet. Unfortunately, the Promote Your Tweet button doesn't offer much in the way of targeting or other options. This is why you'll want to use the Twitter Ads interface to promote your tweet instead. Here, you can post a new tweet to promote or choose from tweets you've already posted to your profile. Then you'll find all of the targeting, budgeting and scheduling options you want for your promoted tweet campaign. Again, using specific audience targeting will ensure that your tweets reach the right audience to drive qualified traffic and engagement to your business. #3: Sponsor Updates on LinkedIn The most recent update on Microsoft's LinkedIn company page has 1,376 likes and 111 comments, which is pretty good since they have over 2 million followers. Past updates have netted fewer than 500 likes and 100 comments each, making LinkedIn yet another network where organic reach is low. Fortunately, you can sponsor updates you've posted to your LinkedIn company page. You can do it from your page with the Sponsor Update button. You can also do it using the Sponsor link from your LinkedIn company page analytics.

WDF? How to find the most relevant keywords on a page.

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Are your web pages relevant to the right keywords? Do search engines find the right keywords on your web pages? Which keywords do your competitors consider as important? The new WDF Relevant Keywords Analyzer in SEOprofiler has the answers to these questions.

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use social media to sell your products? Looking for tools to simplify the process? The right tools make it easier to build relationships with people who are interested in what you offer. In this article you'll discover four tools to simplify your social selling. Listen to this article: #1: Find Shared Connections With Discover.ly A key part of selling via social media is making first contact with users who are primed to buy. When the users you're reaching out to happen to be influencers on social networks, the dividends are potentially higher. A big challenge, however, is breaking the ice and initiating a conversation. This is where Discover.ly comes in. It's a social plugin for your browser that maps out the friends or followers you have in common with a potential connection. When you browse social networks with the Discover.ly browser extension active, you can see all of the friends you have in common with an influencer. You can then ask your shared connections for an introduction and get a leg up on converting the influencer to a customer. Discover.ly also offers social data about people, such as their latest tweets or recent pictures posted to Instagram. With this information, you can reach out to influencers in a way that creates a familiar bond, which (if nurtured) might eventually lead to real-world sales. #2: Tap Online Interest With Talkwalker Tracking what your target audience is saying about your brand is important. This information helps you be more knowledgeable when communicating with people and targeting potential customers. Talkwalker is a great way to take the pulse of your audience. Using it, you see detailed insights about who's talking about your brand, what their interests are and what they like or dislike about you. If you want to identify posts that express intent to purchase, use advanced search queries such as "I am looking for (your product)," "can anyone recommend a good (your service)" or "I want to buy (your product)." Talkwalker also benchmarks your brand against the competition and shows you where you fall short and where you succeed. The alert system ensures you'll receive notifications about online mentions of your brand, products and competitors. This information puts you in a position to act in a timely manner. #3: Showcase Product Images With Pablo If you take a cursory glance at the top social media networks, you'll realize that excepting LinkedIn, every platform has a strong visual component to it. There's a reason for that. According to an Ethos3 infographic, 90% of the information that our brains process is in visual form. Of all of the content that your target audience consumes, they actually retain 80% of the visual content, but only 20% of text-based content. If you're selling a product, showing an attractive image of it is four times more effective from a retention perspective. What's more, visual content gets shared on social media 40 times more often than plain text-based content. So if you produce an engaging image or infographic, potential buyers on social media are likely to spread the word on your behalf. Pablo by Buffer is a great tool for creating original and shareworthy images to highlight your products and services. You can also add a text overlay to your image. Imagine a product shot with a clever tagline and a price attached to it. Add a logo too if you want to ensure your brand doesn't get lost in the conversation. #4: Respond to Customer Inquiries With IFTTT Marketers today have a critical opportunity that previous generations lacked: the ability to respond in real time to user actions. You might already track visitors and offer personalized content and responses when they're on your site. But what about social media? How do you respond to a statement like "Can't wait to see what the new Windows 10 looks like. Gotta try it!"? You can respond quickly to user activity on social media with I...

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter marketing working? Do you want more engagement for your tweets? Knowing how to write your tweets and when to publish them can increase visibility, boost engagement and drive traffic to your site. In this article you'll discover eight tips to deliver better tweets. Listen to this article: #1: Tweet Without Links Research shows that tweets without links get more engagement. Remember that not everything you tweet has to have a link. If you limit the number of links you share on Twitter, you'll add value to the ones you do. For example, I tweeted this same quote with and without a link. The one without the link got more engagement. Twitter is an excellent platform to build your brand and create trust, so spend time developing relationships with your followers rather than just sharing a lot of links. Plus, when you tweet fewer links, the people who trust you know whatever links you choose to share are likely worth clicking. #2: Use the Right Hashtags If you want to get noticed, add hashtags that give your tweets context. It's important not to overdo it with hashtags, however. Handy tools like Hashtagify and RiteTag can help you find the right hashtags to use. Find Hashtags With Hashtagify Hashtagify allows you to search for a hashtag you want to use. In the Search box, type in your hashtag (socialmedia, for example) and press Enter. The results let you see the most popular related hashtags. By default, you see the results in Basic Mode view, which looks like a mind map. Click the Table Mode button to see the related hashtags ranked in order of popularity. You can use any of these alternative hashtags or combine several of them for each tweet. Check Hashtag Relevance With RiteTag Once you determine what hashtags you want to use, use a tool like RiteTag to find out how relevant they are. Go to RiteTag and sign in with (and authorize) your Twitter account. Then click the New button at the top of the page. In the Compose New Tweet box, type in your tweet. You'll notice that when you add hashtags, RiteTag gives you a color-coded rating for each hashtag in real time. Green is good, blue is cool and red is overused. RiteTag also has a Chrome extension that shows the tool's codes and analytics for your tweets whenever you use Twitter, Buffer, Hootsuite or another platform to compose or schedule a tweet. Using Hashtagify and RiteTag together is a great way to find effective hashtags for your tweets to get the most visibility and reach. Use these tools to do research and then build a library of hashtags for your future tweets. #3: Add Images for Shared Links It's no surprise that tweets with images stand out and get more engagement than tweets without images. Fortunately, there are a variety of tools you can use to find the right images to use in your tweets. Twitshot is an online tool you can use in any browser that makes it easy to find images to use when you share links. It's also available as a Chrome extension and iOS app. Compose your tweet in the Twitshot tweet box and paste in the URL you want to share. Twitshot then searches for and lets you see all possible images that go with that link. Select one of the available images or upload your own image. Everyone knows that tweets with images stand out, but not everyone takes the time to add them. Consistently incorporating images will improve your engagement. #4: Tweet With the Proper Format To compose a tweet in the proper format, you need to have all of the individual elements in the correct order. Start your tweet with text and then add a link. Make sure to include the attribution with @mentions if applicable. Then add hashtags and insert your image. Now that you know the rules for composing a tweet, you can break them for effect. Come up with multiple ways to tweet the same information to add variety to your Twitter stream.

Google: how to optimize the crawl budget of your website

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

In Google's official webmaster blog, Google's Gary Illyes wrote about crawl budgets and how they affect your website. Prioritizing the pages that should be indexed can help you to get high rankings for your more important pages. Two factors influence the crawl budget of a website.

5 Free Social Media Tools to Create Visually Engaging Posts

5 Free Social Media Tools to Create Visually Engaging Posts

by Leonardo @ Vizlly

Make your social media posts more engaging to travel shoppers. Check out these 5 free tools that can help you create stunning visual content.

14+ Tools for Bloggers

14+ Tools for Bloggers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy blogger? Looking for new, unique tools to help you work smarter? The right tools will help streamline and improve your blogging. In this article, you'll discover more than 14 tools to help bloggers quickly, efficiently perform common tasks. Listen to this article: #1: Source Free, Quality Images A picture is worth a thousand words. You want them to be the right ones. Unsplash and Foter help tell your story. With Unsplash you get access to a bank of 50,000+ free-to-use photos. No attribution is required. If there's nothing suitable on Unsplash, Foter allows you to choose from a whopping 229 million images. Here's how: type in the search term and click Commercial Use. Next, click on your image. Then download whatever size image you want. Finally, cut and paste the picture attribution into your post. #2: Compress Images to Improve Page Load Speed The load speed of a page is a key ranking factor. Images are usually to blame for lengthy page loading times. That's where Compressor.io comes in. It will reduce image sizes by up to 90%, with no loss of quality. Here's how: just drag and drop your image, watch it compress before your eyes, and then download it. #3: Do More With Screenshots If you write a lot of blog posts you'll need a reliable screenshot grabber to gather illustrative images. To save time, install Save to Google Drive and Awesome Screenshot. Save to Google Drive is a super-speedy browser extension that helps you save web pages. Click the Google Drive icon in your browser extensions bar and it saves the entire web page to your Google Drive in seconds. Alternatively, use Awesome Screenshot if you want to crop the page or annotate it. Click on the Awesome Screenshot extension and you'll get a drop-down where you can choose your options. When you're done, save and store your screenshots in Awesome Screenshot and you can access them from anywhere. #4: Research Competitor Web Traffic When you're competing for a target audience, it's helpful to find out where a competitor's traffic comes from, what their referral sources are, or what their top organic and paid keywords are. SimilarWeb is an unbelievable resource that can help you find this information. The browser extension works best, but you can get the same stats from the SimilarWeb website, too. #5: Run an SEO Audit Want to do a basic SEO audit on your blog, but don't know where to start? Screaming Frog SEO Spider Tool, a small desktop program that acts as a website crawler, will check your blog for broken links, title tags, duplicate pages, redirects, the length of all your meta descriptions, and more. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AOzOffh9HIE #6: Monitor Keyword Rankings What's My SERP is a free tool that will track up to 25 keyword phrases across 20 domains for you and up to three competitors. You can even export the data after each report. Just sign up, input your keyword phrases, and click Check All Keywords. If you want enhanced features, try the multi-functional Monitor Backlinks. Its keyword ranking tool monitors up to 500 keywords, as well as those of your competitors. #7: Optimize Posts and Pages for Search Yoast SEO is a WordPress plugin that makes it easier for bloggers to optimize blog posts to rank on Google. Simply fill in the fields and tweak your entries until you get a green traffic light. A useful feature for bloggers who use social media is the ability to set the title, description, and featured image for shares to top social networks. #8: Search for Email Addresses by Domain Are you doing influencer outreach? Do you pitch to journalists? This tool will find anyone's email address. Email Hunter offers 150 searches with the free plan. For most people, that's plenty. Type in the domain name of the company the person you want to contact works for. If a specific email address isn't located,

What Is SEO / Search Engine Optimization?

What Is SEO / Search Engine Optimization?


Search Engine Land

Get started learning all about SEO from the industry's most trusted source, Search Engine Land. Review basics of search engine optimization, ranking factors & more.

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does tweeting take up a lot of your time? Do you want to share content automatically? There are tools you can use to automatically tweet your best content when your followers are most active and engaged. In this article you'll discover how to automatically schedule your tweets at optimal times. Why Automate Twitter? Putting together a Twitter content calendar can be a time-consuming task. You've likely experienced times when you've run out of ideas or had trouble finding articles to curate. A great way to keep your posting schedule full is to automate Twitter. You can schedule your posts automatically when the engagement and potential reach are higher. Listen to this article: Keep in mind that only a small portion of your followers will see your content the first time you post it. That's why it's a good idea to share the same content more than once. With smart scheduling and automation, you can reshare your content without being a Twitter spammer. This guide will help you schedule your best content when your followers are most engaged. #1: Find Out When to Tweet With Tweriod Before you start scheduling content on Twitter, take the time to analyze your followers' activity. You want to find out when your audience is most active and engaged on Twitter. This is a necessary step to maximize engagement. There are a number of analytics tools you can use to identify these peak periods. One free and easy-to-use tool is Tweriod. It shows you the intervals when your Twitter followers are most active. To get started, go to Tweriod and sign up with your Twitter account. Note that the time zone is determined according to your Twitter profile's settings, so make sure it's correct. After signing in, go to your dashboard and click on My Analysis to get a free premium analysis. On the results page, you'll see which time periods give you the most exposure on weekends and weekdays. For example, the Twitter account below has the most exposure on weekdays from 5 to 7 PM and 8 to 9 PM. On weekends, this account gets the most exposure from 5 to 6 PM and 8 to 10 PM. On your dashboard, you can also see when your followers are online. The results below show that followers are active between the same time periods on weekdays and weekends. Now you know the peak time periods for your followers on weekdays and weekends. In the next section you'll discover how to schedule tweets for these periods. #2: Set Up a Posting Schedule in Buffer A scheduling tool like Buffer can save you a lot of time with your Twitter account. Here's how to set up your own scheduling plan. After you sign in with your Twitter account, click on the Schedule menu. Make sure the time zone matches the settings of your Twitter account. According to when your followers are most active, set up a posting schedule for weekdays and weekends. It's up to you to decide how often you want to post content. You may want to experiment with different posting schedules to see what works best for you. Buffer has a beta feature that will identify the best times to post during the day by analyzing your past 5,000 interactions (likes, favorites, clicks, etc.) and similar profiles in the same time zone. On the Schedule page, scroll down and click on the Try Our Optimal Timing Tool (Beta) link. You can specify how many times you want to post per day, and the tool will calculate the optimal times for posting. Click on the Submit button. Next, you'll see a list of optimal times for you to post on Twitter, according to Buffer. Pro tip: Revise these peak times regularly, since your audience changes over time. Focus on optimizing your posting schedule by using data from Twitter analytics and Buffer. Before you move on to the next step, spend some time scheduling tweets. Here is a great guide to finding high-quality content to share on Twitter. #3: Fill Your Buffer Queue Using IFTTT

3 Ways to Maximize SEO Performance

by admin @ FORWARD marketing

Every business wants to secure the top ranks in the SERPs to attract the maximum number of consumers looking for products or services that they offer. However, reaching the top takes a lot of time and energy, and a solid SEO strategy that is up-to-date with the latest requirements of the search engine algorithms. When […]

How To Get Free SEO Help For Your Small Business

How To Get Free SEO Help For Your Small Business


Internet Marketing Ninjas Blog

I don’t usually recommend free SEO services. I am a firm believer that “you pay for what you get”. But you might be a small business owner that has a few questions about SEO, and doesn’t want to invest in professional SEO consulting just yet. If that’s the case, I can completely understand. And its just your luck because I am going to tell you how you can get free... [Read More...]

Thought Leadership: How to Become Known to People Who Matter

Thought Leadership: How to Become Known to People Who Matter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to be recognized as an expert in your field? Wondering how to make a name for yourself? To explore how to become known, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, a prolific blogger, author, and speaker. He's written Social Media Explained, The Content Code, and The Tao of Twitter. He's also been a frequent guest on this podcast. His newest book is KNOWN: The Handbook for Building and Unleashing Your Personal Brand in the Digital Age. Mark shares how to position yourself as a thought leader. You'll discover the four things it takes to become known. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Thought Leadership How Mark Became Known Before Mark launched his business, he was a global director of ebusiness at a Fortune 100 company. He had won a bunch of awards and had seven patents, a big global team, stock options, and a company car. After he left that job to start his business, Mark realized everything that he was known for at his previous company no longer mattered. He thought he was known, but he wasn't. As Mark grappled with being the go-to guy for nothing, he learned the only thing that matters in terms of your online presence is to be known. Being known isn't about being famous, but having an appropriate digital presence to help you achieve your goals. Mark says that building expertise and becoming known is a process. Nine years ago, as Mark started to teach and write for his own business, he struggled. Like everyone else, he started at the bottom. For instance, when Mark started blogging, he didn't know anything about it. Later on, Mark wrote a book about blogging. When he started consulting, he knew very little about it, but now he consults for big companies. Mark emphasizes that to start, you don't have to be an expert. You only need to be open and willing to learn continuously. I ask Mark what helped him become known again in the second phase of his career as he was building his own business. Mark says his goals, one of which was speaking at Social Media Marketing World, helped, but enjoying the journey was also important because becoming known takes time. Mark says some people set milestones that unknowingly let other people validate their work. However, as he was interviewing known people for his recent book, they often mentioned the positive impact they have on others. Mark believes this sense of mission is important because it defines who they are from within and motivates them as they put in the time necessary to become known. Listen to the show to discover how many years it takes to become known. What Prompted the Book Mark explains the two seeds that led to him write KNOWN. As research for his last book, The Content Code, Mark interviewed Jay Baer. They debated whether just anybody can become known or if you need a certain "it" factor. For three and a half years, this question stayed with Mark and he began wondering whether becoming known involved a process that he could define. The other seed, Mark explains, came from his conversations with consulting clients. People from all over the world ask Mark questions like, "How do I get in a position where I can write a book someday?" "How do I get in a position where I can be a speaker someday?" "How do I get appointed to a board?" "How do I attract more clients in my industry?" "How do I become regarded as a voice of authority?" Mark found himself giving the same answer over and over again: "To do that, you have to be known.

Finding Your Spoken Voice: How to Become Believable

Finding Your Spoken Voice: How to Become Believable

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you talk on podcasts or in video? Want to be more comfortable in front of the microphone? To discover how to improve your spoken presence, I interview David Lawrence. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview David H. Lawrence XVII, an actor and voice talent. You may know him as the evil Puppet Master in the Heroes TV show. David has also done extensive voice work for radio, movies and even as the voice for America Online's customer service. David will explore how to find your spoken voice. You'll discover tips to get comfortable speaking on-camera, as well as some of the more common mistakes people make when speaking. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Finding Your Spoken Voice David's background David grew up in Cleveland, Ohio, listening to both local and nearby stations on a little transistor radio hidden under his pillow. "I just fell in love with the idea that one person can sit in a room and talk to millions of people and make each audience member feel as though he or she was the only one the person was talking to," he recalls. Technology, David's other passion, has also run through everything he has done. David recalls his first time on a commercial radio station at WNCI in Columbus, Ohio. At the very end of "Barracuda" by Heart, he came out with "Landshark, candy gram," which was the big bit on Saturday Night Live at the time. From there he played the radio station jingle and headed into his career. After 12 or 13 years as a disk jockey, David's radio station flipped format, and he moved over to talk radio, where he found his stride. From there he went into syndicated radio: SiriusXM. In 2007 David decided that "radio was great, it had its day and I was done with it." It was time to move to on-camera. He says he likes the phrase, "Leap and the net will appear." David just leapt, although he had been preparing and training. Before he did anything on-camera, he learned how the business worked, as well as who the gatekeepers (but not decision-makers) were. That knowledge was helpful when David first started to audition, he says. David booked Heroes within six months of starting the full-on audition process, which is a lot faster than a lot of actors experience with the process. David explains how his one episode of Heroes turned into many. The first day on the set, his character was supposed to get shot and killed. Toward the end of the day, the director gave David new lines. In this newer version, his character had a chair thrown at him and was sent back to prison. "I was new at this and I said, 'Wait a minute. I rehearsed my death scene all weekend. I'm not going to be able to do that?' They responded, 'Do you want to die? Because we talked to your agent and you're in the next eight episodes.'" In addition to all of the legwork and preparation, David says the book, Secrets of Screen Acting (for which he recently finished voicing the audio book version), was also helpful. David also teaches voiceover courses on VO2gogo.com and he created the Rehearsal app. Here's how the app came about. David was in his agent's office and was called to audition across town with little time to prepare. His usual process is to record his lines and his partner's lines. He would then put that recording on iTunes, so he could repeat it until he learned his lines. All he had at his agent's office was his iPhone with voice memo, which did not have a repeat function. When David got to the studio, he learned they decided to write out the part.

How to Speed Up Your Social Media Content Production

How to Speed Up Your Social Media Content Production

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you spending too much time posting content to social media and not enough time engaging? Do you want an effective strategy for creating social media content quickly? By creating and scheduling content in batches, you'll be able to make more efficient use of your time on social media. In this article you'll discover an easy way to create social media updates in batches so you have more time for live engagement. Why Create Content in Batches? Say you decided to start having a cookie after dinner every day. You probably wouldn't whisk together a few drops of egg, a few pinches of sugar, a sliver of butter and a couple of chocolate chips so that you can bake one lonely little cookie at a time. You'd make a whole batch of cookies at the start of the week. Listen to this article: Creating one status update at a time doesn't make any more sense than baking the lonely cookie over and over. It gets in the way of your schedule, because every time you want to share something, you have to set aside the time to write it and post it. You end up constantly task-switching, which can wreak havoc on your productivity without you even noticing. That's where social batching comes in. When it really comes down to it, pretty much everything you do on social fits into one of two categories: posting original updates (status updates, photos/videos and links to your own content or someone else's website), and live interaction (replies, retweets, shares and so on). Here's how to prep everything you need for social media ahead of time, so you aren't starting from scratch every single day. #1: Make a List of Categories for Updates You're going to need a variety of different update types. Here are a few examples of the types of updates to share on a regular basis: Links to Your Own Content - This one seems obvious, but its importance can't be overstated. Link to your own blog posts, videos or podcasts. Brand Mentions - Whenever someone mentions you in original content, make sure people know about it! This helps drive traffic to your podcast, interviews or product reviews, which is always appreciated. Seasonal Promotions - If you cringe at the thought of running your seasonal promos, you’re probably doing them wrong. Take the pain out of these promos by preparing them in batches, considering each promo to be a separate category. Save your work in a library you can revisit each year to maximize the return on your effort. Other People's Content - This is an important part of a successful social strategy. Simply put, there's so much great content out there on the web that you shouldn't feel pressured to create everything from scratch yourself. Single Use - In general, repeating content on social is a very good thing. But sometimes you might want to say something only once. This can be an easy batch to create and can include everything from topical, time-sensitive questions to short-term promotions. Words of Wisdom - This is actually broken down into two categories. First, use your own tips and advice. Then add quotes from other people. Lumping them together in one category is helpful if you're just starting to build your content library. Now it's time to turn these categories into something that will save you time. #2: Create a Batch of Social Updates Say you end up with six types of updates that you routinely share. Let's keep it simple and assume that you're going to post from each category with the same frequency. If you're posting three updates a day, five days a week, that's a pretty respectable number when you're starting out. That makes 15 updates a week or 60 a month. Sixty updates a month comes down to 10 updates per category per month. Not so bad, right? Once a month, sit down and write 10 updates per category. That's it! Ten links to blog posts you think are interesting. (Shouldn't be too hard to find, right?) Ten tips or quotes. Ten links to your own blog posts,

Is Your Content Optimized for Voice Search?

by SearchEngineOptimization @ Simply Design

When it comes to search engine optimization, it’s becoming more important than ever to utilize multiple forms of search. An emerging and increasingly key aspect of this area of SEO is voice search. Google Voice Search is when you tell Google what information to search for on the internet. Instead of typing the words in […]

The post Is Your Content Optimized for Voice Search? appeared first on Simply Design.

How can I help you?

by Matt Scanlon @ 321GoProject

9 Social Media Tools Recommended by Marketing Pros

9 Social Media Tools Recommended by Marketing Pros

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new social media tools? Want to know what the experts are using? We asked top social media professionals which social tools they’re using right now. In this article you’ll discover nine social media tools to save you time and improve your marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Schedule Repins Using BoardBooster I use BoardBooster to schedule Pinterest. There are several features I use daily within BoardBooster, but my favorite is the "looping" ability. This feature lets you set a board to repin an older pin from that board, and then delete the original pin or the new pin based on which one performed better. This allows me to keep each of my boards active daily while repinning great stuff. I pinned it the first time, so I know it's good! Holly Homer created Kids Activities Blog and Business 2 Blogger, a company that matches bloggers with businesses that need them. #2: Create Weekly Reports With Rival IQ Over the last 6 months, I've started using Rival IQ to track competitors and analyze the results of social media marketing. It's become a vital tool for weekly reporting. Every week, Rival IQ emails you a PowerPoint to show how your social media accounts are performing, how this compares to your competitors, any changes competitors are making and "breakout posts." For example, I get notified if a competitor changes their profile information on their accounts or if one of their posts gets a lot more likes, shares and comments than other posts. Ian Cleary is the founder of RazorSocial, one of the world’s leading marketing technology sites focused on social media and content marketing. #3: Automate Evergreen Updates Using Revive Old Post Hands-down my new favorite tool is the WordPress plugin Revive Old Post. Install it and the plugin will pull from all of your existing blog posts and post them randomly to your Twitter, Facebook and LinkedIn accounts automatically. Use it and you don't have to worry about scheduling any of your latest or evergreen blog posts on social media at all anymore. Set it up and watch the traffic flow on automation. Nathan Chan is the publisher and editor of Foundr Magazine, a digital magazine for young entrepreneurs. #4: Access Images Everywhere With Google Photos Install Google Photos on every computer and device that you own, then select the free option (up to 16 megabyte file size), and Google Photos will upload every picture it finds on your devices. It even works some magic and uploads a version of any RAW images it finds! It took more than a week, but Google Photos uploaded more than 50,000 of my pictures. Some fantastic consequences include: Automatically back up all of your pictures to the Cloud. I now have at least three copies of my photos: local Lightroom, Dropbox and Google Photos, so lots of things have to go wrong for me to lose a photo. Move photos from one device to another. For example, if you have a photo taken with a camera, you can now easily download it to your phone from Google Photos, so that you can post it to Instagram. The opposite direction works well, too; a picture from your phone is available on your computer, so you can edit it easily. Google Photos takes its best shot to make animations, stories and collages. It helps you “rediscover this day” from years ago and helps you view pictures you probably would never have seen again. Think of all of those baby pictures! The results are delightful. Search through your photos by faces and topics. For example, if I search “track,” I don't have to add other keywords for the results to show images from railroads and track meets. And remember, it's all free. The only reason not to do this is if you’ve lost your mind. Guy Kawasaki is the chief evangelist of Canva, an online graphic design tool. #5: Broadcast Live Calls to Action on Periscope Periscope is my new favorite social media marketing too...

How to Attract Guests Online with Killer Visual Content

How to Attract Guests Online with Killer Visual Content

by trivago @ Vizlly

Visual content: When it's good, it's great for marketing a hotel online. When it's not, it doesn't do anybody any favors. In fact, it can discourage travel shoppers from booking. After price and location, photos play the biggest role in influencing the guest's booking decision. Learn how powerful visuals can help you win more bookings.

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you interested in live mobile broadcasting? Have you tried Meerkat or Periscope? To learn about mobile broadcasting apps, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Fanzo, partner and chief digital strategist at Broadsuite, a company that helps businesses succeed with social and mobile marketing. Brian is one of the leading authorities on Meerkat and Periscope. In this episode Brian Fanzo will explore the live mobile broadcasting apps Meerkat and Periscope and what they mean for your business. You'll discover the pros and cons of each platform, as well as how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Meerkat and Periscope How Brian got started with mobile broadcasting Brian, who calls himself a change evangelist, has a technology background and a love of social media. He is always looking for ways people can leverage technology to be more productive and tell their story in unique ways. Brian likes to jump on every new app: it’ll either fail fast, and he’ll uninstall it or he'll run with it! Mobile broadcasting definitely falls into the later category. Brian shares how he was introduced to Meerkat. He was speaking at the Mobile World Congress in Barcelona, when he got a message from someone who worked at Twitter, telling him that Ashton Kutcher and Gary Vaynerchuck were on a new video app. About 35 seconds later, Brian had downloaded it and clicked the start button. Meerkat came out February 26, 2015, and Brian was on it March 2. Brian took to Meerkat immediately. He put his mobile device on his tripod, hit the stream button, put in the event hashtag and was live. He treated it like he does his regular YouTube videos: walking around, describing the event and sharing it with his audience. About three minutes in, someone commented, “I see the Samsung booth, can you turn to your right.” That’s when Brian realized he didn’t just bring the experience to his audience, he was letting his viewers be a part of it. People in the United States could dictate what they saw in Spain. "It felt interactive, like having a true conversation," he recalls. Since Brian was about to go to South by Southwest,  he put some strategy behind his Meerkating. Brian contacted a couple of brands that were holding different events, and asked for backstory, so he could be prepared to cover them. During SXSW, Brian did a Meerkat of all the sessions he went to, as well as a preview each morning and recap every evening. About 300-800 people watched each stream, no matter what he was talking about. Periscope was released into the Apple store during Social Media Marketing World (the last week of March 2015), and Brian recalls using Periscope for first time during the opening keynote. Listen to the show to hear where Brian was when he heard about Periscope at Social Media Marketing World. How live streaming apps work "Live streaming isn’t anything new," Brian explains. "It’s really just turning on a video and opening the portal to anyone who wants to use it." What's new is the fact that we’re able to download an app, sign in with a Twitter account or phone number, click stream and post the link. Then anybody in your Twitter community can click on that link and watch whatever you’re showing on your phone. The big piece is the mobile aspect. It’s as simple as a basic tweet and hitting the “stream” button. Listen to the show to learn how and where to watch a Meerkat or Periscope live stream. Businesses uses for live broadcasting

Google+ Hangouts: What Marketers Need to Know to Get Started

Google+ Hangouts: What Marketers Need to Know to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ hangouts for your marketing? Are you wondering how hangouts can help your business? To learn how to get started with Google+ hangouts, I interview Brandee Sweesy for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brandee Sweesy, who is a Google+ hangouts marketing expert. For the last 20 years she has been helping entrepreneurs grow a following with video. Brandee shares how you can use hangouts to promote your content. You'll learn the different techniques to help brand your hangouts and the best ways to promote attendance. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Hangouts Marketing What is a Google+ hangout? Brandee states that first of all, it's free. Google describes it as a unification of their video, chats and messenger service all in one place. It was a replacement for Google talk and Google chat. Hangouts can either be private or you can stream live to your YouTube channel with Hangouts on Air. Brandee explains that if you're a consultant or coach, you can use hangouts like you would Skype. The quality of the video is amazing. If you want to record your private hangout sessions, then you will have to use Camtasia or ScreenFlow. These hangouts are great to use for team meetings, consulting, coaching or when you privately advise people. With a hangout on air, you can host yourself and up to nine other people. You can all be on the video at the same time, where you can chat and give a presentation. This can be done with private hangouts and hangouts on air. You'll discover why you need to keep control of the sound-activated screen and what you need to do. Hangouts on air stream live to your YouTube channel. It's linked to your Google+ page. If you have a Google+ profile or a Google+ business page, you link it to your YouTube channel. You need to have your YouTube channel verified for uploads of more than 15 minutes and most hangouts run longer than that. The great advantage when you stream live to your YouTube channel is that at the end of the broadcast, you have unlimited YouTube content. You'll find out what you need to add once you have finished the live stream to be able to optimize your video marketing. When you stream live, it also runs on your Google+ profile page at the same time. Once you start a hangout on air, you can take the embed codes and share them on a Facebook tab, website or blog post. You can then direct people to watch it there. There's also a Hangouts on Air page that lists all of the hangouts that are currently on air. Listen to the show to learn about how you should name your hangouts to grab people's attention. How does a hangout differ from a webinar? Brandee first saw hangouts as a possible replacement for webinars. A lot of the webinar platforms are expensive and if you only do a few, it can be hard to justify the cost. Many webinar platforms base their price on the number of viewers. But with a hangout on air, you have unlimited viewership. Brandee explains how she has done webinars by herself with a slide presentation embedded on a website that has unlimited viewers. With hangouts on air, you don't need to buy expensive plugins for your website. People can enter their email address and then flip over to a Watch Live page. You'll discover the best option to help build engagement and keep viewers from getting distracted. The advantage with hangouts is you have the opportunity to share an image wit...

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Welcome to our weekly edition of what's hot in social media news. To help you stay up to date with social media, here are some of the news items that caught our attention. What's New This Week? We've got exciting news this week! The Social Media Examiner Show: Subscribe now (for free) and discover quick tips for marketing your business in our 10-minute daily podcast. Consume snack-sized social media content each day. The result: this daily dose of marketing know-how will equip you to take your social media to an entirely new level. Watch this quick video from our founder AND to discover how to subscribe via an iPhone. Subscribe via iTunes, Stitcher or RSS. Click here to help us spread the word about this new show. Other News Worth Noting Facebook Unveils Facebook at Work: Facebook at Work is "only available to people who have set up a work account through their employer" and is currently in beta only on iOS. Google Lets You Specify Your Social Profiles: Are you a website developer? This new feature allows you to "use markup on your official website to add your social profile information to the Google Knowledge panel in some searches. Knowledge panels can prominently display your social profile information."   Weekly Video Tip // Post by Social Media Examiner. . Studies Worth Examining Q4 Social Login Report: Facebook Losing Ground to Google: Janrain's Q4 2014 social login report shows that while Facebook is still the dominant way people log into websites, Google is closing the gap among music and consumer brand sites. Facebook lost 3% of its social login market share while Google gained 6% in 2014, going from 34% in Q3 to 40% in Q4. REPORT: Messenger Cuts Into Facebook App's Reach: According to November 2014 data from comScore, the Facebook Messenger app is boosting its share of overall reach among U.S. users, at the expense of the social network's flagship app. Messenger rose to fifth place in rankings of reach among smartphone apps at 43.1%. The main Facebook app still overwhelmingly topped the list at 69%. Facebook-owned photo- and video-sharing network, Instagram, took ninth-place position on the list at 30.7%. Social Media Update 2014: A September 2014 survey conducted by the Pew Research Center finds that Facebook has the highest concentration of users, capturing 71% of American adult Internet users and 58% of the entire adult population. However, its overall growth has slowed, while other sites continue to see increases in users. The study also broke down key demographic trends and frequency of use for each of the five major social networks: Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest and LinkedIn. Data Driven and Digitally Savvy: The Rise of the New Marketing Organization: Forbes Insights and advertising technology company, Turn, surveyed 331 senior executives from a range of industries. Of those executives surveyed, 7 in 10 believe their reliance on data analytics for decision-making will either increase significantly (24%) or somewhat (47%) over the next 3 years. Data-driven marketing is credited with creating competitive advantages in customer loyalty (47%), gaining new customers (43%) and customer satisfaction (42%). Sixty-one percent note a measurable increase in ROI from data-driven marketing campaigns. Instagram 2015 Study: The Most Valuable Instagram Study for Your Business: Iconosquare released the largest Instagram study ever conducted, surveying 16,000 Instagram users, tracking 250 million media, and analyzing 39 billion interactions. The published results include 200+ pages of exclusive analyses, case studies and best practices. Their goal is to help marketers better promote their brand, understand best practices, analyze user engagement and recruit and retain users. How Long Does It Take to Plan Facebook, Twitter Content?: Research by Percolate reveals how long companies plan ahead for their content distribution on Twitter and Facebook...

How to Use LinkedIn Publisher Statistics to Refine Your Marketing

How to Use LinkedIn Publisher Statistics to Refine Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn Publisher? Want to get deeper engagement from your posts? LinkedIn Publisher now offers the ability to review stats for your published posts, which helps you refine messaging, target the right audience and directly engage with the people who interact with you. In this article I'll share how to access LinkedIn Publisher statistics and how to use them strategically. Listen to this article: How to Access LinkedIn Publisher Stats LinkedIn Publisher is a powerful platform because it's sticky. Your posts live on forever on your profile, and the content is searchable. It's good for positioning yourself as an expert in your industry and sharing relevant information with your followers. Your LinkedIn Publisher analytics show you how your content is doing, make sure it's reaching the right people and help you connect with those who are responding to your posts. It's great for content development and lead generation. You can access your LinkedIn statistics in a couple of places: on your profile just above your posts and on your author page (the URL that's associated with the page where your posts are listed). Click on See More, and then select a post to see its statistics. The three sections of analytics are See How Your Post Is Doing, Demographics of Your Readers and Who Is Responding to Your Posts. Here's a look at how to use each section to create more powerful content and increase visibility. #1: Track Publication Trends Go to the See How Your Post Is Doing section to discover if your posts are getting views. You can see your posts' visibility for the last 7 days, 15 days, 30 days, 6 months and 1 year. This analytics section also lets you view how many likes, shares and comments a particular post has received, as shown in the upper-right corner of the image below. After you publish a post, keep a close eye on the activity for the first week. Often visibility increases on the second, third and fourth day. Therefore, if you're writing a post that has a specific timeline (perhaps it relates to a project, product or webinar release), make sure you post it a day or two before you need people to see it. Also, try posting on different days of the week and see if your results change. John White, a successful LinkedIn published writer, recommends posting at about 8 p.m. Eastern Time. Not only is this a good time to get views in Europe, but it's also not too late for U.S. time zones to see your content. It's interesting to look at the long-term view also to see if there's some correlation between trending events and the visibility of your post. For example, if your post on the latest Apple products gets a lot of traffic, you may want to write posts whenever Apple releases new products. Build on any increased reach by resharing a popular post as an update on Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. If you like to keep a close eye on your metrics, see if there's a correlation between reshares and LinkedIn views. #2: Discover Reader Demographics Scroll down the page to see the demographics of your readers. LinkedIn shows you reader demographics related to the top four industries, titles, locations and traffic sources. Use the first three demographics (industries, titles and locations) to make sure you're attracting the right audience with your content. For example, if your niche demographic is marketing and advertising executives, but your content is attracting job-seekers in software design, you're probably using the wrong keywords and content. Also check to see what other people in your field are writing about to attract the correct audience. Then reframe your content so it targets the right demographics. You can always use LinkedIn Pulse to research what other people in your industry are writing about. As far as traffic sources are concerned, it might surprise you to find out how people get to your posts.

SEO: Making Recommendations on Mockups

by Jill Kocher @ Practical Ecommerce

Mockups are a key part of creating new marketing campaigns and redesigning entire websites. As partners in the process of producing those new experiences, search-engine-optimization professionals should offer feedback at ...

Failing to Start: Why We Accept Mediocrity and How to Change

Failing to Start: Why We Accept Mediocrity and How to Change

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you accept your lot in life? Are you afraid of starting something new? To learn how to accept who we are and how to make a change, I interview Seth Godin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Seth Godin, the bestselling author of Purple Cow, Tribes, Linchpin and many others. His most recent book is The Icarus Deception. He's also the CEO of Squidoo. Seth shares his experiences of having an idea and going for it, even if you think it might fail. You'll learn why he thinks everyone should be willing to fail and why art is so important. You'll also discover how Seth used Kickstarter to fund The Icarus Deception. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Taking Risks The idea behind The Icarus Deception The idea behind The Icarus Deception was Seth's manifesto rant that will hopefully shine some light on the revolution that he thinks we are living with right now. Seth explains how people don't understand the impact of the Industrial Revolution of 1880–1910. Before 1880, there was no such thing as jobs. The unemployment rate was zero and most people worked on the land or for their family business. The Industrial Revolution changed this and it also changed government, regulations, school, culture and society. It invented the weekend. We accept all this because it happened before we were born. You'll discover why right now we have a new revolution that is replacing the fading industrial age. What's happening now is that we have a revolution built with the connection we have about ideas, people to people and the ability to reach markets. We'd have never thought back then that one person working by him- or herself anywhere in the world with a laptop could touch a million or a billion people. Seth talks about how PSY, who made the Gangnam Style video in South Korea, was viewed 900 million times and how this was impossible 15 years ago. When Seth wrote Permission Marketing 12 years ago, he didn't realize that he was writing about a different way to make connections with people. He believes that it isn't about Facebook or Twitter, it's about a passion for doing things that might not work. The industrial age is about polishing things so they do work. It's the giant gap. Seth wants to teach people to like the idea of doing something that might not work. Listen to the show to find out more about why it's connections that create all of the value in business. Why the commonly told version of the Icarus story is no longer relevant Seth believes that all myths are true, to the extent that although there are no supernatural beings involved, they're about us. Myths have developed over thousands of years to talk to human beings about how to be our best selves. The myth involves Icarus and his father Daedalus stranded on an island. Daedalus fashions some wings for his son and says, "Put these on, but don't fly too high because if you do, the sun will melt the wax and you will die. But more importantly, don't fly too low because the mist in the water will get in your wings and you will surely perish." Seth explains the reason why the industrialists want us to fly too low is because they benefit from this. Listen to the show to find out why Seth thinks we are flying too low and what he wants us to do about it. The meaning of art Seth shares his definition of art. Art is the work of a human being doing something that has never been done before,

New in SEOprofiler: how does your website look on different devices?

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

If you do not know how your website looks on different devices, some customers might get an ugly website. That's not good for your business. For that reason, you should check your website to make sure that your website visitors get the correct design. Fortunately, there's an easy way to test your website without buying multiple devices.

Launching: Why Podcasts Are a Hot New Way to Launch a Product

Launching: Why Podcasts Are a Hot New Way to Launch a Product

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you getting ready to release a product, book or service? Do you want to know how a podcast can boost your launch? To learn why podcasts can be a very powerful marketing tool when it comes to starting a launch, I interview Brian Clark and Chris Ducker for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brian Clark, founder of Copyblogger Media and host of the new podcast New Rainmaker. Chris Ducker is the author of Virtual Freedom and host of The New Business Podcast. Both Brian and Chris are serial entrepreneurs. Brian and Chris share why they've chosen podcasts to launch their new products. You'll discover ideas for your own launches and why you should give audio a chance. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launching With Podcasts Why launch a special podcast with the same name as a new book? Chris explains that podcasting has been good to him from a personal brand perspective, and it's been a way for him to grow his own personal network of contacts and business associates. It also enables him to expand reach ridiculously in a short period of time. Chris says that he enjoys podcasting because he is more of a talker than a typer. The last thing he wanted to do after he had written his book was to write blog posts to promote it. So when they put together a marketing plan for the book, there was no doubt in Chris' mind that a special podcast with the same name would be the best approach. Listen to the show to find out the two main reasons why Chris chose podcasting to help with the launch of his new book. Why add a podcast to the launch plan for a new product? Brian tells the story of how during his time as an attorney, he was first introduced to the word rainmaker, which means the person who brings in the business. It was back in 1998 that Brian started to publish online and he became an entrepreneur. He didn't have professional or family privileges, so he couldn't be the traditional type of rainmaker that he had observed earlier. Reflecting on it, he saw that the Internet was his way to become a rainmaker. Nearly sixteen years later, it's played out really well. It's the genesis of the concept itself. Copyblogger has done a couple of podcasts, and although they don't have the hugest uptake, people do love them. Brian says that they see audio as a completely new channel to reach people who may not be familiar with their brand, and this is in line with the product they'll soon launch. You'll hear why Brian sees audio as the best foundational content, from which you can create every other form of content. Listen to the show to find out why the New Rainmaker podcast is more than just a podcast. Where is the world of podcasting heading? Brian believes that the reason podcasts didn't do as well as expected back in 2005 was because it was hard for people to make money with sponsorships or advertising. However, everyone uses content to sell things, and the world seems to be waking up to this. Consequently there has been a big resurgence in podcasting. The way Apple has embraced podcasts as a format within iTunes has made it easy to subscribe and more people than ever are now aware of them. You'll hear why podcasts work for anybody who knows what they're talking about, and why Brian believes we are entering the golden age of podcasting. If you want to read more about where the world of podcasting is headed, be sure to check out Social Media Marketing podcast...

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your Twitter account? Have you thought about applying SEO tactics to your Twitter marketing? With a few simple techniques, you can increase the chances that your Twitter account shows up in both Twitter and Google search. In this article you'll discover how to improve the visibility of your Twitter account with SEO. Listen to this article: Start With Relevant Keywords Keywords that you're already using in the metadata of your website are a good place to start. Your website keywords might not translate perfectly to Twitter, but if you combine them with popular hashtags and topics that work well in your content, you'll have a good group to test. You'll know which keywords are working best by monitoring your engagement, link clicks and reach. Any spikes in those metrics will show you which tweets have effective keywords in them. Then you can use those keywords more in your tweets and profile. You can also expand your keyword list by including the names of events that your company is always involved with. Make the list as big as you like as long as every word is relevant to your brand. Most importantly, keep this list updated. With your keywords in hand, here are some ways to boost your visibility for both Twitter and Google search. #1: Optimize Your Account for Twitter Search Tweets get the main stage on Google right now, but optimizing your account for search on Twitter will allow you to have long-term searchability. Handle and Username Make sure your handle and username match your website and brand name. Consistent branding across all of your channels is your best bet for being found by the audience you want. Your handle and username don't have to match each other, but they should be related. Your handle is also included in your unique Twitter URL (for example, https://twitter.com/SMExaminer). Your username shows up next to your profile photo for all of your tweets. You can change your username easily. But changing your handle is trickier, and you'll lose your verification badge if you have one. Changing your username or handle may also confuse your followers and cause people to unfollow you. If you're going to change either one, try to do it only once. Don't use a lot of numbers in your username either because Google may flag it as spam. Bio, Photo and Link Your bio, photo and link are the places to make changes and updates to promote campaigns or events. Twitter indexes your bio regularly, so any changes affect your relevancy score in search. You can use up to 160 characters in your bio section, so make the most of them. The bio's main purpose is to explain to potential followers what you usually tweet about and why they should follow you. Update your bio regularly to match the type of content you're currently tweeting about. If you have a campaign or event you're involved with, make sure you include relevant keywords and hashtags in your bio. This will help you show up more on both Twitter and Google when people search for those keywords and hashtags. The profile photo also has some SEO weight. Before you upload the photo, add relevant keywords, separated by dashes, to the filename of your photo (for example, social-media-examiner.jpeg). This won't make you shoot to the top of results on its own, but SEO tactics are most successful when the different pieces are working together. Also make sure your photo is exactly 200 x 200 pixels for optimal loading speed. Your link is the biggest call to action for your Twitter account. Many brands shorten their URL to make it more trackable and user-friendly. If you want to shorten your URL, get a branded link shortener because some link shorteners can be flagged as spam. Also think carefully about which page your bio link is sending your Twitter followers to. The safest option is to use the main page of your brand's website because it usually has the best SEO authority.

3 Tips to Improve the Search Ranking for Your Blog Posts

3 Tips to Improve the Search Ranking for Your Blog Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your blog posts ranking lower in search than you'd like? Do you want to rank higher for specific keywords? In this article, you'll discover tools and tips to help you improve the search ranking of your blog posts. Listen to this article: How Ranking for Keywords Has Changed Optimizing your blog post to rank high in search engines used to be straightforward: pick your keyword and make sure you use it in the title and a few more times in the article. If you picked the right keyword (and if your blog was well-established and referenced), you were most likely to rank somewhere in top 10. Keyword research has quietly changed over the past few years. First, search engines like Google have become much more sophisticated when it comes to understanding what "high-quality content" is. It's not only about how well your article is optimized: it's also how in-depth, useful, and comprehensive it is. Moreover, as Neil Patel explains, keyword stuffing will get you penalized, not rewarded. Second, the competition is growing: most bloggers know the basics of search engine optimization these days. It's harder to stand out and get ranked. Here's how you can get ahead of your competitors. #1: Include More Keywords The days when you wrote one blog post per keyword are gone. Google (as well as your audience) now looks for more in-depth long-form content that features a varied vocabulary including synonyms, related phrases, and concepts. The following tools will help you expand your keyword lists: Seed Keywords helps you crowdsource your friends and followers into suggesting related keywords for you. The tool creates shareable mini-surveys for your followers to help you brainstorm more ways to search for your topic. Soovle will generate keyword suggestions from multiple sources (Wikipedia, Amazon, YouTube, Yahoo, Answers.com, and Bing), giving you a good overview of how people search for your keyword on different platforms. Another tool that does the same (but supports fewer sources) is the Google Keyword Suggest Tool. It generates suggestions from Google, Bing, YouTube, and Amazon and it digs very deep, so you'll get hundreds of phrases to work with. Reference.com and Synonym.com will help you expand your keyword list with synonyms. If you're looking to optimize your existing blog posts, use Serpstat to go through your site, pick the most powerful pages, and suggest a list of "missing keywords." Essentially, these are words your competitors are ranking high for, but you're not. Now all you need to do is go back to your articles and optimize them for those missing keywords to increase your ranking. An easy way to optimize existing content for new keywords is to add new sections (with subheadings) targeting those new words. This helps content get more comprehensive over time, which naturally results in more social media shares and backlinks. #2: Refer to Notable People, Places, and Brands One of the biggest changes in search engine optimization is Google's focus on understanding entities. "Entities" are related notable people, places, organizations, brands, etc., which associate in some way with your keyword. For the easiest way to demonstrate how entities help in ranking your content, read this awesome case study by Bill Slawski. Bill took a well-optimized piece and rewrote it the following way: first by making it much longer, and second by including notable events and people. The result was astounding. The article started to drive referral traffic from people linking to it, and return visits. And yes, better search rankings too! Google pays special attention to entities when trying to understand how concise and useful your content is. Google has had years to learn to understand entities, concepts, and their relationships. Google's Knowledge Graph is an entity graph. Search for any notable name you're aware of to see how Google structures and relates entities.

Why Your Team Needs a Growth Manager

by Sherice Jacob @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Growth hackers…growth managers…growth marketers — startups these days are all about growth. But are these titles just different names for the same kind of job? And if you’re a startup, which type should you hire and why? This article will help shine some light on one of the hottest and most lucrative jobs in the […]

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to drive more traffic to your blog? Looking for ways to use social media to promote it? Understanding how to best share your blog posts on many social networks will maximize your visibility and reach. In this article you'll discover how to promote your blog articles on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram and Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Spread the Word on Facebook There are multiple ways to share your blog articles on your Facebook personal and business pages. Update Your Status With a Link When you first post about your blog on social media, the easiest thing to do is to share a link. But rather than simply restate the title in the update, lead into it with a question, a statistic or a bit of interesting information to tease what's in the article so people will want to read it. Create and Share Photos Image posts stand out on social channels. Facebook allows you to share one or multiple photos with a status update to your business page. (You can only share a photo or a photo album on your personal page.) Start with an engaging photo that's representative of your article, with or without the post's title. If there are multiple photos in your article or if it's a how-to or tour of your products, upload the photos as an album, or even better, a photo carousel. For clarity, it's better to upload larger photos rather than smaller ones, especially given how many people view social media via mobile. Facebook will resize the photos to fit. Here's a comprehensive list of social media image sizes. Remember to include the article link and a headline when you post photo updates. Upload a Video If you have a video embedded in your blog post, upload a snippet as native Facebook video to promote the post. The more active and engaging the video clip, the more attention it will draw in the news feed. Include an update and the article title, as well as the Watch More call to action. Then add your article link, which will show up at the end of the video. If you're feeling adventurous and you don't have a clip to share, create a short video telling people what they'll find when they read your article. Write a Note Facebook notes stand out in the news feed and will draw attention to your article. Notes recently got a makeover, and now look similar to blog posts. But rather than repost your article in its entirety, upload an image and write an intro to the article. Then add a clickable link to the end of your note calling readers to read more. #2: Tell Your Followers on Twitter Adding media to your tweets helps you stand out on Twitter. Tweet a Link As with a Facebook status update, it's easy to share a link to your article on Twitter. The tweet doesn't need to be the title, but it can be, since links don't populate unless the user clicks View Summary. Be sure to add appropriate hashtags and @mention the guest author if appropriate. Again, get creative with your tweets so people will want to read more. Share an Image Upload an image when you tweet your article. The image can have the title in a text overlay, be representative of the content or both. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your tweet. A link takes up 23 of your 140 characters, and an image takes up 24 characters. Upload a Video (or GIF) to Your Tweet Upload a short video or GIF to call attention to your article in the Twitter feed. The maximum length of a Twitter video is 30 seconds so if your video is a little longer than that, you can shorten it after you upload it to Twitter. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your video or GIF tweet. #3: Let Your LinkedIn Networks Know There are three ways to share articles on LinkedIn: with an update, a photo or a LinkedIn Publisher post. Update Your Status With a Link Include your article's link in your status update.

How to Use Facebook Messenger for Your Business

How to Use Facebook Messenger for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for a new way to connect with customers and prospects on Facebook? Have you considered Facebook Messenger? Messenger for business pages makes it easy to offer instant one-on-one customer service, while keeping a record of the conversation. In this article I’ll explain how to use Facebook Messenger with your business page. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Messenger for Business? There are 800 million people who use Facebook Messenger each month. The instant messaging service is available to anyone, whether they have a Facebook profile or not. When Messenger first became available for business pages, Facebook users could message page owners and the page owners could reply. Now, page owners can respond to anyone who has commented on their page, privately or publicly. To keep privacy levels in check, businesses can’t download the email addresses of fans nor can they initiate conversations with users. The ability to direct message your audience is extremely powerful, especially since Facebook would rather have users stay on their platform (rather than jumping over to email). More than 89% of users access Facebook on their mobile devices and they check Facebook 14 times a day. Those people have an intimate relationship with Messenger. When your company starts conversations with users, you’re befriending them on that level. This is how to change business relationships into personal ones. Globally, Facebook continues to roll out Messenger features designed to help businesses efficiently manage their communications. Note: With the number of Messenger users hurtling towards the milestone of its first billion, look for Facebook to monetize Messenger sometime soon. Mark Zuckerberg has said in the past that Facebook likes to wait until its products grow to one billion users before focusing on driving revenue. As the demand for more ad inventory increases, Facebook needs to remain nimble with its core products and offer additional ways for advertisers to reach their audiences. Why Send Private Messages? Some of the biggest benefits to being able to private message your customers are related to social customer care. Answer questions about products or services. Prospects who are looking to make a purchase might want to ask you questions privately first. Encourage prospects to contact or message your business so you can give them the information they need to pull the trigger on their purchase. Have real-time conversations giving customer support. If customers are having an issue with their purchase, Messenger is an immediate way to assist them. You can also send customers order confirmations and shipping info, and invite them to check out related products. Private support is especially important if your business is in a highly regulated industry (such as finance and insurance) where you can’t discuss certain topics publicly. Messenger is also helpful when customers need to give you their private information to resolve an issue. Handle complaints. This is one of the top reasons Facebook introduced the ability to private message people who comment on your page. When you get negative comments from users, Messenger allows you to take the conversation offline on the same platform and defuse them pretty quickly. #1: Enable Messages on Your Page Your page can accept and send messages only if you’ve enabled Messenger. To turn on Messenger for your page, go to Messages under General Settings and then click Edit. Select the option to allow messages to your page, and click Save Changes. If you find that you’re getting more Facebook messages than you can handle, you may want to consider turning the feature off until you’re able to appoint more moderators. Another option is to make use of the ‘Away’ setting (see below for more on this). #2: Configure Message Settings There are two settings to adjust for your business Messenger: Response Time and Inst...

7 Simple SEO Tricks That Still Work in 2017 With Great Results

7 Simple SEO Tricks That Still Work in 2017 With Great Results


SEO Nick

Check out these 7 simple to implement SEO tricks that will help your SEO efforts in 2017 by crafting your way to the top of the SERP!

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you understand how to measure social media activities? Do you know how to gather the right data to help you achieve your business goals? To explore how you can measure social media activities, I interview Lutz Finger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lutz Finger, who is the director of data analytics at LinkedIn and co-author of the new book, Ask, Measure, Learn: Using Social Media Analytics to Understand and Influence Customer Behavior. Lutz shares why he's so interested in social analytics. You'll discover why Lutz believes social media analytics will have a bigger impact than the onset of the Internet did. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Measuring Social Media Why do so many businesses struggle with measuring social media activities? Lutz talks about the trial-and-error phase of social media measurement and how we've moved beyond that phase in some areas but are still learning in others. He says the promise of social media analytics has a lot of misconceptions around it. With easy access to data on trending content, followers, Klout scores, etc., businesses are trying to find a way to use the data. Lutz explains why this approach often leads to a negative outcome and why businesses should approach using data with a goal or question first. Lutz shares why it's important to understand how a metric is built and points to the Influencer metric as an example. He says that while there are at least 10 different Influencer metrics that have to do with reach, not every influencer can help fulfill every goal. He explains why he would consider Social Media Examiner an influencer if he wanted to put a new social tool in front of people who work with social media, but not if he wanted to sell clothing. Listen to the show to learn what influencer reach must be combined with to move people from awareness to intention. The difference between viral and contagious content Lutz says the term viral, when used to describe social media content, is wrong because something that's viral is equally infectious at every stage. For example, a story that is liked by 1 in 10 people the first time it's seen will be liked by 1 in 10 people in the future. He explains that when something is contagious, it gains weight as long as it travels. The more people who believe in it, the more trustworthy the story becomes, regardless of whether it's true. Listen to the show to find out how people convince an algorithm that something is contagious and how that's affected things like the New York Times Bestseller List. How social media data can empower a business Lutz states there isn't good or bad data, there's just useful and useless data. He explains that data is only useful when a business has the right question. He shares that many organizations start by asking what data they have and how they can measure it. Then they try to find something in the data to help their business. Lutz says you need to start with a question or goal, and then figure out how to capture the data that will help answer that question instead of using data to come up with a question you didn't have in the first place. He illustrates how a sales department can use data to answer the question, "How can we find new clients?" Listen to the show to discover why sentiment is an especially difficult metric to measure. How marketers can start measuring social media activities Once you have the question,

Twitter Cards for Blogs: How to Set Them Up

Twitter Cards for Blogs: How to Set Them Up

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you heard of Twitter cards? Are you wondering how you can use them for your business? To learn about how Twitter cards can be beneficial to your blog, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep on the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode you'll discover the different types of Twitter cards available, how to set them up and what to tweak in order to have more customization. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Cards for Blogs What is a Twitter card? A Twitter card is a way for you to add more text and images to your tweets. Twitter cards give you a lot more options than you get with an ordinary tweet. With a normal tweet, you can upload an image that has to be rectangular. If it isn't, Twitter crops the top and bottom for it to fit. When you create a tweet with an image, the default is displayed on Twitter.com and on mobile apps. Tweets with images do not support Twitter cards. They are completely separate. Twitter cards work similarly to how Facebook pulls in default information from a post when you paste a URL into Facebook. It pulls in an image, a headline and some text. Listen to the show to hear why I believe Twitter cards only work on Twitter.com and their own mobile app right now. How a Twitter card works If you go to Twitter.com and go to a Twitter account that has Twitter cards enabled, you'll see the option to View Summary in the bottom right of the tweet. With Twitter's mobile app, you have to click on the tweet to see the Summary card. You'll hear the advantages and disadvantages of this one-click process. One of the benefits you get with a Twitter card is the amount of content you can add. You get 70 additional characters for the title, and 200 additional characters for your description. When you click on View Summary in a tweet, you'll notice that below the tweet is where your additional content appears. There's also the ability to include images. You can even include tall images. For example, I was able to display an image that was 480 x 580 pixels within a Twitter card. Listen to the show to find out what information you can include and what is powerful if you have a multi-author blog. Twitter card benefits for bloggers There are three types of Twitter cards that work well for bloggers. These are the Summary card, the Summary card with large image and the Photo card. 1. The Summary card is the default that most bloggers will likely choose. It shows a small image that's offset to the right, and all text is below it. This is very similar to how Facebook works. 2. The Summary card with large image is a better option if you have nice big images on your blog. The difference here is that the large image is above the content. When someone hits View Summary, they will see the large image before the additional information you have included. 3. The Photo card is essentially the same as the Summary card with large image, except it doesn't have the summary. Instead you just see the photo with a headline. To see a Photo card in use, you can check out Mashable on Twitter. At Social Media Examiner, we use the Summary card and we use the Summary card with large image for My Kids' Adventures. Listen to the show to discover how the images you create for Facebook Open Graph on your blog can also be used for Summary cards. How to set up a WordPress blog to work with Summary cards First of all, you need to install the WordPress SEO by Yoast plugin.

Marketing Trends: How to Think Differently and Predict the Future

Marketing Trends: How to Think Differently and Predict the Future

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to stay on top of the latest marketing trends? Looking to tap into the next big trend? To explore marketing trends, I interview Rohit Bhargava. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Rohit Bhargava, the author of Personality Not Included and Likeonomics. He's also the founder and CEO of the Influential Marketing Group. His latest book is Non-Obvious: How to Think Different, Curate Ideas and Predict the Future. In this episode Rohit explores why trends matter to marketers and reveals a few trends. You'll discover what makes something a trend. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing Trends How Rohit became interested in trends Rohit spent many years working at marketing agencies and frequently crossed industries. For example, he'd work for a toothbrush brand in the morning and an enterprise data client in the afternoon. This is how he started making connections among industries and began thinking about trends. Rohit started writing trend reports in 2011. Rohit's experience includes working with Leo Burnett in Australia and Ogilvy in the United States. He did digital strategy and even worked on Intel's first social media guidelines. One of the biggest problems, Rohit explains, is a lot of trends are self-serving. "Imagine I have a company that sells hammers, and then I declare 2015 the year of hammers," he laughs. "How convenient is that?" People declare trends based on whatever they sell so it helps them, but what they point to isn't actually a trend. Rohit considers a trend to be an observation about the accelerating present. That means there are signs of something already happening that will become more important. A trend will either change the way consumers make decisions or change the way companies structure their business models or how they do business. Listen to the show to discover one of the biggest mistakes many trend writers make. Why marketers should care about trends The biggest benefit to knowing about trends, Rohit explains, is to know when to pivot. The term pivot is frequently used improperly. For example, if someone sells bicycles and then becomes a coffee shop, it's not a pivot, it's a completely new business. An actual pivot was seen when BMW, in addition to making cars, decided to start a program called DriveNow in which they rent electric cars. They're tapping into the trend of the sharing and collaborative economy, and experimenting with their business model. BMW is saying we still make super high-quality cars, but we now distribute them in different ways: we sell, lease and rent them. That's smart, Rohit says. It's the way to look at something that's happening in the marketplace and see how it affects your business. Marketers need to be on the lookout for trends and pivot accordingly, but also understand trends that are already happening. Listen to the show to learn about Rohit's haystack method and the difference between trend curating and trendspotting. Glanceable content The trend of glanceable content is a reaction to our shrinking attention spans, Rohit explains. There's material out there, like BuzzFeed headlines, that tantalize us so much we can't help clicking on them. But that alone doesn't make it a trend. This idea of the shrinking attention span leads to innovation in unexpected places. There's a team of MIT researchers working on studies of glance behavior: how fast can we read something in a situation when we need to consume it quickly? For example,

Search Engine Optimization

Search Engine Optimization


Community Central

Search Engine Optimization, or SEO, is a multi-discipline field that helps to make your site more visible and brings more visitors to your community through prime placement on search engine results pages, or SERPs. SEO best practices are constantly changing and evolving; techniques that would have been impactful during the earliest days of the web have become table stakes and are essential to being indexed. The best way to climb the SERPs is to build unique, engaging content and share it...

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest account working for you? Want to take your Pinterest marketing to the next level? Tailoring your profile, boards and pins to appeal to your target audience will grow your followers and increase engagement. In this article you'll discover six ways to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Page The best way to convince visitors to follow you is to optimize your Pinterest page. Here are some key areas to focus on. Profile For the business name, use your company's name or your name (if it's for your personal brand). Upload a relevant profile image, such as your company logo or an image with your company's name. You want to make it easy for people to recognize your brand page. If it's a personal page, add a photo of you smiling or laughing. Match your username with your business name. If the username is already taken or is too long, choose something similar to it or use an abbreviation. Write a convincing bio. In 160 characters, describe your business and let people know about the types of images and content you share on your Pinterest page. Add your town or city and other location details. This will help you attract local followers. Add your website and social media details. Don't forget to add your website and Twitter account. This information will be displayed right below your profile image. Add your Facebook account only if it's a personal page. (You don't have the option to add a Facebook business page yet.) Boards Make sure that your page has at least 10 boards. Place your most important or popular boards in the top row. That way they're displayed above the fold, and people will see them immediately when they visit your brand page. Optimize your boards by adding good board names, descriptions and cover images. Shake Up Learning's Pinterest boards have relevant cover images that contain the name of the board and their logo. For your cover image, you can use an existing pin from the board or create a unique image, pin it and choose it as the board's cover image. In the image you can include the name of the board and a call to action asking people to check out the board or follow it. Another option is to use a technique similar to pricing tables, where one option (usually the most popular) has a unique color so it stands out. To apply this tactic to your boards, use similar cover images for all of your boards but choose a unique image for your most popular board (or the one you want to drive followers to). Also create a few secret boards so you can save images to pin publicly later on. #2: Design Content to Support Goals Before you can determine what to pin, think about your goals. They might be to drive engagement and build an audience or to drive traffic. Most businesses choose a primary goal (such as driving traffic) and a secondary goal that complements the primary goal (like gaining more followers). Once you choose your goals, you can determine what to pin by reviewing your Pinterest analytics. To access this data, click the gear icon and choose Analytics from the drop-down menu. Your analytics page has three sections: Your Pinterest Profile, Your Audience and Activity from [Your Website]. In the Your Pinterest Profile section, find out how your pins are performing. Your pins are categorized depending on the impressions, clicks, repins and likes they've received. Depending on your goal, choose the category you want to view. If you want to drive engagement, for example, look for pins that have been repinned and liked most. If you want to drive more traffic, take a look at clicks. Scroll down the page to see your most popular boards. You can also adjust the date to see how your pins have performed during longer or shorter time periods. Next, visit the Your Audience section to look at your followers' demographics and interests. Browse the Demographics tab to look at the coun...

Google Updates 2017 (Part 2): More of Mobilegeddon

by Joanne Chong @ SEOPressor – WordPress SEO Plugin

If you read through the first part of our Google Updates series, then hopefully you’re able to gain some valuable insights into some of the new or updated Google features that could potentially help with your marketing efforts. However, you may have noticed that all seven updates covered in part one of our series focused mostly on desktop-based use, although there were a couple of updates that affected both mobile and desktop users. For this ...

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use video in your marketing? Want to make sure your copyright is protected? There are simple steps you can take to brand your videos so you're protected if people upload them to Facebook as their own. In this article you'll discover how to protect your video content from freebooting on Facebook. Listen to this article: What Is Freebooting? Freebooting (also known as video piracy) is the act of downloading someone else's copyrighted video (usually from YouTube) and uploading it to Facebook as your own. You need to protect your content and make sure you don't unknowingly propagate the work of pirates. Joe Hanson of It’s Okay to Be Smart explains that freebooting "is not the same as sharing or linking or embedding [online media] from its original source. Freebooting means downloading it without permission from the creator or copyright holder and redistributing it for your own use, often for your own monetary gain. When it comes to video piracy in 2015, Facebook is ground zero." http://i.imgur.com/oqvxxMB.jpg Of the videos on Facebook, 72.5% are pirated. "According to a recent report from Ogilvy and Tubular Labs, of the 1,000 most popular Facebook videos of Q1 2015, 725 were stolen reuploads," says Hank Green. "Just these 725 'freebooted' videos were responsible for around 17 BILLION views last quarter." A recent trend I'm seeing on Facebook is scraped YouTube videos that have been lightly edited and compiled into a montage with large captions or subtitles on the video itself. Given that Facebook has the Autoplay feature on both desktop and mobile, users are more likely to feel drawn in to watch a video and click/tap for the audio if they read the caption. Freebooting hurts people who work hard to create their video identity. For instance, if you're monetizing your YouTube channel, you'll miss out on ad revenues if someone is scraping and reusing your videos. Facebook is just starting to dig into revenue sharing for their ads, but it's only available to a select few advertisers so far. Granted, if there's a call to action or watermark on an illegally uploaded video, it could potentially help increase the visibility of the original creator. But still… Here's how to protect your content, deal with piracy when it happens and avoid sharing pirated videos. #1: Understand Facebook and YouTube Video Piracy Policies YouTube is stringent with their copyright links, so they'll take infringed content down immediately if a complaint is filed. Unlike YouTube, Facebook won't automatically take down pirated content. Facebook is clearly on a mission to ramp up their own video consumption. Native Facebook video posts have the most organic reach, which is probably what has spawned this trend among users. Under pressure to do something about freebooting, Facebook came up with video matching technology to make life a lot harder for pirates. It lets the creator know when a duplicate video is being shared on Facebook. "Videos uploaded to Facebook are run through the Audible Magic system, which uses audio fingerprinting technology to help identify and prevent unauthorized videos from making their way onto the platform," Facebook states. #2: Report Freebooted Videos Destin Sandlin of Smarter Every Day created the following video (which you can share on Facebook) to simplify what freebooting is and the impact it has for content creators. He talks about a German DJ who created a YouTube video that got over 5 million views in four years. A verified Facebook page then downloaded the video from YouTube, uploaded it as a native Facebook video and got 5 million views in four days. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L6A1Lt0kvMA Destin shares three tips for what to do when you come across freebooted videos anywhere on the Internet. He says to capture the freebooted content (with a screenshot or video screen capture), comment (state that it's stolen and direct people back to the original vid...

Help! I’m an Overworked Owner!

by Julie Weldon @ 321GoProject

You started your own CrossFit Box. Yeah!  Now, you’re drowning and out of time… You coach all or most of the classes, you do the programming, you do the financials (running bills, cards, etc), the marketing, the member outreach.  You’re not getting enough time with your family, you’re not getting enough time for yourself, you’re not getting enough time to GROW your business instead of just maintaining it. What can you do?  What can you do to make your life manageable and put your focus where it needs to be – on building your business while enjoying some stability in your life?  Below are some suggestions. Know what you do, what you don’t want to do and what others could do to help Identify good, trustworthy people and delegate Automate your box Know what you do each day One of the concrete necessities in any box owner’s life is to delegate jobs to others as soon as it’s feasible.  Fire yourself from the smaller jobs (cleaning, minor admin, social media, etc) so you can focus on the big stuff like creating relationships, building programs and expanding your business.   Action steps: List everything you do each do and how much time you spend on each item.  An hour reaching out to new or current athletes?  Two hours cleaning?  Three hours coaching? An hour marketing? Be detailed and thorough. Now, go through that list and highlight the things that you don’t want to do and/or what others could do.   Identify and utilize awesome people Once you’ve identified all the things you do and are responsible for, begin to notate those things that other people can accomplish. Your goal should be to do ONLY those things that you can do. The rest? Delegate them. This won’t happen overnight, but should be...

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to build a personal brand? Interested in ways to differentiate yourself from others? Social media is a great way to develop a personal identity, establish a reputation and stand out in your industry. In this article you'll discover how to use social media to build your personal brand. Why Personal Branding? To understand personal branding, start by doing a Google search for your name. Listen to this article: Chances are you'll see a list of your prominent social profiles (namely LinkedIn, Pinterest, Instagram, Twitter and Facebook) in your search results. Google gives high authority to all of the main social media platforms. Ultimately, the more active you are on a particular platform, the higher that profile is ranked. Your personal blog, website and images are probably ranked high too, as social media and content creation are fundamental parts of personal branding SEO. Remember that everything you do online is a representation of your personal brand. Here are some ways to start shaping your message and how you're perceived. #1: Define Your Objective What do you hope to achieve when people search for your name? What do you want them to see? If you want people to see your work experience and receive new opportunities in your area of expertise, concentrate on developing your LinkedIn profile first. If you want to promote your content to a wider audience, try increasing your Twitter followers. If you're trying to sell artwork, Pinterest is your best option. You get the idea. Here are some other possible goals: "I Want to Start My Own Business" If you're a budding entrepreneur, your personal brand could make the difference in whether your idea is successful. When people research you online, what they learn about you can be a deciding factor in whether they invest in your idea. "I Want to Differentiate Myself From Competitors" With a strong persona and unique branding proposition, you're almost guaranteed to stand out from the crowd. In a competitive marketplace, it's important to show what makes you different. "I Want to Sell More" This goes without saying: When your personal brand is strong and you make yourself appealing enough that people want to connect with you, chances are you'll sell more of your product or service. #2: Identify Up to Three Areas of Expertise What do you want to be known for? Whom do you want to connect with? The Internet is flooded with entrepreneurs and experts, so you need to determine what makes you unique. You might be more than just a social media marketer. Your interests could be as broad as Peruvian cooking or dolphin training, but don't choose more than three. Your areas of expertise define who you are and what you do. They're used for writing your social media profile descriptions and should include your main keywords. #3: Make a List of Profile Links Store links to all of your social media profiles in a spreadsheet. You might have 10 or even 30 profiles (the more, the better). If you have a large number of profiles, prepare to carve out time to be active on these channels. Review each of your social media profiles regularly and update them to ensure they contain your most current information, such as your work info, website URL, social links, etc. #4: Develop a Strong Positioning Statement A positioning statement is a brief summation of who you are, what you do and what you stand for. Typically, positioning statements are created for brands or products, but in this case you're developing one for you. When creating your statement, always keep your audience in mind. Although the statement is about you, it's not necessarily for you. It's for the people you're trying to connect with. Describe what differentiates you from other people in your area of expertise. If you're not quite sure what that is, take time to research some of the well-known people in your field. Take note of their tactics,

Live Video: Creative Ways to Do a Live Show on Facebook

Live Video: Creative Ways to Do a Live Show on Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast live video? Have you considered hosting a regular show on Facebook Live? To discover creative ways to use Facebook Live, I interview Lou Mongello. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Disney expert Lou Mongello, author of multiple books and audio guides for visitors to Disney theme parks. He hosts the popular WDW Radio podcast and also broadcasts a live show on Facebook at Facebook.com/LouMongello. Lou explores how to start a show using live video. You'll discover easy ways to get creative with Facebook Live. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video How Lou got into live video When Lou began his Disney blog and community in New Jersey, he realized everything he was doing, even his podcast, was a one-way conversation. In 2007, when Ustream became a lot more accessible, he decided to give it a try. Lou recalls the first night he did a live stream. He'd told his wife he was going to try it out and would be back in 10 minutes. Six hours later, he was still online with a couple of hundred people who were watching, chatting, and engaging. Since then, he's been broadcasting live video every week. Between his weekly shows and any ad hoc episodes, Lou believes he's done close to 1,000 shows to date. Lou says he moved from Ustream to Livestream, then was a day-two Meerkat user and a day-one Periscope user. He thought Periscope was the best of the bunch until he got his account verified by Facebook and received early access to Facebook Live. Lou simulcasted his show, using two different devices to compare the quality, engagement, and viewer experience of the two broadcasts. Very quickly, in late 2015, he let people know he was moving off of Periscope and going all-in on Facebook Live. Listen to the show to discover what Lou loves about the growth of live video. How Lou uses Facebook Live Lou does a live broadcast show every week. Most episodes are done from his home studio, and topics range from the week's most recent Walt Disney World news and simple Ask Me Anythings (AMAs) and Q&As to showing off things in his collections. He says his in-studio shows are more about the conversation, while the offsite shows (such as when he goes to a Disney park, on a cruise, etc.) are about conveying the experience. Watch & chat with me LIVE! Let's talk Disney, and Ask Me Anything! #tw Posted by Lou Mongello on Wednesday, June 29, 2016 For his Wednesday discussions of Walt Disney World news, Lou talks about what's going on, and also makes the audience part of the broadcast. If a new restaurant is opening, an attraction is coming, or something is changing, he flips it around to make it a question. For example, he'll ask, "What do you guys think?" or "What's your favorite place to eat on property?" Whatever you talk about drives engagement, Lou continues. He always has questions in his head to initiate a conversation, and instead of asking a question, letting people respond, and moving on to the next question, he reads every response in the comments so he can further the conversation with people. Lou stresses that it's important to acknowledge individuals during a live broadcast, because when someone's name is called, it means a lot to them. His AMA episodes allow the audience to ask him questions that are personal, business-related, or relate to an upcoming Disney trip. Lou tries to go through questions as quickly as possible, and normally does a lightning round at the end. He'll do two minutes of rapid-fire questions and answer as many as he can.

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to connect with fans on a deeper level? Have you thought about using psychology in your marketing? Implementing basic psychological marketing principles in your social media activities can help you attract, engage, and form emotional bonds with your target audience. In this article, you'll discover three ways to use psychology in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Give Gifts to Encourage Responses If you give people something they find valuable, they'll typically feel indebted to you. To incorporate this neuromarketing tactic in your social media marketing, you can offer a small gift like a discount, free trial, or free resource guide to your fans. Whatever you decide to offer, the goal is to answer the question: "What's in it for me?" On their Facebook page, Spanish soccer club Real Madrid recently offered free shorts with the purchase of a kid's shirt from the team's official store. In just an hour, the post received over 16,000 reactions and 63 shares. Although Real Madrid's massive Facebook following played a role in the success of their offer, this tactic can help drive engagement for businesses of all sizes. If you don't have the luxury of spending money on giveaways, you can drive engagement using free gifts. Anytime Fitness offered their Facebook followers a free downloadable calendar to plan their activity in and out of the gym and track progress toward their fitness goals. To use the reciprocity tactic on your social channels, take a closer look at your audience to better understand what they like and expect. Figure out what compels them to engage and come up with an offer that they're likely to share with friends. Offer something that's valuable to your audience while ensuring that they give you something in return. For example, give a 5% discount or a free trial of your product to anyone who shares and comments on your post. Or host a giveaway contest in which followers with the most shares and social media engagement receive a free product. In the tweet below, users are offered a free design course in exchange for being a beta tester and providing feedback on the course. Users can reciprocate by clicking on the link to apply. They might also want to share the good news with their Twitter followers, which is a form of engagement. The idea behind the reciprocity tactic is to compel the action of engaging with your brand by making people feel obligated to you. While you can't offer a giveaway every day, you can always post useful, shareworthy information related to your business. For example, if you're in the fitness industry, share articles and tips about exercise and healthy eating. #2: Use Emotional Triggers to Create Authentic Connections Connecting with your audience is one of the most basic ways to increase your social media engagement. This neuromarketing tactic makes use of the emotional reaction that's triggered when people feel connected to you. When people feel close to you and can relate to you, there's a great chance they'll engage with your company. To form an emotional connection, you need to start interacting with followers in a meaningful way. Laughter is one of the most effective tools for forming a strong emotional bond with people. Like Chipotle does here, you can use wit and humor to connect with your Twitter followers. The Mexican grill has a deep understanding of their target audience and the kind of humor they'll likely appreciate. This helps them avoid using humor that their followers might find offensive or lame. Chipotle also posts humorous replies to tweets from their fans. Your tweets can show enthusiasm toward your products with the right mix of humor. This works well for driving social media engagement. Here's how you can pull off this neuromarketing tactic to connect with your fans: Study your audience to see what kind of humor they like.

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products using Instagram? Looking for tools to make it easier for customers to buy from you? The right Instagram tools help you maximize your revenue. In this article you'll discover six tools to help you sell products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Shoppable Content With a Hashtag Hashtags are a big part of how you connect with users on Instagram, and Inselly makes good use of them. Like other platforms on this list, Inselly lets you use the profile-link-to-storefront method of selling. It comes with the added bonus of the Inselly hashtag. Add the hashtag #inselly to your description, as well as any other relevant tags that might put you in front of your target audience. Not only does this hashtag make it easier for users to search for buyable content, but it also flags your content as being buyable if users stumble across it somewhere else. Sellers can process purchases through PayPal, and buyers can contact sellers through a message either on the app or the Inselly website. Buyers need to have Inselly installed and integrated with Instagram, but it's free for them to do so. It's also free for sellers to use, with no commissions or fees, although you can choose to purchase "coins" (the international currency Inselly utilizes) to promote your content. [Editor's note: Inselly recently updated. Buyers don't need to install or integrate the software with Instagram, and it's free for them to use.] #2: Sync Inventory Across Your Online Stores Shopseen is a multichannel listing interface that allows you to upload and list your products and have them automatically uploaded to a variety of ecommerce stores like Shopify, Etsy, eBay and Woo. Shopseen will then update your inventory, continually and automatically, across all of these sales channels. They also have a straightforward Instagram selling tool that's easy to use for both ecommerce businesses and customers. Shopseen will create a storefront using your profile link, similar to other services you'll see in this article. Once you've linked your Instagram to Shopseen, upload images of your products to Instagram, and add a price to the description. Shopsheen will then upload the product to your Shopseen page (which is off of Instagram). Ask followers to click to your store through your profile link and you can collect payment from a credit card. They don't have to set up their own Shopseen account, which is a strong benefit. This is particularly helpful for ecommerce businesses that feature their products on a wide variety of storefronts. Pricing is based on the amount of sales you make per month and the number of stores you have. You start with a free plan that allows you to have one store and Shopseen takes a 10% fee on Instagram sales. #3: Sell Through Comments Soldsie allows users to purchase directly from a seller's Instagram news feed without ever leaving the app. As an added bonus, this selling tool works for Facebook, too. Both buyers and sellers have to install and integrate the software with Instagram after registering with Soldsie, which uses "comment selling" as its method of making sales. Upload your products through your selling dashboard to turn the product images into shoppable Instagram posts. Then you include specific buying information and product details, such as "100% cotton, comes in blue and white" on each Instagram product post. Ask your buyers to make purchases by commenting "sold" directly on the post and including any necessary size/color/selection information. Once buyers comment with this information, Soldsie emails them an invoice so you can collect payment via PayPal or credit card. Soldsie has a variety of pricing plans based on the needs of your store, starting with a basic plan that costs $49 per month, with a 5.9% commission fee on all sales. #4: Connect To a Shoppable Storefront Have2Have.

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how your business can get more out of LinkedIn? Want to make sure you’re maximizing your LinkedIn presence? LinkedIn has a number of features that will work together to promote your business and its products. In this article you'll discover how to create an integrated LinkedIn marketing presence for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Get on the Map With Company and Showcase Pages If you want to spread awareness for a new product line, create a content hub for company news, publish employee success stories or distribute hiring resources to attract new talent, LinkedIn company and showcase pages can help you align your efforts. Create a Company Page The first step to establishing a LinkedIn presence for your business is to create a company page. Talk to key stakeholders within your company and gather the following materials and information: A high-resolution company logo and cover banner (no larger than 2 MB and 646 x 220 pixels) An approved written company description (up to 2,000 characters) A list of relevant keywords for the company specialty section General company information (industry type, organization size, URL, etc.) You're now ready to set up your company page. On LinkedIn, hover over the Interests tab and select Companies from the drop-down menu. On the right side of the page, look for the Create a Company Page section and click the yellow Create button. You're prompted to enter your name and company email address. LinkedIn will send you a verification email to ensure you're an official representative of your company. After you verify your email address, upload your company logo, cover banner image, company description and other details about your business. When you're finished, click the Publish button. Request Access to an Existing Page If your company already has a company page, you'll want to contact your page administrators to ask for LinkedIn account privileges. If you aren't sure who is responsible for your LinkedIn assets, make sure you've added your work email address to your personal profile. Then go to your company page and look for the Want to Help Manage This Page? section on the right. From here, you can contact page administrators and request moderator privileges. Set Up a Showcase Page Once you've set up your company page, you'll want to create other sections within it to market different company assets. LinkedIn allows you to do this with a feature called Showcase Pages. A showcase page is an extension of your company page and allows you to highlight other business lines, products or services, brands or even upcoming events that your company is hosting. Although showcase pages are directly connected to your company page, think of them as unique entities. They contain their own content, attract their own followers and have exclusive functionality, similar to how you'd share distinct assets on your website. To create a showcase page, go to your company profile, mouse over the Edit drop-down menu and select Create a Showcase Page. You'll then see options to get started. Creating a showcase page is similar to building a company page. However, you can provide more detailed information about a specific area of your business and bolster the visual aspects of your brand with the larger cover photo area. Rather than use your business name as the title, select a page name that both summarizes and sets the expectations for the content you'll publish on your showcase page. Keep in mind that the words you choose for your page name can influence how well your page is discovered through LinkedIn search. Distribute Content on Your Pages After creating a company page and affiliated showcase pages, you're ready to begin promoting and distributing content through these channels. Generally speaking, this is an opportunity to: Share your company branded content. Use white papers,

Influence and Persuasion: New Insights From Robert Cialdini

Influence and Persuasion: New Insights From Robert Cialdini

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to persuade more people to become customers? Wondering what the latest science on influence and persuasion has to say? To discover new ways to prepare people for a sale, I interview Dr. Robert Cialdini, author of Influence and Pre-Suasion. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Robert Cialdini, author of Influence and CEO of Influence at Work, a company that provides speakers and training on behavioral psychology and influence in business. Having sold more than 3 million books, he helped coin marketing phrases such as "social proof" and "scarcity." His latest book is called Pre-Suasion: A Revolutionary Way to Influence and Persuade. Robert explores the science behind influence and persuasion. You'll discover how to put these concepts into action to benefit your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influence and Persuasion Robert's First Book Influence, written in the mid-1980s, shares the most successful strategies that professional influencers use to get people to say yes. It was written for consumers so they could recognize and resist these strategies when used in an unwelcome way. The initial response to the book was so mild that the publisher called back the promotional and publicity funds for promoting the book, Robert recalls. They told him it would be like "throwing money down a pit." What happened to change things? Robert explains that times changed. The idea of evidence-based decision-making began to dominate the business world, and Influence provided a compendium of evidence on what factors influence people. About three or four years after publication, the book skyrocketed to bestseller levels, where it's stayed ever since. There were two sources of information for the book. To see what was especially successful in moving people toward a sale, he looked at research literature from the behavioral sciences, marketing, psychology, communication, management, and other fields. He also looked beyond the research literature and began infiltrating all of the training programs he could get access to in the areas of sales, marketing, recruiting, fundraising, etc. This let him see what the professionals were using to train and he gleaned information from those experiences. While he expected consumers to be the audience for Influence, it was actually embraced by the business community first. They wanted to know, scientifically, which factors incline people toward yes, and how to include those factors in messages, marketing campaigns, and more. The interest in harnessing the most powerful practices and procedures for creating change led Robert to write his new book, Pre-Suasion. It's designed for people who want to become more influential. Listen to the show to discover how I was introduced to Robert's work. Pre-Suasion Robert thinks the ideal audience for Pre-Suasion is people who want to increase the extent to which their messages successfully move people in their direction. While this includes salespeople and marketers, it's also for people who want to be more influential inside their families, network of friends, charity boards, etc. Robert says that while Influence covers what to build into a message to get agreement, Pre-Suasion describes the process of gaining agreement with a message before it's sent. The process may seem like some sort of magic, but it's not. It's established science. The key is to create a state of mind in the recipient's head that's consistent with the forthcoming message.

Becoming Recommended: How to Build a Business Others Love Recommending

Becoming Recommended: How to Build a Business Others Love Recommending

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you rely on word of mouth to promote your business? Are you wondering how to get more people to recommend your product or service? To learn how to build a business that's highly recommended, I interview Paul Rand. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Paul Rand, the CEO of Zócalo Group, an agency that specializes in digital, social and word-of-mouth marketing. He's also the chief digital officer at Ketchum and former president of the Word of Mouth Marketing Association. Paul authored the book, Highly Recommended: Harnessing the Power of Social Media and Word of Mouth to Build Your Brand and Your Business. Paul explores how your business can become highly recommended. You'll discover what motivates recommendations, the importance of targeting the right influencers online and the six steps to getting more positive recommendations for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Build a Highly Recommended Business Know why your customers would recommend your business  Paul tells a story in his book about his first encounter with a popular East Coast grocery chain, Stew Leonard's. He learned about the company over dinner from clients who not only gushed about this beloved retailer, but also insisted on picking him up the next morning to take him to Stew Leonard's so he could marvel at it in person. What an incredible word-of-mouth recommendation! Paul discovered that Stew Leonard's does a great job connecting with people and that they built sociability into their business from the very beginning. He felt like he was truly part of a special experience when he was in the store. There are some fairly consistent things, particularly in the age of social media, that companies should do to take advantage of this level of brand affinity. People love to share. When people discover something that they think might help someone else, they really want to share it. If you can figure out why your customers would recommend your brand, you have great ability to help them to do it. Listen to the show to discover what businesses should consistently do to become highly recommended.  The power of online recommendations Online recommendations have a dramatic influence and a bigger reach than face-to-face recommendations. Word-of-mouth recommendations have always been the Holy Grail for marketers. Social media basically puts that power on steroids. Now when someone says something positive about your brand, that endorsement has the potential for reaching millions of people. Paul describes two types of recommendations: implied or explicit. An explicit recommendation is told directly in person, through a post or from an online review that something is great. An implied recommendation can be as subtle as liking a Facebook page or sharing a post, yet it can be just as powerful and influential, depending on the source. Listen to the show to find out how recommendations, even from complete strangers, can drive people to your product or brand.  What drives recommendations There are many reasons people are eager to accept and offer recommendations. Very simply, we humans take our cues from other humans. If someone tells us a product, brand or service is good and we notice them benefiting from it, we assume it will benefit us as well. However, it's all a matter of influence. Most people have a certain degree of knowledge or passion for a specific topic or interest and tend to make recommendations around it. They often become the go-to person to ask about that particular topic.

Twitter Analytics: How to Know if Your Twitter Marketing Works

Twitter Analytics: How to Know if Your Twitter Marketing Works

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you review your Twitter Analytics? Want to use them to improve your Twitter marketing? Ian Cleary is with us to explore what you can learn from the data provided in Twitter Analytics. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, a social tech expert. His blog, RazorSocial.com, placed in our Top 10 Social Media Blogs four years in a row. He also founded the RazorBlazers Club, a community for marketers who want to monetize with social media. Ian explores how you can use Twitter Analytics to take your Twitter marketing to the next level. You'll discover great third-party analytics tools. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Analytics Core Twitter Analytics on the Home Tab Ian explains that once your account is 14 days old, you can access the free analytics provided by Twitter by going to Analytics.Twitter.com on your desktop. You'll start off with an overview on the Home tab, from which you can drill down to view data on tweets, audiences, video analytics, and more. On the Overview screen, you'll see the total number of impressions for all of your tweets. Impressions are the actual number of people who saw your tweets on their Twitter timeline, by visiting your profile, or in a search. For instance, they may have clicked on a hashtag and your tweet was listed. Ian wonders whether Twitter is able to access all of the information for tweets displayed in third-party tools (Hootsuite, Sprout Social, etc.). He goes on to say that even though the data is never going to be 100% accurate, it will give you a gauge to see if your impressions are going up or down each month. Profile Visits is the total number of people who visited your profile on mobile and desktop combined. This number is important, Ian explains, because when you pin a really good tweet to the top of your Twitter profile, you have an idea of how many people have seen it. For example, if Ian's profile shows 17,000 visits, that means 17,000 people have seen his pinned tweet, which is an opt-in to download a lead generation guide. He uses this tweet to build email subscribers from people visiting his Twitter profile. It's a simple thing, but it's the equivalent of having a big opt-in at the top of your website. Mentions show how often your Twitter username is mentioned on other people's profiles. For example, the number of people who shared your content and mentioned your Twitter name will show up there. While they're not clickable, the mountain graphs you see under each data label give you an idea of whether that data set is increasing or decreasing at a glance. For example, you can see if your impressions are going up or down over the course of the month. Or you can check the Followers graph to see if your audience is growing or diminishing. The Top Tweet section of the Overview screen shows you your best tweet over the last 28 days and the number of impressions and retweets on it. Ian explains that you want to see what your most popular tweets are, so you can turn them into evergreen tweets to share regularly. There's no point in retweeting content that's not resonating with your audience. The Top Mention section shows you when someone else shared a piece of your content and mentioned your name, and it did really well. The Top Follower is your follower who is followed by the most people. If someone with a large following has followed you, and he or she is relevant to your audience, pay attention to and start interacting with that person, Ian suggests.

SEO Course Launch Bonuses End July 2 at Midnight

by Josh @ 321GoProject

You do NOT need to be paying an SEO company monthly to rank well on Google Check out the video below to see the Bonuses you get before July 2 at midnight. A success story already from a client: “With an IT background I thought I had a good handle on SEO, but this is such great information. We already put one of the modules to good use within 24 hours of starting the course!” – Chip Hartford | CrossFit Ironborough This Overview and Bonuses. PS. There is also a three payment option as well to help with your budget.

Good SEO practices for Medium writers

Good SEO practices for Medium writers


Medium Support

PublicationsNaming things can be hard, but is very important for search engine rankings. It applies first and foremost to publications themselves. Whether you chose a name that aims at being a bra...

9 Time-Saving Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Time-Saving Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to spend less time on repetitive social media tasks? Are you looking for tools that let you balance automation with a personal touch? In this article, you'll discover nine tools to help marketers save time while maintaining a human presence on social media. Listen to this article: Relationship-building Tools Just like any relationship, connecting on social media starts with finding the right people and reaching out in a human way. Here are some automation tools to help you do that. #1: Notifier Linking to other people's amazing content not only helps establish your own authority, but is also one of the best ways to make meaningful connections. If you're smart about leveraging those connections, you'll reach out directly every time you include someone else in your own work. With Notifier, simply enter the URL into an article you've published (whether on your own site or as a guest contributor) and the tool will pull out all of the people mentioned in the post, tag them based on their Twitter handles, and queue up those shares via Buffer. Here's what a recent article pulled in. Notifier then lets you select how many mentions you want to include in each share and will schedule them to drip out over a chosen time frame. #2: Leadfeeder Visitors pass through your digital presence every day by browsing on your website, looking at your product or services pages, or maybe even consuming your content, all without submitting their information. This means that most of the time you have no digital record that those visitors even exist (outside of raw Google Analytics traffic counts). Leadfeeder is especially valuable to B2B organizations, because it will connect your onsite Google Analytics with your visitors' off-site social profiles so you can see who's coming to your site, which company they're from, and what they're interested in. Once you've identified your visitors, you can easily assign visitors to a campaign, customize your automated responses based on what they've shown interest in, and then measure the results. #3: Socedo Many marketers overlook the bottom-line benefits of lead generation on social media because they haven't found the right tool to automate prospecting and report key metrics like testing. Similar to Leadfeeder, Socedo is another great tool that helps you zero in on your ideal prospects via Twitter and LinkedIn, so you can collect their profile information and add them to your sales pipeline and CRM. Most notably, Socedo's analytics provide robust reporting that links directly to platforms like HubSpot. This allows you to see exactly how specific campaigns have paid off, both on engagement and ultimate conversions. Having a system in place that treats social leads differently from more heavy-handed email campaigns is vital, especially if you want to stay human. Commerce Tools When it comes to advertising, selling, and customer service on social, things get even more inhuman than merely connecting with new leads. Here are three tools that strike an excellent balance among making the sale, supporting current customers, and being genuinely social. #4: Yotpo User-generated marketing in the form of reviews and recommendations is one of the most powerful purchase drivers online. While many websites feature reviews and testimonials, they drop the ball when it comes to sharing those same golden nuggets natively on social media. Enter Yotpo. Yotpo will incentivize reviews by offering bonuses or coupons to your existing customers. It will collect your reviews in a centralized database for easy access and allow you to instantly "push" your reviews both to your website and your social streams. Take Nest Bedding, for instance. Using Yotpo, Nest Bedding was able to integrate user-generated content into a host of their social selling platforms, most notably Facebook. Why this relentless "customer-centric" focus? Easy. Because,

Content for Leads: How to Create Content That Spreads and Fills the Funnel

Content for Leads: How to Create Content That Spreads and Fills the Funnel

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content? Are you looking to generate more leads? To learn how to get the most from your content, I interview Jason Miller. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jason Miller, the senior manager of content and social at LinkedIn Marketing Solutions. He's the author of Welcome to the Funnel: Proven Tactics to Turn Your Social and Content Marketing Up to 11. Jason is also an excellent photographer specializing in rock bands. Jason focuses on creating sharable content that also generates leads. You'll discover how content ties into influencer relationships and how to leverage it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Leads How Jason got started in content and social Jason worked in the music industry before he decided to reinvent himself in the social space. He tried to bring social to his music label, but they weren't interested. So Jason quit, went back to school for training in SEO and digital marketing. He worked at a little startup called Market Tools, then Marketo and he's now at LinkedIn. Jason talks about his time at Marketo. He led global and content marketing and did the blog and the social channels himself when he first started. It was chaos, he recalls. Jason learned very quickly how to solve other marketers' problems and write about them, which is how he grew his blogging skills. "It was B2B marketing, which could be quite boring," Jason recalls. "I took what I call the George Costanza approach, where I do the exact opposite of what everybody else is doing." For example, if someone said to Jason that social media doesn't work in B2B, he would do the exact opposite and prove them wrong. After a tremendous amount of trial and error to find out what worked and scaling his content efforts, Jason was successful. Listen to the show to hear the backstory for Welcome to the Funnel. Build relationships that tie into content Jason believes it's essential to include influencers in your marketing strategy, especially in your content. When you first start building your presence, seek out thought leaders in the space. Figure out how to take their wisdom and feature it in your content. You'll add third-party validation and keep from talking too much about yourself. At the same time, you also get on their radar. They know you're helping them spread the word and eventually you can find mutual benefit. Listen to the show to learn how going to conferences helped Jason get into guest blogging.  How to create sharable content that generates leads Jason believes we don't need more content, we need more relevant content. He has a concept he started at Marketo and brought over to LinkedIn called, "The Big Rock." Basically you need to ask yourself what conversation you want to own, and then write the book on it. Jason suggests going from thinking like a publisher to actually publishing like a publisher. When Jason first got to LinkedIn, the question was, "How do I market on LinkedIn successfully?" Since the conversation was being owned by others, Jason decided to take it back. He wrote a 65-page book called The Sophisticated Marketer's Guide to LinkedIn. It was everything you wanted to know about marketing on LinkedIn, written very strategically. It was broad-reaching content gated for the purpose of collecting email addresses. It was great for lead generation, bringing people into the funnel, helping out fellow marketers and getting the word out. According to Jason,

How to Grow Your Instagram Exposure

How to Grow Your Instagram Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram to promote your business? Want to increase your exposure? Making a few simple tweaks to your Instagram marketing can generate more engagement and increase the visibility of your content. In this article you'll discover how to get more exposure for your brand on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Embrace the Hashtag Descriptive hashtags on Instagram will help expose your content to more people. This will lead to more engagement and ultimately grow your followers. For anyone who doesn't already know, hashtags are short, descriptive keywords, preceded by the hash sign (#), which enable users to find content they're looking for with a simple click. Relevant hashtags in posts help create a dialogue between your business and other users. There are a number of things you can do with hashtags to get the ball rolling on Instagram. First of all, add hashtags relevant to your industry or niche to every post your business makes on Instagram. Remember, you can use as many hashtags as you want, which will help you attract a wider audience. Note: Research has found even small accounts that use 11 or more hashtags receive an average of 77.6 interactions. So if you're an online retailer specializing in women's clothes, include the hashtag #womensfashion, among others, in your photo description. This will help users find inspiration, as well as help you land more followers, improve brand awareness and increase sales. Plus, spend some time commenting on relevant photos from other Instagram users with a hashtag you're targeting. Your brand will be exposed to users who are already interested in that specific hashtag, which will also help increase followers and engagement. There are a few more things you can do to get the most out of hashtags. First, be as specific as possible when choosing your hashtags. This will help your brand connect with other like-minded users on Instagram. You'll have a much better chance of converting them, since they're highly targeted prospects. Also, be relevant. Make sure you use applicable hashtags on your posts, so people who are interested in what you do are able to find you. Finally, keep your eyes open. Pay attention to which hashtags other users are including on their photos. You may find a new, popular hashtag that will help you reach more people. #2: Engage With Your Community To make the most of your efforts on Instagram, it's vital to spend time engaging with your community and other users on the platform. See what photos and hashtags attract the most comments and likes, and jump on the bandwagon. You can also re-post exceptional images from your followers. Also, determine where people from your target demographic hang out. Find out which accounts they follow and then engage with them. Comment on their photos and like their posts. Remember to add value with your comments and don't be spammy. If you've done your research and interact with the right people, these users are likely to engage with your brand and follow your account. Your brand will also start to show up on their followers' radar. #3: Launch a Contest The prospect of getting something for nothing has always been alluring in the world of marketing. Use the reach and popularity of your Instagram account to host competitions and attract more followers. An Instagram contest is a great way to drum up excitement and get people talking about your brand. Whether you go with a tag, hashtag, like to win, share or other type of promotion, your Instagram contest will certainly be a hit. #4: Build Awareness of Your Instagram Handle Even though this is fairly obvious and straightforward, it's still worth mentioning. The first step in Instagram marketing is to promote your handle to your customers. Then they'll know you have a presence on Instagram and where to find you. There are various ways to spread the word that your business is on Instagram.

Marketing Reboot? Are You Ready to Change?

Marketing Reboot? Are You Ready to Change?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business ready to face the technological and sociological changes that are happening right now? To learn why you need to consider rebooting the way you market in this rapidly changing world, I interview Mitch Joel for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mitch Joel, author of the book Six Pixels of Separation and the podcast with the same name. His newest book is Ctrl Alt Delete: Reboot Your Business. Reboot Your Life. Your Future Depends on It. Mitch shares how technology will change the way we market our businesses in the future. You'll learn the most important trends and how they will impact your marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing Reboot What's the business world going to look like for our young children, when they enter the workforce? Mitch shares how the iPad has only been around for the last three and a half years, and so for us to even think about what life will be like in a decade is unfathomable. He believes that in current business, with the catalyst of technology, we've gone through exponential growth. Mitch says that as human beings we find it difficult to understand this dramatic shift. Since the iPad has come along, it has imploded the PC market. Our children will know nothing but technology. It's changing the lives of people and the state of business. Listen to the show to find out why Mitch questions why anyone would download content and keep it on a hard drive. Why we need a reboot In the preface to Mitch's new book, Ctrl Alt Delete, he says, "during this state of purgatory, many businesses will die and many jobs will disappear, but in the same breadth many businesses will thrive, many new businesses will be created, and many new jobs will be invented." Mitch shares his story of when his agency, Twist Image, first started out in 2000. The idea was to create a modern marketing agency focused on technology and connectivity. You'll discover what type of people they now hire compared to back then and see how the acceleration has kicked in over the last 5 years. As far as education goes, Mitch feels that we're not educating young people properly. He believes that we're not setting up an infrastructure for the world as it exists. As a professional marketer, you'll need to look at how we connect with things, engage with brands and engage in our lives. Mitch explains what he means by reboot and how marketing professionals are not grasping it. They tend to still hold onto the old ways in which they buy, sell, create and engage with media. You'll discover why Mitch believes the book is a wake-up call and why it's not forward-looking. Listen to the show to hear the five movements that have already happened that have shaped business and changed the way we work. How has the seemingly ubiquitous adoption of social media led to the need for businesses and marketers to change? Mitch feels the most important element is the intrinsic connection we now have. For example, when you see two young people shopping in a mall, they aren't just two good prospects for your store—they're more like 1,002 prospects. Young people today have about 500 connections on Facebook, where they chat, share and text. They create a connected society that we've never had before. Mitch feels that social media, a platform of connectivity, has been a major factor. The adoption has been so intense that he's not sure if marketers or even the peopl...

4 Ways to Improve Engagement With Hashtags

4 Ways to Improve Engagement With Hashtags

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you include hashtags in your social media posts? Want more traction from your hashtag campaigns? Adding hashtags to your campaigns can drive engagement with fans and followers, as well as attract new and prospective customers. In this article I'll share four ways to improve reach and engagement with hashtags. Why Hashtags Matter Since social media is social, it's important to participate in conversations on a variety of topics. Listen to this article: However, the virtual world does not give us body language cues, and it may be difficult to keep track of everything that's going on. This is especially important when it comes to interacting with hundreds or even thousands of people on social media. Instead of pleasant and engaging conversation, all you hear is noise. Hashtags help cut through all the noise. They connect your business with your audience and put it at the heart of conversations on social networks like Twitter, Instagram, Google+ and Facebook. #1: Align Hashtags With Your Brand Use a hashtag that aligns with your brand to reinforce the message your social, digital and traditional marketing send to your customers. Kit-Kat, the company behind the popular chocolate snack, does this particularly well. They use the hashtag #mybreak, which is in concert with their wider branding message, "Have a break, have a Kit-Kat." Kit-Kat's social media team reinforces the use of #mybreak. They favorite and retweet the social media posts of customers who use the hashtag. This engagement not only helps develop the relationship between Kit-Kat and their customers, but also more broadly extends the reach of the hashtag and Kit-Kat's branding. #2: Choose Hashtags Carefully In social media and in life, there's always the chance things won't work out exactly as planned. Your hashtag could possibly be hijacked, either by another brand or by activists with an axe to grind. Kit-Kat's #mybreak hashtag is unlikely to get hijacked. It's on-brand, and there's not a lot of online activism aimed at chocolate-wrapped wafers. When airline Qantas launched the hashtag #QantasLuxury, they hoped their business and first-class flyers would post about their dream luxury experience. Instead, the hashtag was hijacked by the far larger group of disgruntled Qantas passengers who fly economy class. Give each hashtag strong consideration before deploying it in a tweet or a post. Reflect with your team and colleagues, and ask advice from friends active on social networks about potential hashtags. While you can consider best-case scenarios (like Qantas envisioned), also be sure to consider potential worst-case situations. Choose a hashtag with the least risk of hijacking, so you can avoid a potential social media crisis. #3: Take Your Hashtag Offline Don't limit your business hashtags to only social media. It's important to use them as part of a wider branding strategy that includes offline and traditional media. For Coca-Cola’s 2015 Super Bowl campaign, the company launched the related hashtag #MakeItHappy. The hashtag populated the company's social media feeds on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram and YouTube. Plus, it appeared in television and print advertising, as well as in earned media online. Increase traction for your hashtag by using it away from your social networks. Small businesses can make it easy for their customers to share positive reviews and social comments about their experiences by encouraging the use of a hashtag. If you have a brick-and-mortar location, make sure your hashtag is displayed prominently near the point of sale, on your promotional flyers, print ads and every receipt. Online businesses should create clickable hashtags, encourage visitors to 'click to tweet' text including the hashtag and prominently display the hashtag on the company home page. Whether it's a physical or a digital business, the advice is the same.

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to communicate with your customers via Facebook Messenger? Wondering how Facebook Messenger bots and Messenger ads can help? To explore this topic, I interview Molly Pittman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Molly Pittman, the vice president of marketing at DigitalMarketer. She specializes in customer acquisition and teaches regularly for DigitalMarketer Engage, which is the company's membership community. You'll discover how businesses can benefit from integrating Facebook Messenger features into their marketing. Molly shares use cases for Facebook Messenger marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Messenger Marketing Why Consider Messenger Ads? As soon as Facebook Messenger ads became available in November 2016, Molly started experimenting with them. Molly says she's excited about Facebook Messenger ads because they're not just a new interface element or feature. Facebook Messenger ads are a whole new channel. Molly believes the value of Facebook Messenger ads lies in the app's popularity and convenience. More than one billion people communicate via Facebook Messenger. Because that's where people are having conversations with friends, family, colleagues, or whomever, Molly believes businesses should be connecting with their customers via Facebook Messenger, too. The app's popularity makes Facebook Messenger a good place to buy ads, connect with prospects, and talk to customers. Molly says that DigitalMarketer's initial tests have shown good results. The open rate and consumption are really high. Molly has seen the benefit from the consumer's standpoint, too. A few months ago, as Molly was driving in Austin, she saw a new apartment complex being built. Molly was interested, so she went to the company's Facebook page and contacted them through their Message Us button. They responded almost instantaneously. Every step of her communication with the company was done through Facebook Messenger. I ask Molly if she believes Facebook Messenger will replace email. Molly responds that email will likely always be a powerful tool for marketers, certainly for the next five years. However, she says Facebook Messenger isn't necessarily a replacement but is the mode of communication most similar to email. In some aspects, Messenger is better than email, she continues, because people tend to respond instantaneously on Messenger, whereas people don't feel compelled to respond to emails right away. Listen to the show to hear Molly and I discuss our predictions for the future of Facebook Messenger. The Types of Messenger Ads Molly explains the two types of Facebook Messenger ads. The first one is called a destination ad because when you set it up, you choose Facebook Messenger as the destination (as opposed to your website). Like a regular ad, a destination ad appears in the news feed and can display a video, carousel, or image. When someone clicks the ad, a message to your Facebook page opens in Facebook Messenger and you can begin a conversation. For example, the first test Molly ran was a simple destination ad that said, "Do you have questions about how DigitalMarketer can help grow your business? We'd love to chat." When someone clicked the ad, a Facebook Messenger window opened where the person could type his or her message to DigitalMarketer. Molly says you can target anyone with destination ads, such as your custom audiences and interests. The opportunities are endless. The other type is a sponsored message, which is more like an email.

[Announcement] SEOPressor’s New Website SEO Checker Is Now Live!

by Azfar Hisham @ SEOPressor – WordPress SEO Plugin

For the last 4 weeks, the SEOPressor Team have been working on a super-secret project and now, it’s ready to be unveiled! We are proud to present the latest addition to our online SEO tools – Website SEO Checker by SEOPressor. The Website SEO Checker represents the next step of evolution for the future of SEOPressor’s SEO solutions so allow me to explain it. What Is Website SEO Checker? The Website SEO Checker is a ...

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to connect with local customers on Pinterest? Wondering how to drive foot traffic with Pinterest? Pinterest offers local businesses a way to cultivate relationships with prospects and customers who are primed to walk through your door. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to market a local business. Listen to this article: #1: Find Out What Likely Customers Are Interested In Before you do anything on Pinterest, spend some time on the platform studying the people you want to reach. You likely have an idea of who your target audience is. Are they the same people you're hoping to reach on Pinterest? Find out what your target audience is doing on Pinterest, who they follow, and what kinds of things they're pinning. Start by browsing the categories on Pinterest. Click to the right of the search box to open the drop-down category list. Click through the categories that are most relevant to your business and check out related topics. From here, you can start to see where your content and business might fit in on Pinterest. Try searching for related words in the Pinterest search bar. Pinterest's Guided Search will show you the most commonly searched words and phrases with your search term. You can also click through to the most popular pinners and pins and boards from that search term. This is a great place to find your target customers, and learn what kind of content your target customers value and how they share it. #2: Create Keyword-Friendly Boards and Profiles Now that you've identified popular topics and keywords for your target audience, you can begin building your profile. You've likely discovered some popular topics that are related to your industry. Use the interest topics you've identified for your boards. For example, if you're a hair salon, "Hair styles DIY," "Curly hair tips," and "Prom styles" might be good boards for your business. Your Pinterest profile is a perfect place to embed your keywords. This will help you get discovered on Pinterest and also on Google. Add keywords to your profile name, profile description, board titles, and board descriptions. #3: Fill Your Boards With Informative Content People come to Pinterest looking for things to learn and to buy. Now that you know what your audience finds interesting, consider what informative content you can share on your boards. This is the type of content that will get more repins and help you reach more people. Create some boards that are related to your local community. For example, if you're a restaurant, create a board to share events that are taking place in your area. If you're a vet, you could share educational content related to health and care for animals, popular pet products, and favorite places to take pets in the surrounding area. Informative content will help you extend your reach. In addition to curating that content from others, you should also create your own content. Think about what customers need to know in order to value the service you provide. What kind of customer education is needed in your industry? Create simple graphics to explain a point or a new regulation. Even for non-designers, it's easy to create informative and engaging infographics with online tools. You might also write an explainer article or create a video to show how something gets done. Share your content on Pinterest as a vertical pin. Pins perform best at 600 x 1200 (or more) pixels. Remember to write an information-rich caption to get more engagement. #4: Drive Foot Traffic and Click-throughs With Rich Pins Pinterest rich pins allow you to embed information from your website that is updated dynamically to encourage customer conversions. Here are some rich pins that might be helpful for your local business: Use article pins if you have a blog or create blog content. When you create article pins, the headline, author, and story description will automatically be pul...

Search Engine Optimization Albuquerque | SEO Firm - Google Help

Search Engine Optimization Albuquerque | SEO Firm - Google Help


Simply Design

We see SEO differently. We optimize for more than just Search Engine Optimization, we make your website a tool that will grow your business and out-perform your competitors.

Starting a YouTube Channel: How to Achieve YouTube Growth

Starting a YouTube Channel: How to Achieve YouTube Growth

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a YouTube channel? Want to optimize it to get more subscribers? To explore how to build and grow a YouTube channel, I interview Tim Schmoyer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tim Schmoyer, founder of Video Creators, a YouTube channel and website that helps people grow their YouTube subscribers. With 10 years experience, millions of video views, and more than 200,000 YouTube subscribers, Tim is the world's leading expert on building YouTube channels. Tim explores what you need to know to build a successful YouTube channel. You'll discover how to customize your channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting a YouTube Channel Your YouTube Channel Approach Tim says if you aren't trying to grow a community, have no need for subscribers or conversions, and only want to share your videos with your family, then posting anything and everything is fine. However, if you want to build a brand around your video content to grow subscribers, views, sales, conversions, etc., then you need a more focused approach. A channel, Tim explains, is another word for your YouTube account. It's where your videos reside. For example, Tim's videos are on YouTube.com/videocreators, and when people are looking for his videos, they know that's where to find them. A YouTube channel can be focused on a topic, but it doesn't have to be, Tim says. It could also revolve around a belief, a person, etc. He stresses that your YouTube channel should be very specific to target a specific group of people and deliver a very specific value. Listen to the show to discover who comprises the demographic on YouTube. Common Mistakes People make three big mistakes on YouTube. First, many feel like they need a high-end production team and fancy equipment. Tim says you can grow a very successful channel with basic equipment. Your smartphone may be sufficient, depending on the type of content you want to make, the audience you want to reach, and the image you want to present for your brand. Start with what you have, and possibly invest in a lens for your camera and an external microphone to clip into your phone. Sometimes, a full production studio works against you, because the people have a different content focus and expect higher quality. YouTube viewers, on the other hand, are very forgiving of a shaky handcam if the value of the content is high. Second, people don't pay enough attention to the titles and thumbnails of their videos. Most of your YouTube traffic will come from related videos, suggested by YouTube, when users are viewing other content; an enticing title and thumbnail drive those clicks. Tim says a lot of the top YouTube creators he knows spend just as much time, if not more, developing their title and thumbnail than they spend on the actual content. Start with your title and thumbnail in mind before you start shooting the video. This enables you to capture the thumbnail you need. For example, a video about how to look better on stage needs a thumbnail that portrays that; it could be as simple as a picture of a crowd of people with a spotlight on the main focal point on stage. If you shoot the video first and figure out the title later, the opening may not quite connect to the title until two and a half minutes into the video. The third mistake people make is taking too long to hook viewers. Tim says that when someone clicks your video, you have 15 seconds maximum to relate to the title and thumbnail. That way, viewers feel like they're getting the value they were e...

Selling With Story: How to Make Your Customer the Hero

Selling With Story: How to Make Your Customer the Hero

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you know what your customers really want? Want to discover how to share the solution they want and need in terms they understand? To explore how to connect with your customers through story, I interview Donald Miller. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Donald Miller, a story for business expert. He's CEO of StoryBrand, which helps businesses clarify messaging via workshops and consulting. Donald also hosts the Building a Story Brand podcast. Donald has helped more than 1,000 businesses improve their messaging. Donald explores how story is used to sell, and today you'll discover Donald's seven-part story framework. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Selling With Story Donald's Story Donald had a successful career writing memoirs. Before that, he ran a publishing company. Essentially, his business background got hijacked by his writing career. When he went back into business, he started a conference company. Although he sold millions of memoirs, not many people attended his conferences. Donald figured out the conference invitation was too vague. His message was not pointed, understandable, or accessible. It didn't hit a perceived need, so nobody could figure out why they should come. Donald needed to simplify his message so people would say, "I need that. I'm going to show up. I'm going to buy it." To do that, Donald created a framework based on the elements of story. Since he studied story to write books and screenplays for more than a decade, he knew story was the most powerful tool to compel the human brain. He took the seven most popular elements in every story, the seven things that happen in Tommy Boy, Star Wars, Bridget Jones's Diary, The Hunger Games, Moneyball, and The King's Speech, and put it all on a whiteboard. Donald discovered how to filter his marketing messages through this seven-part framework. Applying this framework, the conference grew from 350 people to 970 people to 1,200 people to 2,000, through word of mouth. People finally understood what he had to offer, Donald says. This evolved into StoryBrand. They let the conference company go because StoryBrand took off from there. Donald has worked with more than 2,000 companies, helping them clarify their message. They all struggle with the same thing. They don't know how to talk about what they do, since they're too close to it. Story is based on 2,000-year-old formulas that have been refined over time, Donald explains. And story is tested every week at the box office. Story, like music, is formulaic. The difference between music and noise is formula. Since story is such a powerful tool, Donald realized it's useful to clarify marketing messages. There's no benefit to a business getting its story out. Customers only care about their own stories. StoryBrand helps people understand the story that their customer is living and what role their business needs to play within that story. Listen to the show to discover which companies and people use story and get responses. Why Story Is Powerful Why is story so powerful? Donald says that's a question that people like Christopher Booker, Robert McKee, and Joseph Campbell have all tried to answer. Donald thinks story comes from within. People self-identify as the hero in a story that's trying to accomplish something and overcome challenges. People believe intuitively that some things come together that would create a climactic or obligatory scene that will resolve the conflict in their life. These are well-worn paths in the human subconscious.

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for a better way to manage your social activities? Are you wondering what tools can help your social media marketing? To discover free or low-cost tools to simplify your social media marketing, I interview Ian Cleary for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, the founder of Razor Social—a blog dedicated to social media tools. He's also the social media tools writer for Social Media Examiner. Ian shares why as a marketer you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data. You'll learn the services available to keep up to date with relevant content and the tools to use to monitor your overall activities across all social channels. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Tools How did you become interested in social media tools? Ian explains how his history working for software companies and his very strong technology background led him to social media. When he started to look at all of the key influencers around social media, he soon realized the social media tools niche was perfect because nobody owned that space. Listen to the show to hear how Ian is amazed by the number of tools in development. Why you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data Ian states that although Google Analytics is useful, it doesn't track things such as what's happening on social media related to Twitter or LinkedIn. And the Facebook analytics tool is a little too complicated for many people. One free tool that Ian recommends is LikeAlyzer, which is a very simple Facebook analytics tool. It evaluates your Facebook Page and will give you a score out of 100. You'll then receive some basic recommendations on what to improve. Listen to the show to find out what other amazing recommendations it will reveal. Tools to help marketers keep up with news and content they may want to share Ian explains why there is a lot of activity in this area. The two tools that Ian likes to use on a day-to-day basis are Feedly and Scoop.it. Feedly is a website that allows you to read a selection of posts from any blogs you subscribe to. When you log in, you will see the latest posts. It has a really nice user interface. You can access the content through the web and your mobile device. It also integrates with Buffer app. You'll discover how this can help you with your social media workflow. Another advantage of Feedly is you can group the sites you subscribe to. You'll hear Ian explain the benefits of this and how he groups his. The integration of Feedly and Buffer saves marketers a lot of time. Another tool to help you discover content is Scoop.it. You can follow people on Scoop.it to find relevant content. You can then add this content to one of your boards. It's not only a great way to find content, but also for others to help create it for you. Scoop.it is similar to Feedly in terms of the collection of content, except it's based around people who pick the content for you. You'll discover how to find the right people to follow and the most popular boards around your niche. Ian shares what replacement he uses for Digg and why it's a good source of content. Ian uses a tool within Facebook called Post Planner. It shows you trending content and what's been shared the most. You can then select content and add it to your Facebook Page. Listen to the show to hear about how LinkedIn has invited authorities to bl...

Facebook News Feed: How to Respond to Facebook Changes

Facebook News Feed: How to Respond to Facebook Changes

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to promote your business? Are you curious how to respond to the recent changes to the Facebook news feed? To learn how to navigate these important changes to Facebook's news feed, I interview Mari Smith, the "Queen of Facebook." More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, who is the world's leading Facebook marketing authority. She's authored the books, The New Relationship Marketing and Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. This is her fourth appearance on the show! Mari explores what you need to know about marketing with Facebook, and in particular the news feed. You'll discover the importance of native links, why micro-video should be key to your Facebook posting strategy and how Atlas will change the way you do online advertising. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook News Feed What marketers need to think about this next year when it comes to Facebook marketing Mari shares that over the next year, marketers will have to embrace the idea of paid amplified posts. According to Mari, most businesses on Facebook will have to bite the bullet and allocate dollars to paid posts this coming year. Mari shares that another Facebook trend is the push for micro-video and user-generated content. You'll hear more about this in the show. The next big consideration is connecting with your mobile users. With 75% of Facebook users accessing the site from mobile devices, your content must be effective on a mobile feed and able to direct people to a mobile-friendly landing page. Listen to the show to find out why community managers are more important than ever to your Facebook marketing strategy.  Review your posting strategy With Facebook clearly giving preferential visibility to consumers rather than brands, marketers now have to rethink their posting strategy. Especially with all of the latest updates to the news feed. Mari explains that some of the changes have been around links, and as marketers we are all about the images. In the past we have been told that posts with photos get the best visibility in the news feed. Mari explains that marketers have tried all kinds of clever ways to circumvent the news feed ranking algorithm. When you wanted to include a link in your post, you could use an image and include the link in the description. Now what Facebook calls native link posts give you a bigger image preview on your posts. You type or paste a link into your publisher on your page or profile, and it automatically generates a preview with a large image. You'll hear the huge advantages of this type of post, and why you need to consider it for your posting strategy. Listen to the show to find out why Mari recommends you change up your posting strategy to integrate more links. How Facebook's Save feature works and its advantages At the end of July 2014, Facebook introduced a new Save feature, which lets you to save items found on Facebook to check out later when you have more time. Available on both mobile and desktop, the Save feature was initially only meant for native link posts, but Facebook quietly upgraded it to allow any post with a link, video, photo or status update to be saved. Even if a post has multiple links in it, you can save all of the links at once with this tool. Mari recommends that you remind your fans from time to time of how to save and retrieve their saved items. Although publishers don't have access to the metrics right now, Mari's educated guess is that this feature might ultimately have value and give priority...

How to Create Facebook Ads With Emails: 5 Creative Ideas

How to Create Facebook Ads With Emails: 5 Creative Ideas

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have an email list? Are you looking for creative ways to use Facebook ads? With Facebook custom audiences, you can reach your email subscribers with relevant Facebook ads. In this article I'll share five ways to target your email subscribers with Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Serve Ads to All Email Subscribers Since it requires no email list segmentation, the best way to get started is to target all your email subscribers. Simply upload your entire email list right into Facebook as a custom audience. The key is to create a unified message across different channels: email to Facebook to website. Target this audience if you're looking to reach your entire list to get the news out about a big event or a storewide sale, where the message is the same for everyone. Make sure your Facebook ad has a similar look and message or offer as your emails. Amazon uses this tactic to remind customers about their Deal of the Day. The idea is to share engaging content, so your email audience will help spread your message by interacting with your ads, acting as brand ambassadors. Since this audience is already familiar with your brand, analyze engagement metrics (likes, shares, comments) to measure the effectiveness of these ads. Their interaction validates how well the ad resonates with them, which results in a higher relevancy score, more social proof and free organic reach. #2: Target Ad Delivery by Opens and Unopens To employ these next few tactics, it's important you are able to segment your email subscriber list into audiences for remarketing. First, divide your email list into people who have opened your email and those who have not. Then, further segment the open list into those who did and did not take action. Target Subscribers Who Opened Your Email Create a Facebook ad that looks similar to the email you sent for those who only read your email. You want to get this audience to take action, so change up the messages with the ad. For instance, if the goal of the email was to get white paper downloads, then offer the same white paper in your Facebook ad, but write a message or ad copy that differs from your email. If you're an ecommerce store trying to get your customers to take advantage of a weekly 20%-off deal, show subscribers an ad that highlights the promotion and encourages them to take action. Sierra Trading Post created a Facebook offer with the same deal as their email. With this custom audience, exclude people who have already purchased or downloaded an offer. Target Subscribers Who Didn't Open Your Email For the subscribers who didn't even open your email, wait a few days and then target them with a Facebook ad. Since they haven't read the email, show them the same message. This helps your company stay in front of your audience. #3: Segment Subscribers by Purchase If you have an ecommerce website, a great way to increase the lifetime value of a customer is to cross-promote and/or upsell related products. Amazon does this brilliantly. The website is always showing their shoppers similar products, bundled products or other products previous customers bought. Their goal is to get people to buy more products that are relevant to what they are viewing. Utilize Facebook carousel ads to highlight multiple products that provide additional value for previous customers. Show products that fit with items they've already purchased. So if they bought dog treats, then show them dog food or dog toys. Look for creative ways to divide your audience for the purpose of upselling or cross-promoting other products they would find useful. Depending on your business goals, consider segmenting your customers by type of products, purchase amount, purchase date and frequency of purchases. Then target a carousel ad to each audience. #4: Reach Out to Disengaged Audiences Do you have a list of people who haven't opened your emails in quit...

3 Practical Steps To Increase Your Page Authority

by Joanne Chong @ SEOPressor – WordPress SEO Plugin

Odds are, you’re implementing a number of different inbound marketing strategies in order to achieve your online marketing goals, from various content marketing strategies to social media strategies – and of course, the use of SEO. But knowing how these strategies are performing is essential to ensuring that you achieve your goals and to making sure you aren’t wasting resources on efforts that don’t work. You can get an overall idea of how your site ...

8 Ways to Generate Leads With Your Blog

8 Ways to Generate Leads With Your Blog

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your blog generating leads for your business? Are you looking for ideas? Offering a suitable and relevant reward in return for people's contact information is a great way to generate business leads. In this article you'll discover eight ways to generate leads with your blog. Why Lead Generators? A lead generator (or lead magnet) is something you offer to your blog visitors in the hope that they'll exchange their contact information (email, address, zip code, etc.) in return for access to whatever it is you're providing. Once you have that contact information, you can use it to target those people with ads on platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. Listen to this article: Your free offer needs to be something prospects are genuinely interested in so they'll want to give you their information. The most effective incentives are uniquely tailored to your target audience's needs and objectives, and provide instant gratification. Here are some examples of lead magnets to consider for your business blog. #1: Offer Guides or Personalized Reports One way to collect leads is to offer a free guide or report, and then let people download it after filling out a form. You can also automatically send the guide or report via email. The freebie should provide practical value and advice to your target audience. Tarot offers a horoscope and cosmic profile report for visitors who fill out a form on the company's website. In addition to the visitors' names and email addresses, the form also asks for their birth date to automatically generate the personalized report. By signing up, visitors can get personalized and insightful horoscopes. These detailed reports provide greater value to Tarot's audience than the free generic daily readings available on the website. Online advertising company WordStream offers websites a free analysis and benchmarking report in exchange for their email address. WordStream can also use these reports to offer products and services to prospects as a way to improve their scores. #2: Grant Exclusive Access Another way to generate leads is to offer visitors access to a valuable resource that will improve something in their life, such as productivity, performance or ideation. Fitocracy is both an app and online platform that caters to people with health and fitness goals. They've built a community around a mobile application that features a fitness tracker and offers a huge fitness library with exercise videos and how-to articles. Access is free if people sign up and become members. Once they're members, they can hire fitness coaches to help meet their personal goals and connect with fitness-minded individuals just like a social network. #3: Recommend Relevant Newsletters This lead magnet is similar to free guides and reports. The difference is the time frame in which the offer is of value to the audience. You can provide more long-term value to your audience by emailing them digital handouts or newsletter updates on a periodic basis. If people fill out the above form, the Digital Photography School will send them weekly photography tips and tutorials via email. The site realizes they should make it easy for people to sign up by asking only for their email address. #4: Hold Webinars Another lead magnet is to hold free online seminars (webinars) about topics that matter to your target audience. Use this opportunity to ask for information from all of your attendees who are likely to be interested in your other offerings. Here, Amy Porterfield offers a free webinar in exchange for visitors providing their name and email address in a signup form. This webinar targets businesses that are new to Facebook and provides information to help them get up and running on the platform. #5: Make Perks Available If you have an online shopping website, consider offering free shipping and exclusive discounts as a way to generate leads.

How to Create a Fan Content Campaign in 7 Easy Steps

How to Create a Fan Content Campaign in 7 Easy Steps

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you considered collaborating with your fans? Do you know how to create a user-generated content campaign? When you include fans, you not only increase brand awareness and reach, but also collect great content that can be repurposed to achieve other business goals. In this article you'll discover how to run a successful user-generated content campaign for your business in seven steps. Listen to this article: Why Fan Content? Social media and smartphones have made it easy for customers to create high-quality content and distribute it to their personal networks. In many ways, social sharing has become modern-day word-of-mouth marketing. Every time customers share a photo of your products or services, your brand receives a mark of social validation. These posts serve as online endorsements that are interpreted as objective and authentic. Contests and campaigns are among the most effective ways to encourage fans to post photos and videos about your brand. Why? Interactive social campaigns give your customers an explicit reason to upload and share great content with their social followings. In turn, their followers will engage with this content and your brand's organic reach will grow. Here's how to run a social campaign to generate great fan content for your brand. #1: Find or Create an Evergreen Hashtag To track the content that your customers will post online, you need to create an evergreen hashtag that represents your brand as a whole. It can be anything from #yourbrandname (#Nike, for example) to #missionstatement (#JustDoIt). Even if you haven't promoted a brand hashtag, your customers may have created one for you. Once you've created or identified your hashtag, make sure that it's highly visible. Display it in your social posts, in your email signatures, on package inserts and on your website. The goal is to make it easy for customers to discover your hashtag and interact with your brand. Here, One Kings Lane has placed their branded hashtag, #MyOKLstyle, on a package insert that encourages customers to share their post-purchase experience online. #2: Map Campaign Goals to Business Goals After you've established your evergreen hashtag, outline what you want your social campaign to accomplish. Why are you asking customers to post and share photos of your products or services online? The goal of your campaign can be anything. Decide whether you want to increase followers on Instagram, generate more leads, increase sales or simply collect more usable content for your brand. What's important is to find your focus and identify how your social campaign will help you achieve your business goals. Country Club Prep wanted to augment their brand lifestyle by using customer photos to represent their preppy style. Using the hashtag #PrepInABox, the company created a customer photo gallery on their website to showcase how their products are worn by everyday people. #3: Choose Social Networks Now that you've laid the foundation for your campaign, you need to decide which social platforms to use for conducting your collection and outreach. Remember that the channels you choose should reflect your target audience. The best place to reach potential customers is on the platforms that they're already active on. Don't know where to start? Here's a breakdown of the demographics for each social network. Decide what network is the best fit for your target audience and start asking customers to submit content to your campaign. #4: Reward Loyal Customers Offering prizes, free product samples, discounts or even public recognition is a great way to boost participation in your campaign. These are all strong incentives to get your customers posting. To spark conversation around your social campaign online, it's important to recognize your most loyal customers. Thank them for being brand advocates and delight them with prizes and discounts.

Online Publishing: Lessons From Five Years at Social Media Examiner

Online Publishing: Lessons From Five Years at Social Media Examiner

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever wondered how Social Media Examiner started? Do you want to know the strategy behind this large online publishing platform? For this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast I'll share how we built Social Media Examiner into what it is today. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode you'll discover the business strategy behind Social Media Examiner, how we built a larger following and how it has been monetized over the years. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things I'll share with you in this show: Online Publishing Social Media Examiner back in 2009 In the beginning, I gave it 3 years. First of all, it was a great experiment. I didn't even know if someone like me, who knew absolutely nothing about social media, could even start a blog and become a leader in this space. I actually call Social Media Examiner an online magazine. In 2008/2009, when I was exploring this idea, I did notice that not a lot of people were talking about the "how" of social media. It was more about "What's wrong with social media?" or "Why should I consider social media?" It was the "how" stuff that was really popular. One of the first things I noticed was that the articles detailing the how-to stuff were going crazy-viral on social. You'll hear two examples of articles that I wrote for Copyblogger and Marketing Profs. Those articles turned out to be two of the most popular articles written on those sites. It was the response to those two articles that drove me to start Social Media Examiner almost 5 years ago to the day. Little did I know then that a million+ people a month would consume our content today. It's hard to believe that it's been 5 years. Listen to the show to find out the type of approach I took when it came to writing the articles for Copyblogger and Marketing Profs. Where the idea for Social Media Examiner came from It all started when I contacted Ann Handley, chief content officer at Marketing Profs, to ask if she wanted to connect on LinkedIn. Her response was, "Are you on Facebook?" At that time I thought Facebook was just for college students. This was probably in 2008 or early 2009. So I opened a Facebook account, and started to notice that there was a whole new community of people, not just students, who were having a great time on there. This opened my eyes to what could possibly happen. It was where it all started, I guess. Every idea has a genesis point, if you will, and that genesis moment was when Ann said, "How about Facebook?" Listen to the show to discover how the name Social Media Examiner came about. The business strategy behind growing Social Media Examiner Before the launch of Social Media Examiner, I put together an online event under my White Paper Source brand. I called the event Social Media Success Summit. This was to see if a segment of my White Paper Source audience would be interested in social. This month is actually our 6th annual Social Media Success Summit. The success of this first summit made me decide to run the idea of Social Media Examiner by several of the presenters. The first summit included Mari Smith, Denise Wakeman and Chris Garrett, who all helped me put on this online conference. The idea behind Social Media Examiner was for me to write one article a week. Then I would recruit the others mentioned above to write one article a week. So the plan was to have a spread and hopefully be able to publish on the site three times a week. This group originally did not think it was a good idea.

About Local SEO | How Can Local SEO Services Help Your Business?

About Local SEO | How Can Local SEO Services Help Your Business?


BrightLocal

Learn all about Local SEO in this quick guide. What is local search optimization & how can it help your business gain more visibility online?

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your social media audience losing interest? Do you want to tap into your followers' emotions? Using psychology to connect with your target audience is a powerful way to engage and motivate them to take action. In this article you'll discover five psychology principles you can use to improve your social media marketing results. Listen to this article: #1: People Prefer Stories to Stats In Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die, authors Chip and Dan Heath share research that reveals we're more likely to donate when we hear the story of an individual in need rather than data about an entire impoverished area. Even though a region's suffering has a larger impact than that of an individual, the individual's story is appealing because we have an emotional response when hearing the experiences of others, not statistics and abstract information. To apply this principle to your social media marketing, tell a story to reach your audience emotionally. Guinness does this well through their marketing campaigns. Rather than spout information or simply show a scene, this ad takes the viewer through a complicated situation that gradually unfolds to reveal the outcome. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rx0MRawkrj4 Ads like this one follow the "show, don't tell" principle. They lead audience members through a story they need to interpret for themselves based on the actions of the characters. Your social media content can impress your audience and be more memorable if you share a personal experience; whether it's your own or someone else's. By creating a journey with a resolution, you can make an emotional impact on your viewers. #2: Personal Benefits Generate Interest Expressing how people can benefit from your product or service will help you increase engagement on social media. Taco Bell's Twitter account socially engages its audience with its witty and interactive tweets. Most importantly, the people behind the account understand what makes people tick. Take a look at this popular tweet. Who wouldn't like a free meal? Imagine what people are thinking as they watch the World Series. They're likely hoping someone steals a base with the promise of free breakfast from Taco Bell. This keeps the brand at the top of its audience members' minds. Of course, you don't have to give everyone in the country a free breakfast to garner attention. There are other effective methods to let people know what you or your product can do for them. Taco Bell's strategy shows that captivating the audience begins with thinking about what they want, first and foremost. Apple famously focused on the consumer when Steve Jobs described the iPod as "1,000 songs in your pocket." Now imagine if he had described the features instead: high storage and smooth texture. People would probably be thinking, "So what? How does this apply to me?" httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6SUJNspeux8 The next time you share something about your brand on social media, explain or show why it will make a difference in people's lives. #3: Social Proof From Peers Increases Trust These days, reviews and testimonials on products and services are available at the click of a button. Consider a 2008 study that involved hanging public-service messages on residents' doors, asking them to use fans instead of air conditioning. Results found that telling a group that 77% of their neighbors were using fans was more effective than mentioning residents could save $54 a month. What our peers do, impacts our decision-making. Crate and Barrel's website invites customers to leave reviews for products and gives them the option of uploading a picture. Pictures help other potential customers visualize how the product would look in a home setting. There are a number of ways to create social proof; show Facebook likes and post testimonials to tell your audience about how popular your product is.

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you rely on your computer for business? Is your computer and data secure? To learn more about ways to protect yourself and your business, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn different ways to protect your data and make sure your business is back up and running very quickly if you were ever to lose it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Computer Security Why secure your computer? There are two main reasons to secure your computer. Peace of mind. If your hard drive was to crash or you had your computer stolen, you need to know that it doesn't spell the end of your business. It allows you to sleep at night. Theft and a hard drive crash are almost the same outcomes. Peace of mind is a big deal. Business continuity. You don't want the loss of your computer to be the end to their business. This is why it's essential to implement security measures. The good news about a lot of this stuff is, it's set and forget. It only takes a small amount of your time, and in certain cases some financial investment, to know that you will be able to continue to operate no matter what happens to your computer. Recently I received a phone call from my office informing me that my two iMacs had been stolen. When the police arrived we were informed that another office within the same building had also been targeted. The alarm system was set, it hadn't been disarmed and even the motion sensors hadn't been triggered. They broke through the office window, taking the computers with them. You'll hear the reason why my office was vulnerable. In total I lost about a day and a half of my time and you'll discover how I got back online within 5 hours. I thought I would share my story with you and hopefully you'll be able to take some notes from it. Here are 9 tips to protect yourself from losing your data. #1: Set-up a remote backup I highly recommend that you have a remote back-up plan in place. I use CrashPlan and for approximately $60 a year have unlimited back-up capabilities. Listen to the show to hear how CrashPlan works and the different account levels they offer. #2: Back-up to an external hard drive You have to make sure that your hard drive is external from your computer. If you put yourself in the minds of the thief, they want to make a quick buck. They don't really care about your hard drive, just your computer. An external hard drive is critical. In my case they left the hard drive behind and I was able to plug it into my new computer. It was the key to everything. For the iMac they have got a really cool thing called Time Machine. Make sure you store your external hard drive somewhere out of sight. Remember the thieves unplug all the cables and just take the computer. Listen to the show to hear how Time Machine works similar to CrashPlan, and how it can get you back up and running very quickly. #3: Secure your browser passwords You should make sure you have a password to log onto your computer. A password can be a deterrent, although when someone does steal your computer, they are likely to reformat the hard drive, rather than try to figure out the password. Make sure you also password protect your web browser. This is really important because we access our banking accounts, merchant systems, blogging tools, email etc from within a web browser. Everything seems to live out in the cloud these days.

Purpose: How People Over Profit Leads to Business Opportunity

Purpose: How People Over Profit Leads to Business Opportunity

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a purpose beyond making money? Want to discover how shifting your business priorities can make a huge difference? To learn how focusing on purpose and people leads to powerful marketing, I interview Dale Partridge. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dale Partridge, the founder of Sevenly (a company that couples t-shirts and causes) and a start-up expert. He blogs over at TheDailyPositive.com, founded StartupCamp.com and he has a podcast by the same name. Dale's latest book is People Over Profit: Break the System, Live With Purpose, Be More Successful. In this episode we'll explore how Dale combines purpose and social to create success. You'll discover the business system you need to break in order to be more successful, as well as social media tips to drive traffic for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Purpose Dale's story Dale always thought he was going to be a professional baseball player. When he broke his arm the summer between high school and college, his dreams fell apart. As a baseball pitcher, Dale felt pitchers know how to lead the team, so he decided to create a business. Dale started a fitness company, which grew rapidly but was unsatisfying. So he sold the business. After that he worked in the stock market for a while, before raising money and opening a rock-climbing gym. Dale thought things were going well until he got pulled into the yoga room by one of his business partners and was fired from his own company for being a "horrible leader." Dale changed. He explains how for a few years he went on a frenzy starting companies before hitting a wall. Dale realized chasing profits wasn't putting meaning in his soul. He wanted to figure out how to blend purpose and profit, and this was the beginning of Sevenly. He was 25. "I said, 'let's create a company where every week, we partner with a new charity,'" Dale recalls. "We would create products like shirts and hats and beanies and jackets, and any time somebody bought one of our products, we would give $7 to the charity that week. So if we sold 1,000 products, we'd give that charity $7,000." Sevenly sold 800 products the first week. A few months later, they grew to 10 employees, then 20 employees, and two years later, 45 employees. Sevenly launched on June 13, 2013. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=neHwgakQcGI Dale explains that seeing money not as the primary goal, but as a byproduct of helping a million people, was the shift. He got lost in something that was so much fun and literally changing the world. Sevenly has raised $4.2 million in $7 donations. Listen to the show to learn about the "aha" moment that set Dale on this path. The system businesses need to break Dale explains the cycle of companies. They often start with a cycle of honesty and move into an era of efficiency. When companies get big, they go from people over profit to people and profit, and become addicted to more. They start confusing being bigger with being better, he adds. What often comes after the efficient era is what Dale calls the deceptive era. This is when businesspeople start to lose their soul and forget why they started the company. At that point they either go out of business, or those who stick around enter the final apologetic era. That's where they earn back consumers' trust, and go back into the honest cycle. For example, Domino's Pizza was one of the worst companies in the world in the 1990s. They released a documentary called The Pizza Turnaround in...

Facebook Video Retargeting for Live Video and Beyond

Facebook Video Retargeting for Live Video and Beyond

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos on Facebook? Have you tried retargeting your live and uploaded videos? To explore techniques for retargeting your videos, I interview Amanda Bond. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amanda Bond, who's known as the "Ad Strategist" specializing in Facebook ads. Amanda also advises top social pros and has taught the ADdicted Facebook Ads course. Online, she's known simply as Bond. Amanda explores Facebook video ads and retargeting. You'll discover how to use Amanda's technique to warm up your Facebook followers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Video Retargeting for Live Video and Beyond Amanda's Story Before Amanda started working in social media marketing, she worked with big brands such as Pepsi and Labatt. As a salesperson for Pepsi, she went door to door to compete with Coke. After she sent two truckloads of Pepsi to a store for a large sale, Coke sent three. Looking over 110 pallets of pop, Amanda realized that the impact she was having in her sales role wasn't aligned with where she wanted to show up in the world. To move forward, Amanda decided to give back through her local Rotary service club. As the club's youngest member, she was encouraged to become their social media manager. When Amanda started working with her Rotary club in 2013, social media marketing felt like magic. Talking to people on the Internet seemed to create relationships out of thin air. However, Amanda quickly learned the impact of social when she used social media marketing for a live local Rotary event. To promote the event, the Rotary club used traditional marketing such as ads in the newspaper, and Amanda used everything she'd been learning about social media marketing. Throughout the weekend, the club expected 4,000 people to attend, but 23,000 people actually came, largely due to social media. That was Amanda's impetus to change direction in her career and she became a social media manager. As she became more versed in Facebook ads, she found that being an ad strategist was a great niche for her as a math and data nerd. Amanda now teaches and helps other businesses behind the scenes. She loves doing the deep dives into the data, helping people see the story the numbers are telling. Listen to the show to hear about Social Media Examiner's role in Amanda's early social media marketing efforts. What Retargeting Means The words retargeting and remarketing are interchangeable. Most people know about retargeting through the Facebook pixel, which is a tiny code snippet you add to your website. When someone lands on a page with this code, the Facebook pixel sends a message back to Facebook, saying something important is happening. Facebook has opened up new ways to retarget people (or show them content or ads based on prior actions), including video retargeting. Because Facebook has been emphasizing live video and video in the news feed, Amanda is especially excited about these video retargeting features. Anytime somebody sees at least three seconds of a video (recorded or live), Facebook takes note of who they are and puts them into a retargeting custom audience that you can use to retarget them again and again. I ask why you would want to retarget someone who watched a Facebook video. Amanda says it's part of getting people to know, like, and trust your brand. You want to start nurturing conversations that may lead to a sales transaction. As the Ad Strategist, she calls this framework "Connect, Convert, Close." In that connection phase, your audience may be cold (they may not know or have heard of you),

SEO: when cheap is not so cheap (and even risky)

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Hiring a cheap SEO service provider can be very tempting. Many cash-strapped businesses have to cut costs and a cheap SEO service seems to be a good solution. What could go wrong? Unfortunately, a lot!

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your business? Wondering how to best leverage your videos on Facebook? To explore Facebook video strategy, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, a digital marketing and social media strategist. He authored Hug Your Haters, a book about social care, and also hosts the Social Pros Podcast and the Jay Today show. Jay discusses the differences between video on Facebook and YouTube. You'll discover the tech and tools Jay uses to produce his own videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Video for Marketers Facebook Versus YouTube Jay says a lot of people do very well with YouTube videos, and just as many do well with Facebook videos. However, not too many people do equally well with both because each platform has a specific use case. People watch YouTube as a replacement for television entertainment or they're searching for how-to videos. On Facebook, videos appear in the news feed and can interrupt people while they're on the platform. At Convince & Convert, Jay says they advise clients to think about what the video is and under what circumstances people will want to watch it. Based on that assessment, choose one of the platforms as the primary home for the video. I mention how views of The Last Jedi trailer on Facebook far surpassed views on YouTube within the first 30 minutes of its release. Jay responds by noting a few factors that might have contributed to that difference at that particular point in time. One is that Facebook allows users to share content with others easily. Also, Facebook defines a "view" differently than YouTube. Although we both suspect most viewers of The Last Jedi are watching the whole trailer, marketers should remember that Facebook counts 3 seconds as a view, whereas YouTube requires 30 seconds. Also, a video on Facebook may receive substantially more views immediately after it's posted but the YouTube video may receive more views in the long run, especially on a strong YouTube channel. To clarify how The Last Jedi example pertains to the everyday marketer, Jay stresses that Facebook drives exposure based on engagement. So if you put a video on Facebook and a disproportionate number of people like, comment, and share, then a disproportionate number of people will see the video in their feed. This visibility gives even more Facebook users an opportunity to share the video with somebody else, and the cycle continues. Jay sees this ripple effect every time he posts a video on Facebook. If he gets immediate engagement, then more people see it. If he doesn't, users' engagement with the video will plateau. Next we talk about streaming live video to Facebook versus YouTube. For vlogging, Jay says that you could use both Facebook and YouTube. Jay does something like this with his Jay Today show. He streams the live video first on his personal Facebook profile and posts the video file elsewhere afterward. Jay explains that Facebook's API prevents you from live-streaming anywhere else while you're streaming to Facebook Live. To stream to Facebook Live, Periscope, and YouTube Live simultaneously, you would need multiple phones or computers. That limitation is one reason Jay goes to Facebook Live first; he can't be anywhere else. He also notes that on YouTube (for now at least), you need to have 1,000 or more subscribers to stream live video from a mobile device. So YouTube's live video feature isn't as widely accessible as Facebook's. Listen to the show to hear Jay discuss his approach t...

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you responsible for reporting your social media results? Do you need to develop a reporting system? Knowing who you report to and what metrics they need will help you streamline the process and ensure you're delivering reports on time. In this article you'll discover how to develop a social media reporting system for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Stakeholders and Goals The first step is to do a quick audit of your current reporting process and find out which stakeholders receive your reports. If you know whom you're reporting to and why, you can ensure your reports will be useful to everyone involved. Find out who receives the social media data in your organization. You may send reports to one person, but that person may then forward them on to others. Also, different teams have different needs. For example, a PR team may have different expectations than a community management team. Next, discover what actions your reports support so you don't waste time reporting on metrics no one uses. Talk to the people you report to, find out their needs (and wants) and see what you can learn about the current state of your social media reporting. You'll likely find some overlapping goals and be able to identify areas of commonality. If you're the sole owner and consumer of social media reporting in your company, identify what you need to know about your performance and what you'll do with this information. Try to distill it to a few clear goals, which will make everything easier in later steps. #2: Decide What Metrics to Track When deciding what to include in your reports, find metrics you can use in multiple situations and have some business benefit for your stakeholders. Just because you can report on something doesn't mean you should. And the more metrics you include in your reports now, the more metrics you'll have to keep supporting in the future. Here's an overview of the metrics that really matter: Reach or exposure: Measure the size of your potential audience. Volume: Track the conversation size and number of brand mentions. Engagement: Analyze the quantity and type of engagement your accounts and posts get. Audience: Learn who participates in a conversation, along with the most active users and influencers. Content: Monitor your top-performing (and worst-performing) posts. The metrics you use will depend on your needs and the social networks you're measuring, but these core concepts are a great start. In addition to the general metrics above, you'll probably have a few specific needs or requests from stakeholders you need to support. That's great, because the more relevant and targeted your reports, the more useful they'll be for your business. However, avoid creating custom metrics or anything you'll need to calculate manually, unless they're really important. You'll likely regret this later. It can take a long time to handcraft special calculations, especially if you're not entirely sure how you did it the last time. Above all, be consistent. Make sure you're reporting the same metrics in the same way each time. Add in percentage changes and other benchmarks to make it easy for your audience to interpret the results. #3: Choose the Right Tools There are many social media measurement and analytics tools you can choose from. However, only a few tools will help you get the precise information you need. Keep in mind that no tool is going to be exactly what you're looking for. There are so many ways to analyze social media that every tool has a different perspective. Plus, social data is far from perfect and the kind of information that you can pull from a particular social media channel will vary depending on the channel. However, there is a product out there for you. Ask these questions when you're researching a new tool: Where does it get its social data? What kind of relationship does it have with the social ne...

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Wondering if content marketing will help move the needle? To discover what it takes to build a content-driven business, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute, author of the book Epic Content Marketing and the founder of Content Marketing World, the leading conference for content marketers. Joe's latest book is Content Inc.: How Entrepreneurs Use Content to Build Massive Audiences and Create Radically Successful Businesses. Joe will explore how you can build a sustainable small business with smart content marketing. You'll discover the six steps to take to create a content business in any niche. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Business When and why Joe started the Content Marketing Institute Joe shares how he got into the content marketing industry. He was vice president of custom media (also known as content marketing) at business publishing company Penton Media until 2007. At Penton, Joe and his team helped advertisers who wanted to do something unique tell their stories. For example, if a company like Microsoft wanted to tell a story to an executive audience, Joe and his team would help them create an ongoing newsletter, a magazine, blog series or webinar series. Joe did that for seven years. Joe left Penton at the end of March 2007 and wrote his first blog post titled "Why Content Marketing?" on April 26, 2007. That led up to Joe launching Junta42, which he says was basically the eHarmony for content marketing. The idea was to match brand sites that wanted to outsource some portion of the content process (creation or distribution) with agencies that would pay for the service to get the leads. Joe explains how in 2008, with no money, no paid distribution and about 2,000 subscribers, he decided it was time to build relationships with influencers. He started a research project called The Top 100 Content Marketing Blogs. (I was on the list first for White Papers and then Social Media Examiner.) He notified everybody who was on the list, and it just took off. Fast-forward to 2009, Joe shares, the model was working and they matched up about 1,000 projects. However, they were still having trouble getting companies to pay for a subscription to the service, even though they were driving leads to them. After his best case study (they sent a $1 million+ customer to an agency, and the agency decided not to renew their subscription), it finally hit Joe that this business was not going to work. Although Joe was "in love with his product," he finally figured out the key was to fall in love with your audience and focus on their needs and pain points. His audience was asking for training, education, consulting and speaking. They weren't even ready for a matching service, because they didn't even know how to create a content marketing strategy. Joe pivoted to the education and training concept and launched Content Marketing Institute six months later. That was May 2010. "At that moment we said we were going to create the leading online destination for content marketing, the leading magazine and the leading event," Joe recalls. "And within two years we were able to do that." Listen to the show to hear how Joe and I first connected, as well as the similarities between our projects. Why now is the time to get into a content-driven business Content Inc. is Joe's fourth book. The other three are content marketing–related and f...

How to Snuff Out SEO Scams Targeting Gyms

by Josh @ SEO Help – 321GoProject

Community Building: How to Grow With the Power of People

Community Building: How to Grow With the Power of People

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have an active community? Would you like to build a community to support your business? To explore these topics, I interview John Jantsch for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview John Jantsch, founder of Duct Tape Marketing and author of several books including The Commitment Engine. John shares insights into how content and community connect. You'll learn what to focus your efforts on and a few simple tactics that work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Community-Building John explains how building a loyal community can make or break your business. People are drawn to you over time if you provide good, valuable and authentic information. Listen to the show to hear the example John shares of a woman who created a community before starting a business. What is community?  John shares how we have always had community. The concept of community is based on how people gather around shared interests or location to give and take mutually. This has not always applied to business. A lot of the communities in place today have grown through social media. These tools not only allow communities to connect face to face, but also to connect much faster on deeper levels. Social media allows people to gather regardless of geography into a community of shared ideas. Listen to the show to hear a great example of a company that has a huge online community. How community-building has changed John shares how people are now tired of being drawn into a sales funnel with free stuff that's a "crippled version" of the upsell. Although these tactics worked a few years ago, today it's different. John explains how some of the best marketers are now offering free stuff that is better than what others charge for. Community-building is about building trust and conveying authenticity. John explains how people now want to participate in a community and draw value from it. A percentage of people will ask how they can go deeper into the community. It's now more of a "platform approach" than a ploy to lead customers in. Listen to the show to hear how Evernote's content is being created by their community. How to build a committed community John talks about how communities form around an idea that's worth sharing. You need to have a unique point of view that is different from everyone else's. Start to bring people together and learn everything you can about them. You should aim to provide content that people want to receive and talk about. Listen to the show to hear how you can find the opportunity to build a community. What makes a "hero" community member? John explains that when thinking of building a community, we should look at "Whom do you want to see you as a hero?" You'll learn how this can help you create a successful community. You need to decide the higher purpose that your business can serve and have your customers' best interests in mind. Getting your customers and community involved in creating content is a really powerful way to generate loyalty and create more value for your community. Listen to the show to hear the advantages of having superstar community members. How content and community connect John shares the 5 types of content that every business and community need to create: Content that builds trust Content that educates User-generated content Other people's content Content that converts

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to supercharge your social media efforts? Have you considered native ads? Native ads not only help build your social followers and boost social engagement, they also drive high-quality consumers to your branded content. In this article you'll discover what native ads are and how to integrate them into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: What Are Native Ads? The Content Marketing Institute defines native advertising as paid marketing that delivers useful, interesting and targeted information to your audience in a form that looks like the site's native, or non-ad, content. The different forms that native ads can take vary greatly. They can be Google paid search results, promoted listings on Twitter, sponsored updates on LinkedIn, Facebook promoted or sponsored posts or even articles on sites like Forbes, BuzzFeed, The Huffington Post and The New York Times. Native ads can also appear as content-recommendation engines at the end of articles. Here's how to start integrating native ads into your social media marketing. #1: Define Your Goal Whatever the form, native ads offer many potential benefits to your business. Joe Pulizzi of the Content Marketing Institute says native ads can help you build brand awareness and trust, plus help bring subscribers to your content. And keep in mind that your content doesn't always have to be new. Native ads can be a great way to attract new audiences to previously published posts. Additional benefits of native ads include SEO and social proof. Promoted posts on a strong social media site get your message in front of a larger audience and can drive traffic back to your website or blog. Native ads can be especially helpful if you have a new site and haven't had time to build up strong SEO. Unlike other forms of digital marketing such as banner ads, native ads on social media can collect social proof such as likes, comments and shares. This increases the credibility of your message and viral opportunities for your brand. More awareness can equal more authority in the form of links and social signals, which can produce better rankings. Native ads can also help you build social media audiences. A sponsored post on Facebook or Twitter can attract new users to follow you, and sponsored stories can grow likes and followers, but only when the content resonates with users. A sponsored post with little organic traction will do poorly. Promote social media content that is already popular for further exposure to a wider audience. #2: Develop Quality Ad Content To get the most from your native ad investment, focus on creating content that is helpful and interesting, attracts attention and provides value. And fight the urge to sell. Additionally, Zoe Robinson of Add3 suggests these best practices for native ads: Publish the content that the ad is promoting on your own site. If your article features an infographic, chart or graph, be sure it appears on your site first with its own URL. Include a call to action that links to your blog or other social channels. Quality content is key. Go beyond marketing and break down departmental silos to leverage the expertise of others in your company. Create content your audience will find less disruptive and more engaging through segmentation with tools like geo-targeting, demographics and interests. Zoe also recommends measuring metrics beyond traditional click-through rates. Consider metrics such as brand affinity or purchase intent to determine native ad success. #3: Use Native Ad Targeting PR software and services company Cision suggests targeting sponsored content to Facebook users who are already customers or lookalike audiences that share characteristics with existing fans. You can also retarget native ads to people who have come to your website to view a product or service or deliver native ads based on search interest.

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage a Facebook page for your business? Interested in ways to improve your marketing? In addition to the Facebook features you use for business every day, there are some handy ones you may have overlooked. In this article you'll discover five lesser known Facebook Page features for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Free Images for Ads When creating a Facebook ad, you can choose from a searchable database of thousands of free stock images from within the Facebook image library. This takes an extra step out of the ad creation process. This image library is powered by Shutterstock, but there's one important caveat: Not all of the images meet Facebook's advertising guidelines. For this reason, it's important to familiarize yourself with the guidelines and choose your images carefully. You don't want your ads getting rejected over some minor technicality such as the 20% text rule on ad images. #2: Ad Relevance Scores The ad relevance score is basically Facebook's answer to Google's quality score for AdWords. The relevance score guides how often your Facebook ad will be displayed and how much you'll pay for each ad engagement. Facebook considers a lot of different factors when calculating your relevance score, including positive and negative feedback via video views, clicks, comments, likes and other ad interactions. If people report your ad or tell Facebook they don't want to see it anymore, those actions count against you. Keeping an eye on your ad relevance score can help you determine if your ad needs work. Oddly enough, this setting is unchecked by default. To enable ad relevance scoring, open the ad or ad set in your Ads Manager and navigate to Customize Columns. From the list of available columns, find and select the Relevance Score check box. Enabling this option adds a Relevance Score column to your ads reports so you can keep an eye on this metric. #3: Email Contact Import A great way to grow your audience is to invite the people in your email address book to like your Facebook business page. To do that, go to your Facebook business page, click on the ellipsis (…) button (next to the Share button on your cover image) and then select Invite Email Contacts from the drop-down menu. Next, you see a pop-up box that lists all of the different integration options you can use to import your contacts. Identify the contact list you want to import and click the Invite Contacts link to the right. After you upload your list, a dialog box appears where you can select which contacts to invite. You have the option to select individual contacts or the group as a whole. After you select your contacts, click Preview Invitation. On the next page, review the invitation, select the check box that you're authorized to send invitations and click Send. There are a couple of points to keep in mind when sending invitations. You can upload up to 5,000 contacts per day, so if you have large customer or subscriber lists, you'll have to send invitations in batches. Remember, your page may already be suggested to your contacts who use Facebook, so you can decide whether to email them as well. If you're already showing up in their recommended pages, it's just free advertising for you. #4: Facebook Post Scheduling The ability to schedule Facebook posts is pretty handy, especially if you're using promoted posts. The good news is that you don't need Hootsuite or Buffer to do it. You can schedule future posts right in Facebook. You can even backdate posts so that they appear earlier in your timeline. To access this feature, go the Publishing Tools tab, select Scheduled Posts and click the Create button. Compose your post and then select Schedule from the Publish drop-down menu. Select the date and time to schedule your post. When you're finished, click Schedule. Scheduling posts can be especially useful for larger teams where you have different ...

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more engagement on your social channels? Have you considered using visual content? There are easy-to-use tools and tactics you can use to create visual content that attracts viewers and engages them. In this article you’ll discover how to use visual content to boost engagement. Listen to this article: #1: Create Animated GIFs From YouTube Video Millennials (people reaching young adulthood around the year 2000) are known as Generation GIF. If you check out publications like BuzzFeed, Gawker and Deadspin or browse the front pages of Reddit and Tumblr, you'll see animated GIFs are everywhere. Animated GIFs expand your marketing channels and increase the chances of your content going viral on Tumblr and Reddit. And from there, content is often picked up by major publications and blogs. There are tools that make it easy to create animated GIFs. Here are a couple you might want to try: MakeaGif is a free online tool that lets you create animated GIFs using photos, YouTube videos, uploaded videos and web camera videos. You can also use it to modify an existing GIF. GIFYT allows you to create high-quality GIFs from YouTube videos. With this free tool, you can select what portion of the video to turn into the GIF and add a caption. You can check out some of the GIFs created with GIFYT here. #2: Install On-Hover Sharing Buttons Sometimes readers are inclined to share an image, but they either don't know how or simply forget to do so. A mild mouseover call to action that encourages a share will prompt more visual shares from viewers. Use a plugin like WWM Social Share On Image Hover as an easy way to enable mouseover sharing (Here's how to securely install Wordpress plugins!) With this tool, you can automatically place buttons on all of your images so your viewers can share them in an instant. It's a surprisingly effective way to increase engagement. Here’s a page where you can see mouseover share buttons in action, and here are more plugins that add image-sharing options on mouseover. #3: Play on Emotion Connecting with your audience on an emotional level leaves a long-lasting impact. When something sparks an emotional response, the viewer is more likely to share, comment on and remember it. Visuals are great for this purpose. Humans respond to what they see, more so than any other form of stimulation. If you're connecting emotionally with users, they'll start to associate those feelings with your brand. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2K5trQS3JeA According to Fractl research, the two most engaging emotions (in terms of provoking shares) are positive feelings (such as joy, interest, anticipation and trust) and the element of surprise. #4: Celebrate Unusual Holidays From National Hamburger Day to National Book Lovers' Day, unusual holidays are hard to resist. They're also an awesome source of visual content inspiration. There's an idea for a cool image to create almost daily. Coca-Cola does a great job of using unusual holidays in their social media marketing. They published these images of cute animals to celebrate National Polar Bear Day. To find holidays and observances, you can check these useful lists of unusual holidays and days of the year for inspiration. #5: Ask Viewers to Contribute You don't have to use your own visuals to capture your viewers' attention. Flip the script and ask your viewers to contribute their images. People love seeing their work promoted by a brand, and it makes them feel appreciated and special. On your social channels, ask viewers to submit designs, logos, photographs, drawings or anything else uniquely suited to your product. Facebook, Instagram and Pinterest are fantastic platforms for this style of campaign. Here are two easy-to-implement visual contest ideas to engage your audience and create more visual context around your brand. Caption Contests Publish an interesting image and ask your reader...

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how your business can benefit from Pinterest? To learn some creative ways to use Pinterest to help your business, I interview Cynthia Sanchez for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cynthia Sanchez, host of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast. She freely admits that she's addicted to Pinterest. It's changed her life in a major way and now she helps other businesses figure out how to tap into this growing network. Cynthia shares how you can use Pinterest for market research and how to get your content seen by more people. You'll learn about some of the most popular trends on Pinterest and how to create attention-grabbing images. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest for Business How did Pinterest grab you? When Cynthia was practicing as an oncology nurse, part of her work was to develop a program called Navigation. The role involved a lot of teaching and reaching out. At the end of 2011, she joined Pinterest to find information not only for herself, but also her patients. It started to take over her life unlike any other social media platform. She had the entrepreneurial spirit, but in the medical world, the opportunities are very limited. In February 2012, Cynthia launched her blog Oh So Pinteresting. It evolved from personal use to more business use. A local company noticed she knew a lot about Pinterest and approached her for help. The business grew from there and she said goodbye to the nursing world. The reason Cynthia started with a blog first was because it seemed less technologically daunting. She used WordPress for her self-hosted site. The podcast started a year later when the time seemed right. You'll discover what type of people Cynthia interviews for her podcast and the areas discussed, with Pinterest being such a visual platform. Listen to the show to find out the reaction to Cynthia's blog at the New Media Expo. How people use Pinterest for market research Cynthia says there are a lot of ways you can use Pinterest for market research. If you already have a presence on Pinterest, take a look at the people who follow your account. You can click on the number of followers you have to see a list pop up with all of the people who follow you. From this, you'll see if you have a predominant age group or gender following you. You have to remember that Pinterest is an international type of service. When you click through your followers, you can see the other boards they're following. You'll find out what you can learn when you click through and how this can help you with some ideas for your business. There are a few other things to look out for within a Pinterest account, which include people's location and if they link up to their other social networks. You'll learn what benefits there are to people having their Twitter account linked to their Pinterest account. Cynthia shares the benefits of a free analytic service called PinLeague. The difference with PinLeague and Pinterest's own analytics service is that you can see who your most influential followers are. You'll learn what you can gain when you dig deep into their accounts. Listen to the show to find out other ways you can check out your competitors and how it can help guide your Pinterest activity. Some of the more popular trends on Pinterest Cynthia believes that the most important thing overall,

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach local customers on social media? Are you monitoring the online conversations near your business? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools help businesses engage with customers who are close to their brick-and-mortar stores. In this article I'll share six location-based monitoring tools to use for local social media marketing. Why Use Location-Based Monitoring Tools? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools are different from the conventional keyword-based monitoring tools in many respects. For one thing, these tools offer a clear picture of what's happening at a particular location, which helps you reach out to local audiences. Plus, they allow you to connect better with your community by engaging with local social media influencers and leveraging local hashtags. Listen to this article: If you do social media for a company with multiple locations, here are some excellent tools to explore. #1: Search Real-time Feeds With Geofeedia Geofeedia allows you to search real-time social feeds by location to discover geolocation social media posts from anywhere worldwide. You also have the ability to monitor multiple locations to archive, curate and share your content. Simply draw a custom perimeter or enter an address on Geofeedia's digital map. It will then display all social content posted by users in that particular area. While the tool searches by location first, you also have the ability to filter your search by keywords, date, time, users and more, across various social media channels including Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Flickr and YouTube. Discover what's trending in an area. Then leverage those trends by including the right keywords and hashtags into your social conversations. Geofeedia offers custom social media monitoring solutions for different industries. The pricing depends on the features you require, as well as the number of locations you want to monitor. #2: Engage and Target Customers With WeLink If you're looking for a cutting-edge social monitoring tool for geo-specificity, WeLink is an excellent option. It lets you engage your potential customers with targeted ads and instant offers on their preferred social media channels. This easy-to-use tool combines keyword-based monitoring with geo-specific listening to offer enterprise-grade location-based social monitoring solutions. The result is a hybrid solution, which uses cellular data mining and WiFi to help you discover and collect all social chatter within your selected area. Gather feeds from all popular social channels using this tool. Use WeLink across various verticals including event management, retail, malls, airlines, hospitality, sports teams and stadiums, schools, security and law enforcement, etc. WeLink offers custom pricing, depending on the features you require. #3: Listen to Trends With Sysomos Sysomos enables you to listen to what's trending locally and understand what your customers are talking about. Use this location-based tool to discover and dig into social content posted by local influencers. Sysomos will gather digital content from popular social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Google+ and LinkedIn, as well as posts on blogs and forums. It then collects and displays insightful actionable data in a single platform. Filter digital conversations by both keywords and demographic information. This makes Sysomos particularly beneficial if you're targeting customers within a specific age group or gender, for instance. Discover which topics, trends and brands particularly interest your target audience, and then create marketing campaigns based around these areas. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N2DpsHXh5rY Sysomos differs from other location-based social media tools in many ways. For one thing, it collects both real-time and previously posted content on any topic across social networks. Plus, you have the ability to capture the conversations most r...

Pinterest Tactics: How to Grow Your Pinterest Following and Your Traffic

Pinterest Tactics: How to Grow Your Pinterest Following and Your Traffic

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post on Pinterest? Want to shake up your strategy? To discover what, how, and when to post on Pinterest, I interview Jeff Sieh. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jeff Sieh, founder of ManlyPinterestTips.com and host of the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast. Jeff also oversees Social Media Examiner's Pinterest account. Jeff will explore proven tactics to grow your following and your website traffic with Pinterest. You'll discover what's new with Pinterest, including promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Tactics What's new with Pinterest After about a year and a half of testing, the do-it-yourself option for promoted pins (Pinterest's ad product) is now available to all small businesses in the United States. Features include a bulk editor, so you can add a lot of pins at once, and more forms of targeting. For example, there were only 30 possible interests to target when promoting a pin, and now there are 420; instead of targeting someone interested in men's clothing, you can be as specific as men's shoes. Pinterest also added keyword targeting, so you can combine interest and keyword targeting. It's a great way to find a specific audience when you promote a product or blog post. Promoted pins are just like regular pins, only you pay to have them seen by more people. They perform just as well as, if not better than, organic pins. The promoted pins in your feed are based on your interests and activity on Pinterest. They also take some off-site data, collected for Pinterest's ad partners. In your home feed, you will see suggested for you or sponsored by pins. If you don't want to see something, tap the X beside it and click on Hide this Pin. Pinterest uses that feedback to make sure you see relevant, promoted pins in the future. More people see your promoted pins. Plus, you get an extra 20% boost, because you only pay for the first click. For instance, let's say Jeff promotes a pin that points back to his website, and you click on it and repin it. Then, someone else pins it from your board to their account. Jeff does not pay for the secondary repins. He only pays for that first one. When I asked Jeff about entry level price points, he says he thinks you have to start with at least $1 a day. Jeff has seen results by spending $5 a day, and believes it's worth testing, especially with the new targeting features, to see how much traffic you can get to your website. Pinterest also has customer targeting, which allows you to upload your email addresses. This is called matching, and is currently only available to Pinterest's Developer Partners. If you have a store with a newsletter that's already driving traffic, you'll be able to upload that list to Pinterest and send promoted pins to that specific audience. They are rolling it out, along with the promoted pins, now. Listen to the show to learn when they opened up promoted pins for everyone in the United States. Social Media Examiner's Pinterest plan for third-party content Jeff explains how on Social Media Examiner he starts by finding good, third-party content (posts that we don't publish on our website) on marketing and social media to share with our audience. He uses Feedly to gather articles on Facebook's breaking news and other top websites, and goes there once a day to review the posts. When Jeff finds an interesting article, he clicks the link to make sure it's quality content and a fit for our audience. He then checks for a good, pinnable image; one that is engaging and also has a text overl...

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to understand the science behind why people share? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn the reasons why people widely share content, I interview Jonah Berger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jonah Berger, author of The New York Times bestseller, Contagious: Why Things Catch On. He's also a marketing professor at the Wharton School and columnist for BusinessWeek. Jonah shares the reasons behind why people engage with word of mouth and why marketers should pay attention to this. You'll learn about the 6 principles that drive people to share. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why People Share How Jonah become fascinated by the reasons people engage in word of mouth As a scientist, Jonah thought it would be interesting to study why things go viral or why certain stories circulate around the water cooler. He grew up studying math, chemistry, computer science and material science and thought it would be interesting to apply these hard science tools to social science problems. It was after reading the book The Tipping Point that he was inspired to think about these things and soon realized there hadn't been a lot of research done on the subject. Listen to the show to find out why he spent his academic career trying to study these things and bottle the phenomena. Why social media marketers should pay attention Jonah starts with how a lot can be done with social media and that there are tons of content out there already from many brands and organizations. Some content does better, but it's not about luck and it's not random. Jonah and his team spent a decade doing research to try to understand why people share word of mouth. With the 6 principles they discovered, you can make it more likely for your own posts to be contagious. People will share them and pass them onto others. You'll find out what the research entailed and how it led to the discovery of the psychological drivers behind sharing. Word of mouth can be over 10 times as effective as traditional advertising. People trust word of mouth more. It's also more targeted than traditional advertising. Plus it's cost-effective, if you can get it to work. It doesn't cost you anything to get people to talk about your brand. However, it requires you to understand why they are talking about some things rather than others. Following the rigorous academic research, Jonah decided to write the book Contagious to help people apply the insights, so their products and ideas could take off. Jonah explains how when the science was applied to a number of different companies to increase word of mouth in a given campaign, there was an increase of 20-50%. You can definitely guarantee more views and more shares when you follow the 6 principles. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to help activate your existing customers and get them to spread that message to more potential new customers. The 6 principles in Contagious Jonah gives the high-level of each principle, which is called the STEPPS framework. These 6 principles drive people to talk and share. Social currency Triggers Emotion Public Practical value Stories These steps are based on psychology. It's about being able to understand the motivation or the drivers that cause us to pass things on. Some people wonder if you need all 6 principles for it to work.

SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study

by Amy Gesenhues @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to use the new Website Audit tool in SEOprofiler

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

The new Website Audit tool in SEOprofiler offers many powerful features that will help you to get better rankings for your web pages on Google and other search engines. Here's how to use it.

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have comments enabled on your blog? Have you ever turned them off? To discover why big bloggers turned their comment systems back on, I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. Michael is author of Platform and co-author of the new book, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want. He's also an avid blogger at MichaelHyatt.com and host of the This Is Your Life podcast. Brian is CEO of Rainmaker Digital, founder of Copyblogger, host of the Unemployable podcast, and evangelist for the Rainmaker Platform. Back in May 2014, I had Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald (who was with Huffington Post) on the show to talk about the trend of big blogs shutting down their comments. This was spurred by a controversial post from Copyblogger entitled, "Why We’re Removing Comments on Copyblogger" from March 2014. In January 2015, Michael Hyatt published, "I’ve Pulled Comments from My Blog-Here’s Why." Michael and Brian will explore why the initial decision to remove comments was made and why those comments are now back. You'll also discover tips for how to grow your email list. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments Revisited Why Brian shut down comments Brian starts by saying he is not the one who made the decision to shut down or bring back blog comments. He left that up to his editorial team. On Copyblogger, a lot of the article feedback shifted to social media, while the product development feedback had moved over to their customer base. As you mature as a company, you really start listening to your existing customers, as opposed to those "out in the wild," Brian explains. At the time, they had 150,000 customers and their strategy was to pay more attention to them. Part of the decision to remove comments (not discussed in the post by Sonia Simone, who ultimately made the decision with input from the editorial team) was a situation Brian calls the six-month class of current commenters. When you publish a marketing blog, other marketers use commenting as a traffic strategy. You'd have six months of the same people showing up, leaving comments: some stupid, some thoughtful. Then they'd move on and a new group of people would come into the comments. The practical reasons for removing comments were the shift to social and to eliminate spam. It's a big deal to moderate comments and have the editorial team spend a significant amount of time trying to figure out whether something is spam or legitimate. Copyblogger's experiment to remove comments lasted for over a year. Listen to the show to learn why Brian left comments on their podcast network, Rainmaker.fm. Why Michael shut down comments Michael says his reasons for shutting down comments on his blog were similar to Brian's. Additionally, Michael noticed the number of comments per post had been going down for some time, so he decided to do a little research. He discovered that in 2011, he averaged about 195 comments per blog post. Then in 2012, while his traffic went up, his comments dropped to an average of 179. Traffic went up again in 2013, and the average number of comments went down to 114. In 2014 blog traffic was up 74% over the previous year, but the average number of comments had dropped down to about 62 per post. Michael adds he read Greg McKeown's book, Essentialism, and thought he had to pare stuff back. The final straw for Michael, who was and is using Disqus as his commenting platform,

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to position yourself as an industry expert? Have you considered using video to increase your visibility? Using video to give your own take on news and stories that are relevant to your industry can help you build influence with peers, prospects, and customers. In this article, you'll discover how to use video to deliver value to your followers on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Gather Relevant News and Stories With the proliferation of news aggregation tools, you can easily select, filter, and digest stories, videos, and content from around the world. To collect curated content, use a news reader like Feedly (available in desktop and app versions) and add the relevant industries, brands, and blogs you want to follow. For example, if you're in the tech industry, you can add Wired, Engadget, and TechCrunch to your feed list. Once you set up your feed and find a great article on your topic, simply save it, share it, or bookmark it for later use. Additionally, you can create knowledge boards in Feedly that allow you to compile (and later share) the information in a single location. Now it's time to sort the stories you've curated. Think about your target audience when you pick out interesting articles, blogs, videos, and stories, and choose five stories that will be most meaningful to your audience. For example, if you're a small business, curate a list of the best entrepreneurial stories of the month. #2: Record Your Thoughts on Each Story in a Single Video Now it's time to record your thoughts on video. At this point, you're curating the news-gathering phase for others and telling your audience why certain content is more important than other content. For this reason, it's important to have the rationale ready for why you made each decision. Be ready to explain to your audience why each story is relevant and different. Much has been written about staging and how to create great video content. But in this case, the type of video you're creating is highly personal, so staging isn't essential. The simple webcam position is enough, and helps make your audience feel they're in a chat with you. Keep in mind that poor lighting or sound will raise red flags for viewers, so leave some time for testing and retesting your look. The actual sound bites can be as short as 30 to 45 seconds, and should explain, retell, or give an opinion on the specific piece of content you're discussing. Be ready to share a quick overview of what happened or why the story is relevant. Then, give your take on the matter. Record five short snippets (one for each story) on your webcam or phone and then send them to your favorite editing software like YouTube. If you're a novice to video editing, check out these simple video editing techniques. In building the actual video, how well you incorporate music, graphics, and images in your video will affect the quality. Regardless, even five quick audio clips of you talking can get your audience's attention. #3: Share Your Video Multiple Times Once you've completed the video, the next step is to create a post to share each relevant headline on your social channels, and include your video. By following best practices on social sharing, you should be able to use a trending hashtag to find like-minded consumers. You can also head over to Google Trends. From there you can map, chart, and study search patterns both globally and regionally. Make notes of the stories that generate a lot of activity, as well as any hashtags associated with those stories. When you share content from a written article, give the journalist or blogger who wrote the piece a shout-out. For example, tag them in a Facebook post, mention them in a tweet, and tag them in a LinkedIn update. This can encourage that person to share your take on the piece. From there, you should tweet influential people who have voiced their opinion on one of the stor...

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Are you familiar with the latest changes? To explore a number of recent changes to Facebook that will impact all advertisers, I interview Jon Loomer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, a marketing expert who specializes in Facebook advertising. Jon is host of the Social Media Pubcast and blogs at JonLoomer.com. Jon explores Facebook ad changes and what you need to know. You'll discover updates to the 20% text rule, custom audiences, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ad Changes The 20% text rule change Jon explains why the 20% rule was created and says that until recently, any Facebook ad image with more than 20% text would be rejected. The text ratio was measured by placing a grid over the image and if there was text in more than 5 out of the 25 boxes, it was considered over the 20% text limit. Since Facebook has abandoned the rule, advertisers can have as much text as they want in their image. However, the more text in the image, the less reach it will receive and the more it will cost to run such an ad. Now, when you upload an image to the Text Overlay tool, Facebook will rate the image as: OK, Low, Medium, and High. Facebook is general about the guidelines, Jon explains, but there is no longer a grid. Basically, zero text means it's OK, and 20% text is considered Low. However, if you compare Facebook's example for 20% to the actual 20% rule, it's actually a little bit more than 20%. Facebook says if you have been following the 20% rule until now, you probably won't see any changes. However, Jon thinks the system for detecting the text is a little buggy, although it's still early on. For instance, he talks about an image of nature that was flagged for having text. Jon says the best approach is to test it. Experiment with little or no text in your images, and compare the results. You'll need to determine what text you absolutely need. The logo is another potential issue since not all logos are created equal. Jon's logo has never been flagged. However, sometimes they detect it and sometimes they don't. Many advertisers and users love memes and big call-to-action text, and now they can boost them. Jon says you probably need to do a manual bid and bid really high to get that ad seen, but you never know. It may be extremely effective. Listen to the show to discover whether the text scale is at play on organic posts. Facebook custom audiences Jon is a big fan of Facebook custom audiences, which is creating audiences of people who have visited your website. It's powerful since these people already know who you are. However, Jon explains, there is a weakness in those audiences. All audiences aren't created equal. In an audience of people who have visited your site over the last 180 days, some visited once, others visited 50 times. Some people bounced after three seconds and don't even remember being there, while others have spent hours on your site. Until recently, you couldn't differentiate the two. With the new website custom audiences' advanced feature, you can create an audience based on frequency. For instance, base it on how many times someone has visited your website or performed one specific action, such as a purchase or a registration. Now, when Jon promotes his blog posts, instead of targeting all of his website visitors from the last 180 days, he focuses only on those who visited at least three times. The quality and the cost per website click have been much better.

8 Ways to Customize Slack for Social Media Marketers

8 Ways to Customize Slack for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Slack? Want to streamline communication with team members and clients? There are a number of third-party apps and add-ons to help you customize Slack to fit your marketing team's needs. In this article, you'll discover eight apps for social media marketers using Slack. Listen to this article: #1: Monitor Your Twitter Feed With the Twitter integration, you can send all of the updates from your Twitter feed directly to a Slack channel. This includes direct messages, mentions, replies, and retweets. You can also monitor outgoing tweets from your Twitter account. Social media marketers can use this integration as a Twitter dashboard. #2: Collaborate With Team Members With Hootsuite Hootsuite has more than 150 app integrations, including Slack. Installing the Hootsuite Slack app lets you send a social post from your Hootsuite dashboard directly to a Slack channel. Note that the app doesn't allow you to send posts from your dashboard directly to a Slack user. However, through a Slack channel, the app lets you collaborate with your team and get the right response for particular social posts. #3: Monitor Subscribers' Social Details With Drift Drift is a live chat service that can be hosted on your website. It lets you chat directly with website users. While the stand-alone product is not particularly helpful for social media marketers, its Slack app is a handy tool. Drift's Slack integration can be connected to your MailChimp account. Once you set this up, you'll receive a notification on your Slack channel every time somebody subscribes. The notifications contain details about subscribers' social media accounts, which is handy if you want to reach out to them that way. You can then use this integration to initiate conversations with them. #4: Find Trending Stories With Nuzzel Nuzzel lets you see the most shared content from your friends' feeds and your friends' friends' feeds. This makes the content that you read very personal and reflective of the topics you're interested in. Think of it as a newspaper service that curates content based on your interests. Nuzzel lets you connect your Facebook and Twitter accounts. Once you do that, it shows you the most popular content in your timeline. With the Nuzzel Slack integration, you can get notifications of popular content in your niche through a Slack channel. This is helpful when you're curating content that you want to share across your social profiles. #5: Integrate RSS Feeds As a social media marketer, you need to follow multiple blogs, influencers, and official news from social platforms to stay on top of industry news, and subscribing to RSS feeds will help you do that. Every time new content pops up on the blogs or sites that you follow, the RSS feeds will give you an update. You can integrate RSS feeds into Slack to ensure that you receive new updates. Once you subscribe to an RSS feed, Slack will automatically update the feed and post new content in a Slack channel. #6: Send Short Video With Giphy GIFs are a great way to convey your thoughts or appreciation to people on social media, as they combine two crucial things: your message and a pop-culture reference, which shows a human side to your business. By installing Giphy on Slack, you won't have to switch platforms to search for the right GIF when you're communicating with people on Slack. For example, if you type in "/giphy im busy," you might get a GIF like this one. #7: Run Polls With Open Agora Slack is known for team collaboration. But how many times do you see all of the communication happening in a channel? It's easy for people to start ignoring stuff unless it's directed toward them. If you need your team's help, polls are a great way to share opinions. It could be anything from deciding whether to run a social campaign or providing an extra six months of onsite warranty to a user.

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to freshen up your social media marketing? Have you thought about looking at other accounts for inspiration? Checking out what other companies are doing on social media can help you brainstorm your own content tactics. In this article you'll discover how to analyze your competitors' social accounts to inspire new marketing ideas. Listen to this article: Why Look at the Competition? Researching your competitors on social media not only provides an overview of your industry, but it also gives you insight into the current habits of the audiences you're targeting. By answering a few key questions, you'll see what kinds of posts are effective for the people you want to reach. #1: Analyze Facebook Pages If you want to gain insight into a company's Facebook page, here are some questions to consider: How many followers do they have? What are they posting about? Are their posts mostly internal (company-based) news, blog posts and articles; mostly external news, blog posts and articles; or a mix of both? What's their brand voice? How often do they post? How many likes/comments/shares do they get per post? Do they run any polls, contests or fun games with their brand? The Facebook page for Powell’s Books, a famous independent bookstore, is worth checking out as inspiration if you're a local business hoping to make a national footprint. One of the first things you'll notice is that Powell's takes the time to create their own graphics, which often include quotes from authors. It's a great twist on a sharable meme for a bookstore. They post photos of customers at individual stores and events, so you can assume their staff participates in social sharing (a great idea for local businesses). They also share interactive posts and comment on national conversation topics to keep the feed relevant to non-local fans. Interestingly, one of the biggest buzz-generators for Powell's Facebook page is when they share posts on books and publishing from other media, such as The New Yorker. Remember that sometimes social media successes can come from other sources. Key takeaway: A brick-and-mortar brand can serve both local and national audiences with the right mix of photos and interactive content. #2: Look at Twitter Accounts If you're analyzing a company's Twitter account, here are some questions to answer to gain insight into their activities: How many followers do they have? How many accounts are they following? A good rule of thumb: An account with 50,000 followers that's following 500 users probably has more influence than an account with 50,000 followers that's following 49,000 users, unless they bought followers. What do they tweet about? Are they mostly mirroring their Facebook content, or is their content unique to the channel? Are their posts mostly internal, external or a mix of both? How many favorites/replies/retweets do they average per post? Does one engagement stand out over the others? Have they created lists? What hashtags do they use? Do they run any Twitter chats? Do they use Twitter cards for lead generation, email signups, etc.? If you look at the Twitter account for Moz, you'll notice that they use a photo in almost every Twitter post. Their photos all follow the brand's style and color scheme, and they've created a template for their Twitter images to accompany guest posts. Brand-wise, it's interesting that the "owner" of the Moz account is a robot named Roger. Choosing an on-brand character to run social accounts is a way the Moz brand stands out as playful in the generally more serious SEO industry. Key takeaway: Templates and a social media character can help a large brand stay consistent in social, even if multiple people are behind the account. #3: Examine Instagram Accounts Answer these questions to evaluate a company's Instagram account: How many followers do they have?

The Future: How Shared Experiences Are Reshaping Business

The Future: How Shared Experiences Are Reshaping Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering where the future of business is heading? Do you want to know how shared consumer experiences are impacting business? To learn about where the business world is headed and what you need to know, I interview Brian Solis for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brian Solis, digital analyst at the Altimeter Group and author of multiple books, including Engage and The End of Business as Usual. His latest book is What's the Future of Business? Brian shares the ideas behind his new book and how the changing social landscape is impacting business. You'll learn about the "four moments of truth" and what steps as a marketer you need to take to prepare for the coming changes. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Future of Business What prompted you to write a book called What's the Future of Business? The last book Brian wrote was called The End of Business as Usual and when he thought about what was next in terms of the future of business, he realized that the natural progression would be a book that actually tells us what the future is and what we need to do about it. Business can no longer operate as it had been because things are different now. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SL2HskcJkos#! The subtitle of the book is "Changing the Way Businesses Create Experiences." Customers have become increasingly connected and informed, no longer relying as much on traditional sources such as Google or websites. Now when they begin a discovery process or look to make an informed decision, they are using networks, friends and apps for help or direction. It's the shared experiences that define what they do next. You'll find out why these moments are critical to businesses. The book explores what these four moments of truth are, what they look like and how businesses need to activate them. Below in chronological order are the four moments of truth. Zero moment of truth First moment of truth Second moment of truth Ultimate moment of truth You'll discover what they mean to businesses in this podcast. As a business, you have to look at the people who are sharing their experiences about your business, product or service and why you should intentionally design those experiences. You'll hear how Procter and Gamble created a division around the first moment of truth and why your business would benefit from having that type of person or group in each division that handles each moment of truth. Listen to the show to hear what happens when customer experiences go into blog posts, tweets, status updates, YouTube videos and become the collective consciousness.  How the social landscape has made an impact on businesses Brian explains how advertisers and marketers have known about these moments of truth for a long time. The first and second moment of truth especially. People are thinking this way because Google made a tremendous push around the zero moment of truth. There is a lot of journey-mapping going on right now. When it comes to writing, Brian normally takes an academic approach, but this time he didn't. He made the book an experience in itself, so it could be a proof point to show the reader what he is talking about. Brian worked with the guys at Mekanism to reimagine what a book experience could be. It's a visually rich book. It simplifies a complex subject to the point where you know what to do. Many businesses today are using social media in very expe...

How to Host a Blab From Your Smartphone

How to Host a Blab From Your Smartphone

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to broadcast live video from Blab with your mobile phone? Looking for tips to improve your mobile Blab broadcasts? Business owners and marketers can use Blab to interact with customers and prospects in real time, from anywhere. In this article you'll discover how to successfully broadcast on Blab from your smartphone. Listen to this article: What Is Blab? Blab allows anyone (businesses included) to have their own "show," where two to four people will be "on air." The show is a live broadcast that viewers can tune in to, participate in the conversation, and potentially join the discussion via video if there's an open seat. Using Blab feels similar to Google Hangouts and Facebook Live Video, with a little bit of Reddit thrown in. Blab emphasizes user engagement and is a platform that lets anyone chime in. As a live video discussion happens among multiple users, people can comment on the content right as it's happening. The average active user spends 65 minutes a day watching different blabs. Businesses and marketers currently use Blab to host after-shows, hold interviews, facilitate discussions, offer coaching and teaching (think webinar), and record podcasts. You can record blabs so users can view them whenever they want, giving marketers the ability to create permanent, valuable content. Blab From Your Smartphone To use Blab, you'll need an account. It's recommended that you log in with your Twitter account so it's easy to share your blab to your Twitter followers. Once you log in, you'll see some live blabs, a tab to see whom you're following, and the option to create your own blab. To start your own blab, click the grey and black "+" button in the center of the top navigation bar. When you create your own blab, you'll be asked to name your blab. You can also add tags. Tagging is one of the best things you can do for your blab, because it attracts a relevant audience not already connected to you. This helps a new audience find your blab as well as your business. Once you're hosting a blab, you can call in. You can also choose to lock the other seats to prevent anyone else from calling in or you can keep them open. To spread the word about your blab, click on the arrow in the options between the video and text. From here, choose any or all of the options to share your blab link on social media, in a message, or in an email. You'll be able to see who's joined the blab, as well as any conversations happening. To show their approval, viewers can give "high fives" to speakers by clicking on the hand symbols in the corner of the speaker's video. Get More Out of Blab Here are some tips to help your on-the-go broadcast go smoothly, get the most audience interaction, and increase viewership. Be Prepared Remember that Blab is live, which means there's no stopping, restarting, or editing things out. If discussions veer away, that's fine in many cases. If things fall stagnant, though, it's good to have a list of topics to get the conversation back on track. Keep an agenda in front of you with topics you want to cover during your blab. Add Value Being entertaining is always good when you want users to tune in, but providing high-value content will keep users both engaged and waiting for (or subscribing to) your next blab. One way to do this is to invite industry leaders to chime in on relevant topics. Another way to add value is to share a list of applicable resources in the comments during each blab. Be Ready to Respond to Users Anything that's live and allows for viewer participation has the risk of something going wrong. An angry customer may chime in, or chaos could break out in the comments among users. Keep an eye on the discussion as much as possible and watch out for discord from guests who video call-in with you. Finally, answer questions from people, and comment on the discussion. Promote Your Blab

How to Build a Blogging Team

How to Build a Blogging Team

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to publish regularly to your blog? Have you thought about bringing in other writers? With a team of bloggers, you can share the workload and keep your blog updated with fresh content. In this article you'll discover how to set up and support a blogging team for your business. Listen to this article: Why a Team? Posting regularly to your blog is not only a way to carry out your content strategy, but it's also the key to driving relevant traffic and awareness for your business. So if you're struggling to update your blog consistently, consider bringing in some help. Creating a team of bloggers can facilitate regular blog contributions. By sharing responsibility, you can provide fresh content on a regular basis and ensure that no single person bears the burden for the blog's success. But setting up a successful team is about more than just selecting a few people and assigning topics. And, no matter how many people you put on your team, keeping them inspired to create engaging content will require time and attention. Here's how to set up a team that's passionate and engaged, and most importantly, that follows through. #1: Assemble the Team The most important element of creating a blogging team is to choose people who really want to write and have a passion for blogging or the industry. You're asking people for an extra commitment, so you need team members who are excited to participate. Consider asking potential members to fill out a short application for entry to the team. And then launch the team with a formal announcement and an in-person kickoff meeting. Nothing creates a sense of enthusiasm and purpose quite like some team bonding time. This meeting can serve a few different purposes (some discussed below), but the main point is to get everyone on the same page with their roles and responsibilities, and to feel confident in their ability to contribute regularly. It's also a great way to foster team camaraderie, which again is essential when you're requesting work above and beyond a colleague's regular job duties. Every team member should also agree on what his or her specific role is, and then document it, sign it and make copies. There's something about signing an official document that reinforces the importance of a commitment. #2: Manage Workflow and Facilitate Communication The team is a team because each member is important. This mentality helps create a sense of accountability and responsibility among team members. It also allows people to volunteer for specific blog posts, pick up the slack when necessary and ensure that there's a reason (other than just the company's prerogative) to show up regularly to team meetings and write new blog posts. A great way to manage workflow is to use a tool like the Edit Flow WordPress plugin. It provides a monthly calendar, allows the team to collaborate on blog posts and sends out notifications so everyone stays on track with their assignments. Other apps like Slack and Facebook groups also allow teams to communicate and share documents without needing to be in the same physical location. #3: Create a Brand Identity and Team Mission During the formal launch, schedule time to discuss the blog's identity and the team's mission. And this isn't about an obvious mission like "Increase our brand's SEO, site traffic and overall position as a thought leader." It's about a mission for the team itself, something like: "Encourage our peers to actively participate in writing, reading and sharing our blogs and dare to create content that's informative and cutting-edge." Make this something the team creates together and that everyone can buy into. What are the adjectives you want to use to describe your team? Hardworking, passionate, upbeat, focused? Choose a few and make this your team's mantra, something you go back to often to encourage participation. Creating a team mission as a group creates a sen...

Help! I Don’t Understand Landing Pages.

by Julie Weldon @ 321GoProject

There’s a lot of talk about landing pages and the importance of them for the successful marketing of your business. But… what if you have no idea what “landing page” really even means? We’re here to help. For the month of July, our blog articles will follow the theme that we’re focused on in Hub – Landing Pages and Paid Ads. So let’s break down the basics first of Landing Pages and create a foundation for the weeks to come. In this article, we’ll talk about 3 things: 1) What is a landing page? 2) How is it different from a home page or another page on your website? and, 3) What is a landing page used for? Then, in following articles, we’ll get deeper into the world of landing pages and paid ads, so that you feel like you have enough of an education to be dangerous to start creating your own landing pages. What is a Landing Page? First, let’s define it. A landing page is a single web page that allows you to get visitor’s information through a form they fill out. This form is called a lead-capture form or a conversion form. This form is on a stand alone page that is designed for a specific marketing campaign and purpose. So, for example, you have an e-book on your website, similar to this: The purpose of the e-Book is to capture someone’s name and email address, while providing something valuable that an ideal client would want. So, when they click on “Claim the Free Guide”, it takes them to this landing page where you will capture their info prior to sending them their e-Book. You now have their name and email address so you can follow up. This image above represents a Landing Page, not a...

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you given up on Google+? Are you wondering whether it is worth managing yet another social network? To address some of the benefits and misconceptions of Google+ marketing, I interview Jesse Stay for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jesse Stay, author of several books including Google+ for Dummies and Google+ Marketing for Dummies. Jesse shares insights into Google's strategy and what this means for your business. You'll learn what's critical for a successful approach to your Google+ marketing and why Google+ may be essential to your business even if you don't think so now. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ for Marketers Here are some interesting Google+ stats: 250 million Google+ accounts, 150+ million active users, 50% sign on daily (Google I/O 2012 conference) 69.4% male (Google+ Social Statistics) Most Google+ users are mobile, not desktop users (The Google+ Developers Blog) Jesse explains why you cannot compare Google+ to Facebook and why he thinks Google+ is more comparable to Twitter. You'll learn why Google+ is more than a destination site. Find out how the Google+ platform is intended to be a layer on top of all other Google products and how Google+ is becoming integrated into the entire Google experience. Listen to the show to find out why Google+ is the glue that connects all Google products together socially. How Google+ can help you Jesse explains why you first need to look at your Googlestrategy to figure out how your business can use Google+ best.  For example, your Google+ marketing can help you to: Improve your search results in Google Bring social connections into your YouTube videos Add a CRM experience into Gmail and Google Calendar Build connections through Google Hangouts When you establish a presence on Google+, build relationships there and get endorsements on the content that you share through Google+, you increase your Google search ranking. Listen to the show to learn how your Google+ marketing improves your Google strategy. The future of Google+  Jesse talks about how Google has proven rumors wrong. Google+ recently released new capabilities for notifications on the Google+ platform. Plus Google+ also has a much stronger integration into Google Apps and you're now able to restrict conversations from sharing outside of the domain. This gives Google+ more privacy and makes it more friendly for business use. Google+ is continuing to grow and add more features. Jesse shares how Google+ can help you gain an edge in Google search engine results. He explains why there is no easier way to get better ranking in search at the moment than by building a Google+ presence. Learn how to give authority to the content that Google is indexing within Google  search results. Listen to the show to find out more about the future of Google+ and what this means to you and your business. Google+ marketing tools  At this time, most third-party social media tools do not integrate with the Google+ API. This can make it challenging for busy marketers to add yet another social media network to their marketing mix. Jesse says to have patience and anticipates they will be releasing APIs at some time. You'll hear about Webmaster Tools where you can find, for example, statistics to help you track how your content is affected within search results as a result of people liking it on Google+.

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you track the return on your social media activity in Google Analytics? Want to discover some valuable shortcuts? To explore cool hacks for Google Analytics, I interview Annie Cushing. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Annie Cushing, Google Analytics expert and chief data officer at Outspoken Media digital marketing agency. She's a total analytics geek who loves teaching other marketers how to make the most of their analytics data. Annie explores Google Analytics, social reporting, dashboards, and more. You'll discover how to customize Google Analytics reports for yourself. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics and Social Media What's New in Google Analytics Starting May 15, 2017, Google Analytics will allow people to do remarketing across multiple devices. Annie explains that if someone visits your site on their mobile device and then comes back to it on their laptop, as long as they're logged into Google in both places, you'll be able to target them across their devices. This new capability is a huge step forward for remarketing audiences because few people shop only on their computer, tablet, or phone. Annie explains that Google previously relied on user IDs to offer remarketing features, but most businesses couldn't implement the technology very easily. Only advanced analysts could set it up for sites where users were highly incentivized to log in. Because most businesses don't have sites like that, this new ability is groundbreaking. Annie says one issue she regularly sees with clients is they seldom use Google Analytics for retargeting. Instead, they use AdWords and DoubleClick. However, Google Analytics enables marketers to get much more granular with targeting. For instance, you can serve an ad to someone who visited a certain page but didn't convert or to someone who put something in a cart but didn't check out. Hopefully, multiple-device retargeting will incentivize more people to take advantage of Google Analytics. Listen to the show to discover how a retargeting ad saved Annie last Christmas. Google Optimize Google recently announced they were releasing Google Optimize, a free tool for A/B testing. For example, say you want to experiment with product page design, such as the placement of the price or Buy button or different font colors or text. In an A/B test, you run two versions of your page and compare how each version performs. Up until this point, Optimizely has been the industry standard. At Social Media Examiner, we use Visual Website Optimizer. Annie believes Google Optimize is perfect for small- to mid-sized or even large businesses. (Google Optimize 360 is the enterprise-level version.) Annie recommends that businesses get what they can from the free version first. Then as your organization develops more sophisticated testing needs (for instance, reducing the bounce rate or increasing the conversion rate), consider paying for more advanced features. Annie also notes that Google Optimize is user-friendly. To move things around, you simply drag and drop. You don't have to ask a developer to customize the page for you. Listen to the show to hear my description of how optimizing tools work. Ad Blockers and Do-not-track Technology Annie explains how ad blockers and do-not-track tools impact your analytics data differently. If you run display ads on AdWords, then ad blockers will impact your overall effectiveness. As people choose to block ads, impressions and conversions will decrease. A lot of publishers,

Do You Have The Secret Weapon For Success In Place?

by 321go @ 321GoProject

If there is one thing that can propel a business and a leader forward it would most definitely be accountability. Accountability is difficult to put into place for a number of reasons: 1) we don’t know who to ask, 2) it’s sometimes surprisingly challenging to set our egos aside, 3) we may feel like we “don’t have time for that”, 4) we’re uncomfortable being vulnerable, and/or 5) we don’t feel like we’d have much to offer someone else. Whatever your reason, if you don’t have accountability in your life and you’re not making the progress you want, you might do well to put all that aside and consider this secret weapon.   Motivation can get you started on making a change or achieving a goal, but eventually the excitement that you’re feeling at the outset will begin to wane. We’ve all experienced this. Good accountability can help you go the extra mile when it’s just feels easier to give up. Every day presents so many possible distractions – even an unexpected phone call or email can completely derail your initial daily plan. If you add up all of these times in your day where distraction wins and strategic thought and execution are a far off 2nd, then your path to business success slowly fades. And sadly, this could leave you among the large percentage of other businesses that just don’t last for the long-term. The simple and unfortunate truth is that far too many small business owners have gotten used to existing on a deserted island, even if they are surrounded by a great staff. They start their business so they can be their own boss and not have to answer to anyone, but the pendulum oftens swings too far left and they lose touch with other voices who are...

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve your WordPress blog? Have you considered customizing WordPress with plugins? One of the biggest advantages of WordPress is the sheer number of easy-to-use plugins that help marketers add functions with little hassle. In this article, you'll discover 26 WordPress plugins for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Social Profile Integration Plugins Social Login Plenty of websites have members-only areas or user accounts, or require users to log in to comment. Social Login will let users log into your site with a social media profile. There are more than 30 different networks you can choose to make available for users to log in with, including Amazon, Facebook, Google+, Instagram, WordPress, and more. Placement options for the login plugin include registration pages, sidebars, comments, and more. This plugin is free to download and use. Snapchat Snapcode Widget Snapchat users don't always actively search for brands on the platform. Because of this, getting followers can sometimes depend on advertising your Snapcode across different online platforms, including your website. The Snapchat Snapcode Widget is exactly what it sounds like; a small widget that allows you to place your Snapcode on your site. All your blog visitors have to do is take a picture of your Snapcode and upload it on Snapchat to find and follow you. This plugin is free and easy to use. WordPress Social Stream When you don't want to choose between featuring your Facebook or Twitter feed, WordPress Social Stream allows you to create a combined feed from multiple social platforms to display on your site. You can add platforms including Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, Dribble, StumbleUpon, LinkedIn, and Delicious. You can pay $19 for a regular license with 6 months of support, and have the option to upgrade to an extended license and/or 12 months of support. Pin It Button One of the most effective ways you can encourage users to share your content and products on Pinterest is to add Pin It buttons to your site, and the Pinterest Pin It Button comes with a range of customizable options. The plugin will let readers select the image they want to pin from your page, although you can also select an image users will be prompted to choose when pinning. To customize your button, choose from a variety of different colors and sizes and easily place your Pin It buttons anywhere on your blog with a shortcode. The features above come with the free version of the plugin, but you can upgrade to the pro version for more customization features. Custom Twitter Feeds Placing a Twitter feed on your blog is a great way to keep your readers up to date and integrate your social media presence with your site. Add Custom Twitter Feeds to your blog to display a customizable feed. You can choose to display only your Twitter feed, a feed from multiple Twitter users, a feed from a single user, or a feed from a hashtag. The top of whichever feed option you choose will display a clickable CTA encouraging users to follow you on Twitter. In addition, the Twitter feed from this plugin is mobile-responsive, automatically takes on the stylistic aspects of your theme, and search engines can find the feed content. This plugin is free and there is a pro version available. Instagram Feed The Instagram Feed plugin will display images from your Instagram profile on your site, and help drive traffic to your profile. Place Instagram Feed on your site to display photos from non-private Instagram accounts, including yours or those that you're tagged in, which is great for sharing user-generated content. You can have single or multiple feeds, plus it's mobile-responsive and was updated with the June 1 Instagram updates. This plugin is free and there is a pro version of the plugin available. Custom Facebook Feed

Local SEO – 14 Actionable Tips To Rank Higher Locally In 2017

by Azfar Hisham @ SEOPressor – WordPress SEO Plugin

Local Search Engine Optimization has been a big deal throughout 2016, and it’s about to get bigger still. Mobile search has been on the rise. Hitwise has reported that 60% of searchers are now on a mobile device. Mobile searches tend to be much more localized in nature, and I have discussed this at length in my previous posts. At the same time, new technology has been emerging that may change the way we search ...

Why Do Small Businesses Need Local SEO? | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

6 Collaboration Tools for Social Media Marketing Teams

6 Collaboration Tools for Social Media Marketing Teams

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve communication with your marketing team? Looking for tools to help? Collaboration tools make it easier for everyone on your team to stay on track with content creation, task assignment, and deadlines. In this article you'll discover six tools to help your social media team collaborate. Listen to this article: #1: Organize Content With Evernote Evernote is an app that allows you to organize content into notebooks, within which you have individual notes. You can add text, images, and files to notes and share them with other users. The app lets you turn your notes into PDFs or (for premium users) instant presentations. You can also add reminders to individual notes, which will sync with your Google Calendar. Add tags to make your notes easier to find. Evernote also has a chat function that allows you to exchange instant messages in real time with other members of your team. For business account users, you can access Evernote online through a program downloaded onto your computer or via their mobile app. This allows you to take your content with you on your mobile devices without any extra effort. Of course, your data is also accessible on your computer. Evernote's mobile app works just as well as Evernote itself. One handy mobile feature is that some functions are available even if you don't have Internet access. Though these functions are restricted, you can still access snippets of information when you really need it. You can set up offline notebooks so you can edit or review content without using data. Evernote's basic plan is free, but there are also paid business and premium plans available. The paid plans have the best features for social media teams, some of which are discussed above. The premium plan is $49.99 per year. #2: Share Files With Google Drive Google Drive allows you to create documents and share them with as many users as you'd like, including team members and clients. Everyone can leave notes and comments, and tag specific users to bring their attention to something. You can use track changes to see who is making what edits within the document. Plus, it's easier to share a link for the document than it is to email a large document file each time an edit is made. Google Drive can also be used as a scheduling tool. Create a schedule showing when content/posts are due or to be published (or both), who's responsible, and what the projects are. You can customize this schedule to fit your needs, including sections that highlight keywords to be used, what platforms the content will be shared on, and more. Google Drive is free for your first 15GB and doesn't require any additional software to install on a desktop, so you don't have to worry about who will or won't have access, as you do with Evernote. It also has a great mobile app, though substantial edits are often more time-consuming on mobile than on a desktop computer. #3: Oversee Projects With Basecamp Basecamp is a web-based project management tool that allows you to create to-do lists, share files, and communicate with your team on projects. Set deadlines for projects and checklists within your projects, so you can see what tasks need to be completed by which team members. You can invite users to individual boards and have discussions within the group. Basecamp has a Calendar feature that shows you what projects will be due soon. You can also review recent changes made to a project, so you never have to worry about missing anything. The tool's settings are highly customizable. For example, you can receive notifications when changes or updates are made for all projects or for only specific projects. Basecamp is ideal for teams that need to stay in touch to monitor projects with long timelines, but don't need to be in contact every few minutes or hours (which Slack is best for). When it comes to project management,

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a social media plan? Are you wondering how to build a social media strategy for your business? To learn about the importance of a social media strategy, I interview Neal Schaffer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of Maximizing LinkedIn for Sales and Social Media Marketing. He's a social media consultant and coach. His newest book is Maximize Your Social: A One-Stop Guide to Building a Social Media Strategy for Marketing and Business Success. Neal shares the unique insights he gained while working overseas with companies that had to build their sales organizations from scratch. You'll learn the core elements your social strategy needs to be successful and sustainable. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Marketing Plan Many marketers are solely focused on the 'how' rather than the 'why' of social media Neal states that you should operate with a plan. The most precious resource for a marketer is time. Social media can drain your time, especially with the emergence of new platforms. You need to have a plan—and more importantly, an objective—and be able to measure what you are doing. For a small business it's one thing, but if you are doing it on behalf of a client or a brand/company, they want to know what they will get out of their social media budget. As social media becomes a mass skill, Neal thinks we'll see a lot more corporate oversight into what people do in social media. If you concentrate on the tactics alone, then the value of a Facebook like is meaningless. It might be a secondary metric, but at the end of the day, you need to know how it affects your business objectives. If you just look at the tactics, you completely miss the whole business picture. As a small business owner, it's easy to get caught up in the numbers. There is more focus on the 'how,' because you can be too concerned about trying to keep up with everyone else. You'll hear Neal give an example of a hotel client's Facebook strategy and how it's not all about the number of likes you have compared to your competitors. Likes are important to companies that want to get brand recognition in the marketplace—although it's not a business objective, it's more brand awareness. Listen to the show to find out why the number of likes is only one indicator in comparing yourself to your competition. How working abroad helped Neal in the new world of social media After graduating from college, Neal moved to Japan, where he helped three companies in the high-tech industry. Neal says it provided him with a lot of extremely holistic business experience. He had to launch their sales organizations from scratch and had to figure out how to get brand recognition across different countries in markets where they weren't known. These jobs included sales and marketing, attending conferences, hiring people, dealing with legal issues and offering customer support. All of these roles led Neal to a very holistic view of social media in terms of not just using it for marketing but throughout the enterprise. You'll hear why storytelling helped strengthen these Chinese brands and Japanese technology. Neal gained unique insights while working with these companies and it has given him a way to look at things in a practical, rational and actionable way. Listen to the show to find out about the analogy of thinking about a social network like a country.

Growing Social Media Examiner: The Bumpy Road of Pursuit

Growing Social Media Examiner: The Bumpy Road of Pursuit

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Ever wonder how Social Media Examiner started? Are you curious about the obstacles we faced in building a sizable media entity? Sit back and learn the story that led millions of people to us. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, my friend Mark Mason, host of the Late Night Internet Marketing Podcast, interviews me to celebrate the fifth anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. We'll explore the core skills that helped me move into social media marketing. You'll also learn how I make strategic decisions about the future of the company. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pursuit My Entrepreneurial Journey Before Social Media Examiner, I was known as a writer. I wrote a book called Writing White Papers and helped a lot of out-of-work journalists figure out how to go from writing for magazines and newspapers to writing for businesses. The job of a white paper is to persuade and educate. Businesses with expensive or complex products or services use white papers to communicate about them. For instance, a big corporation would hire someone to talk to the engineering and sales departments and translate that foreign language into something a customer could understand. Mark asks how important the helping aspect is to me as an entrepreneur. Whatever I do, I want to help the largest number of people in a way that doesn't place a huge strain on me personally. There's only so much of me to go around, and by creating products that are highly scalable, I can make helping others a big part of what I do. For example, this podcast has more than 10 million downloads and Social Media Examiner has 60 million readers. I wasn't an overnight success, however. When I started Social Media Examiner in 2009, I felt like I was really late to the social media game. A lot of people say they feel they're late today. What I lacked in timing I made up for in my ability to ask questions, understand complex things, and communicate how these things work in a way everyone can understand. This skill has helped me throughout my career. In the 1990s, my focus was creative agency work and designing websites, which was novel at the time. I also helped people design annual reports, trade show booth displays, and corporate logos. When I transitioned into a writer and later into social media, my communication skills continued to serve me well. When I started Social Media Examiner, my secret skill wasn't that I knew anything about social (I knew nothing). It was my ability to discern which people knew things, extract information from them, and convey that knowledge to my audience. No matter what you do, figure out which of your skills allow you to travel into a new space. Then you can be really successful. My entrepreneurial journey has never been easy. By the same token, I think if it had been easy, I would have been bored and moved along to the next thing. I like a challenge and solving puzzles. I'm not one of those people who wants to build a system and then sit back and retire on a beach. I want to keep pushing the envelope and figuring out ways to be better. When I was in college, I dreamed that I was in a room with a couple of hundred people who were congratulating me on my success. I had the dream when I was around 20 years old, and I'm 49 now. That dream didn't come true for around 25 years. Although I've always had certain levels of success, I've never had something amazing happen overnight. I've always been the tortoise, not the hare. I realized my dream had come true in 2014, the second year of Social Media Marketing World,

21 Actionable SEO Techniques You Can Use Right Now (Updated)

21 Actionable SEO Techniques You Can Use Right Now (Updated)


Backlinko

21 insanely practical SEO techniques for higher rankings and more search engine traffic.

Facebook Mobile for Business: What You Need to Know

Facebook Mobile for Business: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you take Facebook with you on your mobile device? Turns out 543 million people access Facebook while out and about! To explore the marketing implications of mobile Facebook users, I interview Mari Smith for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this premier episode, I interview Mari Smith, author of The New Relationship Marketing and co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. Mari shares insights into Facebook mobile and the opportunities this new mobile environment gives businesses today. You'll learn about how to get your Facebook content seen by the large mobile audience and you'll also discover the best Facebook advertising options. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Mobile for Business What are the mobile marketing opportunities? Businesses need to understand why mobile users are important on Facebook. 543 million people use Facebook mobile each month 300 million photos are uploaded to Facebook each month Mobile is critical on Facebook because of the number of users and also because mobile users are twice as active on Facebook. Listen to the show to learn about the opportunities Facebook mobile users offer businesses and discover how mobile marketing has become an integral part of their social experience. How can Instagram and the Camera app on Facebook give you more options? Mari shares how Facebook is now positioned to take advantage of this mobile opportunity after acquiring the solely mobile app Instagram. She also brings up the possibility of Facebook rolling out Instagram.com profiles and the rumors of Facebook entering the hardware market and coming out with a phone. Mari also gives you a quick review of mobile apps and how they work. Listen to the show to learn more about what to expect in the future mobile environment. How should you adapt your marketing for mobile Facebook users? Mobile users consume content mainly through their Facebook news feed. With this in mind, here are some marketing tips for businesses to ensure visibility in these mobile news feeds: Post succinct content of 160 characters or fewer Make use of photos Ask short-and-sweet questions Be humorous and entertaining if appropriate Add calls to action Facebook Offers are popular with local businesses from a mobile standpoint. But if you don't use Offers, take advantage of your updates and post something like: "Are you on a mobile phone? Come in and get a free coffee." Listen to the show to understand how to adapt your marketing to reach mobile Facebook users.  What are the best paid advertising options on Facebook? Since going public, Facebook has made changes in the reach of content posted on Facebook and their advertising options. Many businesses are frustrated with Facebook now asking them to pay to get higher visibility for their content. Some businesses are finding value with Promoted Posts. Mari advises businesses to take the time to test Promoted Posts when their page has a low number of fans or has plateaued with a low engagement rate. Also, given the nature of the Facebook mobile app, Promoted Posts will get more visibility on mobile Facebook apps. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1f7G4bVVqO0 Listen to the show to discover other tactics to get your content in front of a larger portion of your audience. Survival Tip: Critical Blog Plugin A while ago, I experienced a nightmare blogging scenario. This is why I use the two WordPress security plugins Secure WP and WSD Security.

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach new audiences on Facebook? Have you considered targeting niche audiences? Targeting niche groups of people on Facebook, in addition to your primary audience, will help you create new channels of traffic and revenue. In this article, you'll discover how to find and reach niche audiences on Facebook. Listen to this article: Uncover Your Niche Audience Sometimes, all it takes is a little brainstorming to yield an immediate option for a secondary audience. Think of your product or service as if you initially created it for people other than your primary audience to identify new shades of its features that will interest additional customer segments. For example if Dollar Shave Club's primary audience is men who use razors, it's easy to see how they would choose women who use razors as a great secondary target. Alternatively, you can go deep into Facebook's Audience Insights to learn more about your primary audience's quirks. Use any shared similarities you find to identify secondary groups of people who might qualify as a viable audience for you. Target Your Niche Audience When you've decided which audience group you want to target on Facebook, you can take advantage of Audience Optimization to ensure your post will be seen by users who are most likely to engage with it. Now that you know how to find and reach your niche audience, here are three tips to help you make the most of that exposure and visibility. #1: Speak Their Language Many niche groups use specific words, slang, or non-typical word expressions that differentiate them from others. Whether you're trying to connect with introverts, hipsters, or healthy lifestyle fans, it's important to speak the same language they do. To examine the specific language of a group, you can use Google to query phrases such as 'hipster slang.' A large gym that wants to attract a niche audience of CrossFit enthusiasts can search Google for slang that audience might use. You can also use Online Slang Dictionary or Urban Dictionary to learn the meaning of words that are unfamiliar to you. Make a list of the words used by the group you want to target and use them to construct Facebook posts that reflect a particular mood and style that will appeal to the social group you're targeting. After you publish your posts, you can increase the rate of engagement and conversion by responding to comments and questions with the same words your visitors use. #2: Reinforce Their Mood and Interests Posting pictures and quotes that appeal to the unique mindset of your niche audience can be especially effective because they're attractive and shareable. To mitigate the risk of alienating your primary audience with this tactic, make sure the images and quotes you use are relevant to your existing audience as well. Otherwise, you may not get any engagement at all. For example, this post by Nike could easily attract the notice of people interested in philology but stays faithful to the interests of their primary audience of athletes and healthy lifestyle fans. Even if you don't directly address a Facebook post to a specific niche audience, you can appeal to their interests indirectly. For example, this Walt Disney World post is equally interesting for three distinct and possibly overlapping audiences: those who are interested in Disney, in Star Wars or in food. You can take this a step further by including a question that helps your niche audience understand their opinion is important to you, thereby increasing your chances of engaging members of that audience in a conversation. #3: Support Their Social Stance If your business openly aligns with a niche audience on an issue or controversial subject, you can publish posts that make a clear statement to signify your support. For example, this post could be shared to appeal to and attract people who are interested in and support strong female role m...

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for more ways to use LinkedIn for your business? Have you considered showcase pages? LinkedIn showcase pages enable you to promote certain products or services to specific customer segments. In this article you'll discover how to use LinkedIn showcase pages for your business. Listen to this article: What Are Showcase Pages? Showcase pages are an extension of your LinkedIn company page and allow you to highlight a particular product line or brand. Although you need to have a company page to create showcase pages, they're somewhat of a standalone feature. Each showcase page has its own followers, status updates and functionality, sort of like a mini LinkedIn company page. Any showcase pages you've created for your business are listed in the right column of your company page. For example, IBM has a number of showcase pages, including IBM Cloud, IBM Analytics, IBM Security, IBM with MSPs, IBM Social Business and IBM Watson. Here's how to set up showcase pages for your business's products and services. #1: Choose a Page Name First, you need to choose a page name. To take advantage of showcase pages for SEO, include your target SEO keywords as part of the page-naming process. For example, because I provide search engine optimization training, I claimed, created and optimized the showcase page with the same name: Search Engine Optimization Training. The URL for the showcase page I claimed is http://www.linkedin.com/company/search-engine-optimization-training. As you can see from the URL, showcase pages are not directly linked to your LinkedIn company page. The URL just says .../company/..., and only the name of the showcase page is included in the URL. This means no one else can claim a LinkedIn showcase page with that same name. It's sort of like registering and claiming a really cool .com URL and making it yours. #2: Create a Showcase Page To create a showcase page, log into your LinkedIn company page, hover or click on the down-pointing arrow next to Edit and select Create a Showcase Page from the drop-down menu. You can claim up to 10 showcase pages for your company. If you need additional pages, reach out to LinkedIn’s support team and request them. #3: Optimize the Page for Search Without a doubt, Google loves LinkedIn company pages, and frequently ranks them high in search results if they're properly optimized. The same principle applies to showcase pages. The more followers you have and the more actively those followers engage with your showcase page, the better. There are a number of ways you can optimize your showcase pages for search. You get more SEO juice by including target SEO keywords in the showcase page name (as described earlier) and in the description. You can use up to 200 characters to draft an engaging and compelling product or service description, so make good use of this real estate. In the Website area of your page, make sure you include a link to the corresponding service or product page on your website. Also add your logo and a header image to your showcase page. For the header image, you can upload an image in the PNG, JPEG or GIF format. The maximum file size for the image is 2MB, and it must be 974 x 330 pixels or larger. Be sure to invite people to follow your showcase page and encourage them to engage with your posts. When you post status updates on the page, keep them focused and include your target SEO keywords. Companies Using Showcase Pages Here's a look at how three well-known companies use showcase pages to promote their products and services. Adobe Creative Cloud The Adobe Creative Cloud showcase page has more than 15,700 followers and features an excellent and relevant header image. The Adobe company page encourages visitors to follow all of their LinkedIn showcase pages. Intel IT Center The Intel IT Center showcase page, which has more than 47,200 followers,

Content Sharing: How to Build a Following Using Other People’s Content

Content Sharing: How to Build a Following Using Other People’s Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a content sharing strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering ways to leverage great content to promote your business and drive sales? To learn how to build a following by sharing other people's content, I interview Guy Kawasaki. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Guy Kawasaki, the author of the book Enchantment and the chief evangelist at Canva. His newest book is called The Art of Social Media: Power Tips for Power Users. Guy explores how to build your social media following by sharing other people's content. You'll discover how to create a consistent brand image for your company, develop a strategy for consistently sharing great content with your audience and leverage that content to promote your products or services. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Sharing How Guy got started in social media  Depending on how you define social media, Guy was there at the very beginning with CompuServe forums. He says he was late to blogging, starting four or five years after it really took off, but gradually adopted social media much quicker over the years. Guy joined Twitter six or seven months after it started, but was on Google+ six days after it launched. Today, Guy considers social media as God's gift, especially for entrepreneurs, because it's fast, free and ubiquitous. It's a great equalizer and makes it possible to potentially reach millions of people with just one tweet, image or post. Listen to the show to discover why Guy says we're in the renaissance of marketing.  Have a consistent image and mantra across all of your social networks In Guy's new book he talks a lot about the importance of having a consistent brand image across all of your social media channels. Guy advises against adopting a different persona for each social media platform. It's much too difficult to manage and will make people question who you really are. You'll hear Guy explore the importance of having a mantra for your business and provides some great examples. Your mantra explains who you are and why your product, service or business exists in two or three simple words. It should go in the Bio or About Me sections of all of your social media profiles. Listen to the show to learn how your mantra is radically different than your company mission statement or slogan. The importance of the Incognito Window  Guy explains that the Incognito Window is a feature found on all browsers, which allows you to browse your pages and your social profiles anonymously. This mode lets you see how a new visitor to your website will see it. Many marketers will be amazed to discover that what they see on their own company's website on a day-to-day basis is not the same thing as most people see when they visit for the first time. The Incognito Window mirrors a different online experience that you or someone inside your company may not even realize exists because you've gotten past the sign-ins, cookies and gates, whereas other people have not. Listen to the show to learn why the Incognito Window matters to your business.  Guy's content-sharing philosophy Guy says there are two key components to his entire strategy. He believes the most important test of all of social media is what he calls the "reshare test," which is: "Are you sharing something that other people will share with their friends and followers?" You'll hear how he relates tipping in a restaurant to a +1 or a like, or something like a thumbs-up. Whereas with a share,

SEO: What to Base Content Decisions On

by Jill Kocher @ Practical Ecommerce

Content is the first thing that comes to mind with search engine optimization. There is a process, however, to creating and optimizing strong content. The process involves four separate tasks: data ...

SEO Expert Services, What To Look For

by Jake Reeves @ New Dimension (NDMR) | Marketing Agency San Diego

Ranking for keywords has become its own search engine discipline. As a result, SEO experts services have increased in demand due to their ROI contribution. Why? Because 92% of internet users use a search engine. Having an SEO expert services allows your site to rank for keywords related to your business. You need an SEO
Read this post

The post SEO Expert Services, What To Look For appeared first on New Dimension (NDMR) | Marketing Agency San Diego.

How to find the top ranked pages of your site (and how they influence your website success)

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

The pages of your website that are ranked on Google are the pages that most visitors of your website see first. Which pages are the top ranked pages of your site? Are these pages a good entry point to your site? The Ranking Monitor in SEOprofiler helps you to locate these pages.

The Ultimate Semantic SEO Guide: How To Do SEO Like An Expert

by Joanne Chong @ SEOPressor – WordPress SEO Plugin

Back in the early days of the Internet, SEO was relatively simple: pick a few relevant keywords and plug them in. However, SEO has become much more complex than just that. Even when it comes to finding relevant keywords, a lot more has to be taken into consideration, including semantic search. (Find out how to do SEO for beginners here.) The following is an in-depth guide on what is semantic search, how it can benefit ...

Increase SEO: Google Plus SEO Strategy & Insights

Increase SEO: Google Plus SEO Strategy & Insights


Retail Search Marketing Agency | Groove Digital Marketing

Have you made Google Plus part of your SEO strategy? Having a Google+ presence will boost your search engine rankings. Learn how!

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you advertise on LinkedIn? Have you considered LinkedIn advertising and want to learn more? To discover everything there is to know about LinkedIn ads, I interview AJ Wilcox. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview AJ Wilcox, a LinkedIn ad expert. His agency, B2Linked, specializes in business-to-business advertising and lead generation on LinkedIn. In addition to managing accounts, AJ also specializes in LinkedIn ads training. AJ explores the different types of ads available on LinkedIn. You'll discover what B2B marketers need to know about advertising on LinkedIn. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How AJ Got Into LinkedIn Ads AJ is a long-time digital marketer who started out doing search engine optimization (SEO) and Google AdWords. About four years ago, a company in Utah recruited AJ. On his first day, he laid out his plans for SEO, pay per click, and social media to the CMO. She gave him the go-ahead and also informed him that the company had started a pilot program with LinkedIn ads. "See what you can do with it," she said. AJ replied, "absolutely," and then turned around and started laughing to himself. He felt like a veteran at digital marketing, yet had never heard of LinkedIn ads. He jumped into the platform to learn about it to try to keep the egg off his face. Within about two weeks, one of the salespeople approached AJ, telling him how much they loved the leads they'd been getting. When AJ discovered through Salesforce that the leads were all sourced from LinkedIn, he realized there was something to it. Listen to the show to hear how AJ started his business, B2Linked. Why Consider LinkedIn Ads? AJ explains that while Facebook's and LinkedIn's ad platforms are very different, they share the same principles. That means that if you have something nailed on Facebook, it will probably work well on LinkedIn and vice versa. While AJ doesn't run Facebook ads for his clients, when he's compared similar campaigns from Facebook to LinkedIn, he's found his conversion rate on LinkedIn to be about double that of Facebook. Plus, the sales teams have told him the LinkedIn leads are much higher quality than the ones from Facebook. LinkedIn is by far the best for B2B targeting, he continues. You can target by job title, seniority, company, skills, specific group membership, geography, and years in business; information people aren't putting on Facebook. AJ shares what he believes are the two best uses of LinkedIn ads. Number one is recruitment and the other is promoting B2B products and services such as an SaaS company (software as a service). Those businesses charge a substantial ongoing rate ($6,000 to $7,000 per month) for access to their software and have a lifetime value of more than $15,000. If you have a lifetime value of under $15,000, AJ cautions, make sure your funnel and your processes are really ironed out on Facebook first, because LinkedIn's cost per click (CPC) is much higher than Facebook's. Listen to the show to discover how to calculate lifetime value. The Ad Types When you go to LinkedIn.com/ads and start a self-service account, you'll have access to two different ad units. AJ explains the first type is text ads. These ads appear in the right sidebar of the LinkedIn homepage (on desktop) and you'll often see three ads there. According to AJ, text ads have a low click-through rate because most people are banner-blind to them. If four people click on them out of every 10,000 times they're viewed, you're doing great, he says.

Social Persuasion: How to Move People to Action

Social Persuasion: How to Move People to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want more of your readers to take action? Are you looking to increase the persuasion of your content? To learn how persuasion and psychology apply to social media marketing, I interview Derek Halpern for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Derek Halpern, founder of Social Triggers. Derek shares the tactics he uses to get people to take action and turn them into loyal readers. You'll learn how to use the right words for your audience and gain insights from your competitors. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Persuasion How the right words help your marketing Derek explains how the right word can make sales and the wrong word can repel sales. You will discover how certain words repel people when it comes to leading them down the path to a sale of a product or service. He shares takeaways from his discussion on "wallet-closing words" with language expert Michael Fishman. Mark Twain said it best: "The difference between the almost right word and the right word, is really a large matter. It's the difference between the lightning bug and the lightning." When it comes to marketing, this still holds up. Listen to the show to discover how you can find the right words to get people to buy what you're selling. The connection between psychology and social media You'll learn how an understanding of the psychology of your audience can help you navigate the constant changes on social media. Social media is always about people. Even if the tools change, people are not going to change and social media tools are ways to talk to people. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MzGnX-MbYE4 Psychology helps you understand people and enables you to mix and match social media tools to communicate with your audience. Listen to the show to find out why psychology is vital in social media. How to approach your content strategy Derek shares his content strategy and why he does not publish content often and how this gets his audience to do what he wants them to. If you get people to use your advice and see results, they are going to be loyal readers. You'll discover how Derek focuses on creating content and gets his readers to take action with a single tip. Derek also shares his strategy behind the Social Triggers Insider podcast. Listen to the show to learn how to get your audience to take action. How to learn from your competitors Derek talks about the fine line between copying your competition and innovating from your competition. You'll learn what to look out for with your competitors and how you can make something better for your audience. Derek shares why it's important to look outside of your competition too. Friendly competition does create a better end-product for the entire community. Listen to the show to find out what you should be doing to innovate and inspire your growth. Hot marketing tips Derek shares techniques to get people to go from passive observers to email subscribers. He shares insights into using popup and opt-in forms on your website to pull people into your email list. He also talks about the advantages of using "click-to-tweet" quotes. Find out how to highlight an interesting quote from your article or video and have readers click to tweet the quote with a link back to your site. Listen to the show to hear how this could work for you. Survival Tip: Tweetbot Tweetbot is a Twitter app that allows you to do everything you can do on any other ...

Free as in beer: manage your links with the improved Link Manager tool

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

We have released a new version of the Link Manager in SEOprofiler. The Link Manager is a powerful tool that helps you to keep track of your link building activities. It is available in all SEOprofiler plans, including the free demo version.

Snapchat or Instagram? Deciding Which Platform Is Ideal for Your Visual Content

Snapchat or Instagram? Deciding Which Platform Is Ideal for Your Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is visual content part of your social media marketing? Are you trying to decide whether to use Instagram or Snapchat? Snapchat and Instagram share the same basic purpose. While many businesses want to know which is better for marketing, the truth is both have value. In this article you'll find insights to help you decide whether your visual content campaigns should be on Snapchat or Instagram. Snapchat and Instagram Stats Instagram and Snapchat have more similarities than just being photo sharing platforms. They also have some commonality in how they both appeal to younger age groups, are mobile-driven and have large portions of their audience use the apps daily. Listen to this article: When determining which platform to use for your next campaign (or even in general), learn the important metrics for each to make an informed decision. Snapchat Metrics Snapchat launched in 2011, though it's only recently that businesses and brands started to use it as a marketing tool. Snapchat has 100 million daily active users, and there are 400 million snaps per day. More than 60% of Snapchat users in the United States are 13 to 34 years old, and 37% are between 18 and 24 years old. The platform is particularly popular among college students; 77% of them use it daily. Engagement on Snapchat, if any, is private. Snapchat's images (which do not have to be high-quality) are only temporary, and only 2% of marketers are currently using Snapchat.   Instagram Metrics Instagram was launched in 2010, and quickly picked up steam, especially since Facebook purchased Instagram as their new sister company. Instagram has more than 400 million monthly users, and there are more than 80 million photos posted daily. The platform also skews young: 53% of Instagram users are 18 to 29 years old; 25% are 30 to 49 years old, and 11% are 50 to 64 years old. Engagement on Instagram is public, and comes in the form of hearts, comments and shares. Instagram now offers ads, partnered with Facebook Ads. Instagram heavily utilizes hashtags, has a wide international reach and incredible click-through rates. Instagram allows cross-posting to Facebook, Flickr and Twitter. #1: Snapchat Marketing Snapchat allows users to either send snaps (photos and videos) to specific individuals or share them with all contacts through "stories." These images and videos aren't professional; they're "snapped" with a phone's camera. You can edit snaps with the platform's basic features, which include the ability to add text. When you share a snap individually, it disappears quickly; an image lasts 10 seconds and a video only for its duration. Since only 1% of businesses currently use Snapchat as a marketing tool, there's a lot of room for businesses to grab hold of their audience without worrying about the looming competition. If you aim to target college students, Snapchat can be incredibly valuable. With Snapchat, it's all about the timing. Businesses that have done well on Snapchat understand how to harness good timing and urgency in promotions. Businesses Using Snapchat Taco Bell, GrubHub and 16 Handles are examples of businesses and brands that have done well on Snapchat. Taco Bell, which knows their target audience well, followed users to Snapchat. They successfully take advantage of the timely feel of Snapchat: snaps and stories are temporary and the audience doesn't linger. Taco Bell has been known to send out stories late at night, when nothing else is open and college students have the munchies. Considering there's a Taco Bell on or close to most college campuses, and almost no one sleeps normal hours at major universities, this is near genius. It has brought them success. GrubHub also takes advantage of the urgency of Snapchat. They'll send out coupon codes, updates and deals, which are sometimes hinted about on Twitter, but require Snapchat to obtain. The codes are temporary,

Twitter Traffic: How to Double Your Traffic to Your Content

Twitter Traffic: How to Double Your Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to increase traffic to your blog? To learn how to use Twitter to grow your business, I interview Kim Garst for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Kim Garst, CEO of Boom Social, a company and blog that specializes in social media marketing. One of Kim's areas of topical expertise is Twitter marketing. Kim shares how she uses Twitter to promote her content and offers. You'll learn about what type of content works best and how frequently you should share it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business How do you use Twitter to help your business? Kim describes many ways to leverage Twitter to help grow your business. One way is to use news updates. Kim refers to Twitter as the "info superhighway." A lot of people don't use Twitter search in the same context as they would with Google. In many cases, the news hits Twitter before it hits the major news channels. There are real people out there who share real information in real time. With Twitter, you can leverage the search function as a way to keep track of your competition. You can search for keywords and find conversations in real time. It's a great way to pay attention to trending topics. You'll hear an example of a news story where 85% of the people polled said they found out about an incident on Twitter before the traditional news got the information. One of the biggest values that Kim has found for Twitter is to drive traffic. It's the most responsive targeted traffic source that you can have at your fingertips. Listen to the show to find out how Kim uses Twitter to drive traffic to her Facebook Page. How Twitter can drive more traffic to a website Kim describes the free offers on built-in tabs on her Facebook Page and why she tests them first on Facebook. Twitter is unique in that you can share your free offer 2-3 times a day; whereas on your Facebook Page it would be considered overkill. A tweet has a lifespan of about 30 seconds, so you can share your free offers multiple times a day and it's seen as acceptable. Different viewers see them as they come through their news feeds. Kim explains the strategy behind sharing the same link multiple times a day and why you shouldn't use the same tweet throughout the day. You'll want to switch them up and test different wording to see what people respond to the most. Kim uses HootSuite to schedule her tweets. You'll find out why it's the number-one opt-in source for leveraging her Twitter traffic to her Facebook Page. Kim shares how she monitors and keeps track of each tweet's performance and why you should only run 2 or 3 at a time, otherwise it's overwhelming. You'll hear what type of content Kim shares from her own articles and how frequently she schedules them. Twitter is Kim's number-one traffic source. She has leveraged the same concept for her clients and increased their traffic by 100-400%. Kim highly recommends that you share content that is still relevant and holds value. You'll hear an example of how to use a hashtag when promoting a blog article and why hashtag content has more relevance. Listen to the show to find out what is one of Kim's top converters. Common mistakes businesses make on Twitter Kim says the mistake people make with their Twitter account is to remain inactive. You need to be consistent regardless of which platform you use,

Story for Business: How to Create Stories That Move People to Act

Story for Business: How to Create Stories That Move People to Act

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use stories to engage your audience? Want to see how powerful stories can be? To discover how to create stories for business that move people to act, I interview Park Howell. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Park Howell, a brand story strategist who helps businesses grow through the power of stories. He also hosts the Business of Story podcast and performs workshops on stories for business. Park will explore the mechanics of storytelling, a craft every marketer should master. You'll discover why this is important to social marketers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Story for Business Park's story Park, who has been in the advertising and marketing business for 30 years, shares that what always frustrated him was not knowing whether a TV spot or radio commercial was going to work. Story started to bubble up in the advertising world around the same time Park's middle son, Parker, went to Chapman University film school (from 2006 to 2010). He asked Parker to send him his textbooks when he was finished with them because he wanted to see what they were teaching his son to prepare him for Hollywood, the most competitive storytelling place in the universe. One of the screenwriting books was Save the Cat! by Blake Snyder. Blake, who Park says sold more family-oriented screenplays in the 1980s than anybody else, had a prescription for the 15 beats to a story. According to Blake, a screenplay needs to be the same number of pages as the weight of a jockey (110), and Blake could tell you on each page (within a page or two) what needed to happen. Although it sounds formulaic, it worked very well for Blake and many other writers, Park adds, and the approach fascinated him. When Park was introduced to the work of Joseph Campbell, America's foremost mythologist, he noted how Blake had adapted Campbell's The Hero's Journey, or what Joseph called the monomyth, a 17-step process for story structure. During the time Park was reading through The Hero's Journey, he was looking at a brand strategy plan and realized he was already following this story structure with his plan. Park wondered what would happen if he was intentional about it. Park boiled down the steps of the Hero's Journey to 10 steps for business, and used it to guide the creation of content to tell a story that would make a difference. To Park's amazement, it worked, so he fine-tuned it into what he calls the Story Cycle, a process that can be used for everything from high-level brand strategy to the creation of a 30-second TV spot. In the social media world, you just have a small blip of time to communicate a story. Park explains that you can get that story across if you follow the three fundamental principles of the three-act play: start with a setup, introduce conflict, and resolve it. He shares that if you can do it in a 6-second Vine video, you will have connected with the deep reaches of your audience's minds. Listen to the show to learn about Park's background in music, as well as his comparisons between music and story. Why marketers should care about stories Park believes that stories are people's superpowers, and says the brain is hardwired to constantly search for them. Humans can go weeks without eating and days without drinking, but only roughly 35 seconds without their brains scanning the environment to create meaning out of what they see. Park explains how while one son was studying film and Park was studying what Hollywood knows about story structure,

You May Not Want To Hear This, But…

by 321go @ 321GoProject

You’re Fat. And so am I. Let me prove it to you. List out how many articles you’ve read in the last week. Name the podcasts you’ve listened to over the past 7-14 days. Write down how many pages of a book you’ve consumed recently, and how many video tutorials you’ve watched lately. Think about the conversations you’ve had that have spurred you on in the last few days. Now… write out what you’ve actually done about all that information you’ve consumed. What action items have you completed that brought about a change in your business or yourself? If you’re like me, you can’t even name all that you’ve listened to and read… even just in one week. (think about all the articles you’ve stopped on while scrolling Facebook.) We live in an information overload age. It used to be hard to get a book or blog published. Not now. Articles are a dime a dozen, and many of them are really good. Self-help books line the bookshelves, maybe your bookshelves. Business books abound. Just this past week, I’ve been referred to 9 of them, every time someone saying, “You have to read this one.” So, why do we do it? Why do we keep consuming like our life depends on it? Why do we feed our minds an excessive amount… all. the. time? Because learning is good, and consuming is easy. It makes us feel like we’re improving. But, unless we’re actually doing something about what we’re consuming, the simple truth is our minds are just getting fat. In the fitness industry, we fight obesity every day, but what about our minds? As a business owner, if change is going to happen, it has to start with you. How many journals have you started that only have 15 pages written in...

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business respond to customers via social media? Are you prepared to deal with upset customers? To discover how to turn unhappy customers into happy fans, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jay Baer, the author of Youtility, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and founder of Convince & Convert, an agency and blog focused on digital marketing. His newest book is Hug Your Haters: How to Embrace Complaints and Keep Your Customers. Jay will explore how to convert social media haters into raving fans. You'll discover why it's important to hug your haters. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Dealing With Unhappy Customers The backstory of Hug Your Haters The idea of customer service and customer experience has been at the front of Jay's mind for a long time, he explains. His company Convince & Convert helps major brands with their social media and content marketing, and they increasingly get involved in issues with customers. It's not just about being proactive and doing marketing, Jay says. You have to be just as good, if not better, at reactive customer service. Jay found even organizations with a lot of resources were befuddled by everything related to digital customer service and experience in the modern world. Jay shares how conducting a tremendous amount of research with Tom Webster from Edison Research changed the focus of his book. Last year at Social Media Marketing World, Jay did his "Hug Your Haters" presentation for the first time. Although he has taken the Youtility concept all over the world, Jay says the Hug Your Haters book is the best thing he's ever done and the speech is the best speech he has ever given. Listen to the show to learn what Tom Webster said he liked about Hug Your Haters in the forward to the book. What are haters and why do people hate Jay refers to anybody who complains about a business either off stage or on stage as a hater. An off-stage hater is somebody who complains in private: on telephone and email. An on-stage hater is somebody who complains in public: social media, review sites, discussion boards and forums. He shares that historically and even currently, the majority of people complain off stage but that the pendulum is swinging the other way because it's much easier to reach out to a brand on Facebook, Twitter or beyond than it is to send an email or wait on hold. When people complain off stage, they almost always want an answer. They have a problem they want to be fixed, and 90% of the time they expect companies to respond. When people complain on stage, they don't necessarily want an answer; they want an audience. They want people to empathize and engage with them around their experience. If they actually hear back from the company, it's a bonus. Even though only 47% of the people who complain in public actually expect companies to get back to them, Jay says their research proved that if you actually answer the person who had a bad experience and left a review online, it has a meaningful and significant impact on your customer advocacy. Listen to the show to discover how content shock also applies to disgruntled customers. Why engage haters Jay says haters are not the problem, ignoring them is. He believes there are multiple benefits to answering every complaint in every channel every time, instead of what most businesses do today, which is answer some people some of the time in the channels they prefer. First, if you answer somebody, you at least have a chance to turn them around.

Supporting Customers With Facebook: What Businesses Need to Know

Supporting Customers With Facebook: What Businesses Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are your customers active on Facebook? Have you got a plan to support your customers via Facebook? To learn how to use Facebook to support customers, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari also teamed up with Facebook to assist in educational events. Mari will explore a few new updates from Facebook and how to use Facebook for customer service and support. You'll discover how to create a good Facebook experience for your customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Supporting Customers With Facebook Recent Updates: Instant Articles and Facebook Messenger Mari believes Instant Articles were inspired by the video autoplay function on Facebook. Instant Articles, which make content more appealing, enticing and engaging, are only visible on the iPhone at this time. Introducing Instant Articles, a new tool for publishers to create fast, interactive articles on Facebook. Posted by Facebook Media on Tuesday, May 12, 2015   Currently there are only nine media partners that can create Instant Articles, which are posts that come alive with audio and movement on the page (animation, video). The New York Times, National Geographic, BuzzFeed, The Atlantic, The Guardian and BBC News are some of the publishers creating these interactive articles. Mari also shares about the changes to Facebook Messenger. At the F8 Conference in March 2015, Facebook announced they're opening up the Messenger API. This means any third-party developer can create an app that will work with Messenger. So if someone sends you a link to something in a Facebook message, it may ask you to install an app when you click on it. Messenger is also integrating with businesses, although there are only a few online merchants doing this as of now. With this functionality, when people make a purchase, Messenger will ask them if they want to get updates for this merchant via Facebook Messenger. That's almost as good as having a person's cell phone number, Mari explains, because there's a high open rate for SMS messages. Using this technology, merchants can make purchase recommendations or send shipment updates via Messenger, for example. It basically opens up the dialog between the business and the customer. Listen to the show to hear how Instant Articles are similar to LinkedIn Publisher. Why businesses should use Facebook for customer service Mari believes Facebook should be part of a business's customer service plan, since most people are already on Facebook and many use Facebook through mobile devices. Mari talks about how she was recently interviewed for a Wall Street Journal article on how companies like JP Morgan and Coca-Cola are turning off voicemail, and cutting millions of dollars in expenses by doing this. Mari thinks it's a sign of the times. The biggest challenge for businesses is that customers have so many different ways to contact them: a tweet or DM on Twitter or a Facebook wall post, comment or direct message. It can be unwieldy. Companies should also look at the features recently added for business pages on Facebook. The newest call to action button on ads is "Call Now." Facebook wants people to call businesses. They realize if a phone is in someone's hand, they can just press the Call button. The challenge is businesses would need to have staff on standby or a system in plac...

Sharing: The Art and Science of Social Sharing

Sharing: The Art and Science of Social Sharing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content for your business? Want to encourage people to share it? To explore the art and science of social sharing, I interview Bryan Kramer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Bryan Kramer, a social strategist and founder of PureMatter, a social media agency. His first book is Human to Human and his newest book is Shareology: How Sharing is Powering the Human Economy. Bryan will explore social sharing and what marketers need to know. You'll discover the different types of people who share, as well as mistakes people make when sharing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Sharing Why Bryan wrote Shareology Bryan explains that he started working on Shareology before he wrote Human to Human. "H2H was a surprise baby," Bryan says. He set Shareology aside and continued with the other, because the Human to Human philosophy seemed to resonate more. Plus, he says, Human to Human provides the best platform used for sharing and not the other way around. Shareology, which is two years in the making, is the study of how, what, where, when and why people and brands share. As a self-proclaimed anthropologist, Bryan has a lot of interest in the subject. Bryan says he always asks his audience what class they took on sharing. In kindergarten, kids learn how to share their toys, but that's about it. It's a skill people learn on top of school, and is part of some classes, like communications, but is not a focus. Social sharing comes in many different flavors, he explains. Meerkat and Periscope are new flavors, but there are so many more. Shareology focuses on the evolution of sharing: the past, present and future. Listen to the show to learn how people shared articles before social media. Why people share For the book Bryan did more than 250 interviews with executives, marketers and social media people, as well as professors of linguistics, psychology, sociology and so on, with the question "why people share" in mind. The answer came down to one thing: connection. People all have the desire to reach out and connect with other people, whether it's through sharing content and having someone reply back or by sharing other people's content and helping them out. These are the six types of people who share: Altruist: Someone who shares something specific about one topic all the time. Careerist: Someone who wants to become a thought leader in their own industry, so they can see their career grow. Hipster: Someone who likes to try things for the first time and share it faster than everyone else. Boomerang: Someone who asks a question so they can receive a comment only to reply. (This can be a troll, but not necessarily. It can be a positive or a negative situation.) Connector: Someone who likes to connect one or more persons to each other. Selective: This is the observer, which some people call a lurker. The majority of the internet observes and then selectively picks pieces to direct or private message other people. Bryan says, while people ebb and flow between different types, we all tend to lean toward one. For example, tech evangelist Robert Scoble is primarily a Hipster, but it doesn't mean he isn't a Careerist or a Selective too. Bryan also touches on the future of sharing. Bryan interviewed the chief scientist of Watson Analytics and learned the computer system Watson (the computer that defeated the other players in Jeopardy!) will be able to tweet in such a way that you'll never know if it's a person or a computer.

3 Instagram Analytics Tools for Marketers

3 Instagram Analytics Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your business ready for Instagram's algorithm? Looking for tools to analyze your Instagram engagement? Tracking engagement will help you serve quality content that keeps you at the top of the Instagram feed. In this article you'll discover three tools to track and evaluate how people respond to your content on Instagram. Listen to this article: Instagram's Feed Algorithm Last week, Instagram announced that they'll be releasing an algorithm that will prioritize what's shown in users' feeds. This algorithm will determine what content Instagram believes people will be most interested in and then show the most relevant posts at the top of the feed, regardless of how many accounts users follow or what time zone they're in. If you do content marketing on Facebook, you know how important it is to make sure you're ranked highly within a social media platform's algorithm. Algorithms that prioritize content in a user's feed can (and will) inevitably affect your business on those platforms. When the Instagram algorithm kicks in, maintaining high levels of engagement will help keep your content on top, whether you're a small company or a large one. Why You Need Instagram Analytics Tools As the algorithm launch approaches, it's important to use analytics tools to see which portion of your Instagram audience is interacting with what content, what content is performing best, and which audience segments you may be missing. As you learn from these analytics, you can create stronger and more relevant content that your audience will be more receptive to. Though Instagram shares the same ad platform as Facebook, the platform does not yet have an analytics tool like Facebook's Insights and Audience Insights. Fortunately, there are a number of third-party Instagram analytics tools available for businesses and marketers to measure their marketing efforts. The following three tools will help you to track and evaluate the success of your content and overall marketing efforts on Instagram. #1: Simply Measured Simply Measured advertises its analytics tool as being the "end-to-end analysis of all your social media networks," and this includes Instagram. It can be a great tool for marketers. Simply Measured offers a variety of reports and analyses, some of which are free and some are available only with a paid plan. When you first visit the site, you can get a free user report on any Instagram account (with up to 25,000 followers) in exchange for following the company on Twitter. This user report provides an in-depth analysis of the past two months, including your top post, best days and hours for engagement, top photo tags, top filters, and the amount and types of engagement you've received on your posts. Additional analytics tools come with pricing plans starting at $500 a month, and include features like cross-platform analysis, social brand and hashtag monitoring, and the ability to add unlimited users to the account at no additional charge. #2: Iconosquare Iconosquare is a go-to tool for anything Instagram, including contests, management tools, and so on. It's also true for analytics. Iconosquare's analytics allow you to track important metrics like follower growth and losses, best times to post for maximum engagement, engagement rates, and engagement growth. It also shows your best performing content, both in terms of likes and comments. Iconosquare offers a 7-day free trial, during which you can access the analytics information to see if the tool is right for you and for your business's needs. The plus plan is currently $28.80 a year and includes features like daily email reports, comment trackers, and analytics on the key Instagram metrics discussed above. #3: Sprout Social Sprout Social is a popular tool that many businesses already use, and it offers detailed reporting on a profile's Instagram activity. You can find analytics under the Reports section.

LinkedIn Marketing: New Features to Enhance Your LinkedIn Results

LinkedIn Marketing: New Features to Enhance Your LinkedIn Results

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for your business? Are you wondering how LinkedIn can help your online marketing? To learn more about the new capabilities of LinkedIn and what they mean for marketers, I interview Viveka von Rosen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Viveka von Rosen, founder of Linked Into Business and author of the new book, LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day. Viveka shares insights into what's new with LinkedIn and how marketers can cash in on all that LinkedIn is doing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Marketing How LinkedIn Company Pages Are Evolving Viveka shares how LinkedIn is becoming more autonomous with their Company Pages. Although functionality has not changed much on LinkedIn Company Pages and they still need to build a more dynamic social destination, the look and design have changed recently. Company Pages are more vibrant. There's a new banner photo across the top, which adds to the branding possibilities and the attractiveness of Company Pages. Want to create a banner? Make your photo 646 x 220 pixels in size. This new design means that people will go beyond one-on-one connections and follow Company Pages. Listen to the show to hear how the new Company Page allows you to build a business following that could lead to a personal following. How Targeted Updates Work Viveka explains how LinkedIn has focused more on Targeted Updates. When sharing updates on your Company Page, you can now target the audience you want to reach. For example, you can choose to share specific updates with everyone who is following you or choose a specific industry or location. And LinkedIn also provides companies with statistics on their results when sharing these updates. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4NqapW7FE6I Listen to the show to find out more about the statistics in your company updates. How to Drive Followers With Your Company Page You can put a Company Follow widget on your website to drive people directly to your company profile. Of course, you can also put the link to your Company Page in your email signature. Viveka recommends letting people know why they should follow your Company Page. You need to tell people what they are going to get out of it. You'll discover how content on an active LinkedIn Company Page has a greater propensity to show up in the LinkedIn Today section of the website. Listen to the show to hear how LinkedIn Today can work for you. What Is the Influencer Program? At present on LinkedIn, there are about 152 influencers whom you can follow on LinkedIn. These thought leaders include President Barack Obama, Governor Mitt Romney, Jeff Weiner (CEO of LinkedIn), Guy Kawasaki and Arianna Huffington (Huffington Post). Viveka explains how you get a sense of interaction with these individuals, as the articles they are sharing are more than just updates. One of the advantages of being an influencer is you are able to write longer blog-style articles that get shared. Viveka says that right now, LinkedIn is choosing who gets to be an influencer. It's uncertain when this is going to be available to everyone else. It's LinkedIn's way of trying to create a more content-rich platform (people tend to think of LinkedIn as a "Rolodex on steroids"). It's a great opportunity to get some inside information from these influencers. Listen to the show to find out how you can share this content across other social networks.

"SEO San Jose" Keyword help

by @mariad Maria Daniel @ "SEO San Jose" Keyword help

@mariad wrote:

Helping should be the prime thing.

Read full topic

Promoted Pins: How to Advertise on Pinterest

Promoted Pins: How to Advertise on Pinterest

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest promoted pins? Want to discover how they work? To explore everything you need to know about promoted pins on Pinterest, I interview Vincent Ng. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Vincent Ng, president of MCNG Marketing and author of Pinterest to Profits with Pintalysis. Vincent helps businesses succeed with Pinterest marketing and visual social media. Vincent explores Pinterest promoted pins. You'll discover what's new with promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Promoted Pins At a basic level, Vincent says, promoted pins are Pinterest advertising. As you scroll through your Pinterest feed and see "Promoted by" on a pin, that means it's advertising. He notes that any pin you want to promote must be a public pin, and says you can even promote something you've repinned! What's New With Promoted Pins? Pinterest recently announced promoted video pins, which, at the moment, are specifically for users on mobile. These pins show an animated GIF and lead you to a full video when you click on them. What's really cool, Vincent shares, is that you can put up to six additional pins below the video on your promoted pin for no extra cost. The six additional pins display like a carousel under the video, and you can use them to promote the product in the video or share additional information about it. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ufVJ3oqpQQ8 While video pins currently send users to third-party players like YouTube to view the video promoted in the pin, Pinterest is working on its own native video player, which will be rolled out to everybody soon. Once available, people will be able to upload videos directly to Pinterest. Listen to the show to hear what video lengths Vincent has seen on Pinterest. What Can You Do With Promoted Pins? Vincent says you can reach a large audience with promoted pins, and that Pinterest allows you to create ad campaigns based on three main business goals: awareness, engagement, and traffic. Brand awareness campaigns let you promote your pin to an audience and you pay based on a thousand impressions. With engagement campaigns, you're charged every time someone taps and enlarges your pin, repins your pin, saves your pin, or clicks your pin. During traffic campaigns, you pay for every click-through on your pin. Vincent says the great thing about promoted pins is that you pay only for the direct promotion, meaning that if a user clicks on someone's share of your promoted pin, that click is free for you. In fact, Pinterest says users get an average of 30% free engagement when they conduct promoted pin campaigns. Which type of campaign is the most cost-effective? Vincent says that he agrees with Pinterest peers Alisa Meredith and Jeff Sieh, who both find the cost-per-click campaigns offer the best bang for your buck versus engagement campaigns. Why? About 80% of Pinterest users access the app on mobile, so they'll enlarge your pin to get a better look at your product. If it's not what they want, they don't necessarily click through. Vincent says it's also possible to run split tests with promoted pins because each campaign type provides the same level of metrics. After you run your test, go to your advertising dashboard and export the data to see which campaign type is a more cost-effective option for your business Pinterest also offers promoted pin users robust targeting capabilities, Vincent says, including by keywords and interests. Pinterest users are asked to follow five interests when they sign up,

Instagram Contests: Tools and Tips for Marketers

Instagram Contests: Tools and Tips for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase engagement on Instagram? Have you thought about Instagram contests? Instagram contests are a great way to get people talking about your business and increase your followers. In this article you'll discover tools and tips to help marketers run a successful Instagram contest. #1: Follow Contest Rules When you're hosting or promoting any kind of contest, you have to follow certain rules. Here are the guidelines for running an Instagram contest: Listen to this article: Don't inaccurately tag content or users, and don't encourage participants to inaccurately tag content or other users. For example, don't ask users to tag themselves in photos if they aren't actually in the photos. Acknowledge that your contest isn't associated with or supported by Instagram. You don't need a neon sign stating this. Just be sure you're not inadvertently making it seem like Instagram is endorsing your promotion. Follow proper eligibility requirements. Some businesses feature products or offer prizes that have age or residency restrictions. If you're a winery, for example, clarify that users must be 21 and older to participate. While most of these guidelines fall under the umbrella of common sense, it's important to make note of them. It's easy to forget about audience restrictions or forget to state them. #2: Pick a Contest Type If you're planning to run a promotion or contest on Instagram, you'll have to decide what type of contest to run, how it will operate and how users can participate. Here are some different types of Instagram contests to consider. Comment on the Post Contests This is a popular type of Instagram contest where you ask users to comment on your post. For example, you might ask fans what their favorite flavor of ice cream is. Asking a question generates engagement because users have to engage beyond simply liking the post. Beauty by Earth asked fans to like and comment on their Instagram post for a chance to win a free exfoliating sponge set. To follow up with contest winners, the company tagged the winners in an Instagram post with a request to privately send their contact information. Like the Post Contests Another type of Instagram contest is to ask fans to like the post that's advertising the contest. While this tactic can generate some engagement, and fans are likely to participate because it's easy to do, many businesses would rather see a more deliberate interaction like commenting. Post Your Own Photo Contests For this type of contest, you ask fans to post their own Instagram images along with the contest hashtag. Make it clear to fans which hashtag they should use to participate. That makes it easy for you to find them and lets you know who's entering the contest. Starbucks' Red Cup Contest generates a ton of engagement and attention each year. Fans are asked to post photos of their red cup moments with the hashtag #redcupcontest. Combine Contests You can also combine several of these contest types. For example, you might ask users to like your post and comment, or follow your brand and upload their own posts with a certain hashtag. Keep in mind that you don't want to ask users only to follow you, because you can't track this action effectively or reliably. #3: Choose a Tool to Manage Your Contest You'll find a number of great tools to set up, run and manage your Instagram contests. Because Instagram has made it clear that they won't be associated with or help support any contests on the platform, all of the tools available for managing contests are from third-party companies. Here are three to consider: Gleam Gleam's contest platform makes it easy to host a contest on Instagram, and comes with a slew of helpful features. The company boasts an average of four actions per user in their competitions. The interface is easy to use and straightforward, featuring a dashboard with current and scheduled competitio...

Establishing Trust: How to Build Relationships With Social Media

Establishing Trust: How to Build Relationships With Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how to best build a platform with social media? Do you want to learn how to build trusted relationships online? To explore how to establish trust with social media, I interview Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chris Brogan, CEO of Human Business Works and author of several books including The Impact Equation. Chris shares his experiences in building trust online, and the importance of having a blog if you want to grow the reach and exposure of your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Trust, Online How social media has changed Chris talks about his views on how social media has changed over the last 3 years. He shares that when he co-founded an event called Podcamp in 2006, he believed podcasting and video blogging were going to change the world. You'll hear Chris share what matters today in social media and how he feels podcasting has recently made a comeback. He explains that email marketing isn't dead—it's bad email marketing that's dead. Instead we need to be more personable and relationship-minded. Chris describes how platforms have come and gone and why it's community that really matters. Listen to the show to find out why community has stayed the same since Chris started. How to make your social media audiences count Chris talks about why only having a Twitter feed is like living in a hotel room and thinking you've made it. He shares the reasons why we need a place to call our own. Chris explains the importance of having a blog or a website. You need to have a "primary home base," as it's the ultimate centerpiece that you need to use any social platforms. If you don't have one, you're throwing away your opportunity for business and influence. Listen to the show to find out how Chris's blog has attracted business opportunities. How to obtain "reach" Chris shares how the larger structure of The Impact Equation is the idea that if you have really good goals, they will drive unique ideas. Next, you need a platform where people can see those ideas. You need a human element or a network of values. You need people who care about the information you share online. These are the components of social media success. Chris explains his definitions of reach and exposure. He describes ways of achieving audience capture. When you have a basic website but don't have an email newsletter, you have a passive connection to your audience. When you only have a Twitter account, you have a very passive connection with your audience. This is because people don't know how to get back to the "meat" of what you're saying. Listen to the show to find out great ways to increase your reach. How to gain trust online Chris shares the common problems people face when it comes to being human across the web. We are born looking for faces and need to see people on the other side of our communication. You'll hear why your "About" page is relevant and it's not just about logos. Chris explains how historically business was based on face-to-face networking and the difference now that things are moving online. Chris talks about the "comma problem" and how marketers can improve their email pitches. Learn why it's not simply about pressing the +1 on complete strangers. As Guy Kawasaki said, "Nobody is from nowhere." If somebody is of value to you, you find ways to express that and it'll go a lot further than hitting the +1 button.

Local SEO for Small Businesses

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Local SEO for Small Businesses The organic search results are already a tough place to fight for top rankings. Local search results? Even harder. Besides traditional SEO, there are a variety of local SEO ranking factors that small businesses and even larger franchises have to worry about when jockeying for the top positions for localized […]

5 Free Ways to Build Your Personal Brand on LinkedIn

5 Free Ways to Build Your Personal Brand on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to build your visibility on LinkedIn? Wondering which LinkedIn features can help? LinkedIn can help you build a professional presence that showcases your work to the people you most want to connect with. In this article, you'll discover five free ways to help you build a personal brand on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your LinkedIn Profile Your profile is the key component of your experience on LinkedIn. A complete profile shows you're actively participating in the LinkedIn ecosystem. Did you know that you can make your profile seven times more likely to be found in searches by adding a profile photo? Or that you can make your profile twelve times more likely to be found by showing your two most recent employment positions? The following tips will make a difference and help your LinkedIn profile pop: To start, add a professional profile picture. Your picture is your virtual handshake, so pick a friendly profile picture that aligns with your role. Choose a square profile picture, recommended at 400 x 400 pixels, and stay under 10 MB in file size. If either width or height exceeds 20,000 pixels, your photo will not upload. Next, create a distinctive LinkedIn profile headline. By default, the headline is your current employment position; however, you can customize it to demonstrate your expertise or vision for your role. Think of your headline as your brand's tagline. It's the first description many people will see, so make it count! Headlines should call upon the words and phrases your friends and colleagues use to uniquely describe you. For example, "trusted Mac expert" or "experienced admin assistant who never misses a deadline." In addition, use your LinkedIn background to communicate more about who you are and what you do. Think about blank billboards along the highway. Those are missed opportunities. The same could be said for your LinkedIn background photo (the photo that displays above your name and headline). Many LinkedIn members use stock photos, nature snapshots, or city skylines for the background image. However, you can use that space to do much more than show off your hometown. Use the background space for content stream promotions, miniature portfolios, credibility-building, publications, photos of you influencing others, and more. Identify your personal brand by using a photo to express an interest secondary to your résumé, but which points to your personal life or work ethic. Next, customize your LinkedIn URL and share it everywhere. For personal branding, attach everything on the web to your full name, and climb as high as you can in the search rankings. LinkedIn's vanity URLs can help you do just that. As a major website, LinkedIn has a high Google PageRank. Using a URL like this, linkedin.com/in/yourfullname, means you'll likely see your name rank pretty high, too. Tip: Add your personalized link to all other social streams, like your blog, email signature, online résumé, Twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn SlideShare. Finally, tell your story using the Summary and Experience sections. Your LinkedIn profile should be more than a quick copy-and-paste of your résumé. The Summary is where you can share a bit more about your vision for your role or company. You can also include personal anecdotes about activities you enjoy outside work. Your Experience section should include a tidy list of the key positions you've held, and briefly explain your roles. You can also detail your educational background. Uploading rich media (videos, images, and presentations) and content you've created or produced as part of a team is a great way to bring your description to life. Tips: Use a keyword-rich approach that makes your profile easier to find. Take out overused words like motivated, passionate, responsible, creative, and driven. And add multimedia content to your profile from written posts on LinkedIn Publisher...

Mobile SEO Missteps That Will Come Back to Haunt You

by SearchEngineOptimization @ Simply Design

Mobile users have become just as important, if not more so, than desktop users when it comes to your search engine optimization practices. If you’re not reaching or keeping your mobile users, you’re missing out on a huge possible customer base. Mobile SEO isn’t quite the same as desktop SEO, and it comes with its […]

The post Mobile SEO Missteps That Will Come Back to Haunt You appeared first on Simply Design.

Relationship Marketing: How to Secure Guests Who Become Allies

Relationship Marketing: How to Secure Guests Who Become Allies

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow better relationships with market influencers? Are you wondering if interviewing people can help your business? To learn how interviewing people can help build power relationships for your business, I interview John Lee Dumas for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview John Lee Dumas, author of the book Podcast Launch and host of the EntrepreneurOnFire podcast—a top-ranked business podcast. John's podcast is a daily show and he has interviewed more than 600 business owners! John shares how he got started with his podcast, how he attracts so many top guests and why he chose his format and niche. You'll discover the benefits that come from the relationships you build through podcasts before, during and after the show is released. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Relationship Marketing John's interview technique when he first started out John explains that he had to work at his interview technique every single day. The very first interviews he ever did were for the EntrepreneurOnFire podcast. He says that if you listen to his first 50 episodes, it's obvious that he was new to it. Before John started his own podcast, he loved listening to the likes of Andrew Warner of Mixergy, Pat Flynn of Smart Passive Income and David Siteman Garland of Rise To The Top. He noticed that nobody was doing a 7-day-a-week show, and decided to give it a go. Although he knew he wouldn't be great in the beginning, he knew he had to start somewhere. So he reached out to people in the space to see if they would talk to him. You'll hear why John batch-processes his interviews for the week ahead, and how many episodes he did before he felt like he had settled in. John is now around the 608th episode mark. When you host a podcast, you need to come across as authentic. John advises anyone who is hesitant to host a show to just start talking into a microphone and have some fun. Listen to the show to find out why you don't have to edit out every imperfection when you first start out. The underlying premise to the strategy for EntrepreneurOnFire John says that he truly wanted to build a lifestyle business that he could be passionate about. To be able to do this, he knew he had to grow an audience. He had to become a leader in a particular area, industry and niche. When John listened to podcasts, he connected with them straightaway. He felt like he was having close relationships with the hosts and their guests—people he had never met. He says it's like being the third person in a conversation when you listen to these shows. For John to be able to do a show, he knew he had to be a little bit different and come up with a unique selling proposition. This is when he had his "Ah-ha" moment for a 7-day-a-week podcast. He realized that if he could interview the likes of Amy Porterfield and Adam Baker, and get them to share their journey on his platform, then he could potentially build his audience. You'll hear what John did to help him overcome his fear of rejection so he could build his platform from day one. Listen to the show to hear the story behind how John and I first connected. How interviewing the pros has helped John's business John's goal from the very beginning has been to interview people who not only talk about what they are successful with right now, but also share their failings along the way. John really wanted to break it down so it would connect with his lis...

12 Things To Learn To Become A Successful Blogger

by Matt Smith @ Online Income Teacher

Written by Matt Smith for Online Income Teacher

I got a question emailed to me today from a reader asking exactly what he needed to learn about in order to become a successful blogger.  Well that isn’t the easiest question to answer in a simple email as there is SO MUCH that goes into becoming a blogger that […]

The post 12 Things To Learn To Become A Successful Blogger appeared first on Online Income Teacher.

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

Failure: Why Taking Risks and Failing Is the Path to Success

Failure: Why Taking Risks and Failing Is the Path to Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you experienced a failure in your business (or your life)? Would you like to discover how to turn failures into success and real growth? For this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast, I'll explore why failure is important and the lessons I've learned from a major failure that happened to me this year. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. You'll discover the importance of failure in your work and your life, reasons you should embrace failure, and how the lessons and discoveries you make can help you succeed. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Embracing Failure Why a show on failure? As C.S. Lewis said, "Failures are finger posts on the road to achievement." As we fail, we are pointed in a direction. We learn a lot from failures because they can help us get better. We focus so much on success stories and what works that we often overlook the unmentioned road of failure, challenges, errors and mistakes that inevitably led to every single one of those success stories. In 2014, I had a really big failure. In fact, it was my biggest failure ever. Many people don't know about it and this show is the first time I've spoken about it publicly. I would like to share what went wrong, the lessons I learned and the importance of failure to your business, marketing and life. Listen to the show to hear why failure is so important to your business and life. The importance of failure and reasons to embrace it Henry Ford offers this great quote: "The only real mistake is the one from which we learn nothing." The path that we go down is meant to have challenges and mistakes. It's what strengthens us and makes us better. Here are three reasons you should embrace failure: 1. It's part of the entrepreneur's journey. Whether or not you consider yourself an entrepreneur or business owner, this lesson applies to everyone. Nearly every definition of "entrepreneur" focuses on the word risk. Risk is at the core of all business breakthroughs and success. With risk comes failure. It's inevitable and it's okay. 2. Nothing ventured. Nothing gained. If you're not willing to float a new idea for your company, experiment with your marketing or launch a new venture, the opportunity that sits in front of that idea will never manifest. It will never come true. You'll never really grow. Social Media Examiner is my third major business venture in the last 18 years. It followed a design agency and a white paper writing consultancy, both of which were very successful and have since shut down. In 2009, I started the media company which you now know as Social Media Examiner. Along the way, I tried and failed at a lot of things. You'll hear four examples of my terrible failures, and why I didn't let these failures stop me or get me down. 3. New discoveries are born in the ashes of failure. The most important reason to embrace failure is that it makes way for new opportunities to grow into awesome things. There's no better time than right after you crash and burn to reflect on what you've done wrong and really learn from it. I love this quote from Zig Ziglar: "It's not how far you fall, but how high you bounce that counts." You have to try, experiment, fail and do it over and over again. In summary, failure is a necessary part of the process of making new discoveries. Listen to the show to discover how two of America's most famous businessmen never gave up on their discoveries and why their persistence paid off. My story In July 2013, I launched My Kids' Adventures,

How Wikipedia Citations Help SEO & Rankings | seoWorks™

How Wikipedia Citations Help SEO & Rankings | seoWorks™


seoWorks

Wikipedia links are all NoFollow, but that doesn't mean they shouldn't be a part of your SEO plan. Find out how Wikipedia can help your SEO strategy.

8 Ways to Effectively Manage Your Facebook Marketing

8 Ways to Effectively Manage Your Facebook Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is Facebook taking up all your time? Interested in ways to maximize your workflow? When you streamline your work and know exactly where to look for the right information, your job becomes easier. In this article you'll discover eight ways to manage your Facebook marketing more effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Maximize Page Notifications You can get notifications for your page while you're on Facebook (click the world icon at the top of your page) or via email or text message. To adjust your notification settings, go to the Settings area of your page and select Notifications in the left sidebar. If you have multiple Facebook pages, you'll manage each page's notifications differently depending on how actively you want to monitor it. When you get notifications within Facebook, the information is more limited when you're logged in as your profile, but you do get some of the more important notifications that you specify. Click on a notification to get more information. When you're logged in as your page, you're acting as your Facebook page on Facebook (which is a good idea for making comments on other pages). To log in as your page, click the down arrow in the upper-right corner and select the Use Facebook As option you want. Or click See More for more options. Now the notifications symbol at the top of Facebook is specific for your page, and you can see new likes and messages. You also should check your notifications area regularly so you can see what's happening on your page at a glance each day. This is especially helpful because there may be activity on older posts. #2: Set Your Post Attribution Correctly Sometimes you may want to comment as your personal profile rather than your Facebook page. You can control this for each post individually or set a default preference in the Settings area. To change your identity for the comment or the like on an individual post, click the icon in the lower-right corner of the post and select how you want to post from the drop-down menu. If you want to set your default preference for how you comment on your page, go to the Settings area of your page and select Post Attribution. This works well if you aren't doing as much posting on the page and want to comment more frequently as your personal profile. #3: Review Page Admin Access to Stay Secure Reviewing the admins of your page is an important step toward making your page more secure. Make sure you're giving full admin control only to people you trust as full admins, because they have the power to remove the other admins or even delete your page. If someone's Facebook account was hacked, your page could be at risk. If you're an admin of other pages that you no longer work with, it's a good idea to remove yourself as an admin to reduce your own liability. To access the list of your admins, go to Settings and select Page Roles in the left sidebar. If you're a full admin of the page, click the X next to the admins who no longer need access. #4: Check Where You're Logged In Another security risk is being logged into Facebook from multiple locations. You might be shocked to find out that some sessions are still active. It's a good idea to end the activity to protect your account and your Facebook page. To find out what sessions are active, go to the Settings area on your personal profile, select Security in the left sidebar and click Where You're Logged In to see all of your sessions. Click End Activity next to the sessions you aren't using. #5: Curate Content With the Save Feature Finding good content to share is always a challenge, and sometimes you'll run across a good piece of content on Facebook that you want to share, but not right at that moment. Or maybe you don't have time to read the full article at that time but want to bookmark it. The Save feature can help you batch your work and bookmark good posts to share later.

Facebook Advertising 101: How to Get Started With Facebook Ads

Facebook Advertising 101: How to Get Started With Facebook Ads

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you considering running Facebook ads? Have you tried Facebook ads but have had little success? To discover how to run successful Facebook ad campaigns, I interview Amy Porterfield. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She's also the former Facebook community manager for Social Media Examiner. Amy will explore what you need to know to get started with Facebook ads, plus you'll discover the benefits of running Facebook ad campaigns. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Advertising 101 How Amy got started in social media and Facebook Amy became interested in social media when she was still in the corporate world. She worked for Tony Robbins for about six and a half years as director of content development. In that last year Tony got heavily into social media (he did his own Twitter), and Amy worked on Tony's Facebook page. Amy got the entrepreneurial bug, and knew she wanted to go out on her own. She fell in love with social media and she knew that was the area to pursue. While still in the corporate sphere, Amy started educating herself. She asked to be involved with anything related to online marketing and social media. About a year later, she took the leap and left the corporate world. Amy started by doing social media consulting, but eventually built a business around online training courses related to social media marketing. Listen to the show to discover how Amy and I first connected, and our first experience at Blog World. Why use Facebook ads? Facebook does a lot to help marketers find their ideal audience online. Amy believes the targeting capabilities on Facebook are far more advanced than any other social media platform. Facebook allows people to get in front of their perfect audience on a regular basis. Amy breaks down the Facebook targeting options. If you've built up a Facebook business page and have a few thousand fans, start with targeting them. It's the cheapest way to target on Facebook, since you don't pay as much when you target your own fans versus a cold audience. The next thing to do is create a lookalike audience of your own fan base. You tell Facebook that you have these fans, and you want to target people who are similar in likes, interests, activities and behavior. Facebook will give you an audience that's very similar to the one you've already attracted. Then upload your email list to Facebook. Facebook will compare it to their database, and when they find a match, they put the contact in a bucket. This allows you to target people who are already on your email list with a new opportunity. Also, take that email list and ask Facebook to find a lookalike audience. Amy adds a couple of other targeting options to the mix. Target fans of other Facebook pages, such as your competitors or people who are aligned with your business. Amy says the reason she mentioned the other options first is that sometimes when people are first starting out and go to look for similar interests, they struggle to find Facebook pages to pop up. For example, when you put together your ad, if you type "Amy Porterfield" in interests, her page will likely pop up, and you can target her fans. But a lot of pages won't populate, Amy explains. Facebook says it has to do with trending, activity, engagement and how many fans you have. Amy suggests trying to find five pages and target their fans. Another one of Amy's favorite techniques is to re...

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to start a live video show? Want to know which tools you'll need to broadcast live? To explore the best live video apps and software to produce your own live show, I interview Ian Anderson Gray. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Anderson Gray, the founder of Seriously Social, a blog focused on social media tools. Ian is also a live video tools expert. His courses include Seriously Social OBS Studio and Seriously Social Wirecast. Ian explores the best live video software for beginning and advanced broadcasters. You'll discover which software and add-ons offer the features you need. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Tools Ian's Live Video Story When Facebook Live started rolling out, Ian felt like everyone had access before he did, because he was an Android user (at the time) living in the United Kingdom. In his search for a workaround, Ian discovered OBS Studio, a free tool for Macs and PCs. With OBS Studio, Ian found a way to broadcast from his computer to his Facebook page, profile, and groups. That was his entry into Facebook Live and live video. Ian wrote a blog post on how to broadcast from your computer with OBS Studio and went out of his way to make the process as easy as possible for people to understand. He even included a tool that allows people to get the magic stream key necessary to broadcast with OBS Studio. Since Ian posted the article last year, the article has had just under three million views. Listen to the show to discover what platform Ian tried using before Facebook Live. What Stops Marketers From Going Live? Two things stop marketers from going live: "the fear and the gear." But Ian believes fear is what really gets in people's way. People are afraid they'll say something silly or wrong. They might be worried their cat will jump on the keyboard, the webcam will fall over, and it will be a complete disaster. Or maybe they're afraid others will think they're a fraud. Marketers also have issues with technology. People think they can't go live because they don't have this webcam, that phone, or a decent lighting setup. Those are excuses for people who are simply scared of getting on camera and communicating their message. Everyone gets nervous, explains Ian, who's trained as a professional singer. He feels it too. The key is to channel your nervous energy into your performance. If you feel nervous or scared, Ian says, it's a good thing. It shows you care. The best performance Ian ever gave was when he was absolutely petrified before he went on stage. The worst performance was when he was entirely complacent. He thought the performance would be absolutely fine, and it turned out to be a disaster. To help you overcome that fear, Ian recommends warming up your voice before each broadcast. Exercise the lower part of your voice up to the high part of your voice. These exercises will likely make you feel a bit more at ease. Also, when you warm up, using the high and low parts makes your voice more engaging. By using your vocal range, you're not trying to become a different person. You're heightening your personality by putting more energy behind it. Listen to the show to hear Ian's example of a vocal warm-up and what your voice might sound like if you don't warm up. Basic Apps The easiest apps for live broadcasting are web-based. Fire up your browser (Safari, Chrome, Internet Explorer, etc.), and go to the tool's web page. BeLive, probably the best-known app, has an advantage because has a free trial. You can broadcast up to two 20-minute broadcasts...

How 3 Gym Owners Increased Revenues, Membership, and Peace of Mind Using These Principles

by Matt Scanlon @ 321GoProject

There’s no doubt that owning a CrossFit gym is difficult. You wear every hat imaginable – coach, janitor, friend, bookkeeper, and Chief Marketing Officer. Often times, your days get so busy you don’t have time to build a growth plan for your business. But with a little direction and consistency you can build some momentum, focus on the important stuff, and have a plan going forward. I’d like to introduce you to three gym owners who have seen some remarkable results over the last year and the principles they used to get there. Each of these gym owners have joined hundreds of others from around the world to execute on growing their business using educational courses and templates from the Hub as well as accountability through M3 Mastermind Groups and the 321Go Think Tank Facebook Group. Meet Dave: 300% Profit increase since 2016 “…since the close of 2016, CrossFit Spero has increased gross revenues 39% while operating expenses have only increased 9%. We have gone from a gym that was just barely in the black to a thriving business with big plans for our future.” How’d he get here? Principle #1: Know Your Starting Line As small business owners, it’s easy to get the “shiny object syndrome.” We scroll through some posts in a Facebook group or forum and grasp at straws to find that “one thing that works.” Unfortunately there is no “One Thing.” Just consistent, constant improvement through focused effort. “I think the tool that has been the most directly helpful is the ‘Business Check-Up.’ When I started I was somewhere in the low 20s for the basic assessment. I re-did the checkup in late March and I am now 37/42” By having some objective rubric, you’re able to knock out the important things first as you scale...

How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways

How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want enthusiastic fans? Looking for unique ways to engage your audience? To discover how he grew a large and thriving fan base, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, the founder of SmartPassiveIncome.com, a website dedicated to helping people start businesses. He's also host of the Smart Passive Income podcast and author of Will It Fly? Pat explores unconventional ways to build loyalty with your fans. You'll discover which forms of content are better than others for creating raving fans. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways The Beginning of Smart Passive Income Pat built the Smart Passive Income blog in the latter half of 2008 as a way to showcase how he was finding success with Green Exam Academy, a website with resources to help people pass the architecture exam. On the blog, Pat shared how he'd built his business, things he wished he would have done, and mistakes he made. In October 2008, he started including income reports (how many products he sold and how much money he made), not to show off but to provide inspiration. Pat believes that by keeping people in the loop of his activities and leading by example, others benefit from his knowledge. Over time, the Smart Passive Income blog became more about experimenting with new tactics, documenting, and sharing what Pat learned along the way. Pat says that's how he became known as the crash test dummy of online business. Back in 2008, if you had told Pat that he would be a leader in this space, he says he would have laughed. He didn't think that was what he wanted. Now Pat is owning the role, trying to lead by example and starting a movement of authentic entrepreneurship. Listen to the show to hear Pat explain more about crash test dummies. Nurturing Fans in the Early Days While Pat got a lot of encouragement via the comments on his blog for the first couple of years, he never thought of those commenters as fans. Then in July 2010, he started his podcast. Later that year, strangers came up to him at a conference and chatted like they were old friends. Nobody at the conference mentioned his blog. Pat thinks his fans connected more through the podcast rather than his blog because they viewed the podcast as more real. He explains that the written word gives you a feel for who a person is, but a podcast puts you in the ears of your listeners. For listeners, the feeling is similar to being part of a conversation. Pat says he's very much himself on air, and shares personal tidbits in each episode to help his audience relate to and connect with him. For example, at the beginning of every show, Pat's voiceover guy John Melley (who does our intros in a different accent) reads a random fun fact about Pat. For example, "Here's your host. He's a Sagittarius who loves long walks on the beach: Pat Flynn." or "Here's your host. He was an 11-pound, 12-ounce baby." Pat says he once met a woman at a conference who told him she loved his show and randomly added, "When I had my baby, he was also a giant." That small fact immediately connected them, because she could relate. When you share fun little facts about yourself, Pat notes, people can find something they have in common with you and decide to follow you. This isn't true only for podcasts; the same thing can happen on your blog or your video channel. Listen to the show to discover Pat's thoughts on using video versus a podcast to connect with people. Being Yourself

4 Things You Can do TODAY, (for FREE), to Help Lay the Foundation for a Strong Online Presence

by admin @ FORWARD marketing

The world of digital marketing is ever-changing, and sometimes it’s difficult to figure out where to start.  As a marketer who has worked with hundreds of businesses of all types throughout the years, I still find it amazing how many business owners don’t take some of the most basic steps (on top of creating a […]

A Guide to International SEO: Strategies and Guidelines

by Natalie Severt @ Unamo Blog

You have a business. Your business has a website. You use localized keyword research and traditional SEO tactics to help your business rank well online. You have a diversified backlink profile and high domain authority. Congratulations! But now you want to expand. And this is where it gets complicated. How do you create an international […]

Free Webinar – Your Recipe for SEO Success – June 5th 12pm MST

by 321go @ 321GoProject

Your Recipe for SEO Success Do you understand the importance of ranking high on google,  as it could be the difference between getting a lead/client or not! Do you have all the FAQs? Have you tried to go at it along with/without results? We asked ourselves, what are the top performing box websites doing to rank high in Google? More important than ranking on Google is figuring out how people search and make sure you show up in those listings. Basically people could find your business through various ways. Maybe on Yelp, a video, blog post, Facebook, Twitter, link on another website. It’s not just Google. The idea is to be proactive and make sure that you are in front of people when they are searching for you. Details: (REVISED DATE:) Friday June 5th 12pm MST, 2pm EST Host: Clay Weldon and Josh Sturgeon Topic: Your Recipe for SEO Success This FREE webinar features our resident SEO expert, Josh Sturgeon

4 Ways to Humanize Your Social Media Updates

4 Ways to Humanize Your Social Media Updates

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create better engagement with your fans and followers? Wondering how your business can come across as more human? Engaging on social media with authenticity helps you turn online connections into customers who feel like they know you. In this article, you'll discover four ways to humanize your engagement on social media. Listen to this article: Why Humanize Social Media Content? Setting up social media accounts and gathering faceless followers who never interact with your brand isn't enough in today's competitive marketplace. What you really need are followers that engage with your brand, form emotional connections, and become an audience of loyal customers. Unfortunately, many businesses treat their social media accounts more like advertising channels than vehicles to create lasting and honest relationships with customers. In response, people have learned to tune out promotional messages and accounts that talk only about themselves and focus on the features of their products, not the needs of their customers. If this describes your company, your messages may not be reaching your ideal audience. If you treat your followers like friends, it can make all the difference when it comes to your social media strategy. Pause for a second and think about your own personal social media accounts. Do you interact with people who constantly self-promote or post run-of-the-mill status updates? The answer is probably no. You likely interact with people who are real. People who emotionally uplift you, make you laugh, or have legitimate questions or recommendations you feel you can be a part of. The same approach should be taken in business social media marketing. Once that happens, your connections can then become brand ambassadors who significantly boost engagement and your bottom line. Here's how: #1: Use a Personable Voice Corporate-speak and lifeless posts can make a company come across as boring and unfeeling. Thankfully, what's acceptable for a business voice has changed a lot over the years. While old rules forbid contractions, first-person, and slang, the new tone of business language is very different. Now you have the freedom to talk in a much more personal and friendly voice. Try creating posts and tweets that speak to your audience in a conversational voice. You'll likely find it's easier for people to converse with you. Bon Appétit, an over 50-year-old gourmet food publication, does a great job injecting just enough personality into their posts. Even insurance companies (traditionally not the most fun-loving and carefree type of business) are learning that a little personality goes a long way. Check out the GEICO Gecko's account, the mascot of the GEICO insurance company. The account, which boasts over 20,000 followers, features quirky drawings and quips, while salesy and promotional posts are noticeably absent. Try This in Your Business Talk like a real person and don't shy away from humor, emojis, and a little informality when it comes to punctuation and grammar. Try tagging along on special days and trending hashtags. Find a way to inject your company (like the image of the GEICO Gecko in the above picture). As long as you have clear standards for what's appropriate to post on social media, you shouldn't have any problem using a conversational tone, and your audience will appreciate the personal touch. #2: Stop the Me, Me, Me Posts When friends or relatives post something monumental on social media (a finished art project, a life event, a huge accomplishment), what do you do? Chances are you share it and take the time to congratulate them and point out to others what a great job they did. Brands that have mastered social media engagement know they can do that with their social media audience as well. Whenever it's appropriate, point out something that an audience member did particularly well.

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach more mobile Facebook users? Wondering how Canvas ads might help? Facebook Canvas lets you create full-page, interactive mobile ads that work like landing pages for tablet and smartphone users. In this article you'll discover how to create quality Facebook Canvas ads. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Canvas? Facebook Canvas is a new tool for advertisers, built specifically for the mobile platform. Facebook users can scroll through Canvas ads to view photos, watch videos, and discover your company's story. Canvas is free to use beyond the standard Facebook advertising costs, and its drag-and-drop interface requires no coding knowledge. The ads are fully immersive, so there's nothing else on the page vying for users' attention when they're scrolling through or clicking on the content in your ads. And while interactive media is normally a concern because of loading times (long loading times drive people away in every corner of the web), Canvas ads load almost as soon as they're selected. This is because they're hosted on Facebook rather than redirected to an outside page. In fact, they can download up to 10 times faster than general mobile web pages. Here are some ways you can use Facebook Canvas to maximize the impact of video ads for your business. #1: Complement Videos With Text and Images To use Canvas effectively, you need to take advantage of everything it has to offer. The tool allows you to share much of the same content you can post on your website, such as articles, photographs, videos, and even products. You have the option to display photos in carousel format, which Facebook introduced last year. You can add up to five images with optional links in one Canvas ad. Facebook is slowly rolling out the ability to create a carousel of videos as well. While there may be an emphasis on video in Canvas ads, you should also consider using other content options to better tell your company's story, highlight your products, and pique consumer interest. A genuinely compelling multimedia Canvas ad will capture attention and engage your audience, which can translate to increased web traffic, more conversions, and more sales. You can also use your video content in a variety of ways. For example, you might create a video that highlights the core principles of your brand and then include a carousel of products. Alternatively, you might include a series of customer testimonials or behind-the-scenes highlights of your company. Tailor your video to your marketing goals, whether that's greater brand awareness or increased sales, to get the best results. Kit and Ace used this video in a Canvas ad to bring awareness to their brand and get their line of all-day technical performance apparel in front of their target market. . #2: Tell a Story With a Series of Video Clips Facebook allows a maximum of 2 minutes of video for your canvas, but you can split up the video content however you want. One tactic is to use a series of 15- or 20-second clips, as in this social media campaign for Evan Williams' Bourbon. . Not only are shorter clips more likely to hold your audience's attention than longer videos, but they also give you the freedom to explore different facets of your business or highlight individual customer experiences. This greater flexibility in storytelling allows you to truly guide your audience through the experience and direct them toward what you want them to see. #3: Draw the Viewer in With Immersive Content Videos let you harness the power of both visuals and words to tell your company's story. It's important, therefore, that you come across as genuine and sincere. Design your videos (and your entire canvas) to elicit some sort of emotion, whether it's funny, heartfelt, or exciting, and then tailor your words to that goal. Keep your language simple, but emotional. Never use business jargon or buzzwords in your video ads.

SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Optimize Your Mobile Social Media Ads

How to Optimize Your Mobile Social Media Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you trying to reach an on-the-go social media audience? Are your ads optimized for mobile users? More people are using social on their smartphones. If you want to reach them, you might need to rethink your ads. In this article you'll discover three ways to make your social media ads mobile-friendly. Listen to this article: #1: Use Simple Copy and Bold Imagery Advertising on mobile means that people will view your ads on a much smaller screen than a desktop monitor. Because of this, you need to make sure your ads are still visible and carry the same impact when viewed on mobile devices. Ads for desktop have the screen space to contain text-heavy copy and detailed images. Mobile ads don't have that advantage, so your mobile ad creative needs to be bold, simple, and beautiful to attract your audience's attention. Take a look at two Facebook ads for the shoe company Tieks. The desktop ad features an intricate and interesting image along with a good amount of text to drive engagement. The image in Tieks's mobile ad is much simpler and the perspective puts the viewer right in the ad. The copy consists of a short sentence driving users to click the ad. This ad works for mobile because people can easily read and understand it on a small smartphone screen. While these two ads look very different, they're both unmistakably from the same company. Including the same visual elements, such as Tieks's bold red flats, in each image ties them together and keeps the ads on-brand, regardless of which device they're viewed on. When migrating desktop ads to mobile, it's important to create campaigns that are easy to understand and compelling to users. Simple copy and bold creative are the best ways to boost engagement on mobile. #2: Create Mobile-Friendly Landing Pages The creative in your ads isn't the only thing you need to adjust for mobile. Make sure that once people click on your ad, they're taken to a website that they can view and navigate properly on their mobile device. A website designed for desktop won't do; viewers will quickly get frustrated by the non-intuitive layout and navigate away from your site. This mobile Twitter ad from Home Depot encourages users to apply for job openings at its stores. Rather than direct users to the company's home page, the ad sends users to a mobile-friendly page that's specifically dedicated to careers at Home Depot. This way, users who are interested in applying for a job don't need to search through the site to complete that objective. The ad's landing page is bright, friendly, and on-theme. It's designed to be visually appealing and easy to navigate for mobile users. These two elements mean that there's a better chance of users viewing the page and eventually doing exactly what Home Depot wants: applying for a job. Mobile ads require landing pages that are designed with mobile in mind. To ensure that people follow through on your desired action, make sure they're driven to a web page that is relevant to your ad and is easy for them to view and navigate on their mobile device. #3: Explore Mobile-Friendly Video Ads When it comes to mobile advertising, video is leading the pack. According to eMarketer, U.S. mobile video ad spend jumped over 80% in 2015, and is expected to see double-digit growth through 2019. Many marketers say that video ads have helped them drive brand awareness and engagement, in addition to achieving higher click-through rates. Why? Mobile video ads are perfectly suited to mobile consumption behaviors. There are several ways you can start including mobile video in your advertising campaigns on Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter. In fact, you may already have the resources on hand to craft video ads with very little money or effort. Website Videos Have a video on your website that introduces your product or service? Then you have a video that's ready to run as a mobile ad! In the video below,

Increasing your site’s visibility to search engines

Increasing your site’s visibility to search engines


Help

This guide shows you how to use Squarespace's SEO-targeting features and other tools to increase your site's visibility to search engines.Note: Before you begin, please note that SEO strategy fal...

How to Tell Stories With Facebook and Instagram Carousel Ads

How to Tell Stories With Facebook and Instagram Carousel Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to make sure your ads stand out on Facebook and Instagram? Have you tried Carousel Ads? While many businesses use Carousel Ads solely to promote products, the ads also provide an excellent opportunity to showcase your brand’s unique narrative. In this article, I’ll share how to use storytelling in carousel ads to promote your products and stand out from your competitors. Listen to this article: #1: Grab Attention With the First Image The first rule of storytelling (and advertising for that matter) is to start out strong. Be sure the first image in your carousel ad series grabs attention and makes sense on its own. Since users may not scroll through all of the images in the series, you want to get your message across right away. Otherwise, you risk confusing your audience and wasting impressions. For example, in Progressive's #ActYourAge carousel ads, the first image immediately stands out. It uses a white background, which is very different from normal photography on the platform, and has a man playing with a baby's mobile (also known as a carousel). The picture is so unexpected and kooky, the user can't help but read the line below: "Dump your parents' car insurance company. #ActYourAge." While your first image shouldn't rely on any of the others to get its point across, it should still be intriguing enough to get users to swipe through to the end. #2: Make Them Swipe With any story, the point is to keep the reader engaged throughout and ultimately to read through to the end. Just as authors want to keep their readers interested, the same is true with carousel ads. Once you've hooked the user with the first image, encourage continued engagement with the other images. This gives your brand more exposure and increased recall. This carousel ad by Tesco Foods certainly elicits the "I can't stop swiping" response. To see the entire photo users must swipe through all of them. This is a great example of drawing a user through a story and, in this case, a very delicious-looking one. Test out this concept for your brand. Use Photoshop's splice tool (or play with pictures in your favorite design program) to cut separate images from a larger one. #3: Create a Scene Relating to your audience and evoking emotion are the other important parts of storytelling. To do these, provide the context necessary for users to feel like they're right there with you. Place them at the scene. Choose photos carefully to create imagery for carousel ads. Then write copy to draw in your audience. The TV series Wet Hot American Summer did a great job getting their audience members to envision themselves at Camp Firewood. Pictures show the characters hanging out and doing things with their friends. Plus the image and copy pairing is so clever that users not only picture themselves there, they also remember how they felt when they attended summer camp years ago. Obviously it's easier to set the scene when you're advertising something with a plot, like a television show or movie. However, for products and services, figure out how your brand fits into your customers' lives and create a scene that demonstrates it. For example, if you're advertising a shirt, rather than show still images of it, think about the lifetime of the shirt. It goes from fresh and new in a package to being worn to being cleaned to being borrowed by a friend, etc. Photos that showcase a story create a plot, which evokes emotion from your customers. #4: Think Sequentially The order of events is essential to story comprehension. A well-edited sequence provides a natural pace to the story within your ad. Help move your users through your story. Showtime did a great job incorporating natural sequence into its recent ads around the second season of Penny Dreadful. In just four photos you can tell the story is about a man on the run. He shoots someone, says goodbye to his girlfriend and runs away to a church.

Launching With Social: A Study of What Works and What Does Not

Launching With Social: A Study of What Works and What Does Not

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to launch a new blog, product or service? Do you want to know how to organize and execute a successful launch with social media? To share ways you can use social media to launch or celebrate anything, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives techniques and insights learned from the launch of My Kids' Adventures' Parenting Adventures podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn how to plan your launch and what assets to include. You'll also find out what worked for us and what didn't. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launching With Social Start the launch process The first thing I did was to prepare a PowerPoint presentation for people on the internal team. If you're a one person show, you can prepare the same ideas and present them to a friend or even to yourself. What's important is to go through the process below. First you need to identify the audience you want to target. As part of the annual survey for Social Media Examiner and My Kids' Adventures, we asked two questions.: "Do you listen to podcasts?" and "Are you a mom or a dad?". Based on the responses we were able to determine that dads listen to podcasts more than moms which helped us to resize our expectations. You then need to identify your biggest asset. Whenever you launch anything, you should use what I call tag-along marketing. You've built an audience somewhere - with a blog, a newsletter, an existing podcast. This asset you own is there for you to use. Piggyback some of the marketing efforts for your new venture on it. My biggest asset was the Social Media Marketing podcast. Next take a look at who you're up against. I looked at the Kids & Family category and identified Sesame Street, Adventures in Odyssey and other podcasts from established brands that have been around forever as competitors. You need to establish what your product is all about. To wrap everyone's heads around Parenting Adventures, I simply shared that it's a 30 minute interview show followed by a fun activity. Then choose your launch date. The Parenting Adventures podcast launched on Friday, June 13, 2014. Listen to the show to hear why this date was chosen to launch the Parenting Adventures podcast. Find the best way to launch One of my strongest assets are the relationships we've built. From these relationships, I was able to identify different "camps" of people we could reach out to for their support. One of the obvious camps was staff and contractors who work for our company. For the second camp, we identified allies from the bloggers and podcasters the My Kids' Adventures marketing team has been building relationships with for a year. Another camp included people who write for My Kids' Adventures and the last camp was made up of my personal friends. Listen to the show to find out other things we had in the launch pipeline. Leverage your website traffic When people come to your website to read an article, they might discover you have something more to offer. We added the Parenting Adventures podcast to the website navigation bar at the top of the page, to the sidebar and the About Us page. I also put together a 'help us spread the word' page to give people everything they need to promote the show for us. On that page I included a video to thank people for their participation. Listen to the show to discover how we are using this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast to promote Parenting Adventures. Make it frictionless

How to Create Social Media Contests That Convert

How to Create Social Media Contests That Convert

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to improve your social media contests? Want to know what works for other businesses? Whether you want to build an email list or grow your follower base, social media contests are a great way to engage your audience and significantly boost conversions. In this article you'll discover how three businesses ran successful social media contests and learn how to incorporate their tactics into your own contests. Listen to this article: 3 Successful Social Media Contests for Inspiration The Prepared Pantry, an Idaho-based specialty grocery store, sells baking mixes, kitchen tools, and gourmet foods. The store ran a smart sweepstakes contest, enticing fans to enter its social media contest by offering a top-of-the-line panini maker. To enter, fans simply had to give their name and email, like the company's Facebook page, and share and tweet out the contest. The Prepared Pantry's campaign received 4,392 impressions and captured 1,972 entries. That's a conversion rate of 44.8%! A conversion rate over 40% is excellent. After this one campaign, the company now has almost 2,000 new email subscribers. TopmaQ is a New Zealand–based company that sells tools, construction equipment, and building products. Fans were offered a chance to win a wheelbarrow full of tools - what a creative incentive! For a chance to win, fans entered their email and liked and shared TopmaQ's Facebook page. TopmaQ's creative giveaway resulted in 8,798 impressions, captured 2,296 email addresses, and finished with a conversion rate of 26%. With the extensive reach and high number of entries, TopmaQ clearly picked a prize that resonated with their target audience. Core Entertainment, an Ontario-based entertainment company, holds over 400 events each year. One lucky winner was offered a private suite for an upcoming concert featuring country music star Garth Brooks. To enter, fans supplied their email and liked and shared the campaign for a chance to win. This social media contest was seen by 3,549 people, captured 1,062 email entries, and resulted in a conversion rate of 29.9%. With impressive reach and over 1,000 new email subscribers, Core Entertainment certainly knocked it out of the park with this campaign. Replicate the Success of These Social Contests for Your Business You've just seen three examples of highly successful social media marketing contests spanning the grocery, hardware, and entertainment industries. Hopefully, you're already considering what prize you might give away for your next social contest, or how you might promote it to your audience. Now here comes the best part. Each of the preceding contests did the same five things to set their campaign up for success. Read on to learn what these steps are and how you can replicate them for your next contest. #1: Make Your Contest Mobile-Friendly Mobile is a must for a successful social contest. Facebook boasts 1.04 billion daily active users, with 934 million of those on mobile. This is a big number, but should come as no surprise. In fact, according to Mary Meeker's 2015 Internet Trends Report, U.S. adults now spend more time every day browsing the Internet from mobile phones than they do from computers. If your social contest isn't mobile-friendly, you're missing out on over half of your potential entries. #2: Promote With Linkshare Posts Creating social contests is great, but how will they help you capture new leads if they can't be found? Promote your contest via email marketing, sharing on social networks, writing a blog post, or even word-of-mouth marketing. Additionally, share your campaign in a linkshare post on Facebook. To promote your campaign in a linkshare post, paste the direct link of your campaign in a Facebook status. As you do, you'll notice that Facebook automatically renders a preview of your campaign, including an image (just like the post for the Prepared Pantry above).

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how a master marketer thinks about books and the launch process? To explore book marketing, blogging and podcasts, I interview Seth Godin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I'll interview Seth Godin, author of 17 books, including Purple Cow, Permission Marketing and Tribes. He blogs every day on topics related to marketing, leadership and more. He also has an excellent podcast mini-series called Seth Godin's Startup School. Seth and I explore his latest book along with his thoughts on publishing and marketing books. You'll discover Seth's philosophy on writing, the importance he puts on blogging and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Book Marketing Seth's new book Seth's latest book is called, What to Do When It's Your Turn (and It's Always Your Turn). He explains that he usually comes up with the title early in the process, and then writes the book to go with it. However, in this case, the title came second to last. The book exists because when his son was heading off to college, he asked Seth to write down his advice. A letter to his son turned into a book for everyone. It's a heavily illustrated book about fear, bravery and doing work that matters. Seth's background is in publishing and he was a book packager for 12 years, during which time he and his team wrote 120 books. These included almanacs, books on gardening, business and everything in between. In 1999, he started writing books as a solo author. One person with a point of view. That's when things shifted for him, he says. "I didn’t say, 'What book do I need to write next, because I need to pay the bills?' I said, 'What do I care enough about saying to put myself through all the pain and suffering it takes to bring a book into the world?' Seth's first "real book" was Permission Marketing which has his picture on the cover. Listen to the show to discover why Seth believes all of his books are marketing books. How Seth decides what to write when it comes to his books Seth doesn’t think he has much say in what he chooses to write about. While he is very strategic in most elements of his life, his best writing is not strategic at all. "I start with an itch and the writing is my scratching of the itch," Seth reveals. He starts a new book every few days, and some of them only last a paragraph or two, which is why it’s great to have a blog. If a book won’t go away, then he has to write it. Seth believes most people shouldn’t look at the book business as a way to make a living. The book business is an organized hobby, and a fabulous way to bring ideas into the world and a great thing to leave behind. For those who want to write a book to become a paid, professional author, Seth says, don't. Instead, think about using books as a generous way to spread ideas and earn trust. Listen to the show to learn why Seth doesn’t discuss upcoming projects with his peers. Why Seth decided to publish and distribute this book on his own Since most people don't finish the books on their Kindle, Seth wanted What to Do When It's Your Turn to be only available on paper. He also didn't want people to buy just one copy of the book. "If you buy 1 copy, I send you 2. If you buy 3 copies, I send you 5. If you buy 8 copies, I send you 12," he explains. "If you get an extra copy of a book, you have to give it away." Since ideas are now spreading person to person and not top down, Seth wanted this book to be his experiment with horizontal publishing.

Does Outbrain Helps My SEO? | Outbrain Blog

Does Outbrain Helps My SEO? | Outbrain Blog


outbrain.com

How does Outbrain affecting my SEO rankings? Does it helps? Does is only doing worse? Check out Outbrain's relationship with Search engine optimization.

Online Security for Business: What Marketers Need to Know

Online Security for Business: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your online identity secure? Are you concerned about hackers? To discover how to secure your social profiles, your online accounts and your identity from hackers, I interview Chalene Johnson and Darren Natoni. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Chalene Johnson and Darren Natoni. Chalene is a fitness celebrity, author of the book Push and has large followings on Instagram and Facebook. She's also someone whose online identity was hijacked and sold to the highest bidder. Darren is a former special agent with the DEA who specializes in online security. He's also the chief technology officer for Shaun T, a fitness celebrity with millions of followers. Chalene and Darren will explore what marketers and entrepreneurs need to know when it comes to securing their online accounts and more. You'll discover how to be safe online and protect your identity from hackers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Security for Business When Chalene got hacked Chalene explains how she was enjoying a perfect day (a fact that she even tweeted out), when she got hacked. Someone changed her bio and had been tweeting at the same time she was tweeting. So Chalene changed her password to something out of the ordinary, logged back in and changed her bio. Then, it happened again. The hackers were sending out porn and tweeting other people at the same time Chalene was on Twitter. Her other accounts were hacked as well. She felt like she wasn't safe in her own home. Even though it was an Internet attack and there wasn't a physical threat, Chalene recalls that it felt like it. Darren shares where he was on the night of Chalene's cyberattack. He and his wife just got home from dinner and were flipping through Instagram when they noticed that Chalene's account had content she normally wouldn't post. So he texted her and said he thought she'd been hacked. She wrote back that she knew and was freaking out. He said to call him so they could get it under control and get the hackers out of her system. By the time Chalene called Darren, her Twitter, Instagram and Facebook had been taken over. And, though she didn't realize it yet, the hackers were also in her inbox. Chalene and Darren spent eight hours, working through the night, trying to patch everything up. People assume it's personal, Chalene says, but that's not the case. It hit her especially hard because social media is her livelihood. The hackers deleted everything she posted on Instagram over the last four and a half years, and they started posting videos of animal cruelty and violent porn. Chalene felt helpless and responsible. The cost of the hack, which included security experts, loss of wages and rebuilding her security, was in excess of $200,000. Darren says hacking is a sport for some people and a hobby for others. They are experts in their field. Since they don't have legal ways to demonstrate their expertise, this is how they do it. Don't worry about hackers, Darren suggests. Focus on what you need to do to protect yourself. Situations like this expose holes that we knew existed, and that we should have patched, but kept putting it off. It's like waiting until a health condition pops up and then deciding to get in shape. Sometimes it takes an unfortunate disaster to get someone to appreciate the value of simple preventive measures. Listen to the show to hear how engaging with the hackers made things worse for Chalene. What defenses to put in place Darren says to protect yourself,

Do not get in trouble: check these four crucial website elements

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

When you do an SEO audit to validate the indexability of your web pages, you have to consider many technical items. Without an error-free website, it will be very difficult to get good visibility in Google�s organic search results. Here are the top four technical things that you should check on your website.

Facebook Ads Management for Local Businesses | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

Instagram Business Profiles: Why Marketers Should Upgrade

Instagram Business Profiles: Why Marketers Should Upgrade

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered moving to an Instagram business profile? Wondering what advantages you'll gain? To explore Instagram business profiles, I interview Jenn Herman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jenn Herman, a social media consultant and Instagram marketing expert. Her blog, JennsTrends.com, has placed in our top 10 social media blogs three different times. She also wrote an ebook called The Ultimate Beginner's Guide to Instagram. Jenn explores Instagram analytics. You'll discover valuable Instagram business profile features. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Business Profiles The Instagram Algorithm The Instagram algorithm came out last year and Jenn explains that for marketers, the algorithm is helpful. You can use it to get better reactions from, engagement with, and reach to your target audience. Jenn stresses that the Instagram algorithm is more personal than the Facebook algorithm. On Facebook, when something is really popular, Facebook is more likely to show that content to more people. However, the Instagram algorithm is based on personal use, not public use. Instagram users don't necessarily see someone's content just because others engage with it. That said, the Instagram content that each user engages with most does show up higher in his or her feed. To make the Instagram algorithm work for your marketing efforts, Jenn recommends sharing the best content for your customers and followers. When you emphasize quality over quantity, your users are more likely to stop, engage, comment, like, and so on. As a result, your followers will constantly see your content higher in their Instagram feeds. Also, Jenn says the Facebook and Instagram algorithms re-sort content differently. Facebook constantly re-sorts content, whereas the Instagram algorithm doesn't. Instead, on Instagram, the re-sorting is based on how often you post and how often a user logs into Instagram. For example, if a user logs on and then logs on three hours later, Instagram re-sorts only the content uploaded in the last three hours. The content that appeared during the user's last login appears exactly as it did before. For marketers, this approach to re-sorting means that your Instagram followers won't miss your content if they scroll far enough through their feeds. For example, say someone follows Social Media Examiner and likes to engage with its Instagram posts. The user logs in after 24 hours and Social Media Examiner has posted three times. In this case, Jenn says the user will see Social Media Examiner's three posts higher in his or her feed, but not necessarily back to back. I ask what marketers can do to encourage fan activity and make their content seen first. Jenn says the key is having better content and (counter-intuitively) posting less content. When you post a lot, Jenn says it's more difficult for that content to show up high in your followers' Instagram feeds. People are more likely to skip your posts. However, gorgeous posts can create a strong connection with your followers and people are more likely to engage. To increase the chances people see and engage with your Instagram posts, Jenn recommends posting your best content three times a week. Also, Jenn suggests adding calls to action. In a text overlay or caption, encourage people to leave a comment or tag friends in the post. The algorithm will see that engagement. I ask Jenn how the algorithm applies to Instagram Stories versus the Instagram feed. Jenn says that at least for now,

How To Create a Solid, Converting Landing Page

by Julie Weldon @ 321GoProject

Landing pages are an important element in the marketing of your business. But how do you know where to start? What makes a rock solid, lead generating landing page vs. just more noise on the internet that doesn’t convert? In a previous article, we defined what a landing page is and walked through a crash course in Landing Pages 101. In this blog post, we’re going to dive into the components you should have in any landing page you create. The thing about landing pages is that there isn’t an exact science on how to create them. You ask ten people, you’re likely to get ten different answers. Include this, don’t include that. But there are a few guidelines that have become industry standard. This month, in our Hub online learning platform, we published a complete course on Landing Pages. It walks you through the basics, the how to’s, and the steps by steps of creating your own landing pages that convert. So, let’s dive in… what are the different aspects we suggest you include when creating a landing page? Check out this infographic and see corresponding numbers explained on either side.  Once you build your landing page, ask yourself these questions: Is your content short and compelling (good headline, short content, benefit bullet points)? Are you using simple language your readers will understand? Is it crystal clear what action you want the reader to take? Would you be interested in what you are offering? Is the experience a good one? Can they easily reach out to you and get a quick response back if they have questions? Need help with your landing pages, marketing or website?  It’s what we’ve been doing in this industry for 6+ years and we’ve helped 1,000+ gyms. Schedule a free call with us at your convenience by...

Tools to Optimize Your Social Scheduling When You Need a Break

Tools to Optimize Your Social Scheduling When You Need a Break

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Ever want to take a day off from posting on social media? Have you considered scheduling posts for weekends and holidays, or when you just can’t respond? Posting to Facebook and Twitter when many businesses are silent helps you stay top of mind with your followers. In this article you'll discover how to keep your social media accounts stocked with content when you’re on break. Why Post on Weekends? Some non-workdays are perfect times to be active on social media for certain types of businesses (think special offers for ecommerce sites during the holidays, for example). Simply greeting your followers on a holiday is a great way to build genuine likes and interactions. Listen to this article: Contrary to popular belief, social media posting on weekends is essential for your brand presence growth. The following studies show Saturday and Sunday posts can increase your interactions: Weekend posts on Facebook get more engagement than workweek posts. Weekend and Wednesday tweets are believed to be the best days for B2C companies. Weekend and afternoon tweets show the highest click-through rates. While posting on weekends and holidays can make sense for your business, the desire to take a well-deserved day off is understandable. Read on for some tips to keep your accounts active on those days. #1: Schedule Content Effectively If you'll be taking a weekend or holiday vacation, scheduling some updates for that time is a smart strategy. I recommend that you schedule updates with a tool like MavSocial because it's free and supports top social media networks. You can use the Post Manager feature to schedule your social media updates and check the Campaign Planner calendar to make sure you post each day of your vacation. Don't overschedule for holidays (especially if you are into ecommerce). Holidays can be risky: Customers wait longer for orders, and customer service is swamped. Downtime also tends to happen on holidays because hosting companies are understaffed. So it's not the best time for multiple social media updates. One timely update congratulating customers on the holidays is enough. Don't overschedule for time slots you won't be available to interact; one or two updates per day will be enough to maintain a consistent presence. I suggest a daily schedule like the one below for weekends or holiday absences: Schedule one Facebook page post: The purpose of this update is mostly to generate organic interactions rather than to convert, so post something entertaining and timely like a meme on a trending topic. You can also consider a post that acknowledges the holiday, a funny weekend picture or video, a joke or a visual quote. Schedule two to three tweets: Avoid asking questions, posting mini-contests or publishing tweets that may prompt questions or interactions you'll need to quickly react to. Instead, use this time to re-share important updates from the weekdays such as a special offer or an upcoming event reminder. #2: Tools to Improve Your Weekend Posting Although consistency is important to your success in social media marketing, so is including variety in what you share. Select an image from the MavSocial gallery to diversify your weekend and holiday social media updates on Twitter and Facebook. Unlike many other scheduling tools out there, the MavSocial Post Manager feature actually uploads your visual content to each network. To scale your entertaining content on Twitter for holidays, weekends or vacation time, use Tweet Jukebox to auto-post from a cool pre-built box you fill. I have a box of interesting quotes I use only for weekends. Simply register a free account and enable the box from My Jukeboxes. Sometimes updating your social media accounts in real time is unavoidable, which is why I like the idea of DrumUp so much. DrumUp has a great free mobile app for Android that you can use to make this process easier from your smartphone.

How to Extend the Life of Your Social Media Content

How to Extend the Life of Your Social Media Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wish you didn't have to keep creating new content? Do you need a better return on the content you create? Having a plan in place for posting, and repurposing your best content will give your content a longer life and make the most of the time you spend creating it. In this article you'll discover how to get more value out of your social media content. #1: Tailor Your Content Posts to Each Network Here's the dilemma. Some of your customers and prospects spend their social networking time on Facebook, while others favor LinkedIn. However, you have a blog post you want both groups to see. Listen to this article: The first idea that comes to mind is to post the same piece to both networks. But you're not sure that's the right thing to do, and you don't want to appear lazy or insincere to those who follow you on multiple networks. The solution is simple: Tailor that one content piece to each network you're posting it on. Posting across social channels in a way that respects the quirks and qualities of each individual network is a win-win: You'll make your audience happy and increase your marketing ROI. Here are a few things to consider when tailoring your content: Understand each platform. Each social network serves a different purpose. Facebook is very flexible in allowing you to post a mix of text, images and video content, but stiff competition might encourage you to think outside of the box. On Twitter, your goal is to engage quickly and concisely. On LinkedIn, people are primed to learn about industry trends and data that are relevant to them, be it in the form of a long blog post or short status updates. Also, extract important points from your content pieces, and use them accordingly. If you have an attention-getting one-liner from your blog, consider linking to that blog post on Facebook or Twitter. A data point that raises concerns or inspires your followers to take action might perform well as a tweet or LinkedIn status update. Finally, make sure you don't overdo it. While cross-posting content to social networks can maximize your social media marketing efficiency, it's also important to produce some original content for each network. This reduces the chances you'll be identified as a spammy marketer, thus triggering people to unfollow you and algorithms to decrease your SEO rankings. #2: Schedule Multiple Shares of New Content Links shared via social media tend to have a short half-life (that is, the amount of time it takes for links to receive half of the clicks they'll ever get) of just a few hours. An easy way to get more out of shared links is to repost them again in the days, weeks and months that follow. Why Repost Content? There are two main reasons you should consider reposting older content. First, posting content again can help you gain new followers and more engagement. When you post a link just once, only a small segment of people will ever see it. This is due to such variables as people not being online at the time you post and quirks of social network algorithms. For example, Facebook’s news feed algorithm, along with growing competition, ensure that only a small segment of your business page followers will see one of your status updates show up organically in their individual feeds. To capture more engagement, it's essential to schedule repeated postings. Second, reposting content also reminds existing followers of what's important. Here's where you might run a small risk of spamming, at least in the eyes of people who happen to see a piece more than once. But if you remind your followers why you're special through slightly varied iterations of the same content, you'll enhance your brand visibility and build thought leadership over time. Repeated contact with qualified leads is essential to moving them through the sales cycle. Simply sharing your content more than once guarantees clicks that you otherwise wouldn...

Facebook Growth: How to Create Huge Facebook Communities Without Advertising

Facebook Growth: How to Create Huge Facebook Communities Without Advertising

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how to grow your Facebook following without resorting to paid advertising? Want to discover the secrets to getting more fans and driving them to your blog? To learn how one marketer has built several massive Facebook communities, all through organic growth, I interview Collin Cottrell. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Collin Cottrell, the founder of WhitetailOverload.com, a website dedicated to deer hunting. He's quickly built a massive following of more than 800,000 fans on his Facebook page, all without advertising. Collin also founded OutdoorOverload.com. In this episode Collin will explore how he built his Facebook pages rapidly, without using paid advertising. You’ll discover how to cross-promote your Facebook pages to grow your following and what types of posts get the most attention. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Growth Collin's background Collin, who grew up in the Midwest, started hunting with his dad at an early age. He would go to hunting camps with his father and uncles, and they would sit around the campfire, tell stories about hunting and talk about life. Collin found he had a passion for hunting, and wanted to figure out how to make a living from it. In high school Collin started building websites, doing graphic design and using social media (at the time it was MySpace and the beginning of Twitter) to build his way into the hunting outdoor industry. For example, he worked on Bowhunting.net (which was on AOL in 1994 and then launched fully in 1996). Collin also attended hunting and outdoor trade shows, such as the Archery Trade Show, where he would interview the different dealers and put the videos on their websites. The hunting industry needed a new way to market to their growing customer base with social media, Collin says, and that’s how he found his niche. At the same time Collin was going to trade shows, he was building his own marketing company on the side. Developing relationships with major players in the hunting industry was a huge boost to his business. Listen to the show to discover the similarity between how Collin and I got started, even though we're in very different niches. Collin's start on Facebook Around 2007, Collin launched a graphics/web design/marketing agency with a focus on the hunting and outdoor industry. Facebook pages were just being introduced, so Collin decided to create hunting-related pages to build communities. In addition to the bowhunting page, he started pages for shed hunting, turkey hunting and more. Facebook was different at the time, Collin recalls. If you put out good content, and you had a good following, you could reach a lot of people. He put interesting, informative, value-driven content on the page, such as questions, pictures and videos. A short time later, Collin decided to create a whitetail deer hunting page, since it’s the top tier in the hunting industry in America. He did crossovers from the other pages to get fans to the new one. This Facebook page grew organically very quickly through contests, content and posting several times a day. A year and a half ago, when they were at 500,000 fans, they were able to reach 25 to 50 million people a month. Whitetail Overload launched August 1, 2014. Since Collin is a web and graphic designer, he was able to build landing pages and apps for his giveaways right in Facebook, which drove people to his pages, as well as other large hunting-related niche pages. Giveaways, Collin shares,

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to keep up with your Twitter activities? Looking for a way to streamline your Twitter marketing? The right productivity tools will help you manage your Twitter marketing more effectively and free up your time for other tasks. In this article you'll discover six tools and techniques that will boost your productivity on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Twitter Messages With AgoraPulse Keeping on top of your Twitter mentions and messages can take a huge amount of time each day. According to research from Brandwatch, retail brands receive an average of 821 mentions per day on Twitter, but only manage to respond to 40 of them. You can do better than that by using a social media management tool like AgoraPulse. It allows you to display your mentions, direct messages, and monitoring alerts in a social inbox so you can respond as you would with an email. When you review or reply to messages, they're archived, which makes it easy to see which messages you've dealt with. The social inbox for your Twitter account is split into an Inbox tab for your incoming mentions and messages and a Monitoring tab for retweets and search queries. Whenever you reply to or review a message, it's highlighted and archived. This feature is particularly useful to archive low-value or spammy direct messages. Have you ever received one of those automated “thank you for following me” direct messages or something similar? With the Direct Messages filter, you can quickly select all direct messages that don't need a reply and review them in one go, which is a huge time-saver. Once you review or reply to all of your mentions, you'll get that lovely inbox zero feeling. Go to the Monitoring tab to view all of your retweets and searches. This tab is for less urgent messages, while the Inbox focuses on the most actionable messages. Select the Type filter to show only your recent searches or retweets. You can then reply to or like them on an individual basis, or via a bulk review if no action needs to be taken. If you work with a team or have a virtual assistant, you can assign individual messages to team members. To do so, view the message, click the Assign button, and select the relevant team member. You can easily see which messages have been assigned to which team members. If you have a social media team, using a social media management tool is important from a security standpoint. With AgoraPulse, you'll get full control over your team members and avoid having to share your Twitter password. Set aside two or three fixed times every day to attend to your Twitter engagement. Make sure you cap the time for these sessions (for example 10-15 minutes) so you can spend the rest of your day focusing on other areas of your business. AgoraPulse also integrates with Facebook and Instagram and offers reports and publishing features. #2: Automate Blog Content Shares With missinglettr When you post an article to your blog, how many times do you share it on Twitter? It's unusual for people to send just one tweet out when they publish blog content. If you want to maximize the engagement potential for your blog posts, use a tool like missinglettr to set up a drip marketing campaign for them. It allows you to publicize each individual article regularly via Twitter over the course of a year. To get started, set up your free account and connect your blog's RSS feed. Once you do that, missinglettr will start checking for new blog posts. When it detects a new article, it analyzes the content and creates a Twitter marketing campaign for that article for the year. The campaign consists of a series of tweets linking to the article and can include summaries, quotes, images, and a call to action. missinglettr will notify you when the campaign is ready so you can review it. Click the Review link to review the campaign schedule for the article.

Twitter for Business: What Smart Marketers Are Doing With Twitter

Twitter for Business: What Smart Marketers Are Doing With Twitter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter to promote your business? Want to discover how to connect with your audience and engage on Twitter? To learn how to use Twitter for business, I interview Laura Fitton. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Laura Fitton, co-author of Twitter for Dummies. She's also founded OneForty (a Twitter app store) and now she is the Inbound Marketing Evangelist at HubSpot. Laura and I will explore Twitter marketing. You'll discover how to market yourself on Twitter, develop relationships using the platform and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business How Laura got into Twitter When Twitter first went big in April 2007, Laura was not immediately on board. Laura admits she even blogged about how stupid she thought Twitter was. The following month she gave it one more shot. Within 24 hours, Laura's opinion changed. She followed a bunch of fascinating people, and saw first-hand how Twitter makes you feel connected. Laura feels she got the hang of it within a month, went to her first Tweetup and the beginning of June put her Twitter handle on her business cards. She thought Twitter would be big. In 2008 she reached out to Wiley Publishing because she wanted to write a book that would break down why Twitter was taking off. She never finished that proposal. She did, however, make several friends at Wiley through Twitter. She reached out to one of them and asked who to talk to about her book. They were looking for someone to write Twitter for Dummies. A match was made. The first edition of Twitter for Dummies came out the same time Laura launched OneForty. Listen to the show to find out how Laura came up with the name for Pistachio consulting and why she used it for Twitter. How to be successful on Twitter Laura hears a lot of the same questions about Twitter all the time: "How do I get more followers?" "What do I tweet about?" "What is the point of Twitter? What is the value for my business?" Laura believes people need to center everything they do on Twitter around who they want to read it. You need to figure out who the perfect customer is for your business and what they actually need. Start by writing a Twitter mission statement on your profile that addresses who the account is for and what value it delivers. Whenever you are deciding what to tweet, see if it fits your mission. The other great thing about a mission statement, Laura adds, is that it lets others simply articulate what your account is about, who should follow it and why. The key to being successful on Twitter is sharing the right information, whether it's your own links or other content. Laura adds that you can get away with a fair amount of self-promotion, if you provide information that helps people, especially the people who would make a good customer for you in the first place. In his book What Would Google Do?, Jeff Jarvis said, "Do what you do best and link to the rest. You can build a valuable Twitter account that shares hardly any original content if it’s extremely well curated." Listen to the show to hear Social Media Examiner's Twitter mission statement.  Businesses doing Twitter right Laura shares two personal Twitter experiences. One with Canada Goose Inc and another with Verizon. In both cases she had a specific customer-service need. With Verizon, she had a wire down on her street. With Canada Goose Inc she had an order for a hard-to-find jacket cancel out. In both cases she said on Twitter.“Hey @company.

Local Business Website Audit | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

How to Create a Twitter Chat: 4 Success Tips

How to Create a Twitter Chat: 4 Success Tips

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Ready to host a Twitter chat? Do you want to improve your chances of success? Making sure you have a few basic building blocks in place will help you start your Twitter chat off with an audience that's ready to participate. In this article you'll discover four tips to help you start a successful Twitter chat. Listen to this article: #1: Choose Your Time Slot With Care If you want lots of people to show up, you need to schedule your Twitter chat at the optimal time for your audience. The more people who are available to chat, the greater your chances for engagement. Use a tool like Followerwonk to figure out when your followers are most active, so you'll know the best time to host your chat. After you log in, click on the Analyze tab, enter your Twitter handle and click Do It. You'll see an hourly breakdown of when your followers are most active. Look at the chart to discover the optimal times to host your Twitter chat and get the most engagement from your audience. There's no point in hosting a chat when the majority of your followers aren't online. Reduce Scheduling Conflicts In addition to knowing when your Twitter followers are most active, you'll also want to take into account the times during which other popular chats are scheduled. To reduce scheduling conflicts, be sure to consult the Twitter chat schedule from TweetReports. This is a helpful resource which shows the times and days other popular Twitter chats are scheduled to take place. Checking this document will help you avoid scheduling your chat during the same time as another chat your audience (or you) might be interested in attending. You might also want to review the Twitter chat schedule from Twubs. It shows you an active list of upcoming Twitter chats. By consulting the schedules of other popular Twitter chats, you'll ensure that your chat doesn't conflict with them. That way you don't run the risk of people not attending yours. If you're just starting out, this can be very beneficial. #2: Invite Relevant Guests and Influencers to Participate To maximize your reach and overall engagement, make a point to invite special guests and relevant people to participate in your chat. For example, SEMrush invites special guests to their Twitter chats and sends direct tweets to influential people inviting them to participate. You can identify influential people using Followerwonk. It allows you to find and connect with influencers in your niche, making it the perfect tool for finding relevant guests to join your Twitter chat. To identify influencers, click the Search Bios tab. Next, you will want to search for a keyword that is relevant to your niche or the topic of your chat. Enter your search term and select Search Twitter Profiles from the pop-up menu. If needed, click the More Options button to see more filtering options like location and minimum followers. Then click Do It. Followerwonk shows you a list of relevant people for your topic of choice. All you have to do is decide which people you want to target from the list, and invite them to be special guests or ask them to participate in your chat. #3: Incorporate Eye-Catching Visuals When you promote and run your own Twitter chat, you'll want to get as much engagement as you can. Visual content might provide the extra boost you need to connect with your audience. There are several ways you can incorporate visuals into your Twitter chats. You can use images to promote your upcoming chats, ask questions during the chat and recap answers to all of the questions that people asked during the chat. Here are a few tips to help you design more appealing images for your Twitter chats: Pick an attractive color palette using a site like COLOURlovers. Ensure there's adequate contrast between the background and text in your images. If you need help identifying contrasting colors, consult the Adobe Color Wheel.

How to Use Google+ Collections for Business

How to Use Google+ Collections for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you share a lot of updates on Google+? Want to make it easier for followers to pick and choose their favorite topics? Google+ Collections allows you to categorize your updates by topic, which helps your followers quickly find updates for the topics they're interested in. In this article I'll show you 11 ways to use Google+ Collections to organize updates from your personal profile or business page. Listen to this article: #1: Share Specific Tips Does your Google+ page share a lot of valuable tips? If so, organize them into collections like the Google Webmasters page does. Collections give your Google+ followers a preview of the kind of advice they can expect to see from your page. #2: Document Campaigns If you participate in specific campaigns, like nonprofits do, you can use Google+ Collections to document those campaigns. 1 Billion Acts of Peace does this with collections about their launch and individual missions. These collections show your Google+ followers what campaigns your organization runs and how they can be a part of those campaigns. #3: Organize Ideas If you share lots of great ideas, Google+ Collections can help you organize them. Brit + Co encourages their followers to be more creative through their collections of ideas. These collections help followers find ideas that fit the things they enjoy doing, whether it's crafts, hosting parties or cooking. #4: Highlight Things to Do Google+ pages for places can use collections to highlight the best things to do in a specific geographic area. The site visitlondon.com highlights things to do, times when the city is in bloom and notable landmarks to visit. These collections allow followers to quickly find updates about the things they want to do when they travel to London. #5: Categorize Freebies If your business sells products by offering related freebies, you can use Google+ Collections to categorize those freebies. Red Heart Yarns does this by offering free crochet and knitting patterns on their Google+ page, all of which are likely to lead to followers purchasing their yarn. These collections direct the company's followers to the exact freebies they want, and ultimately to purchasing the products to complete these projects. #6: Separate Promotions From Tips There's nothing wrong with promoting your business while sharing valuable content. iAuthor uses collections to separate posts about their platform from their useful tips for specific audiences. These collections guide iAuthor's followers to more information about the business or to the tips that will help them most. #7: Classify Product Offerings Does your business offer different types of products and services? ServiceWhale classifies different offerings with their Google+ collections. These collections make it easier for followers to find the specific services they need. They also lead them to testimonials received from happy customers. #8: Inspire Customers at All Stages Your business has customers at all stages: potential customers, current customers and former customers. Capri Laguna uses their collections to organize content for customers at each of these three stages. These collections give Capri Laguna's followers inspirational content to entice them to come to the beach, find things to do while they're there and reminisce after they leave. #9: Showcase Amenities If your business offers many amenities to your customers, you'll likely want to showcase them. Hyatt does this through their collections. These collections help the Google+ followers find the hotels with specific amenities they want, such as pet-friendly locations or locations with the best food. #10: Sort the News Major publications typically have dozens of posts on a daily basis, which can become overwhelming for their audience. BuzzFeed uses their Google+ collections to sort their latest news by specific topics.

Facebook Contests: How to Get Your Fans Excited

Facebook Contests: How to Get Your Fans Excited

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever run a Facebook contest? Are you wondering if you should use them for your business? To learn about Facebook contests, I interview Andrea Vahl for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies. She regularly writes about Facebook for Social Media Examiner (in fact she was our community manager for 2 years), and has an alter-ego known online as Grandma Mary. Andrea shares how a Facebook contest can work for your page and your business. You'll learn about the different contests available and what contest apps to use. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher.  Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Contests Why should businesses run contests on Facebook? When it comes to what contests can do for your Facebook page and your business, Andrea is a contest fan girl. There are many benefits of running a contest and Andrea's top three follow. You'll hear the benefits of each and the best types of prizes to give away. Help grow the likes on your page and your Facebook presence Grow your email list Help promote a product you're selling Listen to the show to find out how we did a photo contest called Help Me Launch. Examples of successful contests Andrea shares a few success stories with Facebook contests and what range of prizes can develop good success. Andrea helped set up a contest for a client on Facebook called Chocolate for Breakfast. It was a contest where the giveaway was a small box of premium chocolate truffles. The contest was run for one week. From this, the client got 700 new fans and 400 email addresses. At the time, the page was at the early stages with around 1200 fans. So for the cost of the premium box of chocolates, the client got a huge response. The contest was on the client's Facebook tab (like you're supposed to do), and it required people to like the page to enter. Discover how a contest on a tab works and what information people need to enter to participate. It was a sweepstakes contest where you didn't have to enter any photos, essay or video. It was a random-draw winner with anyone eligible to win. You'll hear how it was promoted and the frequency of the posts. Another client of Andrea's, Camp Bow Wow, did a contest called Bad to the Bone. They're a doggy daycare facility and also have home buddies dog training courses that they give away. This contest encouraged people to submit pictures of their bad dogs. People would then vote on who was the baddest dog. The winner would get a free year of dog training lessons, which was a great prize. Hear how this contest was run over a couple of stages and why it lasted about a year. It was a huge success, with over 15,000 new fans. Andrea encourages people to think about how you can piggyback on different techniques that have worked well. Create some fun around the contest and engage with your audience. A bigger brand that ran a contest was Eggo. They did a Waffle-Off, which encouraged people to submit recipes with Eggo waffles. People would submit recipes and show you the various ways to enjoy Eggo waffles. It was user-generated content and photos. People were very engaged with the contest. It was easy to set up and it took off for Eggo. You'll discover why there might be less participation if it involves the need to enter a photo or a movie. If you want to start your first contest, Andrea advises you to run a sweepstakes type of...

Top 10 Local SEO Ranking Factors for Small Businesses - SEO Mechanic -

Top 10 Local SEO Ranking Factors for Small Businesses - SEO Mechanic -


SEO Mechanic

Do you want to attract local customers? Local business SEO provides a rare opportunity to create your own little niche within your local community.For example, every town needs a hardware store, but you don’t need to have the most revolutionary hardware options on the market.[click to continue...]

Travis H. | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

5 Ways to Use Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

5 Ways to Use Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to use storytelling in your social media marketing? Are you looking for inspiration? Building your social media campaigns around stories helps you stand out from other brands, and grab the attention of consumers. In this article you'll discover five ways to use storytelling in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Pay Attention to Story Structure Freytag's pyramid is a powerful storytelling framework used in a variety of creative works from Aesop's Fables to Shakespeare's plays. This structure splits the story into five narrative arcs, evoking various emotional reactions from your audience. These arcs include the inciting moment, the complication or rising action, the climax (or turning point), the reversal or falling action and the moment of release. In your storytelling you can follow the steps in Freytag's pyramid or use them in parts, but the approach helps you make an emotional connection with your consumers. In 2014 Jaguar launched a high-suspense campaign with David Beckham in China, targeting local social networks WeChat and Weibo. Before revealing Beckham as the brand ambassador, the campaign asked consumers to guess Mr. Jaguar's identity. Jaguar released street interviews and videos to build suspense. They also dropped hints throughout the campaign to get consumer traction. The exercise was highly successful and drew 50,000 reposts when it started. An additional 30,000 reposts came in after David Beckham was introduced as the ambassador. #2: Sequence Your Ads to Create Stories According to the recently published The Power of Storytelling from Facebook IQ, online storytelling on social media can have a direct impact on in-store purchases. As an experiment, Refinery29 tested Facebook ads that were sequenced like stories. Overall, the experiment yielded a 56% conversion lift and an 87% rise in view-throughs. Refinery29 also saw a 7% increase in in-store purchases and a 10% increase in online purchases. Deliver sequenced Facebook ads that combine quality content with a strong call to create a social media-led storytelling campaign like this one. #3: Align Your Story with Audience Values A belief ecosystem allows you to move away from product-oriented branding to a more lifestyle or customer value-oriented branding. This is a natural fit for social media where businesses need to define a niche target group (the first believers), develop a brand communication strategy (giving consumers a simple and clear reason to believe) and create online and offline spaces for brand reach and to share stories. This approach is effective because it allows you to sharpen your brand identity, creating strong competitive differentiation and higher price flexibility. This, in turn, has a direct impact on your bottom line. In 2014 Daimler's smart division launched a campaign for the FOR lifestyle brand. As Daimler explains, "'FOR' stands for a constructive, positive and optimistic outlook that can change the world." The company set up a special portal to aggregate social content for the #WhatAreYouFOR campaign hashtag. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SB_0vRnkeOk Another component was an offline campaign centered on pedestrian safety. A key element was the Dancing Traffic Light Manikin, which entertained and asked customers, "What are you for?" This approach helped solidify smart's positioning as a consumer lifestyle choice: a green city car that cares about the world. The customer experience was the central pull for smart's campaign. This was in stark contrast to the pre-2013 online positioning of smart cars that talked more about product features than value. The FOR brand campaign also clearly differentiated smart cars from Daimler's performance-oriented cars. #4: Tell Local Stories With powerful social media reach (1 in 7 people in the world are on Facebook) and democratization of the narrative,

Advanced Blogging: How to Make Your Blog Serve Your Business

Advanced Blogging: How to Make Your Blog Serve Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog? Want to supercharge your content and increase email subscribers? To explore advanced techniques for improving blog content, collecting more email addresses, and promoting products and events, I interview Darren Rowse. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Darren Rowse, one of the world's leading experts on blogging. He's the founder of two popular blogs: Digital Photography School and ProBlogger. He also co-authored the book ProBlogger and hosts the ProBlogger podcast. Darren shares how he learned to better serve the needs of his readers. You'll discover how Darren uses portal pages and what goes into creating them. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Advanced Blogging Determine What Type of Content to Create Darren started by writing what he was excited about in the moment, and he believes that's a great place for bloggers to start because their writing comes across as passionate. However, for bloggers to build expertise in a niche, he notes, they need to put more thought into it. Darren says there are two parts to achieving that outcome. First, you need to understand the people who read your blog and what their needs are. Ultimately, Darren's content ideas come from the conversations he has with readers; this determines what he writes about. Second, you should develop before and after avatars. The before avatar represents who his readers are when they come to the blog, and the after avatar represents who he wants his readers to become. Use your avatars to fill in what your readers need to move from the before avatar to the after avatar, he explains. For example, readers first come to the Digital Photography School blog because they don't know how to use their cameras to full potential. The "after" readers have full creative control of their cameras, along with the confidence, knowledge, and technical skills to get out of automatic mode and take their photography to the next level. Give them what they want and sell them what they need. For example, readers who come to Darren's blog to get photography tips realize they need more help when they return from vacation and discover their photos didn't reflect their journey. His ebook, A Guide to Captivating Travel Photography: Transcending Travel, delivers the things they didn't realize they didn't know, such as tips to help lift their photos. Darren used this exercise for the first time in 2006, and came up with 200 things his blog readers needed to know. Those notations became the first 200 posts on the site. Listen to the show to discover how Darren uses what he knows about what people need to collect email subscribers, attract Facebook fans, sell products, and more. Develop an Editorial Strategy Darren shares the nine different elements he and his team work through each year to figure out their editorial strategy. Voice: Is your content more conversational, teaching, or storytelling? Evergreen vs. Time-sensitive Content: What's the proper ratio? Darren's photography blog leans more toward evergreen, but he notes others may need to create more time-sensitive content. Intent: Is your aim to inform, inspire, educate, or interact? Darren's blogs focus on information and education, but mix in inspirational and interactive content here and there. As an example of content created to drive interaction, Darren says Digital Photography School does a challenge post each week in which they prompt readers to take photos using a specific technique and then share the photos in the comments.

Facebook Ads Strategy: How Marketers Can Win With Facebook

Facebook Ads Strategy: How Marketers Can Win With Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Want to make them more effective? To explore how to create a successful Facebook ads strategy, I interview Nicholas Kusmich. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Nicholas Kusmich, author of Give: The Ultimate Guide to Using Facebook Advertising to Generate More Leads, More Clients, and Massive ROI. He also heads up the H2H Media Group, where he consults and manages accounts for high-profile speakers and authors. Nicholas shares how the four M's can help you plan your Facebook ad strategy. You'll discover the three key elements every Facebook ad needs. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ads Strategy Nicholas' Story Nicholas got into Facebook ads almost by accident. He had been marketing his products on the Internet without any success, even though he followed what everyone said to do: Create a course or ebook, and get paid traffic to sell it. His next step was to try Google ads, but then Google had another algorithm adjustment. Fortunately, around that time, two websites' ad platforms were being released in beta: Plenty of Fish (the dating site) and Facebook. Nicholas jumped in to advertise his products on both and soon realized Facebook was going in a very aggressive direction. He was in the right place at the right time. Nicholas learned about Facebook advertising very quickly and got the advantage of being an early adopter. This was about five years ago. These days, Nicholas runs his marketing business with two key services. His boutique agency serves clients in a fully managed scenario. His business also offers marketing training and consulting for business owners and entrepreneurs who want to implement their marketing for themselves. Listen to the show to hear what Facebook ads were like in the early days. The Role of Facebook Ads in Marketing Nicholas loves the paradox of Facebook's size. On one hand, Facebook is an enormous platform: around two billion users log in for at least a few minutes each day. Therefore, regardless of your type of business or message, your prospects are probably using Facebook. Moreover, you don't need a 30-second spot on the Super Bowl to reach hundreds of millions of people. With Facebook, you can do that with a few clicks of a button. On the other hand, Facebook allows advertisers to zero in on a small, specific audience because Facebook aggregates data. Facebook notes where people check in, what they like, whom they follow, and what they mention. And it makes that kind of information available to advertisers. So, for instance, if Nicholas wanted to target a Beverly Hills housewife who lives on a particular street based on her zip code, and who shops at Whole Foods, has an Amex card, and spent money on it in the last seven days or so, he could. This capability makes Facebook an interesting platform for an advertiser (a business owner or entrepreneur) who has a message, product, or service and who knows the audience they're trying to reach. Facebook allows people to advertise at far lower cost than traditional advertising. So in the grand scheme of marketing, Nicholas believes Facebook advertising is the best direct-response platform and distribution channel to get a message to your ideal prospects. Listen to the show to discover the joke at Nicholas' office. How to Put Together a Facebook Ads Strategy A lot of people focus on the tactics, such as how much to bid for the ad or what objective to use. Those are legitimate concerns, but Nicholas doesn't think they're the big needle-movers.

Facebook Mobile Apps: A Guide for Marketers

Facebook Mobile Apps: A Guide for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage your Facebook marketing on the go? Are you looking for mobile apps to help you? Facebook mobile apps make it easier than ever for marketers to manage their pages and respond to customers in real time from their mobile device. In this article, you'll discover the key things marketers need to know about using Facebook mobile apps. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Your Page With the Pages Manager App Rather than use the native Facebook mobile app to manage your page, use Facebook's Pages Manager app. The app lets you manage up to 50 pages from your smartphone or tablet, and it's available for both iOS and Android. Manage Admins Facebook lets you assign five different types of admins: Editor, Moderator, Analyst, Advertiser, or another Admin (full access). To use the app to assign an admin role to someone, tap Page Settings and then Edit Page Roles. Next, tap Add Person to Page at the top of the screen and type in the person's name. Then select a page role for that person and tap Add. If you want to change someone's role, tap the pencil icon to the right of his or her name (as shown above). Then select a new role and tap Save to save your changes. Create Posts, Schedule, or Save Drafts Sometimes Facebook business users get confused about whether they're posting and commenting as themselves or their page. There is no confusion when using Pages Manager, because you need to sign directly into the app as your page. Even if you have your post attribution set to your profile by default, in Pages Manager, your default will be the page. Similar to the regular Facebook mobile app, you can create and publish all types of posts: status update, photo, video, share a link, or create an event. Plus, what many page admins might not realize when using the Pages Manager app is that you can schedule posts or save as a draft to come back and complete later. Just tap the three little dots in the lower right once you've created your post. These same features are available on desktop. Add Comments and/or Private Message One of the coolest new functions for Facebook pages in general is that you can respond to comments on your page, reply via direct message, or both. It used to be you had to wait for someone to direct message your page before you could reply via direct message. Now, you can message a user directly in response to a comment on your page. The message will come through as your page, whether you send the message via the regular Facebook mobile app or the Pages Manager app. This new feature is especially helpful for pages that receive comments of a particularly sensitive or negative nature at times. Being able to private message the person who made the comment can quickly defuse the situation and take it offline. I recommend also that you leave a comment so anyone viewing the comment thread can see you've clearly taken matters offline with a private discussion. Reply to Messages The ability to private message a page is optional. However, I strongly recommend that you have this feature enabled. Facebook wants Messenger for business to be the new 1-800 number. In fact, disabling the Message feature on your page is like publishing your phone number and then unplugging your phone. Facebook is moving towards a more integrated ecommerce and customer service experience with Messenger for Business. The more prompt and thorough your responses to private messages, the more you'll be able to set your business apart from the competition. Facebook encourages page owners to respond to all messages as promptly as possible, usually within five minutes, which can certainly be a challenge for busy business owners. To access your page messages through Pages Manager, tap the message icon at the bottom of the screen. You can view and reply to private messages as your page. You can also access the Saved Replies feature,

How to Turn Your Goals into A Marketing Plan for the Year

by 321go @ 321GoProject

You have some goals for the year, but don’t yet have a marketing plan for the year set. Look no further. We all know how important having a marketing plan is for your gym, but where the heck do you start? Most gym owners never write one down, mostly out of fear or wondering if they will get it right. By writing a plan down means commitment and accountability. On the flip side, it also means peace of mind and clarity for you and your coaches. All heading in the same direction. How satisfying would it be to have your year planned out so all you needed to do was execute on your plan? NOTE: Join us for a free webinar on “Creating a Simple Marketing Plan for the Year”. Signup below. Your marketing plan for the year doesn’t have to be rocket science, it just needs to be pulled out of your head and written down on paper. Here are 3 things you can do today to turn your goals into a written plan. We are going to go in more detail with the execution part of your plan in our upcoming free webinar, so join us. 1. Assess Start with the customer. They are the champion. Build your plans around your customer’s needs and goals – not around your product and tactics. What does your target customer look like? Who is the best member fit in your gym? Who makes up your current members? Families, young professionals, soccer moms, corporate peeps. Maybe you want to increase the amount of guys in your gym? Maybe you would like to get more older peeps in your gym? Understanding who comes in your gym will help direct your marketing efforts. 2. Identify What are your goals for the year? My guess...

How to Use LinkedIn to Connect With Prospects

How to Use LinkedIn to Connect With Prospects

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn to find business opportunities? Are you looking for tips to reach new leads? LinkedIn has a number of features that make it easy to develop relationships with the right prospects for your business. In this article, you'll discover four ways to use LinkedIn for business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Warm Prospects With over 420 million global members, LinkedIn is the best social media platform for businesses to find and connect with potential prospects. It provides an effective way to bypass gatekeepers and directly access your ideal clients. Finding and connecting directly with these decision-makers will not only save you time and energy, but will also make you more successful in your prospecting activities. The best place to start is with warm prospects, and here's where to look for them. Who's Viewed Your Posts If you post on LinkedIn Publisher, you can find warm prospects on the Who's Viewed Your Posts page. Look below the graph and demographics for each post, and you'll see a list of every person who has interacted with the post. You can view them by Likes, Comments, and Shares, and you can even see what they said in their comment or share. Not only are these people familiar with you, but they've also had a positive interaction with your content. If you find someone who matches your target client, send a personalized connection request mentioning their comment or share. Followers Look at the top of your followers list to see the people you're not connected to. These people like your content and posts so much they've chosen to follow you and receive notifications about you, even though you're not connected to them. Be sure to do a little research and look for a good reason to connect when you send a personalized connection request to them. Updates On your Updates page, you'll find every piece of content you've interacted with, whether you posted it or just engaged with it. Scroll through your most recent interactions. In each post, look at the people who posted or commented. If you hover over their name, you'll be able to see if you're connected with them. If you aren't connected and would like to be, go to their profile page and send a connection request that references the post. Who's Viewed Your Profile The people listed on the Who's Viewed Your Profile page are people who have visited your profile. If you have a free account, you can look below the graph at the top to see the last five people who've viewed your profile. If you have a premium account, you'll have access to the entire list for the last 90 days. If you see anyone you're not connected to and connecting would be a benefit, consider sending a connection request. When personalizing it, find another reason he or she would find value from connecting; not just saying, "I saw you viewed my profile." If seeing your profile was a good enough reason to connect, that person would have already sent you a connection request. #2: Create Trust It doesn't help you to simply "collect connections." Once you've found and connected with potential prospects or partners, it's important to build a relationship with your connections. There are a number of ways that you can strengthen your relationships and stay top of mind. Comment and Share An easy way to interact and get on the radar of your connections is to comment on or share their status updates and Publisher posts. Ensure that you tag them when appropriate, as this both alerts them to your share or comment and also gives them exposure to your network. In the case of both comments and sharing, always make sure that your engagement with your connection makes sense and doesn't come across as spammy or unprofessional, and that you only post content that will be of real benefit or interest to your network. Make Introductions Few things leave as strong an impression as when someone gives witho...

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos to promote your business? Have you considered starting a regular video blog? To explore vlogging, I interview Amy Schmittauer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, an online video expert. She founded Vlog Boss Studios and regularly produces awesome content for her YouTube channel, Savvy Sexy Social. She's also the author of the brand-new book, Vlog Like a Boss: How to Kill It Online with Video Blogging. Amy explores how video blogging can help your business. You'll discover what you need to start your own video blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Vlog Like a Boss What Is Vlogging? The term vlog builds off the word blog, and a vlog is simply a blog in video form. In a vlog, you can share anything you might do in a blog post, such as a tutorial or a story from your life. Consistency is best for vlogging. If you post a vlog here and there, you won't gain much traction. Amy says most vlogs that do well have a regular schedule. I ask Amy about how using YouTube for vlogging is different from the other ways people use YouTube. Amy says the purpose of a vlog is to help people discover you. Videos that may be suitable for YouTube but that don't help people discover you, such as a product commercial or an introduction to your company, don't make great vlog posts. To be discovered, think of the users who are searching for a concern, a specialty, or the answer to a question. Think about what a potential customer or audience member might want to know, create a video about the topic, and upload it to YouTube. Listen to the show to discover Amy's thoughts about vlogging on mobile apps like Snapchat and Instagram, which have video and social. Amy's Vlog When Amy launched Savvy Sexy Social, she was just getting started as a social media marketer. She thought teaching people the best way to do things on social media would to attract an audience and potential clients. She wanted her vlog to be informative and fun. She didn't want social media to feel like a chore. To juggle her content marketing with her client work, Amy says she scheduled her vlog posts to appear three days a week but she created the week's videos all in one day. She would pick three topics (which could be an app, a product, or a general social media tip), record the videos sitting in front of her bookshelf, and then edit and schedule them for the rest of the week. Amy emphasizes that people didn't have to know who she was to find her videos via search. They just needed to have a question about a topic in her videos. For instance, Amy created a video about a hack to make tweets a little longer. She thought the topic was something new that people didn't know much about, and the video became one of her popular vlog posts. The video's headline focused on the Twitter tip but the video also introduced viewers to Amy. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OJRp22IXqXY Amy shares the simple vlog format she used for a long time. She introduced her topic, delivered information about the topic that her viewers would value, and gave an actionable item that would give them results right away. Then she wrapped up with, "By the way, I'm Amy. Hope you can subscribe and stay tuned." In the last year, Amy says she's been having fun with her format so her community could get to know her a little more personally. For instance, throughout January, she documented the journey of launching a book. This approach was more of a lifecasting vlog, but her audience was learning through Amy's experience.

List Building With Social Media: How to Grow Your Email List

List Building With Social Media: How to Grow Your Email List

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow your email list? Wondering how social media can help you grow a list of prospects? To learn how to grow your email list with social media, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies. She's also the host of the new podcast Online Marketing Made Easy and she specializes in online training. She blogs at Amy Porterfield. Amy shares how Facebook marketing has helped grow her email list. You'll learn tactics that work for growing your list when it comes to using social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show. List Building With Social Media Amy's list-building story Although Amy focuses primarily on Facebook marketing, she has noticed over the years that social media is a great place to grow your leads. As an online marketer, her email list is really the heart of her business. Back in January 2010, her email list consisted of about 600 people. She realized she had to do something about it. From then on, she has made a conscious effort to focus on publishing content to attract leads. Today, she has an engaged list of around 50,000. Amy goes into detail on how she attracted online marketers, entrepreneurs and small business owners to her content to get them interested enough to sign up for free giveaways and thereby grow her list. Amy explains how her business model is creating info products for people to learn how to use Facebook to grow their businesses and get more traffic to their websites. Listen to the show to find out why having online information products is important. Is social media alone sufficient? Amy tells us although social media has become saturated, alone it isn't enough to get the exposure your business needs. You also need an email list. Social media is a great way to build relationships, make connections and sell your programs, products and services. But when you pair social media with an email list, you will expand your reach. It's a great combination for getting exposure and staying top of mind with your audience. Listen to the show to find out why our email list at Social Media Examiner is the core of our success. Some ways marketers can increase their list size Amy loves to create Signature Promotional Giveaways (SPGs). You'll discover how these giveaways work to your advantage and why they are so effective. Amy shares why she decided to create a webinar once a quarter as part of her strategy to grow her email list. When you opt in, you have access to a free 60-minute webinar and get live access to Amy. This gives you the opportunity to ask questions and at the same time get great content. Other free high-value pieces of content can be an ebook or a video series you've created. Make sure it's premium content you give in exchange for a name and an email. Amy shares one of the best tips she received from Derek Halpern of Social Triggers regarding using an opt-in on your blog. Hint: It's not just about them spending money with you. Listen to the show to learn how Social Media Examiner added 10,000 names to our email list with the 2012 Media Marketing Industry Report. Tips for using video and webinars to increase your email list Amy explains the reasons behind the 2-minute videos she makes to promote her future webinars. People's attention span on social media is very small,

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Is there a new product you want to create? To discover how to improve your chances for success, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Pat Flynn, the host of the Smart Passive Income Podcast, who blogs at smartpassiveincome.com and helps hundreds of thousands of entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs build their dream businesses. His latest book is called Will it Fly? How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money. Pat will explore how to increase the likelihood that your next product idea is successful. You'll discover ways to test and validate your ideas. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Business Ideas That Succeed How Pat's architect background has helped him in business When Pat started in online business, he taught architects how to take the lead exam. He shares that people reached out to him and thanked him for helping them in their careers, and he says that feeling was different from anything he experienced in the world of architecture. Pat talks about what he did and didn't like about working as an architect, and how the long-term process of breaking a giant project down into chunks helped him when he started in entrepreneurship. He says the process of working hard on a building, planning ahead, and not knowing what it will be like until people are actually using it all translate to building and launching product. Architects and entrepreneurs go through similar processes, Pat says. Each of them are building a solution for a client's problem. As you build it, you make changes, you pivot and you learn as you go. To be successful in any business you need to learn how to adapt and solve other people's problems. Listen to the show to learn what software skill Pat used in architecture that he still uses in business. Why Pat wrote a book about the pre-launch phase In addition to Pat's weekly Smart Passive Income podcast, he does a show called AskPat, during which he answers a voice mail question submitted from his audience via SpeakPipe. One of the most common questions asked is "How do I know if this idea I am working on is worth spending the time?" He tried to answer this question on both shows and found there wasn't enough time for him to cover the topic. The topic was validated through an audience survey (Pat uses SurveyMonkey) in early 2015, when he segmented the people who said they had yet to start a business. By far, their number one concern was not wanting to waste time on something that might not be successful. That's when Pat decided he needed to write a book to people with amazing ideas, that might be life-changing products or services, move forward. Listen to the show to hear the reason behind the title of Pat's new book. Making mistakes Assumptions are great because they are ideas, Pat explains. However, if you act on those assumptions without knowing whether it's something people would actually pay for, that's when you have an issue. Pat shares how a couple of WordPress plugin ideas he had turned into a $15,000 mistake. He didn't discuss the ideas with anybody because it was such a good idea, he didn't want to share it. Plus, he wanted to keep it a secret in order to have an awesome reveal on launch day. Had he simply discussed these ideas with his target audience and people in his mastermind groups, it would have been clear that the idea was merely a starting point. He could have gotten feedback and turned it into something that would actually wo...

Do You Own Your Website Domain? The Common Mistake Made by Hoteliers

Do You Own Your Website Domain? The Common Mistake Made by Hoteliers

by Leonardo @ Vizlly

Your website domain is incredibly valuable to your hotel. It’s a part of your intellectual property, essential to your digital marketing, and helps drive revenue through direct bookings. Because it's so valuable, you can't afford to entrust someone else to purchase it for you. Here's what can happen if you do...

How SEO and SEM will help your business

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Businesses of all sizes can benefit a lot from SEO (search engine optimization) and SEM (search engine marketing, also called paid search marketing). You're leaving a lot of money on the table if you do not use SEO and SEM to promote your business. This article explains how to use SEO and SEM to get more paying customers.

10 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

10 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how to use Snapchat for your business? Want to create deeper connections with your followers? Snapchat can help you build an engaged following, increase loyalty, and boost your brand visibility. In this article, you'll discover 10 ways to use Snapchat for business. Listen to this article: #1: Stage an Influencer Reveal Global fast-food giant McDonald's (username: mcdonalds) isn't just about a famous redheaded clown selling toys with a meal. Professional athletes like LeBron James gave users a behind-the-scenes look at the rollout of the new bacon clubhouse sandwich. Although McDonald's didn't share the results of the promotion, it went well enough to continue. The promotion was pushed to Twitter where users were asked to follow back. To date, McDonald's has over 3 million followers on Twitter. Takeaway: You can apply this same philosophy with Snapchat to give your customers a look at what goes on behind the scenes at your company. Even if your marketing budget is only a fraction of what McDonald's is, buyers still like feeling as if they know the story behind your company. #2: Support an Account Takeover The popular young women's clothing retailer Wet Seal (username: wetseal) launched a Snapchat campaign, which was quickly taken over by a Snapchatter named MsMeghanMakeup. Meghan has over 300,000 followers and her influence was quickly felt as a halo effect over Wet Seal's campaign. The boost propelled the clothier to 9,000 connections in two weeks and over 250,000 views of the holiday "story." Wet Seal was named winner of the 6th Annual Shorty Awards, which honors the best in social media. Takeaway: To get your message seen, you can let an influential Snapchat user take over your account. You may not have connections with 300K+ followers, but even local authorities with hundreds or thousands of fans can improve your Snapchat reach. #3: Share Promo Codes Frozen yogurt chain 16 Handles (username: love16handles) used Snapchat's instant photo feature to amass followers and promote their frozen treats. They were also among the first brands to use Snapchat for coupon offers. The yogurt company earned new customers by promoting specific store locations and times, and when people snapped photos of themselves or their friends eating 16 Handles yogurt, they instantly received a coupon code for between 16% and 100% off. The catch: They only had 10 seconds to show the cashier. Takeaway: You can get your followers involved with Snapchat-exclusive coupon codes or other exclusive promos. Make it fun and your brand's reach is sure to grow! #4: Give VIP Access In the past, it took several weeks for photos from New York Fashion Week to trickle down from photographers to magazines, and then from newsstands to consumers. Now, with Snapchat, followers can watch the fashions unfold almost instantly. Lucky Magazine's editor-in-chief, fashion brand Refinery 29, and many others shared snaps of models strutting down the catwalk, allowing them to deliver images of the iconic fashion show to people in ways never dreamed of before. Takeaway: You can use Snapchat to give your followers a VIP look at your events and promotions that they'll likely never have a chance to attend in person. It's a fun, easy way to bring new life to established events. #5: Feature Your Followers Mobile and online food ordering brand GrubHub (username: grubhub) launched its first Snapchat campaign in 2013, becoming a finalist in the 7th Annual Shorty Awards. They featured their own weekly content, stories gathered from user-generated content, giveaways, and promotions. The results included a 20% increase in followers after the launch of the Snapchat giveaway. The campaign was one of many factors that contributed to its Wall Street debut in a public offering. Takeaway: Don't let your Snapchat feed become too self-serving. Make your feed about your followers, offer them value,

13 Ways to Immediately Improve SEO Ranking of Your Website

13 Ways to Immediately Improve SEO Ranking of Your Website


Jeffbullas's Blog

Discover the easiest ways to improve SEO ranking of your website almost overnight. Increase your rankings in Google and other search engines.

Social Sharing: How to Inspire Fans to Share Your Stories

Social Sharing: How to Inspire Fans to Share Your Stories

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use stories to market your business? Are you wondering how you can get people to share your content? To learn how to inspire your fans and followers to share your stories via social media, I interview Simon Mainwaring for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Simon Mainwaring, author of We First: How Brands and Consumers Use Social Media to Build a Better World. He's a consultant who's worked with brands like Nike and Motorola. Simon also hosts the upcoming We First Social Branding Seminar in West Hollywood in a few days. Simon shares the importance of tapping into the power of your fans to share your story. You'll learn how you can create a story and the kind of content you need to use to succeed. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Sharing Why is it important to tap the power of fans? Simon states that the power of social media is not in the ability of a brand to sell directly to a customer; it's more to inspire a customer who made a purchase to talk about your brand to others. With traditional media, it was "one to many." A television commercial would reach many people. Whereas with social media, it's about "one to one to many." Kevin Kelly, co-founder of Wired magazine, said, "One member of those thousand fans and those thousand fans will promote you to so many other people." Apple's marketing looks effortless, but they do very conscious things to build their rabid fan base. They celebrate the customer through the priority they give to the user experience. There is no other brand out there that spends so much time and attention to make sure their customer experience is so well-captured in the product itself. Apple really listens to their customers and the marketing is done in a very human way. The video below shows the campaign for the iPod, which was done in very simple language. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TaVFCdwT0hk You'll discover what else Apple does to tap into the human dynamics and how they have a raving fan base. Not everybody has the brilliance of what Apple has built and Simon says there is a fundamental shift that every brand needs to make. The shift is for companies to market themselves not as the celebrity of their customer community but rather as a celebrant. You have to stop talking about yourself. Instead talk about your customers. Now thanks to social media, there is real-time dialog between brands and consumers. If you want to inspire your fans to promote your brand and build your business, you need to reframe your marketing as a celebration of your customer community. You'll hear the questions you need to think about that get customers to share and what gives you the power of one to one to many. You can then use your marketing platform to celebrate your customers. There are many entrepreneurs and big brands that transform their experience with social media. Brands have changed their positioning and it's become a benefit to their customers. Coca-Cola's marketing used to be "The Real Thing." Now they've changed it to "Open Happiness." Pepsi was "The Joy of Pepsi," and now it's "Refresh Everything." You'll hear how Sharpie celebrates their customers and what Intel did to make it all about their customers with the launch of the Museum of Me. Listen to the show to find out how the direction of conversation has reversed between brand, company and customer. What's happening in the PR and advertising industry to bring about t...

Marketing Instagram Style: What Marketers Need to Know

Marketing Instagram Style: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Instagram for marketing? Are you wondering how you can grow an Instagram following that will build your business? To learn how Instagram can help you engage your audience, I interview Jenn Herman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jenn Herman, who blogs at Jenn's Trends and is one of our top 10 social media blog winners for 2014. Her blog focuses on social media management. She's author of the ebook, The Ultimate Beginner's Guide to Instagram. Jenn shares why marketers should consider Instagram for their business. You'll discover the types of images that will engage your audience, how to drive traffic to your website and examples of marketers who are successful on the platform. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show. Instagram Marketing Why marketers should consider Instagram Jenn explains how a lot of people use Instagram for personal communication. Many people believe that it's a platform for selfies and pictures of food. However, Instagram is much more than that and goes a lot deeper. The marketing aspect is so much stronger now, and will only continue to grow. So far this year, the main buzzword has been visual marketing, with Facebook and Twitter embracing visual content. Not only is Instagram a visual platform, it also gives you the capacity to create visual content for other sites. With the Instagram tools available, you can create fun artwork to use on your blog, website, Facebook and Twitter. It's very useful for cross-promoting. Right now, 65% of the world's top brands use Instagram and Jenn says the number continues to grow. There are 200 million monthly active users on Instagram, 70% of which log in daily. This is a huge base of people for marketers to reach. No matter who your target audience is, some of them will use the platform. You'll hear why you can reach people more clearly through Instagram than you can with any other platform. As a marketer, you should aim to create original images for Instagram. There are many different ways to incorporate your products and services into an image to make it look more native and get better engagement. Listen to the show to find out what our 2014 Social Media Marketing Industry Report revealed about visual marketing. Marketers who use Instagram well The first brand example that Jenn talks about is fashion designer Michael Kors. The way they do product placement on Instagram is amazing. The images they create for their fans are behind the scenes at fashion shows, photo shoots and great shots of their products. These types of images can help you to connect with your audience. Although Jenn loves the images, she says it's their lack of engagement that lets them down. Instagram is a highly engaged and active environment. Jenn advises marketers to be aware of this, and make sure that you're responsive to your followers. Listen to the show to hear the type of images we used to create some buzz prior to Social Media Marketing World this year. Engagement on Instagram Jenn states that engagement is considerably higher on Instagram than it is on Facebook, Twitter and Google+. When Jenn tests her blog posts on all of the different platforms, Instagram almost always comes out ahead. One way to create engagement on Instagram is to ask a question in the caption. This encourages your readers to start or join the conversation. When they start to respond, you receive a trail of comments.

15 Reasons Why Your Business Can’t Live Without Google

by Matt Smith @ Online Income Teacher

Written by Matt Smith for Online Income Teacher

Many people have varying opinions on Google.  Some feel that it is abhorrently evil, whereas others absolutely love it.  People are divided even further, however, when Google has an effect on their livelihood.  This tends to always raise the question of whether you can live without Google or not. There […]

The post 15 Reasons Why Your Business Can’t Live Without Google appeared first on Online Income Teacher.

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to build an engaged loyal following that loves you and your business? Have you tried to use video, podcasting or social media to build engagement? I explore these questions with Pat Flynn for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income. Pat shares insights into his tactics and strategies and how social media content contributes to the success of his business. You'll learn how to create content to publish on different social media platforms to connect to a large audience. And you'll discover the techniques to use to build a loyal fan base. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Content for Business The business strategy behind Smart Passive Income  Pat explains how content plays a key role in his business. You'll learn why his focus is to provide valuable content for those looking for information. You'll hear how you can do this when you share content based on your own experiences. Pat shares the results his business has had from his different content platforms: blog, video and podcast. Listen to the show to discover Pat's personal stories behind his successful business. How to make a personal connection with your audience Pat talks about the different ways he shares personal information about himself to connect with his audience and how he incorporates this into his business content. Pat shares the reason why he gives his audience strategic insights into his personal story. Pat shares how he connects with his audience on Facebook. You'll find out the strategy behind the different components of Pat's Facebook page photo and how this strategy helps him connect with his audience. People like to connect with people. You'll pick up some useful tips on how to build affinity online. Listen to the show to discover why Pat leverages his "trifecta" content creation strategy (blogging, video and podcasting) to connect with a wide audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJIJ_6G9Z84 Pat's video strategy YouTube is the #2 search engine in the world. Pat explains how he uses videos to respond to questions from his audience. Pat explains how this strategy works well for his business and drives traffic back to his website. Listen to the show to find out how Pat intentionally uses keywords in his videos for great results. Pat's blogging strategy Pat blogs three times a week. He publishes content based on his own experiences and explains what he does wrong, what he does right and the results he gets. He's very transparent with all of the different processes. Pat talks about the Niche Site Duel, where he was challenged to build a website from scratch. Pat publicly displayed the process and how it reached #1 in Google. Pat explains the role email marketing plays in his business model and why it's crucial for business. You'll discover why email is still the best tool to use to connect with people in a direct and personal way. Listen to the show to discover insights into the business strategies behind Pat's successful blog. Pat's podcasting strategy You'll discover how Pat was surprised by the extent that podcasting helps his brand. Learn how Pat discovered that 20% of his readers find his website through his podcasts. Find out how to train your podcast audience to get to your blog with calls to action in your podcast. Pat uses the Pretty Link Pro plugin and domain names for easy redirect URLs to get podcast listeners to come to his site.

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your social media marketing mix? Looking for tips to get started with video? Making the right decisions in three key areas will help you create videos that engage people. In this article you'll discover three steps to add video to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Video Type The great thing about social media is that you can create many different types of videos to keep your publishing schedule interesting and your followers engaged. Eighty-eight percent of businesses say that video is an important part of their marketing strategy. However, the biggest struggles are to stop recycling old content and choose the right type of video content. Here are five ways that you can include video in your social media marketing. Grab Attention With Pre-roll Video Pre-roll video ads are short 15- to 30-second videos that grab the viewer's interest in a product or service. You can use them on social media sites such as YouTube, Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. The secret to a successful pre-roll video is to gain the viewer's attention quickly, as most people naturally gravitate towards the Skip button or scroll past videos on their news feed. This pre-roll video from Geico pulls the viewer in by showing a runaway vacuum. Use humorous tactics like this to make your video stand out in the news feed and compel viewers to watch the whole thing. (Editorial Note: This video was removed from public view after this article published.) httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xmzm1JCOqtU Show Viewers How to Do Something One way to produce highly targeted content is to teach your audience how to do something. This helps you improve shares and attract new followers. Fitness trainer Kayla Itsines regularly produces videos that teach her target audience how to do various fitness moves. Content like this has helped her become an influencer in the fitness industry, gaining her 4.4 million followers on Instagram. Her videos are easy to follow and they feature content that people would normally expect to pay money to see. http://www.instagram.com/p/_XYsJfACNp/ "How to" video searches on YouTube are up to 70%, with over 100 million hours watched on the platform. Problem-solving content is valuable and video is one of the best ways to offer it. Capitalize on Trending Topics Marketers are always hoping to create the next viral video, but with so much competition, it's not as easy as it sounds. That's why it's important to take advantage of the trending topics across social platforms. The Trending Topics sections on both Twitter and Facebook are popular sources of news content for social users. If you create a video related to a trending topic, you can potentially tap into a huge market. Jimmy Fallon created an a cappella video to celebrate the new Star Wars movie. Creating content around a popular event helped this video to secure millions of shares across social media. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZTLAx3VDX7g Take a look at the events likely to create a buzz during the calendar year and incorporate these into your video marketing strategy. Go Behind the Scenes Showing people what goes on behind the scenes at your company is a great way to connect with your audience on a personal level. It helps close the gap between brand and customer, which is important in the world of marketing. In this video, Ben and Jerry's introduces one of their Flavor Gurus and gives viewers a brief look at what goes into creating their products and what it's like to work for the company. http://www.instagram.com/p/39m2aMRkLn/ Showcase Products When it comes to video content, 76% of consumers say that they would share a video if it's entertaining. When you incorporate a product video into your social strategy, it's important to strike a balance between promoting your product and keeping the tone light, fun and informal.

10 Snapchat Hacks to Make Your Snaps Stand Out

10 Snapchat Hacks to Make Your Snaps Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to take your Snapchat marketing up a notch? Have you explored all of Snapchat's features? Learning to use all of the features Snapchat offers is a big part of telling stories people will want to follow. In this article, you'll discover 10 hacks for creating more appealing Snapchat stories. Listen to this article: #1: Use Complementary Color Schemes You may be familiar with the color gradient that Snapchat gives you to doodle on your photos, but did you know you can get all of the different shades of color too, including black and white? When you select a color, drag your finger over to the top left of the screen for lighter shades that will eventually turn to white. Or drag down towards the bottom for darker shades and the bottom left for black. #2: Customize Text Size and Color You can also change the color and size of your text, down to the letter. Here's how you do it: after you write something, click the T symbol to make the text bigger. Next, tap on your text. Then play with the color picker to change the color. Finally, press and hold over the text to bring up the highlighting tool, and select individual letters for which you want to change the color. Tap done to finish. You can now pinch smaller, expand bigger, and rotate the bit of text to make even funkier snaps. #3: Combine Snap Filters Snapchat features a good range of filters and geofilters, so many that sometimes one just isn't good enough. Here's how to choose more than one filter. After you take your photo, swipe right or left to choose your first filter. Next, hold one finger steady on the screen, and swipe with a different finger to select another filter. At the moment, you can do this for up to three filters per photo/video. #4: Use Close-ups in Video This hack is easy, yet many people don't make the most of it. When recording video on Snapchat, focus on your subject and play with the zoom function. Doing this can help you retain your viewers' interest for the entire 10 seconds. While recording with either the front-facing or rear-facing camera, simply slide your thumb up and down the screen to zoom in and out. #5: Add a Soundtrack to Snaps It's easier than ever to incorporate music into your snaps. If you have a favorite song that sums up the moment you're snapping, simply load the song onto your music player on your phone (iTunes, Spotify, etc.), and when you start snapping, the song will continue playing in the background. Note: Pay attention to music rights, especially if you're a big brand. You could find yourself in trouble if you use unlicensed music in a way that could be portrayed as advertising your product. #6: Use 3D Stickers in Videos 3D stickers are a fairly recent update to Snapchat. They offer a great way to make your 10-second videos a lot more entertaining. You can add 3D stickers to make your emojis and Snapchat graphics stay in place in a video. It's simple to do. First, shoot your video and select your sticker by clicking the square on the top line. Next, place your sticker where you want it to appear in the video. Then, at the point of the video you want the sticker to stick, simply press and hold, then release. #7: Create Custom Filters Another neat little trick is to create your own color filters/gradients for snaps. Use the emojis and stickers Snapchat gives you. First, find an emoji that has an outline color you want to use (maybe your brand colors). Next, make the emoji larger by expanding it multiple times, and as you do, move it to one side and down. The more you expand it, the more blurred it becomes around the edges of the emoji. You can place it in such a way you get a cool gradient on your photo or video. Also, you can combine Hack #6 and Hack #7 to create 3D filters! #8: Enable Hands-free Snapping One of the restrictions of Snapchat is that you must keep your finger on the button.

Test | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

Email Sales Funnels: How to Automate Your Sales

Email Sales Funnels: How to Automate Your Sales

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have an automated way to market to your email list? Are you thinking of creating a sales funnel? To explore how to automate your email marketing, I interview Yaro Starak. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Yaro Starak, a blogging expert who specializes in helping people turn their blogs into profitable businesses. He's the author of the ebook Blog Profits Blueprint. Yaro also is an expert in building automated email sales funnels. Yaro shares what you need to know to build successful email sales funnels that sell for you. You'll discover how to create a successful automated email sequence. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Email Sales Funnels Yaro's Backstory Yaro discovered blogging in 2004 after someone suggested he start a blog for his editing company. While many bloggers were spending a lot of time writing content, Yaro knew of people who generated $30,000 using email. To avoid becoming one of those bloggers who was trapped writing 20 posts a day and to automate the sales process for his course, Yaro built what he now calls a blog sales funnel. He set up a series of blog posts to go to his email newsletter once a week for 52 weeks. Then at intervals throughout the email delivery process, he would include a sales message for his course. Yaro notes that it took him six months to write a year's worth of messages, so he recommends starting smaller. He's spent the last few years building and perfecting his process. Listen to the show to discover when and why Yaro first went online. How an Email Sales Funnel Works Email sales funnels deliver sequenced pieces of content to anyone who opts in, Yaro explains. When automated, those emails (autoresponders) let marketers deliver trust, educate, and sell their product on autopilot. Businesses have customers at different levels of interest, he points out. Some people are ready to buy a $30 ebook but aren't ready to invest $1,000 in a course. Some want to purchase everything you offer, while others just want to explore your free information. After you set up an email sales funnel, it automatically meets the needs of all of those different people. As each person goes through the email sequence and various product offers, they self-select to enter the next sales level. Yaro now markets a range of ebooks, his membership site, and a flagship course. Because he set up a range of email sequences to market each one, he's free to spend his time blogging and doing podcasts. When someone new discovers him via a blog post or a podcast, his sales funnel automatically goes to work. Listen to the show to hear Yaro discuss the old-school way of doing email newsletters. Examples of Successful Email Funnels Yaro shares that he uses an event-based direct selling launch sequence, similar to that of the Jeff Walker school of marketing, to sell his flagship course. The launch includes a series of free videos and a free copy of his Blog Profits Blueprint report. At the end of the launch, he delivers an offer to join his course. To automate that process, he's set up an email sequence that's triggered when someone visits his site and opts to receive a copy of the Blog Profits Blueprint report. Once people opt in, they receive a series of video trainings over three weeks via an automated email sequence. On the fourth week, he invites people to enter his course. Comparing the two processes, Yaro says it's not necessarily changing the way you sell; it's applying automation to create a more hands-off business process.

5 Tips for Selling Products on Instagram

5 Tips for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you wondering how to sell your products on Instagram? Want some tips to get started? To make the most of interactions with customers on Instagram, your images and descriptions need to stand out and purchasing needs to be as easy as possible. In this article you'll discover five tips for selling your products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Develop a Signature Look Before you start posting, think about how you want to position your products on your page. The right product placement is key to driving Instagram sales and engagement. Identify the aesthetic you want for your page and stick to it. Once you have your product shots, use Instagram's internal filters or an app like VSCO Cam to make your photos visually sharper and clearer. Remember that you want to showcase the true product to your customers, so sometimes no filter works best in social selling. If you want to show one product in a variety of ways, try the Instagram Layout app. The app makes it easy to combine multiple images into a single image. Use it to show your product at different angles, which is particularly useful for fashion and jewelry businesses. Rocksbox showcases their products in an effective and consistent manner on their Instagram page. They feature close-ups of their products or have a model wear them. People can really see the products and find out how to incorporate them in their everyday fashion. #2: Give Product Descriptions Something Extra While it's important to be clear about what you're selling, you also need to attract the attention and interest of likely customers with your descriptions. One way to do that is to add a few relevant emojis. They help break up the copy and work well with an emoji-obsessed demographic. Birchbox uses emojis to detail their products and how to purchase them. Here, the emojis help viewers understand what scents are in each perfume. #3: Promote Product Visibility in Search With Hashtags Hashtags have a lot to do with how your products get discovered on Instagram. You can use Instagram's Search and Explore feature to view the top hashtags for your demographic and vertical, and then use three to five of them in your social selling campaigns. Don't forget to create and use your own branded hashtag, too. Do a daily search for that hashtag to see who's using it, and consider regramming the best photos or videos from fans on your own marketing platforms. Use the Regram app to easily feature your customers' photos on your Instagram feed. #4: Make Purchasing Easy Now it's time to convert your followers into customers. Use an Instagram selling tool like Have2Have.It to add a shoppable link to your Instagram bio. This will eliminate the clunky user experience created when you include a website or Bitly link in your product posts. By clicking on the link in your bio, followers are taken to a page (with the same look and feel as your Instagram page) where they can purchase your products. You can import your products from ecommerce databases like Shopify and WooCommerce into Instagram, and analyze the results so you know what products are converting. Then you can focus on promoting those products to increase sales. The Have2Have.It dashboard also includes conversion tracking, so you can attribute revenue to the platform itself. For social media managers trying to prove ROI for Instagram, this is key in social selling. #5: Partner With Influencers You can expand brand awareness and increase sales by partnering with Instagram influencers to reach an audience that's specifically targeted to your products and services. Simplify the process of connecting your brand and influencers with a tool like Captiv8. From search, discovery and workflow management, you can solidify the relationship right in the marketplace. Figure out the best product placement that's in line with the influencer's authentic voice and the trending hashtags and cop...

7 Ways to Improve Your LinkedIn Company Page

7 Ways to Improve Your LinkedIn Company Page

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your business on LinkedIn? Are you using your LinkedIn company page to its full potential? LinkedIn company pages let you provide value to your audience while giving them the chance to engage with your business, effectively establishing your credibility as a trusted resource. In this article you'll discover seven ways a LinkedIn company page can help your business stand out on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: #1: Support Brand Recognition There are two primary visuals to be aware of on your LinkedIn company page: your company logo, which should be consistent on all websites and marketing materials, and the banner image on the top of your profile, which you can customize for LinkedIn and change whenever you'd like. The banner (or background) image is important to brand your company. Since you may have a different audience on LinkedIn from your other social networks, keep certain graphic elements that define your brand such as colors, fonts, and design, while adding visual variety. For example, HubSpot's LinkedIn banner image has their colors, along with the words "Academy & You," to promote the #FindYourAnd hashtag campaign for their HubSpot Academy educational program. Even though there's a place for your website link on your LinkedIn company page, I recommend that you add your URL and central phone number (if you have one) to the banner image. You don't need to include your logo, since it will be right above the image on your page. Add a call to action, tag line, or hashtag to invite some engagement from your audience. In addition to a main primary banner image, create custom background images too. This can promote upcoming events, a new content series, a product launch, a hashtag campaign, your best clients, or new hires. For instance, Ventiv Technology features their new CEO in their current background image. More than anything, your visuals should be consistent and reflect your other social media and business branding. To update your company page images, or really anything on your page profile, click Edit on the right side of your company page, then Edit Page. #2: Promote Specialized Landing Pages Your website URL is required for your company page, and it's likely you'll want to keep the main one most of the time. However, if you're launching a book or promoting something, change your website URL to point to your blog or a product or event page. Putting your website URL in the banner image gives you the freedom to change the link for your website at any time. #3: Speak Directly to Prospects In a lot of situations, the company description is someone's first impression of your business. Whether they're job seekers looking for more info about your company, vendors seeking strategic partnership, or potential customers and clients checking you out, you want to captivate them immediately. Most businesses copy and paste their About section from the company website. While that's better than nothing, there's a way to step it up a notch. Write a description that directly speaks to the people who are visiting your company page, letting them know who you are and how you can benefit them. In her description, Jeanne Bliss of CustomerBLISS tells her company's story and her background, shares the pain point of her ideal client, and then states how she can help. Plus, the image is an excellent visual representation of what she has to offer. Speak directly to the client with a description that builds your and your business's credibility. #4: Improve Visibility in Search Go to the Specialties section and add your keywords. This will make your company page a little easier to find. Your keywords are likely your specialties. Make them known, so those searching can find your company. #5: Feature Specialties Showcase pages are really subpages of your company page. You may want to use showcase pages if you have an annu...

Smart SEO Strategies to Drive Direct Bookings

Smart SEO Strategies to Drive Direct Bookings

by Leonardo @ Vizlly

Learn how travel shoppers use search engines to find hotels, how to increase your organic rankings to drive more traffic, and the 5 elements of a high-converting hotel website to ensure you can capitalize on all the new traffic heading your way.

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you give presentations or speak to clients? Want to illustrate your knowledge with better stories? To discover how to improve your stories, and your storytelling, I interview Michael Port. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Port, the author of NYT best seller: Book Yourself Solid. He also teaches workshops called Heroic Public Speaking, where he applies the craft of acting to public speaking. His latest book is Steal the Show: From Speeches to Job Interviews to Deal-Closing Pitches. Michael will explore how to find, use and create stories in your marketing. You'll discover tips to improve the delivery of your stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Art of Story Michael's story Michael shares how he started his career as an actor. He has a master from the graduate acting program at New York University. Michael worked professionally on the shows Sex and the City, Third Watch, All My Children, Law & Order and 100 Center Street, as well as in the films The Pelican Brief, Down to Earth and The Believer. He earned a living doing commercial voice overs for companies including AT&T, Pizza Hut, Braun, Coors Beer, MTV and others. After he left acting, Michael says he decided to talk his way into a job for which he was completely unqualified. He pitched himself, got the job and worked his way up in the fitness industry on the business side. He credits his post-acting success to being an actor, as he was able to perform during life's high-stakes situations. When the spotlight and eyes are on you, the way you perform will determine the quality of your life, Michael says. After Michael left the fitness industry, he went into consulting for businesses and started writing books, and he saw it more and more. Over the last 13 years, Michael realized he had to meld his experience and training as an actor, his experience as a professional keynoter and what he knows about the business world. That's what Steal the Show is about, Michael says. Half the book is on the techniques associated with being a great public speaker and the other half is focused on performing during life's everyday situations. Listen to the show to learn more about how Michael coaches speakers, as well as why he originally resisted helping people with their public speaking. Why people love stories People love narrative, wonder and imagination, Michael says. Stories can get us out of our own head and into another world. We turn everything into a story, he continues. Politics, religion, love, our success or our failures become stories. Sometimes the stories we tell actually get in our way and sometimes they can change the world. Michael talks about a researcher named Jonathan Gottschall, who studies the neuroscience behind stories. Jonathan says the constant firing of our neurons in response to fictional stimuli strengthens and refines the neural pathways that lead to skillful navigation of life's problems. Listen to the show to discover in what way projects are stories. How to find your stories People sometimes draw a blank when they start to work on a presentation or prepare for an upcoming meeting, because so many things have happened over the years. Those experiences and stories are not top of mind, since you are more likely thinking about today and tomorrow. There are four different prompters for the discovery part of the process. Take a piece of paper and write out four columns, one for each of these categories. Then, when you go to craft a speech or presentation for a sales pitch,

7 for ’17 — 7 Tips for Enhancing Google AdWords Campaigns in 2017

by Troy Sympson @ NgageContent: Inbound Marketing Agency Cleveland

So you’ve built a website that helps you get found online and you’ve mastered the B2B blog. Now what? How about...

The post 7 for ’17 — 7 Tips for Enhancing Google AdWords Campaigns in 2017 appeared first on NgageContent: Inbound Marketing Agency Cleveland.

7 Ways to Track Your Social Media Marketing Activities

7 Ways to Track Your Social Media Marketing Activities

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you tracking your social media marketing results? Do you know where to find metrics to help you improve? Tracking social activity helps you attract a higher-quality following, communicate more effectively and provide content that resonates with your audience. In this article you’ll discover seven ways to track metrics and improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Discover Optimal Times to Post Use a tool like SumAll to track metrics such as what times of the day you get the most engagement and which content types work best for your social posts. As you gather these insights, start scheduling your posts at optimal times. Make other changes as well, such as a different content type or voice, to connect with and grow your audience. #2: Examine the Reach of a Keyword on Twitter To track the reach of a specific keyword or hashtag on Twitter, use a tool like TweetReach. For example, if you're running a campaign with an associated hashtag, you can determine how far your hashtag traveled over a given time frame. TweetReach's free service will look at 1,500 tweets for a given keyword. For example, below are the results for a search for the hashtag #MondayBlogs. The results show that the term had a reach of nearly 211,000 accounts. TweetReach also shows you the most influential accounts that help spread your message and makes it easy for you to engage with them. With the premium service, you can track a hashtag over weeks or months to see how your campaign is spreading on Twitter. #3: Research Your Competition If you want to know where your competitors excel and where they're falling short on social, use a tool like Rival IQ to find out. Why is this good to know? If your competitors are tanking on Snapchat, for example, chances are you will too. Or if your competitors aren't on Snapchat, it might be worth a look to see why. Maybe they were on the platform previously and it didn't work out, or perhaps it's just a venue they haven't explored yet. A recent blog post from Rival IQ reveals engagement rates for Shopify and their competitors, complete with detailed graphics showing where each company has a social presence and where they get the most interaction. You may find some of the results surprising. For example, Shopify gets the most engagement on Instagram. That's probably not the first place you'd think people would go for an ecommerce solution, but Shopify is connecting well there. #4: Identify Industry Influencers Use a tool like BuzzSumo to identify who the influencers are in your field and what they're talking about. Then connect with those people, talk to them and make sure you're responding to them when they tweet you. Beyond that, you can use BuzzSumo to find out which posts are getting the most action, discover relevant keywords you may have been unaware of and find new Twitter chats to participate in. You can also see who shared the best content so you can target your following habits in the hope that they'll follow you back. Filter your results if you want to see what video is performing best or for details on infographics, for example. You can go back for a year, which is particularly useful if you have season-specific content. All in all, BuzzSumo gives you insights on how to word your posts and whom to engage with for growth on which social platform. It's a great tool for fine-tuning how you present your content on social media. Check out how your own posts rank to make sure that you're improving over time. #5: Determine Website Traffic Sources With a customized landing page, you can measure many metrics, the most basic of which is just where website traffic is coming from. Say you're spending 10 hours a week crafting Twitter posts because you're certain that your audience is there. If you then discover that your Facebook landing page is driving more traffic, you can streamline your efforts either by reducing the...

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does social media marketing contribute to your bottom line? Are you looking for tools to boost your ROI? As social media changes from an engagement-driven environment to a conversion-driven one, new tools are emerging to help you market more effectively. In this article you'll discover four tools to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Locally With Pointro When we think of local marketing, a narrow set of marketing choices comes to mind, such as offline marketing in local communities through events, sampling at stores, posters and fliers handed out by high-schoolers and the like. Alternately, local marketing also refers to local SEO and how to get visitors who are searching for what you offer online to walk into your store. Pointro is a relatively new social media tool that allows local business owners to connect with patrons in real time and offer them excellent service at the point where it matters most. You get a notification each time a customer checks into your restaurant or store. You can then listen to the conversation and chime in where you're needed. You also get instant access to photos taken by customers at your location and shared with their networks on social channels. Use this user-generated content to showcase customer loyalty to your brand and to enhance your credibility with future customers. Keep in mind that according to a HubSpot survey, 73% of users are likely to buy from a brand that responds to them on social media. Using Pointro to tap into that preference will build a relationship that leads to a conversion. #2: Focus on Loyal Advocates With ManageFlitter Managing relationships with social media brand advocates is a huge part of a successful social media program. Brand advocates are satisfied customers who directly impact the perceptions of other followers towards your business on social media. They also help spread a good word about your business far beyond your immediate network. In other words, cultivating brand advocates can be a huge win for converting undecided users. To be able to focus your energies on brand advocates, you need to know who matters and who doesn't. ManageFlitter is a tool that allows you to pare down your Twitter follower lists to only those users who truly like and engage with your brand on social media. By weeding out accounts that are dormant or have unfollowed you, you're freeing up your time and not wasting your marketing budget on fans that exist in name only. ManageFlitter also gives you the best times of day to publish posts for the best response, which is particularly helpful if you have a business or brand that operates across multiple time zones. #3: Reward Purchase Sharing With AddShoppers As previously discussed, brand advocates hold immense power in convincing other users to convert to your brand. A few years ago, Nielsen’s Global Trust in Advertising study revealed that 92% of customers trust recommendations from friends and family when making a purchase decision. This means the friends and families of your existing customers have the potential to turn into easy conversion targets. All you need to do is reach them at the right time with the right message. AddShoppers is a suite of tools that allows you to do that. One of AddShoppers' key features is the purchase-sharing auto-prompt that appears as soon as users complete their purchase. This feature allows users to share the details of their purchase (product descriptions, website URL, pricing and more) on social media. The tool also allows you to offer rewards (future purchase discounts, free shipping, etc.) to customers for sharing their purchases on social media. AddShoppers works well with ecommerce sites built on nearly every platform, including (but not limited to) WordPress, Shopify, Magento and PrestaShop. #4: Deliver Relevant Content With Tweet Jukebox Social media automation is a lot more than just sc...

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you own or manage a local business? Are you leveraging the full power of online reviews? To discover how to leverage online review services, I interview Martin Shervington. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Martin Shervington, one of the world's leading experts on Google+ and Google for Business. As a trainer, speaker and consultant, he helps marketers understand how to best utilize Google's services. Martin will explore online reviews for local businesses. You'll discover how to get reviews for your business, as well as how to respond to negative reviews. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews for Local Businesses Google for business In June 2014 Google launched Google My Business, which simplifies how people set up pages. Part of this is for local businesses, so they can appear on a map, get reviews and so on. Martin has been doing research on this and says businesses are not quite connecting the dots on Google+ marketing and using this powerful tool. He says as of last year, only 37% of businesses had claimed their Google listing, 63% have not. Listen to the show to discover more about Google My Business. The impact of reviews Martin has spoken to hundreds of businesses (owners and staff) about reviews. People use reviews as a socialized way to judge the businesses around them, which get more customers as a result of reviews. For example, Martin shares, Tasty Thai in San Mateo can attribute thousands of dollars of revenue to one single positive Yelp review from a guy who had been to Thailand and loves their Thai food. At the moment Yelp has a lot of people's attention, and Martin hopes Google reviews will get to that level as well. Reviews can bring tourists, new people and new business. The downside is there's the potential for negative reviews. "[Businesses have to have] good service, good product and sometimes be willing to say when you haven't got it 100% right," Martin says. Listen to the show to hear about an amazing experience I had while traveling, based on a Yelp review. Google listings Martin explains how Google sometimes auto-generates a business listing, and a lot of people's businesses are listed without them knowing about it. To determine if your business has an auto-generated listing, Google your location to see if anything comes up. If it doesn't, go to Google.com/business to set one up. If it is already set up, click where it says "claim this listing," so you can control uploading photos, reply to posted reviews and more. When you set up a page on Google they verify it by phone or by mail. There are two different types of local pages, Martin continues, a storefront and a service area. If you run your business from home, say you are a service area to hide your address. Once you've claimed your property or set up your page from scratch, there are several things you can do: change the profile image (which is the icon people see when you make comments or reply to reviews), change your cover photo, manage your photos, add what you do to the description area, post on that Google page, reply to reviews, share reviews and more. You can even embed the best reviews on your website. This is how you take the social proof you get from reviews and spread it onto your website. The Google My Business dashboard provides a higher-level frame-of-reference around the things that are connected to your business, such as analytics, your YouTube channel, the page insights and the Google+ page itself.

5 Unusual Tips to Improve Your SEO With Social Media

5 Unusual Tips to Improve Your SEO With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to rank higher in search engines? Interested in ways to use your social accounts to improve your SEO? Social media has a significant impact on your search results, and a strong social presence can boost your search rankings. In this article you'll discover five ways to use social media to improve your search rankings. Listen to this article: #1: Build Links With Your Social Channels Google used to put a high value on link building in their search rankings, no matter what quality of links you were building. When people figured this out and started manipulating rankings with fake or low-quality links to their site, Google started to focus on higher-quality links. Links on social media are often considered higher-quality links, because social sites have a high web authority from the get-go. Even if your Facebook page is new, it's likely to rank highly (and maybe even surpass your website) thanks to Facebook's overall high authority. It may sound obvious, but make sure that you include a working link to your website not only in your content, but also in every social profile you have. In addition to increasing traffic to your site, it's also highly valuable for link building. When it comes to link building within content, post content like new products or blog posts to your social profiles to encourage sharing. For example, you could create a relevant YouTube video for each blog post and embed it in the post, capitalizing on the high web authority to send traffic to your site and increase search rankings. #2: Grow Your Follower Base Pages with a lot of high-quality followers rank better in searches. High-quality followers are real followers on your social channels, and a large percentage of them engage or interact with you in some form. This interaction might be repinning pins, retweeting your content or sending you a tweet, placing reviews on Google+ or engaging with your posts on Facebook. Social signals are a very real factor when it comes to SEO. Search engines look at social signals to find out how often you're posting to your social media accounts, how many people interact with you and if there are social-sharing elements available to visitors to your site. There's no point in trying to outsmart the algorithms with fake likes on Facebook. Low-quality followers are not good for you. Not only will Facebook penalize you for fake likes, search engines like Google will punish you with lower rankings, too. So, make sure you're steadily gaining a solid base of followers that are interacting with you and your content, and encourage them to share, engage and interact with you. #3: Make Your Content Searchable and Sharable Pinterest is a great example of a social platform that makes your content both searchable and sharable. Pinterest encourages sharing to a great extent. Users post pins they like to their boards, and share them with other Pinterest users. Many social accounts give you the option of keeping your content private, or relatively so. On YouTube, you can have unlisted videos, and only people who have links to the videos can watch them. Pinterest allows secret boards, and Twitter gives you the option to have a private profile. When it comes to your business, you want all of your social accounts to be public, and you want all of your content to be searchable. For example, for your Facebook profile, you have the option to make your posts searchable in search engines. To do this, go to your Facebook privacy settings and enable the option Do You Want Other Search Engines to Link to Your Timeline?, shown here. The more people who see your posts, the more people who might share it. Encouraging sharing (including through methods like Facebook contests) is a great way to increase your search rankings. #4: Use Keywords in Your Posts Keywords are important for your website, blog and paid ad campaigns,

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to be a recognized expert in your industry? Looking for relevant conversations to weigh in on? Using Twitter's Advanced Search to monitor keywords and conversations can help you connect with influencers and uncover opportunities for thought leadership. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Twitter's Advanced Search to increase your influence in your industry. Listen to this article: #1: Find Conversations to Participate In Doing a keyword search on Twitter is a quick and easy way to find out what people in your industry are talking about, identify accounts to follow, and discover new business opportunities. With Twitter's Advanced Search, you can create complex searches with keywords that are relevant to your industry. To start, choose three or four keywords that are relevant to your industry and use the Boolean search operator "OR" to create a single search for all of your terms. For example, search for "digital marketing" OR "digital marketing advice." Look at the search results to find conversations in your niche. Then join relevant discussions to offer expert advice and build meaningful connections with people in your industry. Use the OR operator to ensure that every key phrase or search term is relevant to your mission. Keep this list updated and weed out the keywords that aren't helping you find the best results. Soon you'll have a filtered list of conversations to review on a daily basis. You can also add keywords like "recommend" to find prospects looking for services you offer. You can also use a keyword search to optimize your own Twitter profile. Add keywords to your bio to help other users find you. Including key phrases (such as "public speaker" and "charity worker") may help you uncover new opportunities. #2: Monitor Hashtags for Media Opportunities You can follow specific hashtags and keywords to discover people who are looking for thoughtful comments or quotes. For example, the hashtag #journorequest is popular among journalists and industry writers. You can create an advanced search that pairs both #journorequest and your key industry terms ("skincare expert" or "facial expert," for example) to find opportunities for free coverage in print and online. Once you've uncovered opportunities through hashtag monitoring, reach out to users to share your expert insights. This helps you get media coverage for your business and create meaningful connections. #3: Connect and Converse With Industry Peers Your influence is often measured by the network you keep. Use Twitter's Advanced Search filters to find key contacts and people to follow in your industry. Filter Results by Account In Twitter's search box, search for a keyword (or group of keywords). Then to filter your results, click More Options and select Accounts to see only those accounts that contain your keywords. Once you create a tailored list of key industry contacts, follow those users, add them to a list, or use a monitoring tool like TweetDeck to track what they're saying. Filter Results by People You Follow You can also limit your search to only the users you follow. To do this, enter your search term (for example, "social media data"). Then filter your results by clicking More Options and selecting From People I Follow. Your search results will only include tweets that match your search query and are from the accounts you follow. Filter Results by Date You can add a date range to find conversations relevant to your topics of interest and occurring within the last few weeks from users you follow. This gives you the opportunity to add comments, share your insights, and show thought leadership within your online peer group. Filter Results by People You can also use Twitter search to find previous conversations you've had with your contacts. This is a great way to revive relationships and build camaraderie.

Influencer Marketing: How to Work With Influential People

Influencer Marketing: How to Work With Influential People

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you reach out to influencers? Want to create good relationships to increase your visibility and get more customers? To learn how to work with influencers, I interview Doug Karr. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview conversion expert Doug Karr, the author of Corporate Blogging for Dummies and founder of the Marketing Technology blog. Doug also co-hosts the Edge of the Web podcast. Doug will explore influencer marketing and how to work with prominent people. You'll discover how to identify and reach out to influencers, as well as develop relationships and campaigns that lead to sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing How Doug became interested in influencer marketing After Doug got out of the Navy in 1992, he started a newspaper and did direct and database marketing. Then about 12 years ago, he started a blog. From a database marketing standpoint, Doug shares he's always been intrigued by the pockets or the gaps, and not the averages. In the direct mail days, the motto was "go after a certain age group, gender and neighborhood, and get 100% saturation." Doug found, over time, it was the smaller pockets of people who had higher conversion rates. This is true in online marketing as well. People who do SEO optimize for huge keywords with massive search volumes. Maybe they rank, but they don't get any results (meaning business) out of it. Influencer marketing is the same, in that people go after influencers. They spend a lot of money without seeing results, because they make significant errors as they select and research influencers. Doug says he tells people who are transitioning from traditional to online media that he doesn't think a lot has changed. As marketers, it's all about building trust and satisfying clients. Blogging and social media are great for that, because customers can now talk to people at different companies and get insight into their business through these channels. You build relationships virtually, then get those people to convert. Listen to the show to hear what opportunities came to Doug from blogging. How Doug defines influencer marketing Doug believes influencers are people within our industry who already have established trust with an audience. Let's say someone has an amazing audience you want to reach. The best way to get to that person's audience is to create an influencer marketing campaign and work with that influencer to help you promote your products and services. The keys are audience (find an influencer whose audience matches what you need) and reach. Determine if the influencer's reach is wide enough to make your campaign sensible from a time and money standpoint. Listen to the show to hear examples of good influencers to reach out to in the marketing and social media space. The differences among reach, popularity and influence Doug says half of the time, a company fails because they focus on reach and popularity, but not necessarily on influence. Influence is not about retweets or shares. It's about conversions. If someone makes a purchase based on a person's advice, that person is an influencer. When Doug works with an influencer, he looks at that person's target audience to see whether he or she has captivated their trust and made sales to them. One of the telltale signs that influencers are doing well is they've had the same sponsor on their site for 3 years; they don't switch them out every month. Doug also cautions that before entering into a relationshi...

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you think the world of publishing is evolving? Have you ever thought of self-publishing? To learn more about how blogs, books and social content have evolved, I interview Guy Kawasaki for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Guy Kawasaki, former chief evangelist for Apple and author of many books including Enchantment and What the Plus! Google+ for the Rest of Us. Guy shares his experience of publishing his first book in 1987 and how publishing has changed since then. You'll also learn tips and techniques to use on Google+. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Changes in Publication How the process of publishing books has changed Guy talks about what the book publishing process was like back in 1987 when he published The Macintosh Way and how it has changed since then. He explains the difference between a traditional publishing and self-publishing. With a traditional publisher, there's a lot of going back and forth and not a lot of control for the author. The timeline from finishing a book to it being on a shelf is around 6-9 months. Self-publishing today is a completely different world. You'll discover  how Guy's last book What the Plus was on sale on Kindle six days after he finished writing it.  Guy also shares the story of going from an electronic book to a print book. Listen to the show to hear the story of how What the Plus made it to paperback. How the publishing world is changing Guy explains why publishing is an industry in transition, where he feels this industry will go and the opportunities for publishers today. Guy shares how times have changed with desktop publishing and how anybody with InDesign or an Apple Mac and a laser printer can become a publisher. In addition, people with blogs and websites are publishers. With the variety of tablet computers available today, anyone with Microsoft Word can become a publisher. You'll find out why Guy believes in the theory of "infinite monkeys working on keyboards are going to produce a lot of masterpieces." Listen to the show to find out why now is a great time to self-publish. How Guy's publishing journey has changed and why Guy shares his story of how he ran out of ideas to publish on his own blog, which led him to guest writing for the American Express Open Forum, and how he ran out of ideas for that too. You'll learn why Guy considers his biggest challenges in blogging are to have enough topics to write about over time and to have the time to write. Now with Twitter, Google+ and Facebook, he finds himself more of a curator than a blogger. It's one thing to generate content; it's another to curate and find content. Guy says he has evolved from a blogger to a curator, and when he does write, he writes books. Social networks allow him to express himself spontaneously and the deeper ideas go into book format. He explains why a blog is the logical place to start and why he considers blogging good practice before writing a book. You'll discover the benefits of writing a blog-type post on Google+, compared to a stand-alone blog. Listen to the show to find out why Guy would use Google+ or a Facebook Fan Page today as a platform. How Twitter fits into the social ecosystem today Guy explains why his personal approach to Twitter now is unusual. You'll find out how Guy uses Twitter to curate great content from his website Alltop and a section there called Holy Kaw!

Facebook Marketing Declines: How Business Should React

Facebook Marketing Declines: How Business Should React

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to promote your business? Are you wondering how the recent Facebook algorithm changes will affect your marketing? To learn what the future of Facebook means for your brand or business, I interview Mari Smith and Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mari Smith and Jay Baer. Mari is the co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and considered to be the world's leading expert on Facebook marketing and Jay is the author of Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. He's also host of the Social Pros podcast. Mari and Jay share how to be successful with Facebook's new algorithm and what these changes mean for your Facebook strategy. You'll learn how to monitor your reach and engagement, and how to navigate paid versus earned media in your content strategy. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Declines Recently, an article by AdAge referenced an official Facebook document that said, "We expect organic distribution of an individual page's posts to gradually decline over time, as we continually work to make sure people have a meaningful experience on the site." In other words, Facebook says that they are going to show less of your Facebook updates to your fans and followers. If you want to get seen, you will have to pay to play. This news has raised a lot of concern among marketers. Previous changes to the Facebook news feed Mari explains how up until a few months ago, the algorithm that governs what content goes into the news feed was called EdgeRank. The term used now is the Facebook news feed ranking algorithm. The formula changed dramatically, with Facebook telling everyone that on any given day, a user can potentially see 1,500 possible stories. A story includes likes, comments, shares, videos and photos. Once you click Like, Comment or Share, Facebook knows what type of content to show you. Most users are aware that the majority of content shown comes from friends. This means that business pages struggle to get organic visibility. On December 2, 2013, Facebook announced they will start to decline or diminish organic reach for pages because users predominantly want to see content from friends and brands that they enjoy interacting with. According to Inside Facebook, studies show more than 40% decreased organic reach on Facebook. Listen to the show to find out what type of content Facebook will give less weight to. Is Facebook trying to protect its fans from marketers?  I recently heard Gary Vaynerchuk say that Facebook is trying to protect its fans from marketers. It seems that Facebook has realized that they need to provide a quality user experience, otherwise people won't click on the ads. Jay explains why Facebook doesn't want to devolve into MySpace. They are now a public company, which needs to continue to generate tons of advertising money. One of the ways to do this is to squeeze the algorithm. Listen to the show to find out how Facebook has used one of the oldest business playbooks in history to get you hooked. Marketers see a decline in organic reach In December, an article by Ignite Social Media showed that brands saw massive declines in organic reach that month. Jay says that a large number of brands on Facebook have seen a decline in organic reach, but there are other brands that have not been impacted by the change at all. There are some exceptions to the rule.

Visual Content: How to Create Shareable Images People Love

Visual Content: How to Create Shareable Images People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use images in your social media marketing? Are you interested in finding ways to create more shareable visual content quickly and easily? To learn how to create shareable images that enhance your social media marketing, I interview Kim Garst. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Kim Garst, CEO of Boom Social, a social media marketing consultancy. Kim's also an expert in using visuals for social media marketing. She's the author of a new book, Will the Real You Please Stand Up: Show Up, Be Authentic, and Prosper in Social Media. Kim explores visual content and how it can enhance your social media marketing. You'll discover the importance of using visual content in your social media marketing; the different types of visual content you can create for your brand or business; and the best tools, apps and resources for creating visual content at your desktop or on the go. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Visual Content Marketing What is visual content marketing? Visual content marketing is a way to use images, rather than words, to communicate a message about your business, product or service. Visuals are a snackable way to express ideas. Visuals are a huge part of social media and they continue to evolve. People are so busy today. Images catch their attention and are quicker and easier to process than text as they scroll through a social media feed. Beyond leveraging social media platforms typically known to be visual (Pinterest and Instagram), Kim also looks for ways to implement visuals and eye-popping graphics in her Twitter content strategy and on her blog. Listen to the show to discover more ways to leverage visual content in your social media marketing.  The importance of visuals for social media marketing  From a social media marketing standpoint, the old saying that "a picture's worth a thousand words" holds so much value today. As marketers, we all need to be or become storytellers. A great photo or graphic tells a story in one hot second. We live in such an information-overloaded space right now and attention spans are so short. Text-based marketing alone has become less and less effective. The brain processes visuals 60,000 times faster than text. A good image can connect an idea or message much quicker and stronger than text-only content. Listen to the show to find out other amazing stats for the effectiveness of visual content on what your audience will process, learn and retain.  Different types of visuals you can create  There are five primary types of visual content you can create for social media: videos, photos, creative images, infographics and slide shows. Kim explains that comics, memes and infographics tend to be hugely popular on social media. Comics and memes are a way to showcase humor. They're fun and relatable, so people are eager to share them with their friends and family. According to Kim, businesses that use infographics probably have a 12% higher growth rate than companies that don't. Infographics offer a visual way to share a lot of interesting content in one image. People love them too. The most popular place to get more bang from your infographics is on Pinterest. People share them there like mad. Another great place to leverage infographics is on blogs. An infographic doesn't necessarily have to be complex to be appealing and effective. For example, if you have a blog post that's about 10 ways to do something, then you could repurpose your blog content and very easily make an infographic on those 10 ways.

Video Production: How to Create Quality Videos Quickly

Video Production: How to Create Quality Videos Quickly

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your fans and followers? Want to improve the quality? Today, Roberto Blake is with us to explore how quality videos are produced. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Roberto Blake, a visual and video marketing expert, has a popular YouTube channel where he teaches YouTube marketing and video editing. You can find out more at RobertoBlake.com. Roberto explores the ins and outs of producing quality videos. You'll discover tools you need for video production. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Production Roberto's Story Like many kids, Roberto grew up watching Disney and was fascinated by all the behind-the-scenes information about the animators, storytellers, and moviemakers. He says animation wasn't in the cards, so at about 14 or 15 years old he switched to video and was producing online video as a hobby for about six years before YouTube existed. Rob says he didn't join the YouTube craze when it first launched, and shares that changed around the time he left corporate life for entrepreneurship.He'd already been running a blog to help creative professionals (designers, artists, web design), and found it was easier to answer questions and provide tutorials with video than it was to write and re-write the same email replies or blog comments over and over again. Roberto notes that if business people use video to address commonly expressed customer pain points, they're essentially buying back some of their time; it makes things easier on everyone. How did Roberto decide to turn video into a business? He'd been making ad revenue on the blog side and wanted to scale his existing freelance business. As he focused more on teaching web and graphic design, rather than social media marketing, he decided producing video content was faster than organizing his thoughts around screen captures and stills. Plus, Roberto believes that, if he's going to teach someone how to use Adobe Premiere Pro, a full-screen video tutorial like the one below is more helpful than still images and walls of text. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AxkXrPzEGtI Listen to the show to learn more about Roberto's early experience working with a wedding videographer. Why Video is so important today Roberto explains that one of the easiest and most practical ways for people to learn is through video, because they can see a process. Even when the video isn't based on a demonstration, like with software tutorials, there's value in seeing another human being; reading that person's micro-expressions and mannerisms can help cut the learning curve. Roberto remembers growing up watching Bob Ross, Reading Rainbow, and VideoSmarts, a program in the 1980s that helped children with memorization games, learning concepts, and reading. He notes that if individuals and businesses take advantage of educating via video, and make it engaging, fun, and informative, they'll find their content resonates with people. Listen to the show to discover my personal connection to early training DVDs. What to Do Before Recording Whether you're using a smartphone or a DSLR camera, one thing Roberto recommends before recording is to check the environment. Look for and remove any distractions from the background. For example, if there's noise from cars driving by you can change your location. If there's a part of your office that needs to be cleaned, you can tidy up. He also says you should think about the context of your background. For instance, when Roberto does personal vlogs as motivation for creatives and entrepreneurs who might be thin...

Twitter Marketing: How Smart Marketers Are Succeeding

Twitter Marketing: How Smart Marketers Are Succeeding

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Want to discover how to use the latest Twitter updates? To learn more about Twitter marketing, I interview Joel Comm. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joel Comm, a serial entrepreneur and the author of 12 books. His latest project is an apparel brand you can find at DoGoodStuff.com. Joel's latest book is Twitter Power 3.0: How to Dominate Your Market One Tweet at a Time. In this episode Joel will explore new updates to Twitter, along with video, his favorite apps and more. You'll discover how to use Twitter more effectively. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Joel got involved with Twitter Joel, who has been building businesses online since 1995, likes to explore different technology and new ways to communicate. Twitter and microblogging interested Joel, since he had already been blogging for several years. In May 2007 Joel posted his first tweet. "In true, first-tweet form, it was utterly forgettable," Joel recalls. "I think it was something like 'Trying to figure out what this Twitter thing is.'" That was about it, until six months later, when Joel gave Twitter another try. He looked more closely, and decided Twitter was a cool platform for engagement. Sometime in 2008, after Joel accumulated about 5,000 followers, a friend told him John Wiley & Sons was looking for somebody to write a book on how to use Twitter for business. They connected and hit it off. The first edition of Twitter Power came out in February 2009. At the time, many were still trying to figure out Twitter, which posed the question, "What are you doing?" "We began to realize the heart of social media is about sharing life, relationships, the journey that we are on together," Joel says. "It's the points of commonality that we have in many of these mundane activities ... that bring us closer together. Therein lies the power of Twitter to connect people." An organic tweeter, Joel uses Twitter.com and the Twitter app on his phone. For those who like to consolidate and schedule tweets, he recommends tools like SocialOomph and Hootsuite. Listen to the show to hear both of our initial thoughts on Twitter. How the retweeting process has changed In the past if people wanted to retweet something, they would have to take all of the original tweet's text, copy it and put "RT" in front of it. They could only comment if there was any space left in the 140 characters. Joel believes Twitter finally realized that when people want to retweet, they have something they want to say about it. So now, if you want to retweet, you can quote that tweet and still have 116 additional characters left to add to it. This change makes these retweets feel like more of a conversation, because it puts all related tweets together. The way it works is simple. If you are in the app, you can retweet and share as is or quote the tweet. If you are on the site and you click Retweet, it opens up a window and you can comment or just retweet. Listen to the show to learn what Joel thinks of the Twitter character limit. Twitter video Joel starts by talking about Vine. You can record a Vine video and it automatically goes to Twitter. In addition to doing a straight video, Vine allows you to do creative things. For example, you can hold down the recording button, let up with your thumb, then point in another direction and take some other video, until you've got your full segment. Joel finds native Twitter video more interesting,

Blog Growth: How to Build a Mega-Following

Blog Growth: How to Build a Mega-Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to attract a bigger audience to your blog? Are you wondering how you can write content that will generate more comments, shares and subscribers? To learn how to grow a successful blog, I interview Syed Balkhi for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Syed Balkhi, founder of multiple popular websites, including WPBeginner and List25. He's also the founder of OptinMonster. Syed shares how he grew his very popular sites and provides actionable tips that you can employ to grow your own blog traffic. You'll learn about the different types of content that work best and some profitable choices for monetization. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Growth The idea for WPBeginner Back in 2009, Syed did consulting work for small businesses, with a lot of the work retainer-based. To free up some time, he decided to switch his clients to WordPress, which would give them the ability to change their own text and not have to contact him directly. Once this change happened, Syed was still approached with the same questions about WordPress. At the time there was no other WordPress resource site out there for beginners. So WPBeginner was formed on July 4, 2009. Syed explains how his goal in the beginning was to produce multiple posts a day and answer all of the questions that he was asked. The idea was to put the answers on the website so he could link back to them, rather than send an email. When he noticed that other people were using the site, he knew there was definitely a market for it. You'll hear how Syed used Twitter to help with content creation and why he used Digg and StumbleUpon to push articles. Listen to the show to find out why it was Syed's goal to help individuals, rather than have hugely popular articles. WPBeginner's site metrics Syed states that WPBeginner gets an average of 1.5 million page views a month and they have just over 70,000 followers on Twitter. Listen to the show to find out how these figures are similar to Social Media Examiner's. The lessons learned about content creation From the very beginning, Syed built an email list, but he didn't engage with it. At first, he didn't realize the value of asking people to ask you questions. Now when you subscribe to WPBeginner, it asks you one question: "What is the one thing we can help you with right now?" You'll discover why there is huge value in this one question and how this has changed the way WPBeginner creates content. Syed used to be the only person who wrote articles, but the site now has multiple writers with a very good editorial workflow. Listen to the show to hear how the interaction and response to email has developed the WPBeginner community. WPBeginner's business model Syed explains that his business is monetized through building WordPress applications and plugins. A lot of the time, it's conversion marketing for clients. The WPBeginner brand allows them to position themselves as experts. Whenever somebody wants a WordPress company to work with, they automatically think of WPBeginner. You'll hear how they use affiliate links for paid plugins. In the beginning, Syed tried display advertising. He had ads through AdSense, BuySellAds and private ad sales. You'll find out why these ads didn't work for the WPBeginner audience and how affiliate deals make more sense. Listen to the show to find out why we use DoubleClick for Publishers at Social Media Exam...

Screaming Frog SEO Spider Update – Version 7.0

by screamingfrog @ Screaming Frog

I’m delighted to announce Screaming Frog SEO Spider version 7.0, codenamed internally as ‘Spiderman’. Since the release of rendered crawling in version 6.0, our development team have been busy working on more new and exciting features. Let’s take a look at what’s new in 7.0. 1) ‘Fetch & Render’ (Rendered...

YouTube Strategy: How to Plan Your YouTube Marketing Success

YouTube Strategy: How to Plan Your YouTube Marketing Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your audience? Are you curious about what works on YouTube? To discover more about YouTube video strategy, I interview Owen Hemsath. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Owen Hemsath, a YouTube consultant and president of Videospot, a YouTube consultancy that helps authors and brands succeed on YouTube. Owen also writes on YouTube strategy for ReelSEO. Owen will explore how to put together a smart YouTube plan and how to monetize your YouTube videos. You'll discover the importance of video today, as well as the biggest mistakes marketers make with YouTube. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Strategy Owen's story Owen explains how he decided to pursue his dream of doing video. When Owen began making videos for his ecommerce website and started making money, he realized he could be more successful helping other business owners leverage YouTube than he could doing his own product demos. Owen is now a YouTube specialist and has a YouTube course that teaches the process of building a YouTube channel for business. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KgbwS4kfwyY He currently spends 60% of his time working with clients in a group setting and 40% of his time acting as manager for bigger channels that are looking to connect with brands and monetize. Listen to the show to learn about Owen's early experience making videos. The importance of video today Owen believes that because relationships can be formed through digital communication and social media these days, the value we place on face-to-face interaction has been minimized. Video brings that face-to-face interaction to everyone, since people can use video to develop a one-way relationship with their viewers. He shares that this type of interaction can take place on YouTube, Snapchat, Facebook video, the live-streaming apps (Meerkat, Periscope and Blab), Twitter and Instagram video. Owen explains the relationship between Google and YouTube, and why you're more likely to be found on search if you're leveraging a video content strategy in your overall marketing plan. Listen to the show to hear Owen's thoughts on why people are turning to video, movie comparisons to YouTube and predictions for the future. Mistakes marketers make with YouTube The first thing Owen cautions against is using YouTube as a compilation channel, a holding ground for every video you've ever made. For instance, you may have a couple of Q&A videos with your staff, an old commercial and some home video of the company picnic. All of these videos have low views, and there's no real cohesive strategy. The second thing Owen calls out is violations of what he refers to as the 3 Ps: Platform, Purpose and People. Marketers often violate the Platform when they repurpose their non-YouTube video content (Google hangouts, Meerkat videos or portrait videos) for YouTube. Repurposing leads to a violation against People. YouTubers want to engage with your content, comment and be a part of your community. He says that when marketers repurpose, such as putting their Meerkat videos on YouTube, they're telling their audience they don't care enough to create content for them. The third violation involves Purpose. Marketers need to have a purpose for their videos. They must figure out what they're trying to communicate with their video and the business objective of that video, whether it's to build subscribers, get more shares, grow a list or sell a product. Marketers who don't consider purpose when developing their content strateg...

4 Ways to Use Facebook and Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Marketing

4 Ways to Use Facebook and Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you overwhelmed by the amount of analytic data found on social media platforms? Want to know which metrics to follow? Knowing what to measure and how to apply the data makes it easier to modify your marketing for better reach, engagement, and visibility. In this article, you'll discover four ways social media insights can improve your marketing on Facebook and Twitter. Listen to this article: Measure What Matters Like any data set, social analytics have their share of vanity metrics that provide very little value. Paying attention to these vanity metrics can distract you from watching the metrics that help you take action and make decisions. For example, a sudden growth in likes or followers might make you feel great about your efforts, but by itself, it's a vanity metric that doesn't really tell you anything to help you adjust your marketing. Instead, focus on the analytics that are important to your strategy and goals, then review other data for trouble signs or trends that can impact your efforts. For example, if growing your engagement is a target goal in your strategy, then you need to zero in on per-post engagement levels to see what works and what doesn't. #1: Adjust Your Content Mix Twitter and Facebook both offer data on how well individual posts perform with your audience, including their reach and engagement. On Facebook, go to Insights > Posts > Post Types to review the engagement by the type of content you posted (post, link, image, video). On Twitter, you can see a snapshot of each post you've made by going to Settings > Analytics > Tweets. Pay close attention to this data, because it paints a clear picture about the type of content your audience is most interested in. You can review this data to see how your audience responds to the use of links, images, and video. For example, link shares might not do well overall by the numbers. Looking closer, you could discover that your audience may be less inclined to engage with curated links, but their heads turn when you post links to your own blog. Monitoring the data on engagement and reach vs. post type can help you tweak your approach to sharing content so that you're leveraging the types of content your audience prefers to digest and share. #2: Fine-tune Your Posting Schedule The majority of your audience may be up during the day, but that doesn't mean they're checking their social accounts at the same time. When they check, and on which days, can vary greatly from one audience to another. Your social metrics can tell you exactly when your audience is most likely to engage with your content. On Facebook, go to Insights > Posts > When Your Fans Are Online. For Twitter, you can use a tool such a Tweriod to find out when the bulk of your followers are online. This data is very important when you consider the limited real estate you get in social feeds. Getting the timing right on your content can make a huge difference. If you make a post early in the morning, but the bulk of your audience typically engages with your content in the afternoon, then that early morning post is likely to get buried, seen by only a small portion of your audience. Check your insights and analytics for peak engagement times. Experiment with different times and days to see when your audience is most likely to respond. Zeroing in on when they're most active will greatly improve your reach and engagement. #3: Inform Your Messaging Both Twitter and Facebook sit on a wealth of user data, including behavior, location, demographics, interests, lifestyle, employment, and more. Facebook arguably provides the most diverse data set, while Twitter also provides helpful audience information. Similar audience data is available in a variety of ways depending on the platform you're using. On Facebook, open the Ads Manager and go to Audience Insights. On Twitter, you can check your audience data by going to Settings > Twitter Ads > Analytics ...

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in using live video for business? Have you considered creating a live video show? To find out what live video can do for your business, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Fanzo, a tech evangelist who specializes in live video. He's the founder of iSocialFanz and host of the FOMOFanz podcast. Brian explores live video, where it's headed, and how it can help your business. You'll discover whether to use Facebook Live or Periscope if you're just getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video and Marketing What Live Video Means for Business Whether yours is a small business, a brick-and-mortar store, or an ecommerce company, you need to shrink the distance between yourself and your customer, Brian explains. Live video is much more than a marketing play because it shrinks that distance by humanizing your brand and business. Live video is also the gateway to technologies such as augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR), which Brian believes will be huge by 2020. To embrace AR and VR, he says, companies and brands will need to have a live video strategy already in place. He says today's consumers want you to convince them that you can be trusted, that you're a resource, are invested in them, and can understand them. They don't want to be marketed or sold to; they want to engage and have a conversation with you. Businesses need to spend time building rapport, a relationship, and trust with their audience, and live video is a great vehicle for that. With regard to building trust, Brian believes the most valuable statement anyone can make on live video is, "I don't know." If a brand admits they don't know something on live video, it adds validity to what they do know. (When you're stumped, you can also ask audience members to send you a message on Twitter or Facebook, and say you'll have your product manager get back to them.) Listen to the show to hear more about the strategy behind using live video to break down barriers with your audience. Getting Started With Live Video Brian says that according to Cisco, 79% of Internet traffic in 2020 will be video. Nowhere did anyone say that's going to be great video, good video, or live video, Brian continues. However, he believes most brands are thinking about video. Many people think live video is scary because they picture themselves on the video. Brian has to remind them that the best live videos are often made when you're celebrating customers and employees. And if your live video brings people access they can't get anywhere else, the camera doesn't even need to be on you. For example, say you use live video to interview a client, a customer, or a celebrity while they're in the office. As the person behind the camera, you can watch the comments for questions and decide which are important enough to ask the guest. With these kinds of live videos, all of the scary elements of being on air are taken away. Listen to the show to discover my process for doing live videos. Innovative Examples of Live Video Brian says Cisco has done an amazing job with their We Are Cisco campaign. Employees in different offices are trusted to take over the company's social media accounts, including Snapchat and Instagram, to share their point of view. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMjEzVH1d0k Not only does the campaign celebrate Cisco's employees, it's also a great recruiting tool. The company doesn't have to convince job applicants that they trust their employees; the proof is v...

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to bring more pop to your social media marketing? Looking for video tools to help? The right tools make it easy to create engaging video content. In this article, you'll discover six tools to create and improve your social media videos. Listen to this article: #1: Animoto to Create Video Compilations Animoto allows you to create professional-quality videos with pictures and video clips. There are both free and paid versions of Animoto. Pricing plans range from $8 a month for personal use to $34 a month for businesses. Here's how to get started with Animoto. First, sign up for a free account. You can create your free account with your Facebook profile or with your email address. Then click the Create button to start your Animoto project. Next, choose a style to customize the look and feel of your video. Click on the style template preview to see what your video would look like with that style. Now you're ready to add photos, video clips, and music. Animoto accepts photo and video uploads from your computer, smartphone, or other sources including Facebook, Dropbox, and Photobucket. You can add your own song or select one from Animoto's music catalog. Tracks available include instrumentals and songs. Now you'll want to personalize your video in Settings. Be sure to add a custom thumbnail, video title, and description for your video. All of this information helps with search engine optimization. When you're finished, you can preview your work. Click the Preview Video button to see what your video looks like. If you want to make changes, close this window and make any required edits. Finally, you're ready to produce your video. To do this, click Produce. Expert Tip: If you decide to choose music from another source (such as SoundCloud or YouTube), ensure you have full rights. You may be breaching copyright laws if you don't fully check the music ownership and third-party sharing rights. #2: Legend to Build Custom GIFs GIFs are images with movement. While there are apps that offer premade GIFs, consider customizing your own. This personalizes your brand and allows you to create unique content. Legend is a smartphone app that allows you to create GIFs by combining text, flash, and images. You can download Legend from Google Play or the App Store. Here's how to use Legend to create your own branded GIFs. First, type your text. You have 100 characters to work with. Next, choose a photo. You can take a photo using the camera on your phone, choose a photo from your photo library, or select a photo from Flickr. Now it's time to select your animation style. There are 18 variations to choose from, six on each screen. When you choose your color palette, it changes the color of your photo and your text. Then tap GIF to convert your work into a GIF and tap More to save it to your camera roll. You can share your animated GIF on Instagram, WhatsApp, or in a text message from the Legend app. You can also share it directly from the app to other social networks if you've already downloaded the apps to your smartphone. Expert Tip: Make Legend GIFs in bulk and save them to your camera roll to share later. #3: Relay for Snapchat Video Geofilters Relay is a graphic design and publishing tool for people who aren't graphic designers. You can use Relay to design your own customized Snapchat geofilters, which you overlay on your videos. Geofilters act as a personal branding tactic for your Snapchat stories, which lead to greater engagement. Relay provides a Snapchat geofilter template layout of 1080 x 1920 pixels. You can sign up for a free Relay account and try out a demo for 14 days. For pro features, it will cost you $12 per month or $96 per year. Paying for the whole year up front gives you four months free. Here's how to create a custom geofilter for Snapchat using Relay. After you create a Relay account,

How to Optimize Your Social Media Schedule for Maximum Impact

How to Optimize Your Social Media Schedule for Maximum Impact

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you schedule social media updates? Want to know the best days and times to share? Creating a social media calendar helps you deliver a steady flow of content to your followers. In this article you'll discover how to create an effective posting schedule for your social media updates. Listen to this article: #1: Determine a Daily Posting Frequency Just like you plan a blog schedule, consistent social sharing can help you stay top of mind. A calendar of when you plan to post to each platform helps you see when you have gaps in your sharing schedule or when you have too much going on at once. Take these informal guidelines into account when deciding how many times you'll post on each social network. Socialbakers reports you should post to Facebook once a day for the best engagement. For Twitter, Salesforce recommends you start with one to four tweets a day. Data directly from LinkedIn and compiled by Buffer suggests you'll reach 60% of your connections if you post on LinkedIn 20 times a month. SumAll recommends you pin five times a day. Brands can safely post to Instagram up to 15 times per day. One glance at your social media calendar and you'll know where to fill in gaps and remove extra messages from the overcrowded days and times. #2: Post at the Right Time of Day Once you know which days you'll be posting to each network, you'll need to find the best times to share your content on each platform. Don't just pick a few times to regularly share content. Try different times each day to give your social media schedule some flexibility for best results. Use trial and error, and check engagement stats to find the best times to share from your own accounts. Analyzing data from QuickSprout, Buffer, Fast Company and others to find the best times for social media posts, revealed the following insights: Try posting to Facebook on Wednesdays at 3 pm, Thursdays and Fridays from 1 to 4 pm, and Saturdays and Sundays from 12 to 1 pm. Tweet from 12 to 3 pm, and at 5 pm during the workweek. Post to LinkedIn just outside of working hours (7:30 to 8:30 am, and 5 to 6 pm) and on lunch breaks at 12 pm on Tuesdays, Wednesdays and Thursdays. Pin from 2 to 4 am and 2 to 4 pm. Avoid posting to Instagram from 3 to 4 pm on Mondays and Thursdays. Note: Most of those studies analyzed data in the United States. With 80% of the U.S. population in the Eastern and Central time zones, those time zones may be your best bet for optimal reach. #3: Share Your Content More Than Once Some people create great content, and then lose out on a ton of traffic because they only share it right after it's published, and only one time per social network. Sharing your content more than once can get you 3,150% more traffic all within your first day of publishing. Imagine what could happen if you spread out your social media sharing to publish links to your content throughout the week, month and year after the original publish date. Here's a schedule for sharing your content multiple times on social media: Schedule social messages to announce new content right when it publishes. Share your post again a few hours later on the same day. A tweet’s average lifespan is 18 minutes, so sharing it again, even on the same day, increases your visibility. Schedule a few more social messages for the following day to get the word out, while the content is still fresh. Drip a few more social messages the following week to reach people who missed it the first time around. Scatter at least one message per week, over the course of the next month, on all of your networks. #4: Vary Your Message Mix up your social messages to keep your updates fresh on different sites. This is especially important when you share your content more than once. Here are some ideas for crafting different messages for a single piece of content: Reference quotes from people in your posts.

Engagement: How to Create a Loyal Audience That Loves You

Engagement: How to Create a Loyal Audience That Loves You

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is audience loyalty important to your business? Are you wondering how you can increase your audience loyalty through engagement? To learn the importance of engagement, I interview Danny Iny for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Danny Iny, author of Engagement from Scratch! He is also the founder of Firepole Marketing (now Mirasee) and host of the Connect, Engage, Inspire podcast (now the Business Reimagined podcast) . Danny shares his techniques for increasing engagement, which engenders loyalty in his audience. You'll find out how to define engagement in your business, the benefits of it and how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Engagement From a writer to someone who specializes in engaging audiences Danny shares that he has been writing since childhood, and started a copywriting business when he was young. In 2006, he wrote his first book, Ordinary Miracles: Harness the Power of Writing to Get Your Point Across! In the book, he discusses his ideas about writing and how to write well. Although it's a great book, Danny didn't get the response he was looking for. The lesson he learned is that when you write copy, it's not actually about the words. You need to understand the people you want to connect with, and understand what matters to them. Danny's copywriting practice evolved over time into a marketing and strategy consultancy. You'll hear what happened when he attended local networking sessions that made him want to create a training program. Danny soon discovered that people who didn't have an audience wanted to know more about engagement; and therefore, he wanted to help them. He started to reach out to all of the experts who had built an engaged audience from nothing. With their input and perspectives, his new book, Engagement from Scratch! was created. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to be sensitive to other people's needs. Definition of engagement Since his latest book was published, Danny says that he has developed the insight that engagement is about the deep emotional investment that people have in what you are doing. If you think about Apple's customers, they are members of the Apple tribe. The fact that they use Apple's products actually says something about who that person is. It's a piece of their identity. Not only are these customers incredibly engaged, they are also invested in what Apple does. If the company were to betray the values they stand for, the response would be dramatic. They would feel like a friend had betrayed them. Danny says that the best model for conceptualizing engagement is by increasing the feeling of commitment through rewards over time. When someone discovers you for the first time, there is no connection, relationship or engagement. You have to give them something to keep them coming back. Make sure you give people an opportunity to provide you with their name and email address. Once they commit, you can reward them. You'll find out another great way to get people to invest some of their time and attention, which will help you build a relationship with them. It's important to stand out from the competition, and one way to do this is to answer emails personally. This puts you in a whole different category. To be a good email marketer, you need to have a double opt-in, a one-click Unsubscribe button and a high content-to-pitch ratio.

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered crowd funding? Are you wondering how it can help your business grow? To learn about how Kickstarter has transformed the process of funding projects, I interview Richard Bliss for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Richard Bliss, host of the podcast Funding the Dream on Kickstarter. He's also a coach and consultant for crowd funding. Richard shares the do's and don'ts when it comes to creating a Kickstarter project. You'll learn the process in detail of how Kickstarter works for both the campaigner and the supporter. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crowd Funding How would you describe Kickstarter? Richard believes that Kickstarter is a new phenomenon that most people are familiar with. He says the idea is similar to what happens in a church when they pass around a collection plate. The crowd helps fund an idea, a passion or something that they all would like to get more of. It's very public radio– and television–esque in its approach. Listen to the show to find out how Kickstarter has been around nearly 4 years and seems to have hit mainstream now.  Why entrepreneurs and marketers need to pay attention to Kickstarter Richard explains how Kickstarter is totally changing the rules of how we think about money. Traditionally it's the money that blocks us from fulfilling our dreams. However, what crowd funding and Kickstarter have done is made the money worry go away and that leaves us with "Now what do we do?" If you have an idea for a game or a project, for example, you can put it out there and Kickstarter allows you to go find like-minded people. These people want to see you succeed because they like what you are doing. We buy into people's passions. You'll hear an example of someone who wanted to do a tour through New Zealand taking video and photographs and how with help from Kickstarter, she achieved her goal. Kickstarter is not into causes, political campaigns, charities, funding businesses or equity. They are into one thing: If you have an idea for a project, which includes a beginning, an end and a deliverable, they will help you fund it. Richard describes what the deliverable can be and why it has to be clearly defined. You'll discover why the founders of Kickstarter built the platform and the reason it started with film and music. Listen to the show to find out how Richard picked the name for his podcast, Funding the Dream. Types of businesses that benefit from Kickstarter Richard explains how film is the largest category when it comes to sheer numbers. Sundance Film Festival has had 14 of their projects backed by Kickstarter. This year for the first time, an Academy Award was won by a Kickstarter project. Amanda Palmer made news when she raised more than $1 million to fund her new CD. Richard explains how Kickstarter has 13 different categories and 50 subcategories. One of the biggest categories that gets covered in the news is technology. Transformation is what is happening with Kickstarter and crowd funding. Every Kickstarter category that catches fire turns everything upside down. Richard gives an example of a project he has backed recently and how in the past you'd have to convince a bank to give you a business loan for your idea. But Kickstarter totally transforms the money. You'll hear the difference between reward-based and equity-based crowd funding. Richard tells the story of how his reputation led Kic...

Freak Success: A Dialog With Chris Brogan

Freak Success: A Dialog With Chris Brogan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you feel like you don't fit in? Are you wondering how you can succeed in business by being different? To learn about how your unique qualities can help you achieve success in the business world, I interview Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chris Brogan, publisher and CEO of Owner Magazine, co-author of The Impact Equation and host of The Owner's Mind podcast. His latest book is called The Freaks Shall Inherit the Earth. Chris shares why some freaks are successful in business and how you can follow their lead. You'll discover how to face your fears, run with your ideas and put them into practice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Freak Success The motivation behind the book and who the freaks are Chris says that it was his children who were the motivation behind his new book, The Freaks Shall Inherit the Earth. He explains the reasons why he believes that neither of them is suitable for real employment, and therefore wrote the book for them. During the process, he realized that it doesn't only include his story of how he was a freak who never fit in, but there are a lot of people out there exactly like him. Chris believes that there is an economic shift that's close to happening, and that cottage industries are coming back in a world of Dollar Shave Club. A lot of people aren't necessarily saying "I hope IBM hires me," they want to forge their own path. An example is Jake Thompson who has an apparel brand called Compete Everyday, which is a similar premise to Life Is Good. You'll hear Chris' definition of the word freak, and why they choose their own adventure. Listen to the show to hear Chris' story about the original Choose Your Own Adventure books. Why some freaks are successful in business and others are not Chris explains why Richard Branson is successful for being a freak. One of his very first businesses was a company that sold records in the UK. When he told people he would distribute records overseas, he discovered that he could get them for a lot less money. So he went on to resell them in the UK and undercut all of the other retailers. He has since gone on to own 400 successful companies, lives on an island of his own creation and has been knighted. You'll discover why Richard Branson is Chris' biggest business idol. A true freak is someone who stays true to what they are passionate about, even if they don't fit within the box. Then you have people who are weird for weird's sake. This is the type of person who looks for attention, but it's not really who they are. Chris gives an example of violinist Lindsey Stirling, who is doing extremely well. She has 2.3 million likes on Facebook and has a huge group that follows and connects with her. Although what she does has no part in modern pop culture, she has stuck with her love of the violin and brought her own energy to it. It's a way for her to put her own story out there. The freaks who are successful actually stay pretty close to who they are. They have something to offer and help others at the same time. One way to find out if you're a freak is to consider the quote by Ralph Waldo Emerson, "Do not go where the road may lead, but go where there is no road and leave a trail." You'll find that people react differently to it. Some people find it too scary to think about. Listen to the show to find out why most people want instructions and feel fear if they hav...

SEO case study for the home building industry (including concrete recommendations)

by @ Free Weekly Search Engine Optimization SEO News

Search engine optimization (SEO) can be difficult and time-consuming if you don't know what to do and where to start. For this reason, we're going to regularly perform SEO case studies for different industries. We show you what we would do to improve the website's rankings on Google using only white-hat methods that are approved by Google.

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook to acquire customers for your small business? Do you struggle to measure the return on your social media marketing investment? Despite a lack of concrete proof of sales, small businesses are devoting time and dollars to Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover findings from recent studies focused on Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Most Small Businesses Don't See a Return From Their Social Media Efforts In April 2015, small business directory Manta surveyed 540 small business owners for their insights on social media return on investment (ROI). Fifty-nine percent report that they did not see ROI from their social media activities. Because the vast majority of small businesses puts most, if not the entire, social media budget into Facebook, this article focuses on that channel. Of the remaining 41% reporting that they did see returns, 17% received less than $100, and 57% received less than $1,000 for their energy and budget. One-third of that 41% (63 individuals) report outearning their social media marketing spend by more than $2,000. Social Media Examiner's 2015 Social Media Marketing Industry Report findings echo those in the Manta study. When the team asked 3,720 marketers whether their Facebook marketing is effective (which we can interpret as driving return to some extent), only 45% reported that it is. (Read here about how 60% of the respondents for the report were small business owners or executives. They either worked in companies with 2 to 10 employees or self-identified as solopreneurs.) The report also reveals that just 33% of the self-employed described Facebook marketing efforts as effective. Larger businesses have a slightly higher regard for their Facebook marketing efforts, with 50% pleased with their Facebook returns. B2C marketers also have a more positive take than B2B, with 51% of B2C marketers finding Facebook effective, compared to just 36% of B2B respondents. Key Takeaways: The significant 35% of respondents who are uncertain about whether their Facebook presence helps their business is telling. With barely enough time to keep up their Facebook page, small businesses typically lack the time and resources to gather the data needed to determine whether their Facebook efforts work. Gathering data requires that either the business owner or staff member learns or understands Google Analytics and Facebook Insights. Both of these tools require time and effort. Further, as Facebook's former Global Head of SMB Marketing Chris Luo explains in his March 2015 Fast Company article, effective Facebook advertising is moving away from the simple updates and boosting that small businesses could master easily: "Facebook has also introduced new, more sophisticated, advertising tools to directly target any user on Facebook in their newsfeed, but for the most part, these tools are used by savvy direct marketers at mid-sized or larger companies and not small businesses." #2: Small Businesses Are Reluctant to Invest Money in Social Media Small business owners are indicating their suspicion of social media marketing with their dollars. The Manta study mentioned above found that 47% of respondents invest less than $100 per month, and 40% spend between $100 and $1,000 monthly. Low spending numbers like these are surprising, given the hype Facebook marketing receives in the media. In a seeming contradiction, a recent poll of 547 small- and medium-sized business owners conducted by BIA/Kelsey and reported in The Wall Street Journal claims that social media marketing gets the majority of small businesses' ad budgets at 21.4% of total dollars. Further investigation, however, reveals that small businesses don't spend very much on marketing at all. A January 2015 BrightLocal survey of 736 small businesses revealed that 70% spend $500 or less per month on marketing. Fifty percent spend less than $300 per month.

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new content to share to your fans and followers? Have you considered Reddit as a source for valuable content? Using Reddit will reveal unique and interesting content that helps you stand out from the crowd. In this post you'll discover how to use Reddit for content curation and inspiration. Listen to this article: #1: Find Subreddits in Your Niche Many marketers already know Reddit is useful for discovering content, but browsing its individual communities, called subreddits, can be time-consuming. Fortunately, you can make that task easier if you create a multireddit, which is a custom dashboard of content around a particular topic. First, you need to find subreddits you want to include in your multireddit, and compile a master list of subreddit names, organized by topic. Discover Relevant Subreddits There are thousands of active subreddits, so it's important to find those that share the best content in your niche. Here are some easy ways to search for relevant subreddits: The subreddit search box lets you search for all subreddits related to a keyword (for example, fitness). Use the Reddit site search to find site-wide mentions of your keyword, plus a list of subreddits where the term appears most frequently. You can use advanced search operators to focus your search. You can also combine advanced operators. For example, I did a search for posts with "paleo" in the title on the r/xxfitness subreddit. I then sorted the results by New to see the most recent posts. To perform granular searches, use the Boolean operators AND, OR and NOT (or the minus symbol). You can also group keywords with parentheses. Along with search features on Reddit, you can use metareddit to find subreddits. This third-party directory allows you to filter results by number of subscribers and last post, as in the example here. The results are displayed in a word cloud, where the size of the words correlates to the number of subscribers. Make a List of Subreddits To keep track of the subreddits you find, create a spreadsheet of subreddit names organized by topic. As you find subreddits you want to add to your multireddit, note the subreddit's name after the r/ in its URL (for example, http://www.reddit.com/r/HealthyFood). Here's a list you might create for health and fitness subreddits. #2: Create a Multireddit Once you've found a group of relevant subreddits, organize them as a multireddit. You can include all of the subreddits you found in one big multireddit or create a handful of more specific multireddits. After you log into the site, go to the Reddit front page, and click on the dotted line on the left side. Click the Create button, and type in a name for your multireddit. (Note that you can't use spaces or symbols in the multireddit name.) When you're finished, click Create again. Now that you've created your multireddit, you can begin adding subreddits to it in the upper-right corner of the screen. Type a subreddit name into the Add Subreddit box and click the plus sign (or press Enter) to add it to your multireddit. You can also add a description for the multireddit and choose whether it's public (other redditors can find it) or private (only you can view it). Open the sidebar from the front page to access any multireddits you've created. You can filter the content in your multireddit using the tabs at the top of the page: Hot: Posts that receive the highest engagement (upvotes/comments) New: The most recent posts Rising: Posts that are gaining popularity Controversial: Posts that receive an equal mix of upvotes and downvotes Top: The most popular posts of all time Gilded: Posts that received reddit gold Promoted: Sponsored content You can also search for keywords within your multireddit. For example, if you're looking for healthy recipes to share on your social channels,

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in starting a podcast? Want tips to manage and promote your podcast effectively? Creating a successful podcast doesn't have to be a time-consuming process. Today, tools can help streamline activities such as finding guests, publishing audio, and promoting episodes. In this article you'll discover how to manage your podcast from start to finish. Listen to this article: Why a Podcast? The key to generating a goldmine of compelling and engaging content is to leverage the expertise of others and interview them on your own podcast. A podcast is a win-win platform for your content strategy, because it provides an opportunity for both you and your guest to share your knowledge, feature your respective companies, and build a quality relationship with listeners. Inviting people with knowledge and experience in your industry to share their insights frees you from relying solely on your own knowledge. It also allows you to build a collection of quality content from a network of experts. Here's how to get started with your own podcast. #1: Find Potential Guests The first step is finding potential guests for your podcast. Are you groaning at the thought? Never fear, use a tool like LeadFuze to do the work for you. It's traditionally used by sales teams for B2B lead generation, but it also works well for identifying podcast guests. LeadFuze finds prospective guests by searching LinkedIn for categories such as industry, title, role, and location. It then aggregates all of the prospects' contact information, social media accounts, and domains into a list for you. By automating the prospecting process, LeadFuze saves you the hours of research typically needed to find good guests. #2: Send Out Email Invites Once you have the names and email addresses for guests you want to feature on your show, it's time to send out cold emails. In these emails you make your initial request asking the recipient to be a guest on your podcast. Send the Initial Email There are a number of mass emailing tools out there (such as MailChimp, Infusionsoft, and AWeber), but that's not what you need at this stage in the game. You'll want to send a more personal request with a tool like QuickMail.io. QuickMail.io is unique because it lets you automatically send one-to-one emails at scale through your Gmail account. It sends emails so that they arrive in the recipient's inbox as a personal email. This increases the chances of your emails being opened and not being filtered into a spam folder. QuickMail.io also lets you set up unlimited follow-up emails, which will automatically shut off once the recipient responds. Follow Up With Interested Guests Use FollowUpThen to stay in touch with prospective guests who responded to your initial emails, but haven't yet booked a day/time for your podcast interview. With this tool, you can add a simple email address to the BCC field on any email to remind you to follow up at a later date. You include your desired time frame within the FollowUpThen email address, and the email will then boomerang back into your inbox at that date and time. Once it's back to your inbox, it's up to you to decide if you need to follow up again. #3: Plan the Podcast Once you've lined up guests for your podcast, the next step is to choose a topic and set up a time for the interview. The secret to never running out of creative and compelling content ideas is to allow your guests to choose the topic for their episode. When guests ask you about the topic, say something like this: "We encourage guests to choose the topic for their episode based on their background and experience. Is there a certain topic you'd like to discuss on the show?" Next you need to work out a time for your interview. Unfortunately, we've all experienced the email scheduling dance: "Hi, are you free on Wednesday at 1pm?" "I can't do Wednesday. How does Thursday between 2 and 5pm?"

Meet the Team | Local SEO Help

by @ Local SEO Help

Haters: How to Deal With Haters and Trolls of Your Business

Haters: How to Deal With Haters and Trolls of Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever been publicly criticized or mocked for something that you did? Are you wondering how you can deal with this type of negativity when it happens on social media? To learn about haters and how to deal with them, I interview Marcus Sheridan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, who blogs at The Sales Lion, is host of The Mad Marketing Podcast and is a partner at River Pools & Spas. Marcus is a consultant and keynote speaker. In fact, he was the closing keynote at Social Media Marketing World and he simply killed it! Marcus shares the various types of critics you might attract and how you can deal with them. You'll discover the differences among haters, trolls and critics and what to do when you are under attack. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Haters in Business Haters are the type of people who seem to get great joy out of saying nasty things about you or your company online. If you haven't dealt with haters yet, the chance of dealing with one in the future is pretty good. I'm going to share a story with you that happened recently to us, and my hope is that it will prepare you for these types of people. If you let them have their way, then they succeed and you fail. This will impede your progress. The story is about an entertainment piece that was made for Social Media Marketing World 2014. Phil Mershon, who is my event director, created an original jingle called "Let's Get Social," which was sung by Mary McCoy from Continuum Marketing Services. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=itvvFfeLh84 The song was performed just before Jay Baer took the stage with a panel, which included Ted Rubin, Nichole Kelly and Jeffrey Rohrs. The panel discussion was entitled "Have We Lost The Social in Social Media?" This particular piece of entertainment was designed to be funny, and was to set the stage for the panel discussion. Even though it was corny, attendees got into it. Although on the video, you can't grasp the audience's reaction. The video was originally released on the event page for Social Media Examiner, on my personal Facebook profile and on Social Media Examiner's Facebook page. It was never intended to be released to the public. The day after it was uploaded, it started to go crazy viral. The first day alone it received 75,000 views on YouTube. The number of negative and nasty comments on YouTube was unbelievable. Phil and I had a discussion as to whether to close off the comments, but I didn't feel that was appropriate. You'll hear the reasons why I kept the comments open, and what I hoped would happen. An article was then published by Gawker called The Devil Is Real, and He Made a Song About Social Media Marketing. Gawker is a gossip blog that has a section called Valley Wag, which covers the social space. This very negative post spurred a lot of the video's views and negative comments on YouTube. Following this blog post, Mashable, Huffington Post, Slate and CNET also covered the story. By the Friday of that week, VH1 created this 90-second comedy piece of the video: httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Sv6byr_JKuk To date, our video has been viewed nearly 500,000 times, with just over a 1,000 comments. At one point it ranked #15 worldwide. Someone has even made an acoustic version of it, which is quite good. Now the plus side of it all is that Social Media Marketing World was referenced or linked back to within all...

The Conversion Rate Conundrum: Common Mistakes and What to Do Instead

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

In real estate, the axiom is location, location, location. It’s first and foremost. The number one consideration. For your digital efforts – email, web pages, eCommerce platforms – an argument could be made for a few different ones: search engine optimization (SEO), the user experience (UX), conversion rate optimization (CRO), or perhaps something else entirely. […]

Animated Visuals: How to Bring Still Images to Life

Animated Visuals: How to Bring Still Images to Life

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals on your blog and social media? Have you considered animating them? To explore how to use animated visuals in your content, I interview Donna Moritz. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview visual marketing expert Donna Moritz. Her blog Socially Sorted was recognized as one of Social Media Examiner's Top 10 Social Media Blogs in 2015, 2016, and 2017. Donna explores three popular types of animated images. You'll discover tools to easily animate your own images. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Animated Visuals Why Animate As people scan their social media feeds, they're making lightning-fast decisions about what content they'll pay attention to. In this context, animated visuals add a little bit of movement that can attract the eye and add value in a short, snappy way. Donna explains that short animations can be less intimidating to create than video. Animation is simply combining drawings, photographs, text, or computer graphics to make them move. You don't need to talk in front of a camera. Short animations can also be a way to develop your audience. Donna says if you can make a strong first impression with a short animation, that animation can encourage viewers to watch longer videos and further engage with your content. Listen to the show to hear Donna discuss the findings of a small MIT study that investigated how quickly people interpret images. Popular Formats Donna says that quick animations aren't divided into formal types, but you do tend to see a few common approaches. In a one- to three-second animated image, the background is typically fixed and only text is animated. For example, she points out, Social Media Examiner does these on Instagram. She says you might also see a mini slideshow. "Video is your window of opportunity to get seen the Facebook news feed." - @mari_smith #SMMW17 #marketing #socialmedia #business #entrepreneuer #socialmediamarketing #smm #socialmediatips #smallbusiness #new #socialmediaexaminer #professionaldevelopment #smb #socialmediastrategy #businesstraining #quote #quoteoftheday A post shared by Social Media Examiner (@smexaminer) on Feb 8, 2017 at 4:58pm PST A GIF is a silent animated loop often used to convey a feeling. GIFs have become hugely popular on social media. GIFs started appearing in blog posts and emails but have spread to messaging apps like Slack and Facebook Messenger. For example, in a blog post about social media strategies that drive her crazy, Donna says the only way she could express her frustration was with a Muppet GIF from Giphy. Another type is a 3- to 10-second video, which you could create with something like the Ripl app. (More on that below.) Finally, Instagram and Snapchat stories enable you to blend and share quick successions of images or videos. All of these types of content are easy to create because so many tools are available. Listen to the show to hear about audio in short video. The Pros and Cons of GIFs In blog posts and in email, GIFs are a great way to highlight particular emotions, add humor, or simply break up the content. Donna says she once sent out the wrong email to her subscribers, so she used a GIF to apologize. However, you need to be careful about how you use GIFs. Donna recommends using GIFs sparingly. In a blog post, use no more than two GIFs, and in email one is enough. Donna says too many GIFs are like strobe lights going off at a nightclub. When you insert a GIF in an email, Donna suggests checking the file size and compressing the GIF bef...

Franchise SEO: How to Apply Local SEO to Multiple Locations

by Avinash Nair @ Unamo Blog

From creating different landing pages to finding niche, relevant keywords, a lot of franchisors (and their SEO vendors) are neck deep in their search for the Holy Grail of franchise SEO. And that’s only the beginning. As a franchisor, you’re aware by now of the many pitfalls of attempting to unify information without duplicating it. […]

3 Social Image Tools That Increase Exposure and Engagement

3 Social Image Tools That Increase Exposure and Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how to improve the impact of your social media images? Looking for tools to optimize your visual content? In this article you'll discover three little-known tools to analyze the effectiveness of your visuals before you use them in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize for Conversion Bannersnack is an online app that makes it easy to create banner ads. You can adapt its behavior-based analytics feature to optimize the images you use on your social channels. First, you'll want to create a banner image using the tool's handy online editor. Then grab the embed code and add the image to your blog. After some time has passed, look at the heat map in Bannersnack to see where people clicked when engaging with that image. Tweak your image until the heat map registers a high amount of activity. When you're happy with the engagement your image is receiving, download it and use it on all of your social media channels. #2: Optimize for Visual Impression VAS (Visual Attention Software) uses its science-based algorithm to simulate which parts of the image will likely draw people's attention during the first 3-5 seconds of viewing. It also will predict the path that viewers' eyes are likely to travel when looking at the image. With the insights from VAS, you can enhance visual properties (such as edge and color contrast, brightness contrast, and faces) to draw attention to important areas of your image. Again, when you're happy with the predicted results, you can use your optimized image in your social media marketing. Tip: It's a good idea to use VAS in tandem with Bannersnack until you identify industry-specific patterns to apply to your own visuals. #3: Optimize for Accessibility The Color Contrast Analyzer extension for Google Chrome not only will analyze color contrast on your web pages, but will also assess text within images and report on how well your text overlay can be seen. This is especially important for people with poor eyesight. To use this tool to optimize your social media images, load your visuals to your blog so you can view them in a Chrome tab. Then use the Color Contrast Analyzer extension to adjust the design until you're happy with the results and add the final versions of the images to your visual marketing library. Where to Find Engagement Metrics for Visual Content Now that you have some tools to help you optimize the design of your images, it's time to put them to the test. After you use visuals in your social media marketing, you'll need to measure the results to be sure you're hitting the mark. Use the platform-specific metrics below to identify images that trigger engagement. Twitter Media Engagements On Twitter, media engagement is the metric that shows you the number of clicks to your image. It's hidden behind the Tweet Activity link, so you won't see it on the main Tweets section of your Twitter analytics dashboard. To access it, open your Twitter Analytics and click on the Tweets tab at the top of the page. Then click on View Tweet Activity under the tweet you want to review. You'll see all of the tweet activity metrics, including media engagements. Facebook Photo Views After you attach a visual to a Facebook post, you can click on that post in Facebook Insights to see the number of views that image attracted. Pinterest Clicks, Impressions, Repins, and Likes All of the data from Pinterest is image-specific because there's not much there to analyze beyond images. You can see which images have generated the most clicks, impressions, repins, and likes with Pinterest analytics. Use what you learn to identify which types of images work best for you on the platform. Instagram Likes and Comments Instagram analytics is on the rise with many tools being launched. However, there's not much to analyze beyond likes and comments. There are no clicks here and I don't think Instagram r...

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to measure the ROI of your marketing videos? Looking for tools to help track sales from your videos? A simple framework and a few tools can reveal if your video campaigns are working for you. In this article you'll discover how to track and measure the ROI for your video marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Outline Your Campaign Costs Take the time to do a complete breakdown of all of the projected costs of your video marketing campaign, including the marketing hours you'll spend promoting it. Include a buffer of at least 20% of your projected expenses if you manage the campaign on your own. This buffer will be used for unexpected costs, such as having to reshoot footage or invest more in editing. Keep in mind that there are video marketing companies that offer all-inclusive video marketing packages, and this can make doing a cost outline much easier and more effective. #2: Determine the Financial Tipping Point Think about how many sales you need to make from your video marketing campaign to break even. After you reach your break-even amount, everything else will be pure profit. But first you need to determine that amount. You can make this a very simple process. For example, if your video marketing campaign has a budget of $5,000 per month, you should expect to see your monthly sales go up by more than $5,000. If your average sale is $100, you already know that you'll need to make at least 50 sales to compensate for the cost